texi2any
: The Generic Translator for Texinfo@chapter
: Chapter Structuring@unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other Labeling@majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level Headings@section
: Sections Below Chapters@unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
@subsection
: Subsections Below Sections@subsection
-like Commands@subsection
and Other Subsub Commands@part
: Groups of Chapters@raisesections
and @lowersections
@xref
@ref
@pxref
@anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference Targets@inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material@url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
@cite
{reference}@code
{sample-code}@kbd
{keyboard-characters}@key
{key-name}@samp
{text}@verb
{chartextchar}@var
{metasyntactic-variable}@env
{environment-variable}@file
{file-name}@command
{command-name}@option
{option-name}@dfn
{term}@abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]}@acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}@indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}@email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}@quotation
: Block Quotations@indentedblock
: Indented text blocks@example
: Example Text@verbatim
: Literal Text@lisp
: Marking a Lisp Example@display
: Examples Using the Text Font@format
: Examples Using the Full Line Width@exdent
: Undoing a Line’s Indentation@flushleft
and @flushright
@raggedright
: Ragged Right Text@noindent
: Omitting Indentation@indent
: Forcing Indentation@cartouche
: Rounded Rectangles@small…
Block Commands@sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts@math
: Inserting Mathematical Expressions@TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX)@copyright{}
(©)@registeredsymbol{}
(®)@dots
(…) and @enddots
(...)@bullet
(•)@euro
(€): Euro Currency Symbol@pounds
(£): Pounds Sterling@textdegree
(°): Degrees Symbol@minus
(-): Inserting a Minus Sign@geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting Relations@result{}
(⇒): Result of an Expression@expansion{}
(→): Indicating an Expansion@print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated Output@error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error Message@equiv{}
(≡): Indicating Equivalence@point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a Buffer@U
@*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line Breaks@-
and @hyphenation
: Helping TeX Hyphenate@allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
@w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks@tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable Space@sp
n: Insert Blank Lines@page
: Start a New Page@group
: Prevent Page Breaks@need mils
: Prevent Page Breakstexi2dvi
tex
/texindex
lpr
from Shell@smallbook
: Printing “Small” Books@pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page Sizestexi2any
: The Generic Translator for Texinfo
texi2any
: A Texinfo Reference Implementationtexi2any
/makeinfo
from a Shelltexi2any
texi2any
Printed Outputpod2texi
: Convert POD to Texinfotexi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
Next: Copying Conditions, Up: (dir) [Contents][Index]
This manual is for GNU Texinfo (version 6.5, 25 August 2017), a documentation system that can produce both online information and a printed manual from a single source using semantic markup.
The first part of this master menu lists the major nodes in this Info document, including the @-command and concept indices. The rest of the menu lists all the lower-level nodes in the document.
• Copying Conditions: | Your rights. | |
• Overview: | Texinfo in brief. | |
• Writing a Texinfo File: | Format of a Texinfo source file. | |
• Beginning and Ending a File: | Beginning and end of a Texinfo file. | |
• Nodes: | Writing nodes, the basic unit of Texinfo. | |
• Chapter Structuring: | Creating chapters, sections, appendices, etc. | |
• Cross References: | Writing cross-references. | |
• Marking Text: | Marking words and phrases as code, keyboard input, meta-syntactic variables, and the like. | |
• Quotations and Examples: | Block quotations, examples, etc. | |
• Lists and Tables: | Itemized or numbered lists, and tables. | |
• Special Displays: | Floating figures and footnotes. | |
• Indices: | Creating indices. | |
• Insertions: | Inserting @-signs, braces, etc. | |
• Breaks: | Forcing or preventing line and page breaks. | |
• Definition Commands: | Describing functions and the like uniformly. | |
• Internationalization: | Supporting languages other than English. | |
• Conditionals: | Specifying text for only some output cases. | |
• Defining New Texinfo Commands: | User-defined macros and aliases. | |
• Include Files: | How to incorporate other Texinfo files. | |
• Hardcopy: | Output for paper, with TeX. | |
• Generic Translator texi2any : | texi2any , an all-purpose converter.
| |
• Creating and Installing Info Files: | Details on Info output. | |
• Generating HTML: | Details on HTML output. | |
Appendices | ||
---|---|---|
• @-Command Details: | Details of the Texinfo @-commands. | |
• Tips: | Hints on how to write a Texinfo document. | |
• Sample Texinfo Files: | Complete examples, including full texts. | |
• Texinfo Mode: | Using the GNU Emacs Texinfo mode. | |
• Headings: | How to write page headings and footings. | |
• Catching Mistakes: | How to find mistakes in formatting. | |
• Info Format Specification: | Technical details of the Info file format. | |
• GNU Free Documentation License: | Copying this manual. | |
• Command and Variable Index: | A menu containing commands and variables. | |
• General Index: | A menu covering many topics. | |
— The Detailed Node Listing — Overview of Texinfo | ||
• Reporting Bugs: | Submitting effective bug reports. | |
• Output Formats: | Overview of the supported output formats. | |
• Info Files: | What is an Info file? | |
• Printed Books: | Characteristics of a printed book or manual. | |
• Adding Output Formats: | Man pages and implementing new formats. | |
• History: | Acknowledgements, contributors and genesis. | |
Writing a Texinfo File | ||
• Command Syntax: | @-commands are used for formatting. | |
• Conventions: | General rules for writing a Texinfo file. | |
• Comments: | Writing comments and ignored text in general. | |
• Minimum: | What a Texinfo file must have. | |
• Short Sample: | A short sample Texinfo file. | |
Beginning and Ending a Texinfo File | ||
• Sample Beginning: | A sample beginning for a Texinfo file. | |
• Texinfo File Header: | The first lines. | |
• Document Permissions: | Ensuring your manual is free. | |
• Titlepage & Copyright Page: | Creating the title and copyright pages. | |
• Contents: | How to create a table of contents. | |
• The Top Node: | Creating the ‘Top’ node and master menu. | |
• Global Document Commands: | Affecting formatting throughout. | |
• Ending a File: | What is at the end of a Texinfo file? | |
Texinfo File Header | ||
• First Line: | The first line of a Texinfo file. | |
• Start of Header: | Formatting a region requires this. | |
• @setfilename : | Tell Info the name of the Info file. | |
• @settitle : | Create a title for the printed work. | |
• End of Header: | Formatting a region requires this. | |
Document Permissions | ||
• @copying : | Declare the document’s copying permissions. | |
• @insertcopying : | Where to insert the permissions. | |
Title and Copyright Pages | ||
• @titlepage : | Create a title for the printed document. | |
• @titlefont @center @sp : | The @titlefont , @center ,
and @sp commands.
| |
• @title @subtitle @author : | The @title , @subtitle ,
and @author commands.
| |
• Copyright: | How to write the copyright notice and include copying permissions. | |
• Heading Generation: | Turn on page headings after the title and copyright pages. | |
The ‘Top’ Node and Master Menu | ||
• Top Node Example: | ||
• Master Menu Parts: | ||
Global Document Commands | ||
• @documentdescription : | Document summary for the HTML output. | |
• @setchapternewpage : | Start chapters on right-hand pages. | |
• @headings : | An option for turning headings on and off and double or single sided printing. | |
• @paragraphindent : | Specify paragraph indentation. | |
• @firstparagraphindent : | Suppressing first paragraph indentation. | |
• @exampleindent : | Specify environment indentation. | |
Nodes | ||
• Texinfo Document Structure: | How Texinfo manuals are usually arranged. | |
• Node Names: | How to choose node names. | |
• Writing a Node: | How to write an @node line.
| |
• Node Line Requirements: | Keep names unique. | |
• First Node: | How to write a ‘Top’ node. | |
• @top Command: | How to use the @top command.
| |
• Node Menu Illustration: | A diagram, and sample nodes and menus. | |
• makeinfo Pointer Creation: | Letting makeinfo determine node pointers. | |
• Menus: | Listing subordinate nodes. | |
Menus | ||
• Writing a Menu: | What is a menu? | |
• Menu Example: | Two and three part menu entries. | |
• Menu Location: | Menus go at the ends of nodes. | |
• Menu Parts: | A menu entry has three parts. | |
• Less Cluttered Menu Entry: | Two part menu entry. | |
• Other Info Files: | How to refer to a different Info file. | |
Chapter Structuring | ||
• Tree Structuring: | A manual is like an upside down tree … | |
• Structuring Command Types: | How to divide a manual into parts. | |
• @chapter : | Chapter structuring. | |
• @unnumbered @appendix : | ||
• @majorheading @chapheading : | ||
• @section : | ||
• @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading : | ||
• @subsection : | ||
• @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading : | ||
• @subsubsection : | Commands for the lowest level sections. | |
• @part : | Collections of chapters. | |
• Raise/lower sections: | How to change commands’ hierarchical level. | |
Cross-references | ||
• References: | What cross-references are for. | |
• Cross Reference Commands: | A summary of the different commands. | |
• Cross Reference Parts: | A cross-reference has several parts. | |
• @xref : | Begin a reference with ‘See’ … | |
• Referring to a Manual as a Whole: | Refer to an entire manual. | |
• @ref : | A reference for the last part of a sentence. | |
• @pxref : | How to write a parenthetical cross-reference. | |
• @anchor : | Defining arbitrary cross-reference targets | |
• @inforef : | How to refer to an Info-only file. | |
• @url : | How to refer to a uniform resource locator. | |
• @cite : | How to refer to books not in the Info system. | |
| ||
• One Argument: | @xref with one argument.
| |
• Two Arguments: | @xref with two arguments.
| |
• Three Arguments: | @xref with three arguments.
| |
• Four and Five Arguments: | @xref with four and five arguments.
| |
| ||
• @url Examples: | Examples of using all the forms of @url .
| |
• URL Line Breaking: | How lines are broken within @url text.
| |
• @url PDF Output Format: | A special option to hide links in PDF output. | |
• PDF Colors: | Colorizing urls and other links in PDF output. | |
Marking Text, Words and Phrases | ||
• Indicating: | How to indicate definitions, files, etc. | |
• Emphasis: | How to emphasize text. | |
Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc. | ||
• Useful Highlighting: | Highlighting provides useful information. | |
• @code : | Indicating program code. | |
• @kbd : | Showing keyboard input. | |
• @key : | Specifying keys. | |
• @samp : | Indicating a literal sequence of characters. | |
• @verb : | Indicating a verbatim sequence of characters. | |
• @var : | Indicating metasyntactic variables. | |
• @env : | Indicating environment variables. | |
• @file : | Indicating file names. | |
• @command : | Indicating command names. | |
• @option : | Indicating option names. | |
• @dfn : | Specifying definitions. | |
• @abbr : | Indicating abbreviations. | |
• @acronym : | Indicating acronyms. | |
• @indicateurl : | Indicating an example url. | |
• @email : | Indicating an electronic mail address. | |
Emphasizing Text | ||
• @emph @strong : | How to emphasize text in Texinfo. | |
• Smallcaps: | How to use the small caps font. | |
• Fonts: | Various font commands for printed output. | |
Quotations and Examples | ||
• Block Enclosing Commands: | Different constructs for different purposes. | |
• @quotation : | Writing a quotation. | |
• @indentedblock : | Block of text indented on left. | |
• @example : | Writing an example in a fixed-width font. | |
• @verbatim : | Writing a verbatim example. | |
• @verbatiminclude : | Including a file verbatim. | |
• @lisp : | Illustrating Lisp code. | |
• @small… : | Examples in a smaller font. | |
• @display : | Writing an example in the current font. | |
• @format : | Writing an example without narrowed margins. | |
• @exdent : | Undo indentation on a line. | |
• @flushleft @flushright : | Pushing text flush left or flush right. | |
• @raggedright : | Avoiding justification on the right. | |
• @noindent : | Preventing paragraph indentation. | |
• @indent : | Forcing paragraph indentation. | |
• @cartouche : | Drawing rounded rectangles around text. | |
Lists and Tables | ||
• Introducing Lists: | Texinfo formats lists for you. | |
• @itemize : | How to construct a simple list. | |
• @enumerate : | How to construct a numbered list. | |
• Two-column Tables: | How to construct a two-column table. | |
• Multi-column Tables: | How to construct generalized tables. | |
Making a Two-column Table | ||
• @table : | How to construct a two-column table. | |
• @ftable @vtable : | Automatic indexing for two-column tables. | |
• @itemx : | How to put more entries in the first column. | |
| ||
• Multitable Column Widths: | Defining multitable column widths. | |
• Multitable Rows: | Defining multitable rows, with examples. | |
Special Displays | ||
• Floats: | Figures, tables, and the like. | |
• Images: | Including graphics and images. | |
• Footnotes: | Writing footnotes. | |
Floats | ||
• @float : | Producing floating material. | |
• @caption @shortcaption : | Specifying descriptions for floats. | |
• @listoffloats : | A table of contents for floats. | |
Inserting Images | ||
• Image Syntax: | ||
• Image Scaling: | ||
Footnotes | ||
• Footnote Commands: | How to write a footnote in Texinfo. | |
• Footnote Styles: | Controlling how footnotes appear in Info. | |
Indices | ||
• Index Entries: | Choose different words for index entries. | |
• Predefined Indices: | Use different indices for different kinds of entries. | |
• Indexing Commands: | How to make an index entry. | |
• Printing Indices & Menus: | How to print an index in hardcopy and generate index menus in Info. | |
• Combining Indices: | How to combine indices. | |
• New Indices: | How to define your own indices. | |
Combining Indices | ||
• @syncodeindex : | How to merge two indices, using @code
font for the merged-from index.
| |
• @synindex : | How to merge two indices, using the roman font for the merged-from index. | |
Special Insertions | ||
• Special Characters: | Inserting @ {} , \ # | |
• Inserting Quote Characters: | Inserting left and right quotes, in code. | |
• Inserting Space: | Inserting the right amount of whitespace. | |
• Inserting Accents: | Inserting accents and special characters. | |
• Inserting Quotation Marks: | Inserting quotation marks. | |
• Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts: | Inserting sub/superscripts. | |
• Inserting Math: | Formatting mathematical expressions. | |
• Glyphs for Text: | Inserting dots, bullets, currencies, etc. | |
• Glyphs for Programming: | Indicating results of evaluation, expansion of macros, errors, etc. | |
• Inserting Unicode: | Inserting a Unicode character by code point. | |
Special Characters: Inserting @ {} , \ # | ||
• Inserting an Atsign: | @@ , @atchar{} .
| |
• Inserting Braces: | @{ @} , @l rbracechar{} .
| |
• Inserting a Comma: | , and @comma{} .
| |
• Inserting a Backslash: | \ and @backslashchar{} .
| |
• Inserting a Hashsign: | # and @hashchar{} .
| |
Inserting Space | ||
• Multiple Spaces: | Inserting multiple spaces. | |
• Not Ending a Sentence: | Sometimes a . doesn’t end a sentence. | |
• Ending a Sentence: | Sometimes it does. | |
• @frenchspacing : | Specifying end-of-sentence spacing. | |
• @dmn : | Formatting a dimension. | |
Glyphs for Text | ||
• @TeX @LaTeX : | The TeX logos. | |
• @copyright : | The copyright symbol (c in a circle). | |
• @registeredsymbol : | The registered symbol (R in a circle). | |
• @dots : | How to insert ellipses: … and ... | |
• @bullet : | How to insert a bullet: • | |
• @euro : | How to insert the euro currency symbol. | |
• @pounds : | How to insert the pounds currency symbol. | |
• @textdegree : | How to insert the degrees symbol. | |
• @minus : | How to insert a minus sign. | |
• @geq @leq : | How to insert greater/less-than-or-equal signs. | |
Glyphs for Programming | ||
• Glyphs Summary: | ||
• @result : | How to show the result of expression. | |
• @expansion : | How to indicate an expansion. | |
• @print : | How to indicate generated output. | |
• @error : | How to indicate an error message. | |
• @equiv : | How to indicate equivalence. | |
• @point : | How to indicate the location of point. | |
• Click Sequences: | Inserting GUI usage sequences. | |
Forcing and Preventing Breaks | ||
• Break Commands: | Summary of break-related commands. | |
• Line Breaks: | Forcing line breaks. | |
• @- @hyphenation : | Helping TeX with hyphenation points. | |
• @allowcodebreaks : | Controlling line breaks within @code text. | |
• @w : | Preventing unwanted line breaks in text. | |
• @tie : | Inserting an unbreakable but varying space. | |
• @sp : | Inserting blank lines. | |
• @page : | Forcing the start of a new page. | |
• @group : | Preventing unwanted page breaks. | |
• @need : | Another way to prevent unwanted page breaks. | |
Definition Commands | ||
• Def Cmd Template: | Writing descriptions using definition commands. | |
• Def Cmd Continuation Lines: | Continuing the heading over source lines. | |
• Optional Arguments: | Handling optional and repeated arguments. | |
• @deffnx : | Group two or more ‘first’ lines. | |
• Def Cmds in Detail: | Reference for all the definition commands. | |
• Def Cmd Conventions: | Conventions for writing definitions. | |
• Sample Function Definition: | An example. | |
The Definition Commands | ||
• Functions Commands: | Commands for functions and similar entities. | |
• Variables Commands: | Commands for variables and similar entities. | |
• Typed Functions: | Commands for functions in typed languages. | |
• Typed Variables: | Commands for variables in typed languages. | |
• Data Types: | The definition command for data types. | |
• Abstract Objects: | Commands for object-oriented programming. | |
Object-Oriented Programming | ||
• Variables: | ||
• Methods: | ||
Internationalization | ||
• @documentlanguage : | Declaring the current language. | |
• @documentencoding : | Declaring the input encoding. | |
Conditionally Visible Text | ||
• Conditional Commands: | Text for a given format. | |
• Conditional Not Commands: | Text for any format other than a given one. | |
• Raw Formatter Commands: | Using raw formatter commands. | |
• Inline Conditionals: | Brace-delimited conditional text. | |
• @set @clear @value : | Variable tests and substitutions. | |
• Testing for Texinfo Commands: | Testing if a Texinfo command is available. | |
• Conditional Nesting: | Using conditionals inside conditionals. | |
Flags: | ||
• @set @value : | Expand a flag variable to a string. | |
• @ifset @ifclear : | Format a region if a flag is set. | |
• @inlineifset @inlineifclear : | Brace-delimited flag conditionals. | |
• @value Example: | An easy way to update edition information. | |
Defining New Texinfo Commands | ||
• Defining Macros: | Defining and undefining new commands. | |
• Invoking Macros: | Using a macro, once you’ve defined it. | |
• Macro Details: | Limitations of Texinfo macros. | |
• @alias : | Command aliases. | |
• @definfoenclose : | Customized highlighting. | |
• External Macro Processors: | #line directives.
| |
External Macro Processors: Line Directives | ||
• ‘#line’ Directive: | ||
• TeX: | ||
• Syntax: | ||
Include Files | ||
• Using Include Files: | How to use the @include command.
| |
• texinfo-multiple-files-update : | How to create and update nodes and menus when using included files. | |
• Include Files Requirements: | texinfo-multiple-files-update needs.
| |
• Sample Include File: | A sample outer file with included files within it; and a sample included file. | |
• Include Files Evolution: | How use of the @include command
has changed over time.
| |
Formatting and Printing Hardcopy | ||
• Use TeX: | Use TeX to format for hardcopy. | |
• Format with texi2dvi : | The simplest way to format. | |
• Format with tex /texindex : | Formatting with explicit shell commands. | |
• Print with lpr : | How to print. | |
• Within Emacs: | How to format and print from an Emacs shell. | |
• Texinfo Mode Printing: | How to format and print in Texinfo mode. | |
• Compile-Command: | How to print using Emacs’s compile command. | |
• Requirements Summary: | TeX formatting requirements summary. | |
• Preparing for TeX: | What to do before you use TeX. | |
• Overfull hboxes: | What are and what to do with overfull hboxes. | |
• @smallbook : | How to print small format books and manuals. | |
• A4 Paper: | How to print on A4 or A5 paper. | |
• @pagesizes : | How to print with customized page sizes. | |
• Cropmarks and Magnification: | How to print marks to indicate the size of pages and how to print scaled up output. | |
• PDF Output: | Portable Document Format output. | |
• Obtaining TeX: | How to obtain TeX. | |
Format with | ||
• Formatting Partial Documents: | ||
• Details of texindex : | ||
| ||
• Reference Implementation: | texi2any : the reference implementation.
| |
• Invoking texi2any : | Running the translator from a shell. | |
• texi2any Environment Variables: | ||
• texi2any Printed Output: | Calling texi2dvi .
| |
• Pointer Validation: | How to check that pointers point somewhere. | |
• Customization Variables: | Configuring texi2any .
| |
• Internationalization of Document Strings: | Translating program-inserted text. | |
• Invoking pod2texi : | Translating Perl pod to Texinfo. | |
• texi2html : | An ancestor of texi2any .
| |
Customization Variables | ||
• Commands: | ||
• Options: | ||
• HTML: | ||
• Other: | ||
Creating and Installing Info Files | ||
• Creating an Info File: | ||
• Installing an Info File: | ||
Creating an Info File | ||
• makeinfo Advantages: | makeinfo provides better error checking.
| |
• makeinfo in Emacs: | How to run makeinfo from Emacs.
| |
• texinfo-format commands: | Two Info formatting commands written
in Emacs Lisp are an alternative
to makeinfo .
| |
• Batch Formatting: | How to format for Info in Emacs batch mode. | |
• Tag and Split Files: | How tagged and split files help Info to run better. | |
Installing an Info File | ||
• Directory File: | The top level menu for all Info files. | |
• New Info File: | Listing a new Info file. | |
• Other Info Directories: | How to specify Info files that are located in other directories. | |
• Installing Dir Entries: | How to specify what menu entry to add to the Info directory. | |
• Invoking install-info : | install-info options.
| |
Generating HTML | ||
• HTML Translation: | Details of the HTML output. | |
• HTML Splitting: | How HTML output is split. | |
• HTML CSS: | Influencing HTML output with Cascading Style Sheets. | |
• HTML Xref: | Cross-references in HTML output. | |
HTML Cross-references | ||
• Link Basics: | ||
• Node Expansion: | ||
• Command Expansion: | ||
• 8-bit Expansion: | ||
• Mismatch: | ||
• Configuration: | htmlxref.cnf. | |
• Preserving links: | MANUAL-noderename.cnf. | |
Sample Texinfo Files | ||
• Short Sample Texinfo File: | ||
• GNU Sample Texts: | ||
• Verbatim Copying License: | ||
• All-permissive Copying License: | ||
Using Texinfo Mode | ||
• Texinfo Mode Overview: | How Texinfo mode can help you. | |
• Emacs Editing: | Texinfo mode adds to GNU Emacs’ general purpose editing features. | |
• Inserting: | How to insert frequently used @-commands. | |
• Showing the Structure: | How to show the structure of a file. | |
• Updating Nodes and Menus: | How to update or create new nodes and menus. | |
• Info Formatting: | How to format for Info. | |
• Printing: | How to format and print part or all of a file. | |
• Texinfo Mode Summary: | Summary of all the Texinfo mode commands. | |
Updating Nodes and Menus | ||
• Updating Commands: | Five major updating commands. | |
• Updating Requirements: | How to structure a Texinfo file for using the updating command. | |
• Other Updating Commands: | How to indent descriptions, insert missing nodes lines, and update nodes in sequence. | |
Page Headings | ||
• Headings Introduced: | Conventions for using page headings. | |
• Heading Format: | Standard page heading formats. | |
• Heading Choice: | How to specify the type of page heading. | |
• Custom Headings: | How to create your own headings and footings. | |
Catching Mistakes | ||
• makeinfo Preferred: | makeinfo finds errors.
| |
• Debugging with Info: | How to catch errors with Info formatting. | |
• Debugging with TeX: | How to catch errors with TeX formatting. | |
• Using texinfo-show-structure : | How to use texinfo-show-structure .
| |
• Using occur : | How to list all lines containing a pattern. | |
• Running Info-validate : | How to find badly referenced nodes. | |
Finding Badly Referenced Nodes | ||
• Using Info-validate : | How to run Info-validate .
| |
• Unsplit: | How to create an unsplit file. | |
• Tagifying: | How to tagify a file. | |
• Splitting: | How to split a file manually. | |
Info Format Specification | ||
• General: | ||
• Text: | ||
Info Format General Layout | ||
• Whole: | Split vs. nonsplit manuals. | |
• Preamble: | ||
• Indirect: | ||
• Tag table: | ||
• Local variables: | ||
• Regular nodes: | ||
Info Format Text Constructs | ||
• Info Format Menu: | ||
• Info Format Image: | ||
• Info Format Printindex: | ||
• Info Format Cross Reference: | ||
Documentation is like sex: when it is good, it is very, very good; and when it is bad, it is better than nothing. —Dick Brandon
GNU Texinfo is free software; this means that everyone is free to use it and free to redistribute it on certain conditions. Texinfo is not in the public domain; it is copyrighted and there are restrictions on its distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit everything that a good cooperating citizen would want to do. What is not allowed is to try to prevent others from further sharing any version of Texinfo that they might get from you.
Specifically, we want to make sure that you have the right to give away copies of the programs that relate to Texinfo, that you receive source code or else can get it if you want it, that you can change these programs or use pieces of them in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To make sure that everyone has such rights, we have to forbid you to deprive anyone else of these rights. For example, if you distribute copies of the Texinfo related programs, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must tell them their rights.
Also, for our own protection, we must make certain that everyone finds out that there is no warranty for the programs that relate to Texinfo. If these programs are modified by someone else and passed on, we want their recipients to know that what they have is not what we distributed, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on our reputation.
The precise conditions of the licenses for the programs currently being distributed that relate to Texinfo are found in the General Public Licenses that accompany them. This manual is covered by the GNU Free Documentation License (see GNU Free Documentation License).
Next: Writing a Texinfo File, Previous: Copying Conditions, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Texinfo is a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both online information and printed output. This means that instead of writing several different documents, one for each output format, you need only write one document.
Using Texinfo, you can create a printed document (via the TeX typesetting system) in PDF or PostScript format, including chapters, sections, cross-references, and indices. From the same Texinfo source file, you can create an HTML output file suitable for use with a web browser, you can create an Info file with special features to make browsing documentation easy, and also create a Docbook file or a transliteration to XML format.
A Texinfo source file is a plain text file containing text interspersed with @-commands (words preceded by an ‘@’) that tell the Texinfo processors what to do. Texinfo’s markup commands are almost entirely semantic; that is, they specify the intended meaning of text in the document, rather than physical formatting instructions. You can edit a Texinfo file with any text editor, but it is especially convenient to use GNU Emacs since that editor has a special mode, called Texinfo mode, that provides various Texinfo-related features. (See Texinfo Mode.)
Texinfo was devised specifically for the purpose of writing software documentation and manuals. If you want to write a good manual for your program, Texinfo has many features which we hope will make your job easier. However, it provides almost no commands for controlling the final formatting. Texinfo is not intended to be a general-purpose formatting program, so if you need to lay out a newspaper, devise a glossy magazine ad, or follow the exact formatting requirements of a publishing house, Texinfo may not be the simplest tool.
Spell “Texinfo” with a capital “T” and the other letters in lowercase. The first syllable of “Texinfo” is pronounced like “speck”, not “hex”. This odd pronunciation is derived from the pronunciation of TeX. Pronounce TeX as if the ‘X’ were the last sound in the name ‘Bach’. In the word TeX, the ‘X’ is, rather than the English letter “ex”, actually the Greek letter “chi”.
Texinfo is the official documentation format of the GNU project. More information, including manuals for GNU packages, is available at the GNU documentation web page.
• Reporting Bugs: | Submitting effective bug reports. | |
• Output Formats: | Overview of the supported output formats. | |
• Info Files: | What is an Info file? | |
• Printed Books: | Characteristics of a printed book or manual. | |
• Adding Output Formats: | Man pages and implementing new formats. | |
• History: | Acknowledgements, contributors and genesis. |
Next: Output Formats, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
We welcome bug reports and suggestions for any aspect of the Texinfo system: programs, documentation, installation, etc. Please email them to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. You can get the latest version of Texinfo via its home page, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
For bug reports, please include enough information for the maintainers to reproduce the problem. Generally speaking, that means:
When in doubt whether something is needed or not, include it. It’s better to include too much than to leave out something important.
It is critical to send an actual input file that reproduces the problem. What’s not critical is to “narrow down” the example to the smallest possible input—the actual input with which you discovered the bug will suffice. (Of course, if you do do experiments, the smaller the input file, the better.)
Patches are most welcome; if possible, please make them with ‘diff -c’ (see Comparing and Merging Files) and include ChangeLog entries (see Change Log in The GNU Emacs Manual), and follow the existing coding style.
Next: Info Files, Previous: Reporting Bugs, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
Here is a brief overview of the output formats currently supported by Texinfo.
(Generated via makeinfo
.) Info format is mostly a plain
text transliteration of the Texinfo source. It adds a few control
characters to provide navigational information for cross-references,
indices, and so on. The Emacs Info subsystem (see Info), and the standalone info
program (see GNU Info), among others, can read these files. See Info Files, and Creating and Installing Info Files.
(Generated via makeinfo --plaintext
.) This is almost the
same as Info output with the navigational control characters are
omitted.
(Generated via makeinfo --html
.) HTML, standing for Hyper
Text Markup Language, has become the most commonly used language for
writing documents on the World Wide Web. Web browsers, such as
Mozilla, Lynx, and Emacs-W3, can render this language online. There
are many versions of HTML, both different standards and
browser-specific variations. makeinfo
tries to use a subset
of the language that can be interpreted by any common browser,
intentionally not using many newer or less widely-supported tags.
Although the native output is thus rather plain, it can be customized
at various levels, if desired. For details of the HTML language and
much related information, see http://www.w3.org/MarkUp/.
See Generating HTML.
(Generated via texi2dvi
.) The DeVIce Independent binary
format is output by the TeX typesetting program
(http://tug.org). This is then read by a DVI ‘driver’, which
knows the actual device-specific commands that can be viewed or
printed, notably Dvips for translation to PostScript (see Dvips) and Xdvi for viewing on an X display
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/xdvi/). See Hardcopy.
(Be aware that the Texinfo language is very different from and much
stricter than TeX’s usual languages: plain TeX, LaTeX,
ConTeXt, etc.)
(Generated via texi2dvi --ps
.) PostScript is a page
description language that became widely used around 1985 and is still
used today. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PostScript gives a
basic description and more preferences. By default, Texinfo uses the
dvips
program to convert TeX’s DVI output to PostScript.
See Dvips.
(Generated via texi2dvi --pdf
or texi2pdf
.) This
format was developed by Adobe Systems for portable document
interchange, based on their previous PostScript language. It can
represent the exact appearance of a document, including fonts and
graphics, and supporting arbitrary scaling. It is intended to be
platform-independent and easily viewable, among other design goals;
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portable_Document_Format and
http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb22-3/tb72beebe-pdf.pdf have some
background. By default, Texinfo uses the pdftex
program, an
extension of TeX, to output PDF; see
http://tug.org/applications/pdftex. See PDF Output.
(Generated via makeinfo --docbook
.) This is an XML-based
format developed some years ago, primarily for technical
documentation. It therefore bears some resemblance, in broad
outline, to Texinfo. See http://www.docbook.org. Various
converters from Docbook to Texinfo have also been developed;
see the Texinfo web pages.
(Generated via makeinfo --xml
.) XML is a generic syntax
specification usable for any sort of content (a reference is at
http://www.w3.org/XML). The makeinfo
XML output,
unlike all the other output formats, is a transliteration of the
Texinfo source rather than processed output. That is, it translates
the Texinfo markup commands into XML syntax, for further processing by
XML tools. The XML contains enough information to recreate the
original content, except for syntactic constructs such as Texinfo
macros and conditionals. The Texinfo source distribution includes a
utility script txixml2texi to do that backward transformation.
The details of the output syntax are defined in an XML DTD as usual, which is contained in a file texinfo.dtd included in the Texinfo source distribution and available via the Texinfo web pages. Texinfo XML files, and XML files in general, cannot be viewed in typical web browsers; they won’t follow the DTD reference and as a result will simply report a (misleading) syntax error.
Next: Printed Books, Previous: Output Formats, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
As mentioned above, Info format is mostly a plain text transliteration of the Texinfo source, with the addition of a few control characters to separate nodes and provide navigational information, so that Info-reading programs can operate on it.
Info files are nearly always created by processing a Texinfo source
document. makeinfo
, also known as texi2any
, is
the principal command that converts a Texinfo file into an Info file;
see Generic Translator texi2any
.
Generally, you enter an Info file through a node that by convention is named ‘Top’. This node normally contains just a brief summary of the file’s purpose, and a large menu through which the rest of the file is reached. From this node, you can either traverse the file systematically by going from node to node, or you can go to a specific node listed in the main menu, or you can search the index menus and then go directly to the node that has the information you want. Alternatively, with the standalone Info program, you can specify specific menu items on the command line (see Info).
If you want to read through an Info file in sequence, as if it were a printed manual, you can hit SPC repeatedly, or you get the whole file with the advanced Info command g *. (See Advanced Info commands in Info.)
The dir file in the info directory serves as the departure point for the whole Info system. From it, you can reach the ‘Top’ nodes of each of the documents in a complete Info system.
If you wish to refer to an Info file via a URI, you can use the (unofficial) syntax exemplified by the following. This works with Emacs/W3, for example:
info:emacs#Dissociated%20Press info:///usr/info/emacs#Dissociated%20Press info://localhost/usr/info/emacs#Dissociated%20Press
The info
program itself does not follow URIs of any kind.
Next: Adding Output Formats, Previous: Info Files, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
A Texinfo file can be formatted and typeset as a printed book or manual. To do this, you need TeX, a sophisticated typesetting program written by Donald Knuth of Stanford University.
A Texinfo-based book is similar to any other typeset, printed work: it can have a title page, copyright page, table of contents, and preface, as well as chapters, numbered or unnumbered sections and subsections, page headers, cross-references, footnotes, and indices.
TeX is a general purpose typesetting program. Texinfo provides a file texinfo.tex that contains information (definitions or macros) that TeX uses when it typesets a Texinfo file. (texinfo.tex tells TeX how to convert the Texinfo @-commands to TeX commands, which TeX can then process to create the typeset document.) texinfo.tex contains the specifications for printing a document. You can get the latest version of texinfo.tex from the Texinfo home page, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/.
In the United States, documents are most often printed on 8.5 inch by
11 inch pages (216mm by 280mm); this is the default size.
But you can also print for 7 inch by 9.25 inch pages (178mm by
235mm, the @smallbook
size; or on A4 or A5 size paper
(@afourpaper
, @afivepaper
).
See @smallbook
, and A4 Paper.
TeX is freely distributable. It is written in a superset of Pascal for literate programming called WEB and can be compiled either in Pascal or (by using a conversion program that comes with the TeX distribution) in C.
TeX is very powerful and has a great many features. Because a Texinfo file must be able to present information both on a character-only terminal in Info form and in a typeset book, the formatting commands that Texinfo supports are necessarily limited.
See Obtaining TeX, for information on acquiring TeX. It is not part of the Texinfo distribution.
Next: History, Previous: Printed Books, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
The output formats in the previous sections handle a wide variety of usage, but of course there is always room for more.
If you are a programmer and would like to contribute to the GNU
project by implementing additional output formats for Texinfo, that
would be excellent. The way to do this that would be most useful is
to write a new back-end for texi2any
, our reference
implementation of a Texinfo parser; it creates a tree representation
of the Texinfo input that you can use for the conversion. The
documentation in the source file
tp/Texinfo/Convert/Converter.pm is a good place to start.
See Generic Translator texi2any
.
Another viable approach is use the Texinfo XML output from
texi2any
as your input. This XML is an essentially complete
representation of the input, but without the Texinfo syntax and option
peculiarities, as described above.
If you still cannot resist the temptation of writing a new program
that reads Texinfo source directly, let us give some more caveats:
please do not underestimate the amount of work required. Texinfo is
by no means a simple language to parse correctly, and remains under
development, so you would be committing to an ongoing task. You
are advised to check that the tests of the language that come with
texi2any
give correct results with your new program.
From time to time, proposals are made to generate traditional Unix man pages from Texinfo source. However, because man pages have a strict conventional format, creating a good man page requires a completely different source from that needed for the typical Texinfo applications of writing a good user tutorial and/or a good reference manual. This makes generating man pages incompatible with the Texinfo design goal of not having to document the same information in different ways for different output formats. You might as well write the man page directly.
As an alternative way to support man pages, you may find the program
help2man
to be useful. It generates a traditional man page
from the ‘--help’ output of a program. In fact, the man pages
for the programs in the Texinfo distribution are generated with this.
It is GNU software written by Brendan O’Dea, available from
http://www.gnu.org/software/help2man.
Previous: Adding Output Formats, Up: Overview [Contents][Index]
Richard M. Stallman invented the Texinfo format, wrote the initial
processors, and created Edition 1.0 of this manual. Robert J.
Chassell greatly revised and extended the manual, starting with
Edition 1.1. Brian Fox was responsible for the standalone Texinfo
distribution until version 3.8, and originally wrote the standalone
makeinfo
and info
programs. Karl Berry has
continued maintenance since Texinfo 3.8 (manual edition 2.22).
Our thanks go out to all who helped improve this work, particularly the indefatigable Eli Zaretskii and Andreas Schwab, who have provided patches beyond counting. François Pinard and David D. Zuhn, tirelessly recorded and reported mistakes and obscurities. Zack Weinberg did the impossible by implementing the macro syntax in texinfo.tex. Thanks to Melissa Weisshaus for her frequent reviews of nearly similar editions. Dozens of others have contributed patches and suggestions, they are gratefully acknowledged in the ChangeLog file. Our mistakes are our own.
In the 1970’s at CMU, Brian Reid developed a program and format named
Scribe to mark up documents for printing. It used the @
character to introduce commands, as Texinfo does. Much more
consequentially, it strove to describe document contents rather than
formatting, an idea wholeheartedly adopted by Texinfo.
Meanwhile, people at MIT developed another, not too dissimilar format called Bolio. This then was converted to using TeX as its typesetting language: BoTeX. The earliest BoTeX version seems to have been 0.02 on October 31, 1984.
BoTeX could only be used as a markup language for documents to be printed, not for online documents. Richard Stallman (RMS) worked on both Bolio and BoTeX. He also developed a nifty on-line help format called Info, and then combined BoTeX and Info to create Texinfo, a mark up language for text that is intended to be read both online and as printed hard copy.
Moving forward, the original translator to create Info was written
(primarily by RMS and Bob Chassell) in Emacs Lisp, namely the
texinfo-format-buffer
and other functions. In the early 1990s,
Brian Fox reimplemented the conversion program in C, now called
makeinfo
.
In 2012, the C makeinfo
was itself replaced by a Perl
implementation generically called texi2any
. This version
supports the same level of output customization as
texi2html
, an independent program originally written by
Lionel Cons, later with substantial work by many others. The many
additional features needed to make texi2html
a replacement
for makeinfo
were implemented by Patrice Dumas. The first
never-released version of texi2any
was based on the
texi2html
code. That implementation, however, was abandoned
in favor of the current program, which parses the Texinfo input into a
tree for processing. It still supports nearly all the features of
texi2html
.
The new Perl program is much slower than the old C program. We hope
the speed gap will close in the future, but it may not ever be
entirely comparable. So why did we switch? In short, we intend and
hope that the present program will be much easier than the previous C
implementation of makeinfo
to extend to different output
styles, back-end output formats, and all other customizations.
In more detail:
texi2html
for years. Thus, in effect two independent
implementations of the Texinfo language had developed, and keeping
them in sync was not simple. Adding the HTML customization possible
in texi2html
to a C program would have been an
enormous effort.
makeinfo
, it
would have been tantamount to rewriting the entire program. In Perl,
much of that comes essentially for free.
makeinfo
code had become
convoluted to the point where adding a new back-end was quite complex,
requiring complex interactions with existing back-ends. In contrast,
our Perl implementation provides a clean tree-based representation for
all back-ends to work from. People have requested numerous different
back-ends (LaTeX, the latest (X)HTML, …), and they will now
be much more feasible to implement. Which leads to the last item:
See Reference Implementation, for more on the rationale for and
role of texi2any
.
Next: Beginning and Ending a File, Previous: Overview, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes Texinfo syntax and what is required in a Texinfo file, and gives a short sample file.
• Conventions: | General rules for writing a Texinfo file. | |
• Comments: | Writing comments and ignored text in general. | |
• Minimum: | What a Texinfo file must have. | |
• Short Sample: | A short sample Texinfo file. |
Next: Comments, Up: Writing a Texinfo File [Contents][Index]
This section describes the general conventions used in all Texinfo documents.
Depending on what they do or what arguments1 they take, you need to write @-commands on lines of their own, or as part of sentences. As a general rule, a command requires braces if it mingles among other text; but it does not need braces if it is on a line of its own. For more details of Texinfo command syntax, see Command Syntax.
@example
environment.
@code
and @example
.
In normal text, treated as ending any open paragraph; essentially ignored between paragraphs.
Output as-is between paragraphs (their most common use); in other contexts, they may be treated as regular spaces (and thus consolidated with surrounding whitespace).
Written as a numeric entity except contexts where spaces are ignored; for example, in ‘@footnote{ ^L foo}’, the form feed is ignored.
Keep them everywhere; in attributes, escaped as ‘\f’; also, ‘\’ is escaped as ‘\\’ and newline as ‘\n’.
Completely removed, as they are not allowed.
As you can see, because of these differing requirements of the output formats, it’s not possible to use form feeds completely portably.
makeinfo
does nothing special with tabs, and thus
a tab character in your input file will usually have a different
appearance in the output.
To avoid this problem, Texinfo mode in GNU Emacs inserts
multiple spaces when you press the TAB key. Also, you can run
untabify
in Emacs to convert tabs in a region to multiple
spaces, or use the unexpand
command from the shell.
Next: Minimum, Previous: Conventions, Up: Writing a Texinfo File [Contents][Index]
You can write comments in a Texinfo file by using the @comment
command, which may be abbreviated to @c
. Such comments are
for a person looking at the Texinfo source file. All the text on a
line that follows either @comment
or @c
is a comment;
the rest of the line does not appear in the visible output. (To be
precise, the character after the @c
or @comment
must
be something other than a dash or alphanumeric, or it will be taken as
part of the command.)
Often, you can write the @comment
or @c
in the middle
of a line, and only the text that follows after the @comment
or @c
command does not appear; but some commands, such as
@settitle
, work on a whole line. You cannot use @comment
or @c
within a line beginning with such a command.
In cases of nested command invocations, complicated macro definitions,
etc., @c
and @comment
may provoke an error when
processing with TeX. Therefore, you can also use the DEL
character (ASCII 127 decimal, 0x7f hex, 0177 octal) as a true TeX
comment character (catcode 14, in TeX internals). Everything on
the line after the DEL will be ignored.
You can also have long stretches of text ignored by the Texinfo
processors with the @ignore
and @end ignore
commands.
Write each of these commands on a line of its own, starting each
command at the beginning of the line. Text between these two commands
does not appear in the processed output. You can use @ignore
and @end ignore
for writing comments. (For some caveats
regarding nesting of such commands, see Conditional Nesting.)
Next: Short Sample, Previous: Comments, Up: Writing a Texinfo File [Contents][Index]
By convention, the name of a Texinfo file ends with one of the extensions .texinfo, .texi, .txi, or .tex.2
In order to be made into a printed manual and other output formats, a Texinfo file must begin with lines like this:
\input texinfo @settitle name-of-manual
The contents of the file follow this beginning, and then you must end the Texinfo source with a line like this:
@bye
Here’s an explanation:
@settitle
line specifies a title for the page headers (or
footers) of the printed manual, and the default title and document
description for the ‘<head>’ in HTML. Strictly speaking,
@settitle
is optional—if you don’t mind your document being
titled ‘Untitled’.
@bye
line at the end of the file on a line of its own tells
the formatters that the file is ended and to stop formatting. If you
leave this out, you’ll be dumped at TeX’s prompt at the end of the
run.
Furthermore, you will usually provide a Texinfo file with a title page, indices, and the like, all of which are explained in this manual. But the minimum, which can be useful for short documents, is just the two lines at the beginning and the one line at the end.
Previous: Minimum, Up: Writing a Texinfo File [Contents][Index]
Here is a short but complete Texinfo file, so you can see how Texinfo source appears in practice. The first three parts of the file are mostly boilerplate: when writing a manual, you simply change the names as appropriate.
The complete file, without interspersed comments, is shown in Short Sample Texinfo File.
See Beginning and Ending a File, for more documentation on the commands listed here.
The header tells TeX which definitions file to use, names the manual, and carries out other such housekeeping tasks.
\input texinfo @settitle Sample Manual 1.0
This segment describes the document and contains the copyright notice
and copying permissions. This is done with the @copying
command.
A real manual includes more text here, according to the license under which it is distributed. See GNU Sample Texts.
@copying This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file, version 1.0. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @end copying
The title and copyright segment contains the title and copyright
pages for the printed manual. The segment must be enclosed between
@titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands. The title and
copyright page does not appear in the online output.
We use the @insertcopying
command to
include the permission text from the previous section, instead of
writing it out again; it is output on the back of the title page. The
@contents
command generates a table of contents.
@titlepage @title Sample Title
@c The following two commands start the copyright page. @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage
@c Output the table of contents at the beginning. @contents
The ‘Top’ node starts off the online output; it does not appear in the printed manual. We repeat the short description from the beginning of the ‘@copying’ text, but there’s no need to repeat the copyright information, so we don’t use ‘@insertcopying’ here.
The ‘@top’ command itself helps makeinfo
determine
the relationships between nodes. The ‘Top’ node contains at least a
top-level menu listing the chapters, and possibly a Master
Menu listing all the nodes in the entire document.
@ifnottex @node Top @top Short Sample This is a short sample Texinfo file. @end ifnottex
@menu * First Chapter:: The first chapter is the only chapter in this sample. * Index:: Complete index. @end menu
The body segment contains all the text of the document, but not the indices or table of contents. This example illustrates a node and a chapter containing an enumerated list.
@node First Chapter @chapter First Chapter @cindex chapter, first
This is the first chapter. @cindex index entry, another
Here is a numbered list. @enumerate @item This is the first item. @item This is the second item. @end enumerate
This may contain commands for printing indices, and
closes with the @bye
command, which marks the end of the document.
@node Index @unnumbered Index
@printindex cp @bye
Here is what the contents of the first chapter of the sample look like:
This is the first chapter.
Here is a numbered list.
- This is the first item.
- This is the second item.
Next: Nodes, Previous: Writing a Texinfo File, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter expands on the minimal complete Texinfo source file previously given (see Short Sample).
Certain pieces of information must be provided at the beginning of a Texinfo file, such the title of the document and the Top node. A table of contents is also generally produced here.
Straight text outside of any command before the Top node should be avoided. Such text is treated differently in the different output formats: at the time of writing, it is visible in TeX and HTML, by default not shown in Info readers, and so on.
• Sample Beginning: | A sample beginning for a Texinfo file. | |
• Texinfo File Header: | The first lines. | |
• Document Permissions: | Ensuring your manual is free. | |
• Titlepage & Copyright Page: | Creating the title and copyright pages. | |
• Contents: | How to create a table of contents. | |
• The Top Node: | Creating the ‘Top’ node and master menu. | |
• Global Document Commands: | Affecting formatting throughout. | |
• Ending a File: | What is at the end of a Texinfo file? |
Next: Texinfo File Header, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
The following sample shows what is needed. The elements given here are explained in more detail in the following sections. Other commands are often included at the beginning of Texinfo files, but the ones here are the most critical.
See GNU Sample Texts, for the full texts to be used in GNU manuals.
\input texinfo @settitle name-of-manual version @copying This manual is for program, version version. Copyright @copyright{} years copyright-owner.
@quotation Permission is granted to … @end quotation @end copying
@titlepage @title name-of-manual-when-printed @subtitle subtitle-if-any @subtitle second-subtitle @author author
@c The following two commands @c start the copyright page. @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying
Published by … @end titlepage @c So the toc is printed at the start. @contents @ifnottex @node Top @top title This manual is for program, version version. @end ifnottex
@menu * First Chapter:: Getting started … * Second Chapter:: … … * Copying:: Your rights and freedoms. @end menu
@node First Chapter @chapter First Chapter @cindex first chapter @cindex chapter, first …
Next: Document Permissions, Previous: Sample Beginning, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
Texinfo files start with at least two lines. These are the
\input texinfo
line and the @settitle
line.
Also, if you want to format just part of the Texinfo file in Emacs,
you must write the @settitle
line between start-of-header and
end-of-header lines. These start- and end-of-header lines are optional,
but they do no harm, so you might as well always include them.
Any command that affects document formatting as a whole makes sense to
include in the header. @synindex
(see @synindex
),
for instance, is another command often included in the header.
Thus, the beginning of a Texinfo file looks approximately like this:
\input texinfo @settitle Sample Manual 1.0
(See GNU Sample Texts for complete sample texts.)
• First Line: | The first line of a Texinfo file. | |
• Start of Header: | Formatting a region requires this. | |
• @setfilename : | Tell Info the name of the Info file. | |
• @settitle : | Create a title for the printed work. | |
• End of Header: | Formatting a region requires this. |
Next: Start of Header, Up: Texinfo File Header [Contents][Index]
Every Texinfo file that is to be the top-level input to TeX must begin with a line that looks like this:
\input texinfo
When the file is processed by TeX, the ‘\input texinfo’ command tells TeX to load the macros needed for processing a Texinfo file. These are in a file called texinfo.tex, which should have been installed on your system along with either the TeX or Texinfo software. TeX uses the backslash, ‘\’, to mark the beginning of a command, exactly as Texinfo uses ‘@’. The texinfo.tex file causes the switch from ‘\’ to ‘@’; before the switch occurs, TeX requires ‘\’, which is why it appears at the beginning of the file.
You may optionally follow this line with a comment to tell GNU Emacs to use Texinfo mode when the file is edited:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
This may be useful when Emacs doesn’t detect the file type from the file extension automatically.
Next: @setfilename
, Previous: First Line, Up: Texinfo File Header [Contents][Index]
A start-of-header line is a Texinfo comment that looks like this:
@c %**start of header
Write the start-of-header line on the second line of a Texinfo file.
Follow the start-of-header line with an @settitle
line and,
optionally, with other commands that globally affect the document
formatting, such as @synindex
or @footnotestyle
; and
then by an end-of-header line (see End of Header).
The start- and end-of-header lines allow you to format only part of a
Texinfo file for Info or printing. See texinfo-format
commands.
The odd string of characters, ‘%**’, is to ensure that no other
comment is accidentally taken for a start-of-header line. You can
change it if you wish by setting the tex-start-of-header
and/or
tex-end-of-header
Emacs variables. See Texinfo Mode Printing.
Next: @settitle
, Previous: Start of Header, Up: Texinfo File Header [Contents][Index]
@setfilename
: Set the Output File NameThe @setfilename
line specifies the name of the output file to
be generated.
When present, it should be the first Texinfo command (that is, after
‘\input texinfo’).
Write the @setfilename
command at the beginning of a line and
follow it on the same line by the Info file name.
@setfilename info-file-name
The name must be different from the name of the Texinfo file. There are two conventions for choosing the name: you can either remove the extension (such as ‘.texi’) entirely from the input file name, or (recommended) replace it with the ‘.info’ extension.
When a @setfilename
line is present, the Texinfo processors
ignore everything written before the @setfilename
line. This
is why the very first line of the file (the \input
line) does
not show up in the output.
If there is no @setfilename
line, makeinfo
uses the
input file name to determine the output name: first, any of the
extensions .texi
, .tex
, .txi
or .texinfo
is removed from the input file name; then, the output format specific
extension is added—.html
when generating HTML, .info
when generating Info, etc. The \input
line is still ignored in
this processing, as well as leading blank lines.
When producing another output format, makeinfo
will replace any
final extension with the output format-specific extension (‘html’
when generating HTML, for example), or add a dot followed by the
extension (‘.html’ for HTML) if the given name has no extension.
@setfilename
used to be required by the Texinfo processors, and
some other programs may still expect it to be present; for example,
Automake (see Texinfo in GNU Automake).
Although an explicit ‘.info’ extension is preferable, some
operating systems cannot handle long file names. You can run into a
problem even when the file name you specify is itself short enough.
This occurs because the Info formatters split a long Info file into
short indirect subfiles, and name them by appending ‘-1’,
‘-2’, …, ‘-10’, ‘-11’, and so on, to the original
file name. (See Tag and Split Files.) The subfile name
texinfo.info-10, for example, is too long for old systems with
a 14-character limit on filenames; so the Info file name for this
document is texinfo rather than texinfo.info. When
makeinfo
is running on operating systems such as MS-DOS which
impose severe limits on file names, it may remove some characters from
the original file name to leave enough space for the subfile suffix,
thus producing files named texin-10, gcc.i12, etc.
See also the --output option in Invoking texi2any
.
Next: End of Header, Previous: @setfilename
, Up: Texinfo File Header [Contents][Index]
@settitle
: Set the Document TitleA Texinfo file should contain a line that looks like this:
@settitle title
Write the @settitle
command at the beginning of a line and
follow it on the same line by the title. Do not write anything else
on the line. The @settitle
command should precede everything
that generates actual output. The best place for it is right after
the @setfilename
command (described in the previous section).
This command tells TeX the title to use in a header or footer for double-sided output, in case such headings are output. For more on headings for TeX, see Heading Generation.
In the HTML file produced by makeinfo
, title serves as
the document ‘<title>’. It also becomes the default document
description in the ‘<head>’ part
(see @documentdescription
).
When the title page is used in the output, the title in the
@settitle
command does not affect the title as it appears on
the title page. Thus, the two do not need not to match exactly. A
practice we recommend is to include the version or edition number of
the manual in the @settitle
title; on the title page, the
version number generally appears as a @subtitle
so it would
be omitted from the @title
. See @titlepage
.
Previous: @settitle
, Up: Texinfo File Header [Contents][Index]
Follow the header lines with an end-of-header line, which is a Texinfo comment that looks like this:
@c %**end of header
See Start of Header.
Next: Titlepage & Copyright Page, Previous: Texinfo File Header, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
The copyright notice and copying permissions for a document need to
appear in several places in the various Texinfo output formats.
Therefore, Texinfo provides a command (@copying
) to declare
this text once, and another command (@insertcopying
) to
insert the text at appropriate points.
This section is about the license of the Texinfo document. If the document is a software manual, the software is typically under a different license—for GNU and many other free software packages, software is usually released under the GNU GPL, and manuals are released under the GNU FDL. It is helpful to state the license of the software of the manual, but giving the complete text of the software license is not necessarily required.
• @copying : | Declare the document’s copying permissions. | |
• @insertcopying : | Where to insert the permissions. |
Next: @insertcopying
, Up: Document Permissions [Contents][Index]
@copying
: Declare Copying PermissionsThe @copying
command should be given very early in the document;
the recommended location is right after the header material
(see Texinfo File Header). It conventionally consists of a sentence
or two about what the program is, identification of the documentation
itself, the legal copyright line, and the copying permissions. Here is
a skeletal example:
@copying This manual is for program (version version, updated date), which … Copyright @copyright{} years copyright-owner. @quotation Permission is granted to … @end quotation @end copying
The @quotation
has no legal significance; it’s there to improve
readability in some contexts.
The text of @copying
is output as a comment at the beginning
of Info, HTML, XML, and Docbook output files. It is not output
implicitly in plain text or TeX; it’s up to you to use
@insertcopying
to emit the copying information. See the next
section for details.
The @copyright{}
command generates a ‘c’ inside a
circle when the output format supports this glyph (print and HTML
always do, for instance). When the glyph is not supported in the
output, it generates the three-character sequence ‘(C)’.
The copyright notice itself has the following legally-prescribed form:
Copyright © years copyright-owner.
The word ‘Copyright’ must always be written in English, even if the document is otherwise written in another language. This is due to international law.
The list of years should include all years in which a version was completed (even if it was released in a subsequent year). It is simplest for each year to be written out individually and in full, separated by commas.
The copyright owner (or owners) is whoever holds legal copyright on the work. In the case of works assigned to the FSF, the owner is ‘Free Software Foundation, Inc.’.
The copyright ‘line’ may actually be split across multiple lines, both
in the source document and in the output. This often happens for
documents with a long history, having many different years of
publication. If you do use several lines, do not indent any of them
(or anything else in the @copying
block) in the source file.
See Copyright Notices in GNU Maintainer Information, for additional information. See GNU Sample Texts, for the full text to be used in GNU manuals. See GNU Free Documentation License, for the license itself under which GNU and other free manuals are distributed.
Previous: @copying
, Up: Document Permissions [Contents][Index]
@insertcopying
: Include Permissions TextThe @insertcopying
command is simply written on a line by
itself, like this:
@insertcopying
This inserts the text previously defined by @copying
. To meet
legal requirements, it must be used on the copyright page in the printed
manual (see Copyright).
The @copying
command itself causes the permissions text to
appear in an Info file before the first node. The text is also
copied into the beginning of each split Info output file, as is legally
necessary. This location implies a human reading the manual using Info
does not see this text (except when using the advanced Info
command g *), but this does not matter for legal purposes,
because the text is present.
Similarly, the @copying
text is automatically included at the
beginning of each HTML output file, as an HTML comment. Again, this
text is not visible (unless the reader views the HTML source).
The permissions text defined by @copying
also appears
automatically at the beginning of the XML and Docbook output files.
Next: Contents, Previous: Document Permissions, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
In hard copy output, the manual’s name and author are usually printed on a title page. Copyright information is usually printed on the back of the title page.
The title and copyright pages appear in printed manuals, but not in most other output formats. Because of this, it is possible to use several slightly obscure typesetting commands that are not to be used in the main text. In addition, this part of the beginning of a Texinfo file contains the text of the copying permissions that appears in the printed manual.
• @titlepage : | Create a title for the printed document. | |
• @titlefont @center @sp : | The @titlefont , @center ,
and @sp commands.
| |
• @title @subtitle @author : | The @title , @subtitle ,
and @author commands.
| |
• Copyright: | How to write the copyright notice and include copying permissions. | |
• Heading Generation: | Turn on page headings after the title and copyright pages. |
Next: @titlefont @center @sp
, Up: Titlepage & Copyright Page [Contents][Index]
@titlepage
Start the material for the title page and following copyright page
with @titlepage
on a line by itself and end it with
@end titlepage
on a line by itself.
The @end titlepage
command starts a new page and turns on page
numbering (see Heading Generation). All the
material that you want to appear on unnumbered pages should be put
between the @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands.
You can force the table of contents to appear there with the
@setcontentsaftertitlepage
command (see Contents).
By using the @page
command you can force a page break within the
region delineated by the @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands and thereby create more than one unnumbered page. This is how
the copyright page is produced. (The @titlepage
command might
perhaps have been better named the @titleandadditionalpages
command, but that would have been rather long!)
When you write a manual about a computer program, you should write the version of the program to which the manual applies on the title page. If the manual changes more frequently than the program or is independent of it, you should also include an edition number3 for the manual. This helps readers keep track of which manual is for which version of the program. (The ‘Top’ node should also contain this information; see The Top Node.)
Texinfo provides two main methods for creating a title page. One method
uses the @titlefont
, @sp
, and @center
commands
to generate a title page in which the words on the page are
centered.
The second method uses the @title
, @subtitle
, and
@author
commands to create a title page with black rules under
the title and author lines and the subtitle text set flush to the
right hand side of the page. With this method, you do not specify any
of the actual formatting of the title page. You specify the text
you want, and Texinfo does the formatting.
You may use either method, or you may combine them; see the examples in the sections below.
For sufficiently simple documents, and for the bastard title page in
traditional book frontmatter, Texinfo also provides a command
@shorttitlepage
which takes the rest of the line as the title.
The argument is typeset on a page by itself and followed by a blank
page.
Next: @title @subtitle @author
, Previous: @titlepage
, Up: Titlepage & Copyright Page [Contents][Index]
@titlefont
, @center
, and @sp
You can use the @titlefont
, @sp
, and @center
commands to create a title page for a printed document. (This is the
first of the two methods for creating a title page in Texinfo.)
Use the @titlefont
command to select a large font suitable for
the title itself. You can use @titlefont
more than once if you
have an especially long title.
For HTML output, each @titlefont
command produces an
<h1>
heading, but the HTML document <title>
is not
affected. For that, you must put a @settitle
command before
the @titlefont
command (see @settitle
).
For example:
@titlefont{Texinfo}
Use the @center
command at the beginning of a line to center
the remaining text on that line. Thus,
@center @titlefont{Texinfo}
centers the title, which in this example is “Texinfo” printed in the title font.
Use the @sp
command to insert vertical space. For example:
@sp 2
This inserts two blank lines on the printed page.
(See @sp
, for more information about the @sp
command.)
A template for this method looks like this:
@titlepage @sp 10 @center @titlefont{name-of-manual-when-printed} @sp 2 @center subtitle-if-any @sp 2 @center author … @end titlepage
The spacing of the example fits an 8.5 by 11 inch manual.
You can in fact use these commands anywhere, not just on a title page, but since they are not logical markup commands, we don’t recommend them.
Next: Copyright, Previous: @titlefont @center @sp
, Up: Titlepage & Copyright Page [Contents][Index]
@title
, @subtitle
, and @author
You can use the @title
, @subtitle
, and @author
commands to create a title page in which the vertical and horizontal
spacing is done for you automatically. This contrasts with the method
described in the previous section, in which the @sp
command is
needed to adjust vertical spacing.
Write the @title
, @subtitle
, or @author
commands at the beginning of a line followed by the title, subtitle,
or author. The @author
command may be used for a quotation in
an @quotation
block (see @quotation
);
except for that, it is an error to use any of these commands outside
of @titlepage
.
The @title
command produces a line in which the title is set
flush to the left-hand side of the page in a larger than normal font.
The title is underlined with a black rule. The title must be given on
a single line in the source file; it will be broken into multiple
lines of output is needed.
For long titles, the @*
command may be used to specify the
line breaks in long titles if the automatic breaks do not suit. Such
explicit line breaks are generally reflected in all output formats; if
you only want to specify them for the printed output, use a
conditional (see Conditionals). For example:
@title This Long Title@inlinefmt{tex,@*} Is Broken in @TeX{}
The @subtitle
command sets subtitles in a normal-sized font
flush to the right-hand side of the page.
The @author
command sets the names of the author or authors in
a middle-sized font flush to the left-hand side of the page on a line
near the bottom of the title page. The names are followed by a black
rule that is thinner than the rule that underlines the title.
There are two ways to use the @author
command: you can write
the name or names on the remaining part of the line that starts with
an @author
command:
@author by Jane Smith and John Doe
or you can write the names one above each other by using multiple
@author
commands:
@author Jane Smith @author John Doe
A template for this method looks like this:
@titlepage @title name-of-manual-when-printed @subtitle subtitle-if-any @subtitle second-subtitle @author author @page … @end titlepage
Next: Heading Generation, Previous: @title @subtitle @author
, Up: Titlepage & Copyright Page [Contents][Index]
By international treaty, the copyright notice for a book must be either
on the title page or on the back of the title page. When the copyright
notice is on the back of the title page, that page is customarily not
numbered. Therefore, in Texinfo, the information on the copyright page
should be within @titlepage
and @end titlepage
commands.
Use the @page
command to cause a page break. To push the
copyright notice and the other text on the copyright page towards the
bottom of the page, use the following incantation after @page
:
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
The @vskip
command inserts whitespace in the TeX output; it
is ignored in all other output formats. The ‘0pt plus 1filll’
means to put in zero points of mandatory whitespace, and as much
optional whitespace as needed to push the following text to the bottom
of the page. Note the use of three ‘l’s in the word
‘filll’; this is correct.
To insert the copyright text itself, write @insertcopying
next (see Document Permissions):
@insertcopying
Follow the copying text by the publisher, ISBN numbers, cover art credits, and other such information.
Here is an example putting all this together:
@titlepage … @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying Published by … Cover art by … @end titlepage
We have one more special case to consider: for plain text output, you must insert the copyright information explicitly if you want it to appear. For instance, you could have the following after the copyright page:
@ifplaintext @insertcopying @end ifplaintext
You could include other title-like information for the plain text output in the same place.
Previous: Copyright, Up: Titlepage & Copyright Page [Contents][Index]
Like all @end
commands (see Quotations and Examples), the
@end titlepage
command must be written at the beginning of a
line by itself, with only one space between the @end
and the
titlepage
. It not only marks the end of the title and
copyright pages, but also causes TeX to start generating page
headings and page numbers.
Texinfo has two standard page heading formats, one for documents printed on one side of each sheet of paper (single-sided printing), and the other for documents printed on both sides of each sheet (double-sided printing).
In full generality, you can control the headings in different ways:
@setchapternewpage
command
before the title page commands, if required, and then have the
@end titlepage
command start generating page headings in the
manner desired.
Most documents are formatted with the standard single-sided or
double-sided headings, (sometimes) using @setchapternewpage
odd
for double-sided printing and (almost always) no
@setchapternewpage
command for single-sided printing
(see @setchapternewpage
).
@headings
command to prevent
page headings from being generated or to start them for either single
or double-sided printing. Write a @headings
command
immediately after the @end titlepage
command. To turn off
headings, write @headings off
. See @headings
.
Next: The Top Node, Previous: Titlepage & Copyright Page, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
The @chapter
, @section
, and other structuring commands
(see Chapter Structuring) supply the information to make up a
table of contents, but they do not cause an actual table to appear in
the manual. To do this, you must use the @contents
and/or
@summarycontents
command(s).
@contents
Generates a table of contents in a printed manual, including all
chapters, sections, subsections, etc., as well as appendices and
unnumbered chapters. Headings generated by @majorheading
,
@chapheading
, and the other @…heading
commands
do not appear in the table of contents (see Structuring Command Types).
@shortcontents
@summarycontents
(@summarycontents
is a synonym for @shortcontents
.)
Generates a short or summary table of contents that lists only the chapters, appendices, and unnumbered chapters. Sections, subsections and subsubsections are omitted. Only a long manual needs a short table of contents in addition to the full table of contents.
Both contents commands should be written on a line by themselves, and
placed near the beginning of the file, after the @end
titlepage
(see @titlepage
), before any sectioning
command. The contents commands automatically generate a chapter-like
heading at the top of the first table of contents page, so don’t
include any sectioning command such as @unnumbered
before
them.
Since an Info file uses menus instead of tables of contents, the Info
formatting commands ignore the contents commands. But the contents
are included in plain text output (generated by makeinfo
--plaintext
) and in other output formats, such as HTML.
When makeinfo
writes a short table of contents while producing
HTML output, the links in the short table of contents point to
corresponding entries in the full table of contents rather than the text
of the document. The links in the full table of contents point to the
main text of the document.
Next: Global Document Commands, Previous: Contents, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
The ‘Top’ node is the node in which a reader enters an Info manual. As such, it should begin with a brief description of the manual (including the version number), and end with a master menu for the whole manual. Of course you should include any other general information you feel a reader would find helpful.
It is conventional and desirable to write a @top
sectioning
command line containing the title of the document immediately after
the @node Top
line (see @top
Command).
The contents of the ‘Top’ node should appear only in the online output;
none of it should appear in printed output, so enclose it between
@ifnottex
and @end ifnottex
commands. (TeX does not
print either an @node
line or a menu; they appear only in Info;
strictly speaking, you are not required to enclose these parts between
@ifnottex
and @end ifnottex
, but it is simplest to do
so. See Conditionally Visible Text.)
• Top Node Example: | ||
• Master Menu Parts: |
Next: Master Menu Parts, Up: The Top Node [Contents][Index]
Here is an example of a Top node.
@ifnottex @node Top @top Sample Title This is the text of the top node. @end ifnottex
Additional general information.
@menu * First Chapter:: * Second Chapter:: … * Index::
@end menu
Previous: Top Node Example, Up: The Top Node [Contents][Index]
A master menu is the main menu. It is customary to include a detailed menu listing all the nodes in the document in this menu.
Like any other menu, a master menu is enclosed in @menu
and
@end menu
and does not appear in the printed output.
Generally, a master menu is divided into parts.
@detailmenu
before the first one, and
@end detailmenu
after the last; otherwise, makeinfo
will get confused.
Each section in the menu can be introduced by a descriptive line. So long as the line does not begin with an asterisk, it will not be treated as a menu entry. (See Writing a Menu, for more information.)
For example, the master menu for this manual looks like the following (but has many more entries):
@menu * Copying Conditions:: Your rights. * Overview:: Texinfo in brief. …
* Command and Variable Index:: * General Index::
@detailmenu --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Overview of Texinfo * Reporting Bugs:: … …
Beginning a Texinfo File * Sample Beginning:: … … @end detailmenu @end menu
Next: Ending a File, Previous: The Top Node, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
Besides the basic commands mentioned in the previous sections, here are additional commands which affect the document as a whole. They are generally all given before the Top node, if they are given at all.
• @documentdescription : | Document summary for the HTML output. | |
• @setchapternewpage : | Start chapters on right-hand pages. | |
• @headings : | An option for turning headings on and off and double or single sided printing. | |
• @paragraphindent : | Specify paragraph indentation. | |
• @firstparagraphindent : | Suppressing first paragraph indentation. | |
• @exampleindent : | Specify environment indentation. |
Next: @setchapternewpage
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@documentdescription
: Summary TextWhen producing HTML output for a document, makeinfo
writes a
‘<meta>’ element in the ‘<head>’ to give some idea of the
content of the document. By default, this description is the
title of the document, taken from the @settitle
command
(see @settitle
). To change this, use the
@documentdescription
environment, as in:
@documentdescription descriptive text. @end documentdescription
This will produce the following output in the ‘<head>’ of the HTML:
<meta name=description content="descriptive text.">
@documentdescription
must be specified before the first node of
the document.
Next: @headings
, Previous: @documentdescription
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@setchapternewpage
: Blank Pages Before ChaptersIn an officially bound book, text is usually printed on both sides of the paper, chapters start on right-hand pages, and right-hand pages have odd numbers. But in short reports, text often is printed only on one side of the paper. Also in short reports, chapters sometimes do not start on new pages, but are printed on the same page as the end of the preceding chapter, after a small amount of vertical whitespace.
You can use the @setchapternewpage
command with various
arguments to specify how TeX should start chapters and whether it
should format headers for printing on one or both sides of the paper
(single-sided or double-sided printing).
Write the @setchapternewpage
command at the beginning of a
line followed by its argument.
For example, you would write the following to cause each chapter to start on a fresh odd-numbered page:
@setchapternewpage odd
You can specify one of three alternatives with the
@setchapternewpage
command:
@setchapternewpage off
Cause TeX to typeset a new chapter on the same page as the last chapter, after skipping some vertical whitespace. Also, cause TeX to format page headers for single-sided printing.
@setchapternewpage on
Cause TeX to start new chapters on new pages and to format page headers for single-sided printing. This is the form most often used for short reports or personal printing. This is the default.
@setchapternewpage odd
Cause TeX to start new chapters on new, odd-numbered pages (right-handed pages) and to typeset for double-sided printing. This is the form most often used for books and manuals.
Texinfo does not have a @setchapternewpage even
command,
because there is no printing tradition of starting chapters or books on
an even-numbered page.
If you don’t like the default headers that @setchapternewpage
sets, you can explicit control them with the @headings
command.
See @headings
.
At the beginning of a manual or book, pages are not numbered—for example, the title and copyright pages of a book are not numbered. By convention, table of contents and frontmatter pages are numbered with roman numerals and not in sequence with the rest of the document.
The @setchapternewpage
has no effect in output formats that do
not have pages, such as Info and HTML.
We recommend not including any @setchapternewpage
command in
your document source at all, since such desired pagination is not
intrinsic to the document. For a particular hard copy run, if you
don’t want the default output (no blank pages, same headers on all
pages) use the --texinfo option to texi2dvi
to
specify the output you want.
Next: @paragraphindent
, Previous: @setchapternewpage
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@headings
CommandThe @headings
command is rarely used. It specifies what kind of
page headings and footings to print on each page. Usually, this is
controlled by the @setchapternewpage
command. You need the
@headings
command only if the @setchapternewpage
command
does not do what you want, or if you want to turn off predefined page
headings prior to defining your own. Write a @headings
command
immediately after the @end titlepage
command.
You can use @headings
as follows:
@headings off
Turn off printing of page headings.
@headings single
Turn on page headings appropriate for single-sided printing.
@headings double
Turn on page headings appropriate for double-sided printing.
@headings singleafter
@headings doubleafter
Turn on single
or double
headings, respectively, after the
current page is output.
@headings on
Turn on page headings: single
if ‘@setchapternewpage
on’, double
otherwise.
For example, suppose you write @setchapternewpage off
before the
@titlepage
command to tell TeX to start a new chapter on the
same page as the end of the last chapter. This command also causes
TeX to typeset page headers for single-sided printing. To cause
TeX to typeset for double sided printing, write @headings
double
after the @end titlepage
command.
You can stop TeX from generating any page headings at all by
writing @headings off
on a line of its own immediately after the
line containing the @end titlepage
command, like this:
@end titlepage @headings off
The @headings off
command overrides the @end titlepage
command, which would otherwise cause TeX to print page headings.
You can also specify your own style of page heading and footing. See Page Headings, for more information.
Next: @firstparagraphindent
, Previous: @headings
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@paragraphindent
: Controlling Paragraph IndentationThe Texinfo processors may insert whitespace at the beginning of the
first line of each paragraph, thereby indenting that paragraph. You can
use the @paragraphindent
command to specify this indentation.
Write a @paragraphindent
command at the beginning of a line
followed by either ‘asis’ or a number:
@paragraphindent indent
The indentation is according to the value of indent:
asis
Do not change the existing indentation (not implemented in TeX).
none
Omit all indentation.
Indent by n space characters in Info output, by n ems in TeX.
The default value of indent is 3. @paragraphindent
is
ignored for HTML output.
It is best to write the @paragraphindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
Next: @exampleindent
, Previous: @paragraphindent
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@firstparagraphindent
: Indenting After HeadingsAs you can see in the present manual, the first paragraph in any
section is not indented by default. Typographically, indentation is a
paragraph separator, which means that it is unnecessary when a new
section begins. This indentation is controlled with the
@firstparagraphindent
command:
@firstparagraphindent word
The first paragraph after a heading is indented according to the value of word:
none
Prevents the first paragraph from being indented (default).
This option is ignored by makeinfo
if
@paragraphindent asis
is in effect.
insert
Include normal paragraph indentation. This respects the paragraph
indentation set by a @paragraphindent
command
(see @paragraphindent
).
@firstparagraphindent
is ignored for HTML and Docbook output.
It is best to write the @firstparagraphindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
Previous: @firstparagraphindent
, Up: Global Document Commands [Contents][Index]
@exampleindent
: Environment IndentingThe Texinfo processors indent each line of @example
and similar
environments. You can use the @exampleindent
command to specify
this indentation. Write an @exampleindent
command at the
beginning of a line followed by either ‘asis’ or a number:
@exampleindent indent
The indentation is according to the value of indent:
asis
Do not change the existing indentation (not implemented in TeX).
Omit all indentation.
Indent environments by n space characters in Info output, by n ems in TeX.
The default value of indent is 5 spaces in Info, and 0.4in in TeX, which is somewhat less. (The reduction is to help TeX fit more characters onto physical lines.)
It is best to write the @exampleindent
command before the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file, so the region
formatting commands indent paragraphs as specified. See Start of Header.
Previous: Global Document Commands, Up: Beginning and Ending a File [Contents][Index]
The end of a Texinfo file should include commands to create indices
(see Printing Indices & Menus), and the @bye
command to mark
the last line to be processed. For example:
@node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
An @bye
command terminates Texinfo processing. None of the
formatters process anything following @bye
; any such text is
completely ignored. The @bye
command should be on a line by
itself.
Thus, if you wish, you may follow the @bye
line with arbitrary
notes. Also, you may follow the @bye
line with a local
variables list for Emacs, most typically a ‘compile-command’
(see Using the Local Variables List).
Next: Chapter Structuring, Previous: Beginning and Ending a File, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
A node is a region of text that begins at a @node
command, and continues until the next @node
command.
To specify a node, write a @node
command at the beginning of
a line, and follow it with the name of the node.
Each node contains the discussion of one topic. Info readers
display one node at a time, and provide commands for the user to move
to related nodes. The HTML output can be similarly navigated.
Nodes are used as the targets of cross-references. Cross-references,
such as the one at the end of this sentence, are made with @xref
and related commands; see Cross References. Cross-references can
be sprinkled throughout the text, and provide a way to represent links
that do not fit a hierarchical structure.
Normally, you put a node command immediately before each chapter
structuring command—for example, an @section
or
@subsection
line. (See Chapter Structuring.).
You must do this even if you do not intend to format the file for Info.
This is because TeX uses both @node
names and
chapter-structuring names in the output for cross-references. The only
time you are likely to use the chapter structuring commands without also
using nodes is if you are writing a document that contains no cross
references and will only be printed, not transformed into Info, HTML, or
other formats.
• Texinfo Document Structure: | Double structure of documents. | |
• Node Names: | How to choose node names. | |
• Writing a Node: | How to write an @node line.
| |
• Node Line Requirements: | Keep names unique. | |
• First Node: | How to write a ‘Top’ node. | |
• @top Command: | How to use the @top command.
| |
• Node Menu Illustration: | A diagram, and sample nodes and menus. | |
• makeinfo Pointer Creation: | Letting makeinfo determine node pointers. | |
• Menus: | Listing subordinate nodes. |
Next: Node Names, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
Nodes can contain menus, which contain the names of child nodes within the parent node; for example, a node corresponding to a chapter would have a menu of the sections in that chapter. The menus allow the user to move to the child nodes in a natural way in the online output.
In addition, nodes contain node pointers that name other nodes. The ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ pointers form nodes at the same sectioning level into a chain. As you might imagine, the ‘Next’ pointer links to the next node, and the ‘Previous’ pointer links to the previous node. Thus, for example, all the nodes that are at the level of sections within a chapter are linked together, and the order in this chain is the same as the order of the children in the menu of the parent chapter. Each child node records the parent node name as its ‘Up’ pointer.
The Info and HTML output from makeinfo
for each node includes
links to the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ nodes. The HTML also uses
the accesskey
attribute with the values ‘n’, ‘p’, and
‘u’ respectively. This allows people using web browsers to
follow the navigation using (typically) M-letter, e.g.,
M-n for the ‘Next’ node, from anywhere within the node.
Node pointers and menus provide structure for Info files just as
chapters, sections, subsections, and the like provide structure for
printed books. The two structures are theoretically distinct; in
practice, however, the tree structure of printed books is essentially
always used for the node and menu structure also, as this leads to a
document which is easiest to follow. See Texinfo Document Structure.
Typically, the sectioning structure and the node structure are completely parallel, with one node for each chapter, section, etc., and with the nodes following the same hierarchical arrangement as the sectioning. Thus, if a node is at the logical level of a chapter, its child nodes are at the level of sections; similarly, the child nodes of sections are at the level of subsections.
Although it is technically possible to create Texinfo documents with only one structure or the other, or for the two structures not to be parallel, or for either the sectioning or node structure to be abnormally formed, etc., this is not at all recommended. To the best of our knowledge, all the Texinfo manuals currently in general use do follow the conventional parallel structure.
Next: Writing a Node, Previous: Texinfo Document Structure, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
The name of a node identifies the node. For all the details of node names, see Node Line Requirements).
Here are some suggestions for node names:
In the Info file, the file name, node name, and pointer names are all inserted on one line, which may run into the right edge of the window. (This does not cause a problem with Info, but is ugly.)
Because node names are used in cross-references, it is not desirable to casually change them once published. Such name changes invalidate references from other manuals, from mail archives, and so on. See HTML Xref Link Preservation.
The pointers from a given node enable you to reach other nodes and
consist simply of the names of those nodes. The pointers are usually
not specified explicitly, as makeinfo
can determine them
(see makeinfo
Pointer Creation).
Normally, a node’s ‘Up’ pointer contains the name of the node whose menu mentions that node. The node’s ‘Next’ pointer contains the name of the node that follows the present node in that menu and its ‘Previous’ pointer contains the name of the node that precedes it in that menu. When a node’s ‘Previous’ node is the same as its ‘Up’ node, both pointers name the same node.
Usually, the first node of a Texinfo file is the ‘Top’ node, and its ‘Up’ pointer points to the dir file, which contains the main menu for all of Info.
Next: Node Line Requirements, Previous: Node Names, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
@node
LineThe easiest way to write an @node
line is to write @node
at the beginning of a line and then the name of the node, like this:
@node node-name
After you have inserted an @node
line, you should immediately
write an @-command for the chapter or section and insert its name.
Next (and this is important!), put in several index entries. Usually,
you will find at least two and often as many as four or five ways of
referring to the node in the index. Use them all. This will make it
much easier for people to find the node.
If you wish, you can ignore @node
lines altogether in your
first draft and then use the texinfo-insert-node-lines
command
to create @node
lines for you. However, we do not recommend
this practice. It is better to name the node itself at the same time
that you write a segment so you can easily make cross-references.
Useful cross-references are an especially important feature of a good
Texinfo manual.
Even when you explicitly specify all pointers, you cannot write the nodes in the Texinfo source file in an arbitrary order! Because formatters must process the file sequentially, irrespective of node pointers, you must write the nodes in the order you wish them to appear in the output. For Info format one can imagine that the order may not matter, but it matters for the other formats.
You may optionally follow the node name argument to @node
with up to three optional arguments on the rest of the same line,
separating the arguments with commas. These are the names of the
‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers, in that order. We recommend
omitting them if your Texinfo document is hierarchically organized,
as virtually all are (see makeinfo
Pointer Creation).
Any spaces before or after each name on the @node
line are
ignored.
The template for a fully-written-out node line with ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers looks like this:
@node node-name, next, previous, up
The node-name argument must be present, but the others are
optional. If you wish to specify some but not others, just insert
commas as needed, as in: ‘@node mynode,,,uppernode’. However,
we recommend leaving off all the pointers and letting makeinfo
determine them.
If you are using GNU Emacs, you can use the update node commands
provided by Texinfo mode to insert the names of the pointers; or
(recommended), you can leave the pointers out of the Texinfo file and
let makeinfo
insert node pointers into the Info file it
creates. (See Texinfo Mode, and makeinfo
Pointer Creation.)
Alternatively, you can insert the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers yourself. If you do this, you may find it helpful to use the Texinfo mode keyboard command C-c C-c n. This command inserts ‘@node’ and a comment line listing the names of the pointers in their proper order. The comment line helps you keep track of which arguments are for which pointers. This comment line is especially useful if you are not familiar with Texinfo.
Next: First Node, Previous: Writing a Node, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
@node
Line RequirementsNames used with @node
have several requirements:
This means, for example, that if you end every chapter with a summary, you must name each summary node differently. You cannot just call them all “Summary”. You may, however, duplicate the titles of chapters, sections, and the like. Thus you can end each chapter with a section called “Summary”, so long as the node names for those sections are all different.
@TeX{}
in a
node name results in the TeX logo being output, as it would be in
normal text. Cross-references should use @TeX{}
just as the
node name does.
For Info and HTML output, especially, it is necessary to expand
commands to some sequence of plain characters; for instance,
@TeX{}
expands to the three letters ‘TeX’ in the Info
node name. However, cross-references to the node should not take the
“shortcut” of using ‘TeX’; stick to the actual node name,
commands and all.
Some commands do not make sense in node names; for instance,
environments (e.g., @quotation
), commands that read a whole
line as their argument (e.g., @sp
), and plenty of others.
For the complete list of commands that are allowed, and their expansion for HTML identifiers and file names, see HTML Xref Command Expansion. The expansions for Info are generally given with main the description of the command.
Prior to the Texinfo 5 release in 2013, this feature was supported in
an ad hoc way (the --commands-in-node-names option to
makeinfo
). Now it is part of the language.
(not)allowed
, since this syntax is used to
specify an external manual. (Perhaps these limitations will be
removed some day.)
makeinfo
warns about such problematic usage in node names,
menu items, and cross-references. If you don’t want to see the
warnings, you can set the customization variable
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
to ‘0’ (see Other Customization Variables).
Also, if you insist on using these characters in node names (accepting
the resulting substandard Info output), in order not to confuse the
Texinfo processors you must still escape those characters, by using
either special insertions (see Inserting a Comma) or @asis
(see @asis
). For example:
@node foo@asis{::}bar
As an example of avoiding the special characters, the following is a section title in this manual:
@section @code{@@unnumbered}, @code{@@appendix}: ...
But the corresponding node name lacks the commas and the subtitle:
@node @unnumbered @appendix
@node foo bar @node foo bar, @node foo bar , @node foo bar, @node foo bar ,
all define the same node, namely ‘foo bar’. In menu entries, this is the name that should be used: no leading or trailing spaces, and a single internal space. (For cross-references, the node name used in the Texinfo sources is automatically normalized in this way.)
@node
lines must be the names
of nodes. (It’s recommended to leave out these explicit node pointer
names, which automatically avoids any problem here; see makeinfo
Pointer Creation.)
Next: @top
Command, Previous: Node Line Requirements, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
The first node of a Texinfo file is the Top node, except in an included file (see Include Files). The Top node should contain a short summary, copying permissions, and a master menu. See The Top Node, for more information on the Top node contents and examples.
Here is a description of the node pointers to be used in the Top node:
Usually, all Info files are available through a single virtual Info tree, constructed from multiple directories. In this case, use ‘(dir)’ as the parent of the Top node; this specifies the top-level node in the dir file, which contains the main menu for the Info system as a whole. (Each directory with Info files is intended to contain a file named dir.)
That’s fine for Info, but for HTML output, one might well want the Up
link from the Top node to go somewhere other than ‘dir.html’.
For example, for GNU the natural place would be
http://www.gnu.org/manual/ (a web page collecting links to most
GNU manuals), better specified as just /manual/
if the manual
will be installed on www.gnu.org
. This can be specified with
the TOP_NODE_UP_URL
customization variable (see HTML Customization Variables), as in
$ makeinfo --html -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=/manual/ ...
All links to (dir)
will be replaced by the given url.
See Installing an Info File, for more information about installing an Info file in the info directory.
It is usually best to leave the pointers off entirely and let the tools implicitly define them, with this simple result:
@node Top
Next: Node Menu Illustration, Previous: First Node, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
@top
Sectioning CommandThe @top
command is a special sectioning command that you
should only use after a ‘@node Top’ line at the beginning of a
Texinfo file. The @top
command tells the makeinfo
formatter which node is to be used as the root of the node tree.
It produces the same sort of output as @unnumbered
(see @unnumbered @appendix
).
The @top
node is conventionally wrapped in an
@ifnottex
conditional so that it will not appear in TeX
output (see Conditionals).
Thus, in practice, a Top node usually looks like this:
@ifnottex @node Top @top your-manual-title very-high-level-summary @end ifnottex
@top
is ignored when raising or lowering sections. That is,
it is never lowered and nothing can be raised to it
(see Raise/lower sections).
Next: makeinfo
Pointer Creation, Previous: @top
Command, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
Here is a diagram that illustrates a Texinfo file with three chapters, each of which contains two sections.
The “root” is at the top of the diagram and the “leaves” are at the bottom. This is how such a diagram is drawn conventionally; it illustrates an upside-down tree. For this reason, the root node is called the ‘Top’ node, and ‘Up’ node pointers carry you closer to the root.
Top | ------------------------------------- | | | Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 | | | -------- -------- -------- | | | | | | Section Section Section Section Section Section 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
Using explicit pointers (not recommended, but for shown for purposes of the example), the fully-written command to start Chapter 2 would be this:
@node Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Chapter 1, Top @comment node-name, next, previous, up
This @node
line says that the name of this node is
“Chapter 2”, the name of the ‘Next’ node is “Chapter 3”, the
name of the ‘Previous’ node is “Chapter 1”, and the name of the
‘Up’ node is “Top”. You can (and should) omit writing out these
node names if your document is hierarchically organized
(see makeinfo
Pointer Creation), but the pointer
relationships still obtain.
Note: ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ refer to nodes at the same hierarchical level in the manual, not necessarily to the next node within the Texinfo file. In the Texinfo file, the subsequent node may be at a lower level—a section-level node most often follows a chapter-level node, for example. (The ‘Top’ node contains the exception to this rule. Since the ‘Top’ node is the only node at that level, ‘Next’ refers to the first following node, which is almost always a chapter or chapter-level node.)
To go to Sections 2.1 and 2.2 using Info, you need a menu inside Chapter 2. (See Menus.) You would write the menu just before the beginning of Section 2.1, like this:
@menu * Sect. 2.1:: Description of this section. * Sect. 2.2:: Description. @end menu
Using explicit pointers, the node for Sect. 2.1 is written like this:
@node Sect. 2.1, Sect. 2.2, Chapter 2, Chapter 2 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
In Info format, the ‘Next’ and ‘Previous’ pointers of a node usually lead to other nodes at the same level—from chapter to chapter or from section to section (sometimes, as shown, the ‘Previous’ pointer points up); an ‘Up’ pointer usually leads to a node at the level above (closer to the ‘Top’ node); and a ‘Menu’ leads to nodes at a level below (closer to ‘leaves’). (A cross-reference can point to a node at any level; see Cross References.)
A @node
command and a chapter structuring command are
conventionally used together, in that order, often followed by
indexing commands. (As shown in the example above, you may follow the
@node
line with a comment line, e.g., to show which pointer is
which if explicit pointers are used.) The Texinfo processors use this
construct to determine the relationships between nodes and sectioning
commands.
Here is the beginning of the chapter in this manual called “Ending a
Texinfo File”. This shows an @node
line followed by an
@chapter
line, and then by indexing lines.
@node Ending a File @chapter Ending a Texinfo File @cindex Ending a Texinfo file @cindex Texinfo file ending @cindex File ending
An earlier version of the manual used explicit node pointers. Here is
the beginning of the same chapter for that case. This shows an
@node
line followed by a comment line, a @chapter
line, and then by indexing lines.
@node Ending a File, Structuring, Beginning a File, Top @comment node-name, next, previous, up @chapter Ending a Texinfo File @cindex Ending a Texinfo file …
Next: Menus, Previous: Node Menu Illustration, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
Pointer CreationThe makeinfo
program can automatically determine node pointers
for a hierarchically organized document. This implicit node pointer
creation feature in makeinfo
relieves you from the need to
update menus and pointers manually or with Texinfo mode commands.
(See Updating Nodes and Menus.) We highly recommend taking
advantage of this.
To do so, write your @node
lines with just the name of the
node:
@node My Node
You do not need to write out the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers.
Then, you must write a sectioning command, such as @chapter
or @section
, on the line immediately following each truncated
@node
line (except that comment lines may intervene). This is
where it normally goes.
Also, you must write the name of each node (except for the ‘Top’ node) in a menu that is one or more hierarchical levels above the node’s level.
Finally, you must follow the ‘Top’ @node
line with a line
beginning with @top
to mark the top-level node in the file.
See @top
Command.
If you use a detailed menu in your master menu (see Master Menu Parts), mark it with the @detailmenu … @end
detailmenu
environment, or makeinfo
will get confused,
typically about the last and/or first node in the document.
In most cases, you will want to take advantage of this feature and not redundantly specify node pointers that the programs can determine. However, Texinfo documents are not required to be organized hierarchically or in fact to contain sectioning commands at all (for example, if you never intend the document to be printed), so node pointers may still be specified explicitly, in full generality.
Previous: makeinfo
Pointer Creation, Up: Nodes [Contents][Index]
Menus contain pointers to subordinate nodes. In online output, you use menus to go to such nodes. Menus have no effect in printed manuals and do not appear in them.
• Writing a Menu: | What is a menu? | |
• Menu Example: | Two and three part menu entries. | |
• Menu Location: | Menus go at the ends of nodes. | |
• Menu Parts: | A menu entry has three parts. | |
• Less Cluttered Menu Entry: | Two part menu entry. | |
• Other Info Files: | How to refer to a different Info file. |
Next: Menu Example, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
A menu consists of a @menu
command on a line by itself,
followed by menu entry lines or menu comment lines, and then followed
by an @end menu
command on a line by itself.
A menu looks like this:
@menu Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once. @end menu
In a menu, every line that begins with an ‘* ’ is a menu entry. (Note the space after the asterisk.)
A line that does not start with an ‘* ’ may also appear in a menu. Such a line is not a menu entry but rather a menu comment line that appears in the Info file. In the example above, the line ‘Larger Units of Text’ is such a menu comment line; the two lines starting with ‘* ’ are menu entries.
Technically, menus can carry you to any node, regardless of the
structure of the document; even to nodes in a different Info file.
However, we do not recommend making use of this, because it is hard
for readers to follow. Also, the makeinfo
implicit pointer
creation feature (see makeinfo
Pointer Creation) and GNU
Emacs Texinfo mode updating commands work only to create menus of
subordinate nodes in a hierarchically structured document. It is much
better to use cross-references to refer to arbitrary nodes.
makeinfo
can automatically generate menus in nodes for Info
and HTML output, based on the chapter structure of the document. To
specify that you want it to do this, place the line
‘@validatemenus off’ near the beginning of the document.
In Info, a user selects a node with the m (Info-menu
)
command. The menu entry name is what the user types after the m
command.
In the HTML output from makeinfo
, the accesskey
attribute is used with the values ‘1’…‘9’ for the
first nine entries. This allows people using web browsers to follow
the first menu entries using (typically) M-digit, e.g.,
M-1 for the first entry.
Next: Menu Location, Previous: Writing a Menu, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
A menu looks like this in Texinfo:
@menu * menu entry name: Node name. A short description. * Node name:: This form is preferred. @end menu
This produces:
* menu: * menu entry name: Node name. A short description. * Node name:: This form is preferred.
Here is an example as you might see it in a Texinfo file:
@menu Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once. @end menu
This produces:
* menu: Larger Units of Text * Files:: All about handling files. * Multiples: Buffers. Multiple buffers; editing several files at once.
In this example, the menu has two entries. ‘Files’ is both a menu entry name and the name of the node referred to by that name. ‘Multiples’ is the menu entry name; it refers to the node named ‘Buffers’. The line ‘Larger Units of Text’ is a comment; it appears in the menu, but is not an entry.
Since no file name is specified with either ‘Files’ or ‘Buffers’, they must be the names of nodes in the same Info file (see Referring to Other Info Files).
Next: Menu Parts, Previous: Menu Example, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
There may be at most one menu in a node. A menu is conventionally
located at the end of a node, without any regular text or additional
commands between the @end menu
and the beginning of the next
node.
This convention is useful, since a reader who uses the menu could easily miss any such text. Also, any such post-menu text will be considered part of the menu in Info output (which has no marker for the end of a menu). Thus, a line beginning with ‘* ’ will likely be incorrectly handled.
It’s usually best if a node with a menu does not contain much text. If you find yourself with a lot of text before a menu, we generally recommend moving all but a couple of paragraphs into a new subnode. Otherwise, it is easy for readers to miss the menu.
Next: Less Cluttered Menu Entry, Previous: Menu Location, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
A menu entry has three parts, only the second of which is required:
The template for a generic menu entry looks like this (but see the next section for one more possibility):
* menu-entry-name: node-name. description
Follow the menu entry name with a single colon, and follow the node name with tab, comma, newline, or the two characters period and space (‘. ’).
The third part of a menu entry is a descriptive phrase or sentence. Menu entry names and node names are often short; the description explains to the reader what the node is about. A useful description complements the node name rather than repeats it. The description, which is optional, can spread over multiple lines; if it does, some authors prefer to indent the second line while others prefer to align it with the first (and all others). It’s up to you. An empty line, or the next menu entry, ends a description.
Space characters in a menu are preserved as-is in the Info output; this allows you to format the menu as you wish. Unfortunately you must type node names without any extra spaces or some versions of some Info readers will not find the node (see Node Line Requirements).
makeinfo
warns when the text of a menu item (and node names
and cross-references) contains a problematic construct that will
interfere with its parsing in Info. If you don’t want to see the
warnings, you can set the customization variable
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
to ‘0’ (see Other Customization Variables).
Next: Other Info Files, Previous: Menu Parts, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
When the menu entry name and node name are the same, you can write the name immediately after the asterisk and space at the beginning of the line and follow the name with two colons.
For example, write
* Name:: description
instead of
* Name: Name. description
We recommend using the node name for the menu entry name whenever possible, since it reduces visual clutter in the menu.
Previous: Less Cluttered Menu Entry, Up: Menus [Contents][Index]
You can create a menu entry that enables a reader in Info to go to a node in another Info file by writing the file name in parentheses just before the node name. Some examples:
@menu * first-entry-name:(filename)nodename. description * (filename)second-node:: description @end menu
For example, to refer directly to the ‘Outlining’ and ‘Rebinding’ nodes in the Emacs Manual, you could write a menu like this:
@menu * Outlining: (emacs)Outline Mode. The major mode for editing outlines. * (emacs)Rebinding:: How to redefine the meaning of a key. @end menu
If you do not list the node name, but only name the file, then Info presumes that you are referring to the ‘Top’ node. Examples:
* Info: (info). Documentation browsing system. * (emacs):: The extensible, self-documenting text editor.
The GNU Emacs Texinfo mode menu updating commands only work with nodes within the current buffer, so you cannot use them to create menus that refer to other files. You must write such menus by hand.
Next: Cross References, Previous: Nodes, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Texinfo’s chapter structuring commands divide a document into a hierarchy of chapters, sections, subsections, and subsubsections. These commands generate large headings in the text, like the one above. They also provide information for generating the table of contents (see Generating a Table of Contents).
Normally you put a @node
command immediately before each
chapter structuring command. See Nodes.
• Tree Structuring: | A manual is like an upside down tree … | |
• Structuring Command Types: | How to divide a manual into parts. | |
• @chapter : | Chapter structuring. | |
• @unnumbered @appendix : | ||
• @majorheading @chapheading : | ||
• @section : | ||
• @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading : | ||
• @subsection : | ||
• @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading : | ||
• @subsubsection : | Commands for the lowest level sections. | |
• @part : | Collections of chapters. | |
• Raise/lower sections: | How to change commands’ hierarchical level. |
Next: Structuring Command Types, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
A Texinfo file is usually structured like a book with chapters, sections, subsections, and the like. This structure can be visualized as a tree (or rather as an upside-down tree) with the root at the top and the levels corresponding to chapters, sections, subsection, and subsubsections.
Here is a diagram that shows a Texinfo file with three chapters, each with two sections.
Top | ------------------------------------- | | | Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 | | | -------- -------- -------- | | | | | | Section Section Section Section Section Section 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
In a Texinfo file that has this structure, the beginning of Chapter 2 would be written like this:
@node Chapter 2 @chapter Chapter 2
For purposes of example, here is how it would be written with explicit node pointers:
@node Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Chapter 1, Top @chapter Chapter 2
The chapter structuring commands are described in the sections that
follow; the @node
command is described in
the previous chapter (see Nodes).
Next: @chapter
, Previous: Tree Structuring, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
The chapter structuring commands fall into four groups or series, each of which contains structuring commands corresponding to the hierarchical levels of chapters, sections, subsections, and subsubsections.
The four groups of commands are the @chapter
series, the
@unnumbered
series, the @appendix
series, and the
@heading
series. Each command produces a title with a
different appearance in the body of the document. Some of the
commands list their titles in the tables of contents, while others do
not. Here are the details:
@chapter
and @appendix
series of commands produce
numbered or lettered entries both in the body of a document and in its
table of contents.
@unnumbered
series of commands produce unnumbered entries
both in the body of a document and in its table of contents. The
@top
command, which has a special use, is a member of this
series (see @top
Command). An @unnumbered
section
is a normal part of the document structure.
@heading
series of commands produce simple unnumbered
headings that do not appear in a table of contents, are not associated
with nodes, and cannot be cross-referenced. These heading commands
never start a new page.
When a @setchapternewpage
command says to do so, the
@chapter
, @unnumbered
, and @appendix
commands
start new pages in the printed manual; the @heading
commands
do not. See @setchapternewpage
.
Here is a summary:
No new page | |||
Numbered | Unnumbered | Lettered/numbered | Unnumbered |
In contents | In contents | In contents | Not in contents |
@top | @majorheading | ||
@chapter | @unnumbered | @appendix | @chapheading |
@section | @unnumberedsec | @appendixsec | @heading |
@subsection | @unnumberedsubsec | @appendixsubsec | @subheading |
@subsubsection | @unnumberedsubsubsec | @appendixsubsubsec | @subsubheading |
Next: @unnumbered @appendix
, Previous: Structuring Command Types, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@chapter
: Chapter Structuring@chapter
identifies a chapter in the document–the highest
level of the normal document structuring hierarchy. Write the command
at the beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the title
of the chapter. The chapter is numbered automatically, starting
from 1.
For example, the present chapter in this manual is entitled
“@chapter
: Chapter Structuring”; the @chapter
line
looks like this:
@chapter @code{@@chapter}: Chapter Structuring
In TeX, the @chapter
command produces a chapter heading in
the document.
In Info and plain text output, the @chapter
command causes the
title to appear on a line by itself, with a line of asterisks inserted
underneath. So, the above example produces the following output:
5 Chapter Structuring *********************
In HTML, the @chapter
command produces an <h2>
-level
header by default (controlled by the CHAPTER_HEADER_LEVEL
customization variable, see Other Customization Variables).
In the XML and Docbook output, a <chapter>
element is produced
that includes all the following sections, up to the next chapter.
Next: @majorheading @chapheading
, Previous: @chapter
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@unnumbered
, @appendix
: Chapters with Other LabelingUse the @unnumbered
command to start a chapter-level element
that appears without chapter numbers of any kind. Use the
@appendix
command to start an appendix that is labeled by
letter (‘A’, ‘B’, …) instead of by number; appendices are also
at the chapter level of structuring.
Write an @appendix
or @unnumbered
command at the
beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the title,
just as with @chapter
.
Texinfo also provides a command @centerchap
, which is analogous
to @unnumbered
, but centers its argument in the printed and HTML
outputs. This kind of stylistic choice is not usually offered by
Texinfo. It may be suitable for short documents.
With @unnumbered
, if the name of the associated node is one of
these English words (case-insensitive):
Acknowledgements Colophon Dedication Preface
then the Docbook output uses corresponding special tags
(<preface>
, etc.) instead of the default <chapter>
.
The argument to @unnumbered
itself can be anything, and is
output as the following <title>
text as usual.
Next: @section
, Previous: @unnumbered @appendix
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@majorheading
, @chapheading
: Chapter-level HeadingsThe @majorheading
and @chapheading
commands produce
chapter-like headings in the body of a document.
However, neither command produces an entry in the table of contents, and neither command causes TeX to start a new page in a printed manual.
In TeX, a @majorheading
command generates a larger vertical
whitespace before the heading than a @chapheading
command but
is otherwise the same.
In Info and plain text, the @majorheading
and
@chapheading
commands produce the same output as
@chapter
: the title is printed on a line by itself with a line
of asterisks underneath. Similarly for HTML. The only difference is
the lack of numbering and the lack of any association with nodes.
See @chapter
.
Next: @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading
, Previous: @majorheading @chapheading
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@section
: Sections Below ChaptersAn @section
command identifies a section within a chapter
unit, whether created with @chapter
, @unnumbered
, or
@appendix
, following the numbering scheme of the chapter-level
command. Thus, within a @chapter
chapter numbered ‘1’, the
sections are numbered ‘1.1’, ‘1.2’, etc.; within an @appendix
“chapter” labeled ‘A’, the sections are numbered ‘A.1’, ‘A.2’, etc.;
within an @unnumbered
chapter, the section gets no number.
The output is underlined with ‘=’ in Info and plain text.
To make a section, write the @section
command at the
beginning of a line and follow it on the same line by the section
title. For example,
@section This is a section
might produce the following in Info:
5.7 This is a section =====================
Section titles are listed in the table of contents.
The TeX, HTML, Docbook, and XML output is all analogous to the
chapter-level output, just “one level down”; see @chapter
.
Next: @subsection
, Previous: @section
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, @heading
The @unnumberedsec
, @appendixsec
, and @heading
commands are, respectively, the unnumbered, appendix-like, and
heading-like equivalents of the @section
command (see the
previous section).
@unnumberedsec
and @appendixsec
do not need to be used
in ordinary circumstances, because @section
may also be used
within @unnumbered
and @appendix
chapters; again, see
the previous section.
@unnumberedsec
The @unnumberedsec
command may be used within an unnumbered
chapter or within a regular chapter or appendix to produce an
unnumbered section.
@appendixsec
@appendixsection
@appendixsection
is a longer spelling of the
@appendixsec
command; the two are synonymous.
Conventionally, the @appendixsec
or @appendixsection
command is used only within appendices.
@heading
You may use the @heading
command (almost) anywhere for a
section-style heading that will not appear in the table of contents.
The @heading
-series commands can appear inside most
environments, for example, though pathological and useless locations
such as inside @titlepage
, as an argument to another command,
etc., are not allowed.
Next: @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading
, Previous: @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@subsection
: Subsections Below SectionsSubsections are to sections as sections are to chapters;
see @section
. In Info and plain text, subsection titles
are underlined with ‘-’. For example,
@subsection This is a subsection
might produce
1.2.3 This is a subsection --------------------------
Subsection titles are listed in the table of contents.
The TeX, HTML, Docbook, and XML output is all analogous to the
chapter-level output, just “two levels down”;
see @chapter
.
Next: @subsubsection
, Previous: @subsection
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@subsection
-like CommandsThe @unnumberedsubsec
, @appendixsubsec
, and
@subheading
commands are, respectively, the unnumbered,
appendix-like, and heading-like equivalents of the @subsection
command. (See @subsection
.)
@unnumberedsubsec
and @appendixsubsec
do not need to
be used in ordinary circumstances, because @subsection
may
also be used within sections of @unnumbered
and
@appendix
chapters (see @section
).
An @subheading
command produces a heading like that of a
subsection except that it is not numbered and does not appear in the
table of contents. Similarly, an @unnumberedsubsec
command
produces an unnumbered heading like that of a subsection and an
@appendixsubsec
command produces a subsection-like heading
labeled with a letter and numbers; both of these commands produce
headings that appear in the table of contents. In Info and plain
text, the @subsection
-like commands generate a title
underlined with hyphens.
Next: @part
, Previous: @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@subsection
and Other Subsub CommandsThe fourth and lowest level sectioning commands in Texinfo are the ‘subsub’ commands. They are:
@subsubsection
Subsubsections are to subsections as subsections are to sections.
(See @subsection
.) Subsubsection titles appear in the
table of contents.
@unnumberedsubsubsec
Unnumbered subsubsection titles appear in the table of contents, but lack numbers. Otherwise, unnumbered subsubsections are the same as subsubsections.
@appendixsubsubsec
Conventionally, appendix commands are used only for appendices and are lettered and numbered appropriately. They also appear in the table of contents.
@subsubheading
The @subsubheading
command may be used anywhere that you want
a small heading that will not appear in the table of contents.
As with subsections, @unnumberedsubsubsec
and
@appendixsubsubsec
do not need to be used in ordinary
circumstances, because @subsubsection
may also be used within
subsections of @unnumbered
and @appendix
chapters
(see @section
).
In Info, ‘subsub’ titles are underlined with periods. For example,
@subsubsection This is a subsubsection
might produce
1.2.3.4 This is a subsubsection ...............................
The TeX, HTML, Docbook, and XML output is all analogous to the
chapter-level output, just “three levels down”; see @chapter
.
Next: Raise/lower sections, Previous: @subsubsection
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@part
: Groups of ChaptersThe final sectioning command is @part
, to mark a part of
a manual, that is, a group of chapters or (rarely) appendices. This
behaves quite differently from the other sectioning commands, to fit
with the way such “parts” are conventionally used in books.
No @node
command is associated with @part
. Just write
the command on a line by itself, including the part title, at the
place in the document you want to mark off as starting that part. For
example:
@part Part I:@* The beginning
As can be inferred from this example, no automatic numbering or
labeling of the @part
text is done. The text is taken as-is.
Because parts are not associated with nodes, no general text can
follow the @part
line. To produce the intended output, it
must be followed by a chapter-level command (including its node).
Thus, to continue the example:
@part Part I:@* The beginning @node Introduction @chapter Introduction ...
In the TeX output, the @part
text is included in both the
normal and short tables of contents (see Contents), without a page
number (since that is the normal convention). In addition, a “part
page” is output in the body of the document, with just the
@part
text. In the example above, the @*
causes a
line break on the part page (but is replaced with a space in the
tables of contents). This part page is always forced to be on an odd
(right-hand) page, regardless of the chapter pagination
(see @setchapternewpage
).
In the HTML output, the @part
text is similarly included in
the tables of contents, and a heading is included in the main document
text, as part of the following chapter or appendix node.
In the XML and Docbook output, the <part>
element includes all
the following chapters, up to the next <part>
. A <part>
containing chapters is also closed at an appendix.
In the Info and plain text output, @part
has no effect.
@part
is ignored when raising or lowering sections (see next
section). That is, it is never lowered and nothing can be raised to it.
Previous: @part
, Up: Chapter Structuring [Contents][Index]
@raisesections
and @lowersections
The @raisesections
and @lowersections
commands
implicitly raise and lower the hierarchical level of following
chapters, sections and the other sectioning commands (excluding parts).
That is, the @raisesections
command changes sections to
chapters, subsections to sections, and so on. Conversely, the
@lowersections
command changes chapters to sections, sections
to subsections, and so on. Thus, a @lowersections
command
cancels a @raisesections
command, and vice versa.
You can use @lowersections
to include text written as an outer
or standalone Texinfo file in another Texinfo file as an inner,
included file (see Include Files). Typical usage looks like this:
@lowersections @include somefile.texi @raisesections
(Without the @raisesections
, all the subsequent
sections in the main file would also be lowered.)
If the included file being lowered has a @top
node, you’ll
need to conditionalize its inclusion with a flag (see @set @value
).
As a practical matter, you generally only want to raise or lower large
chunks, usually in external files as shown above. The final result has
to have menus that take the raising and lowering into account, so you
cannot just arbitrarily sprinkle @raisesections
and
@lowersections
commands throughout the document.
Repeated use of the commands continues to raise or lower the
hierarchical level a step at a time. An attempt to raise above
‘chapter’ reproduces chapter commands; an attempt to lower below
‘subsubsection’ reproduces subsubsection commands. Also, lowered
subsubsections and raised chapters will not work with
makeinfo
’s feature of implicitly determining node pointers,
since the menu structure cannot be represented correctly.
Write each @raisesections
and @lowersections
command
on a line of its own.
Next: Marking Text, Previous: Chapter Structuring, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Cross-references are used to refer the reader to other parts of the same or different Texinfo files.
• References: | What cross-references are for. | |
• Cross Reference Commands: | A summary of the different commands. | |
• Cross Reference Parts: | A cross-reference has several parts. | |
• @xref : | Begin a reference with ‘See’ … | |
• Referring to a Manual as a Whole: | Refer to an entire manual. | |
• @ref : | A reference for the last part of a sentence. | |
• @pxref : | How to write a parenthetical cross-reference. | |
• @anchor : | Defining arbitrary cross-reference targets | |
• @inforef : | How to refer to an Info-only file. | |
• @url : | How to refer to a uniform resource locator. | |
• @cite : | How to refer to books not in the Info system. |
Next: Cross Reference Commands, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
Often, but not always, a printed document should be designed so that it can be read sequentially. People tire of flipping back and forth to find information that should be presented to them as they need it.
However, in any document, some information will be too detailed for the current context, or incidental to it; use cross-references to provide access to such information. Also, an online help system or a reference manual is not like a novel; few read such documents in sequence from beginning to end. Instead, people look up what they need. For this reason, such creations should contain many cross references to help readers find other information that they may not have read.
In a printed manual, a cross-reference results in a page reference, unless it is to another manual altogether, in which case the cross-reference names that manual. In Info, a cross-reference results in an entry that you can follow using the Info ‘f’ command. (See Following cross-references in Info.) In HTML, a cross-reference results in an hyperlink.
The various cross-reference commands use nodes (or anchors,
see @anchor
) to define cross-reference locations.
TeX needs nodes to define cross-reference locations. When TeX
generates a DVI file, it records each node’s page number and uses the
page numbers in making references. Thus, even if you are writing a
manual that will only be printed, and not used online, you must
nonetheless write @node
lines in order to name the places to
which you make cross-references.
Next: Cross Reference Parts, Previous: References, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
There are three different cross-reference commands:
@xref
Used to start a sentence in the printed manual and in HTML with ‘See …’ or an Info cross-reference saying ‘*Note name: node.’.
@ref
Used within or, more often, at the end of a sentence; produces just
the reference in the printed manual and in HTML without the preceding
‘See’ (same as @xref
for Info).
@pxref
Used within parentheses, at the end of a sentence, or otherwise before punctuation, to make a reference. Its output starts with a lowercase ‘see’ in the printed manual and in HTML, and a lowercase ‘*note’ in Info. (‘p’ is for ‘parenthesis’.)
Additionally, there are commands to produce references to documents
outside the Texinfo system. The @cite
command is used
to make references to books and manuals. @url
produces
a URL, for example a reference to a page on the World
Wide Web. @inforef
is used to make a reference to an Info
file for which there is no printed manual.
Next: @xref
, Previous: Cross Reference Commands, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
A cross-reference command requires only one argument, which is the name of the node to which it refers. Here is a simple example:
@xref{Node name}.
In Info output, this produces
*Note Node name::.
In a printed manual, the output is
See Section nnn [Node name], page ppp.
A cross-reference command may contain up to four additional arguments. By using these arguments, you can provide a cross-reference name, a topic description or section title for the printed output, the name of a different manual file, and the name of a different printed manual. To refer to another manual as a whole, the manual file and/or the name of the printed manual are the only required arguments (see Referring to a Manual as a Whole).
Here is an example of a full five-part cross-reference:
@xref{Node name, Online Label, Printed Label, info-file-name, A Printed Manual}, for details.
which produces
*Note Online Label: (info-file-name)Node name, for details.
in Info and
See section “Printed Label” in A Printed Manual, for details.
in a printed book.
The five possible arguments for a cross-reference are:
@node
to define the node (see Writing a Node), or
@anchor
(see @anchor
).
Write a node name in a cross-reference in exactly the same way as in
the @node
line, including the same capitalization; otherwise, the
formatters may not find the reference.
The template for a full five argument cross-reference looks like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label, info-file-name, printed-manual-title}
Whitespace before and after the commas separating these arguments is
ignored. To include a comma in one of the arguments, use
@comma{}
(see Inserting a Comma).
When processing with TeX, a comma is automatically inserted after the page number for cross-references to within the same manual, unless the closing brace of the argument is followed by non-whitespace (such as a comma or period). This gives you the choice of whether to have a comma there in Info or HTML output. For example,
@xref{Another Section} for more information
produces ‘See Another Section, page ppp, for more information’ in the printed output, and ‘*Note Another Section:: for more information’ in the Info output.
If an unwanted comma is added, follow the argument with a command such as ‘@:’. For example, ‘@xref{Hurricanes}@: --- for the details’ produces
See Hurricanes, page ppp — for the details
instead of ‘See Hurricanes, page ppp, — for the details’.
Cross-references with one, two, three, four, and five arguments are
described separately following the description of @xref
.
makeinfo
warns when the text of a cross-reference (and node
names and menu items) contains a problematic construct that will
interfere with its parsing in Info. If you don’t want to see the
warnings, you can set the customization variable
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
to ‘0’ (see Other Customization Variables).
Next: Referring to a Manual as a Whole, Previous: Cross Reference Parts, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@xref
The @xref
command generates a cross-reference for the
beginning of a sentence.
• One Argument: | @xref with one argument.
| |
• Two Arguments: | @xref with two arguments.
| |
• Three Arguments: | @xref with three arguments.
| |
• Four and Five Arguments: | @xref with four and five arguments.
|
Next: Two Arguments, Up: @xref
[Contents][Index]
@xref
with One ArgumentThe simplest form of @xref
takes one argument, the name of
another node in the same Texinfo file.
For example,
@xref{Tropical Storms}.
produces
*Note Tropical Storms::.
in Info and
See Section 3.1 [Tropical Storms], page 24.
in a printed manual.
Next: Three Arguments, Previous: One Argument, Up: @xref
[Contents][Index]
@xref
with Two ArgumentsWith two arguments, the second is used as a label for the online output.
The template is like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning}.
produces:
*Note Lightning: Electrical Effects.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Electrical Effects], page 57.
in a printed manual, where the node name is printed.
The second argument to cross-references must observe some of the restrictions for node names (see Node Line Requirements). The most common issue is that colons cannot be used, since that interferes with the parsing of the Info file.
Next: Four and Five Arguments, Previous: Two Arguments, Up: @xref
[Contents][Index]
@xref
with Three ArgumentsA third argument replaces the node name in the TeX output. The third argument should be the name of the section in the printed output, or else state the topic discussed by that section.
The template is like this:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning, Thunder and Lightning}, for details.
produces
*Note Lightning: Electrical Effects, for details.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Thunder and Lightning], page 57, for details.
in a printed manual.
If a third argument is given and the second one is empty, then the third argument serves for both. (Note how two commas, side by side, mark the empty second argument.)
@xref{Electrical Effects, , Thunder and Lightning}, for details.
produces
*Note Thunder and Lightning: Electrical Effects, for details.
in Info and
See Section 5.2 [Thunder and Lightning], page 57, for details.
in a printed manual.
The third argument to cross-references must observe some of the restrictions for node names (see Node Line Requirements). The most common issue is that colons cannot be used, since that interferes with the parsing of the Info file.
As a practical matter, it is often best to write cross-references with just the first argument if the node name and the section title are the same (or nearly so), and with the first and third arguments only if the node name and title are different.
Texinfo offers a setting to use the section title instead of node names by default in cross-references (an explicitly specified third argument still takes precedence):
@xrefautomaticsectiontitle on
Typically this line would be given near the beginning of the document
and used for the whole manual. But you can turn it off if you want
(@xrefautomaticsectiontitle off
), for example, if you’re
including some other sub-document that doesn’t have suitable section
names.
Previous: Three Arguments, Up: @xref
[Contents][Index]
@xref
with Four and Five ArgumentsIn a cross-reference, a fourth argument specifies the name of another Info file, different from the file in which the reference appears, and a fifth argument specifies its title as a printed manual.
The full template is:
@xref{node-name, online-label, printed-label, info-file-name, printed-manual-title}.
For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, Lightning, Thunder and Lightning, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces this output in Info:
*Note Lightning: (weather)Electrical Effects.
As you can see, the name of the Info file is enclosed in parentheses and precedes the name of the node.
In a printed manual, the reference looks like this:
See section “Thunder and Lightning” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
The title of the printed manual is typeset like @cite
; and the
reference lacks a page number since TeX cannot know to which page a
reference refers when that reference is to another manual.
Next case: often, you will leave out the second argument when you use
the long version of @xref
. In this case, the third argument,
the topic description, will be used as the cross-reference name in
Info. For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects, , Thunder and Lightning, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces
*Note Thunder and Lightning: (weather)Electrical Effects.
in Info and
See section “Thunder and Lightning” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
in a printed manual.
Next case: If the node name and the section title are the same in the other manual, you may also leave out the section title. In this case, the node name is used in both instances. For example,
@xref{Electrical Effects,,, weather, An Introduction to Meteorology}.
produces
*Note (weather)Electrical Effects::.
in Info and
See section “Electrical Effects” in An Introduction to Meteorology.
in a printed manual.
A very unusual case: you may want to refer to another manual file that is within a single printed manual—when multiple Texinfo files are incorporated into the same TeX run but can create separate Info or HTML output files. In this case, you need to specify only the fourth argument, and not the fifth.
Finally, it’s also allowed to leave out all the arguments except the fourth and fifth, to refer to another manual as a whole. See the next section.
Next: @ref
, Previous: @xref
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
Ordinarily, you must always name a node in a cross-reference. However, it’s not unusual to want to refer to another manual as a whole, rather than a particular section within it. In this case, giving any section name is an unnecessary distraction.
So, with cross-references to other manuals (see Four and Five Arguments), if the first argument is either ‘Top’ (capitalized just that way) or omitted entirely, and the third argument is omitted, the printed output includes no node or section name. (The Info output includes ‘Top’ if it was given.) For example,
@xref{Top,,, make, The GNU Make Manual}.
produces
*Note (make)Top::.
and
See The GNU Make Manual.
Info readers will go to the Top node of the manual whether or not the ‘Top’ node is explicitly specified.
It’s also possible (and is historical practice) to refer to a whole
manual by specifying the ‘Top’ node and an appropriate entry for the
third argument to the @xref
command. Using this idiom, to
make a cross-reference to The GNU Make Manual, you would write:
@xref{Top,, Overview, make, The GNU Make Manual}.
which produces
*Note Overview: (make)Top.
in Info and
See section “Overview” in The GNU Make Manual.
in a printed manual.
In this example, ‘Top’ is the name of the first node, and ‘Overview’ is the name of the first section of the manual. There is no widely-used convention for naming the first section in a printed manual, this is just what the Make manual happens to use. This arbitrariness of the first name is a principal reason why omitting the third argument in whole-manual cross-references is preferable.
Next: @pxref
, Previous: Referring to a Manual as a Whole, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@ref
@ref
is nearly the same as @xref
except that it does
not generate a ‘See’ in the printed output, just the reference itself.
This makes it useful as the last part of a sentence.
For example,
For more information, @pxref{This}, and @ref{That}.
produces in Info:
For more information, *note This::, and *note That::.
and in printed output:
For more information, see Section 1.1 [This], page 1, and Section 1.2 [That], page 2.
The @ref
command can tempt writers to express themselves in a
manner that is suitable for a printed manual but looks awkward in the
Info format. Bear in mind that your audience could be using both the
printed and the Info format. For example:
Sea surges are described in @ref{Hurricanes}.
looks ok in the printed output:
Sea surges are described in Section 6.7 [Hurricanes], page 72.
but is awkward to read in Info, “note” being a verb:
Sea surges are described in *note Hurricanes::.
Next: @anchor
, Previous: @ref
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@pxref
The parenthetical reference command, @pxref
, is nearly the
same as @xref
, but it is best used at the end of a sentence or
before a closing parenthesis. The command differs from @xref
in that TeX typesets the reference for the printed manual with a
lowercase ‘see’ rather than an uppercase ‘See’.
With one argument, a parenthetical cross-reference looks like this:
… storms cause flooding (@pxref{Hurricanes}) …
which produces
… storms cause flooding (*note Hurricanes::) …
in Info and
… storms cause flooding (see Section 6.7 [Hurricanes], page 72) …
in a printed manual.
With two arguments, a parenthetical cross-reference has this template:
… (@pxref{node-name, cross-reference-name}) …
which produces
… (*note cross-reference-name: node-name.) …
in Info and
… (see Section nnn [node-name], page ppp) …
in a printed manual.
@pxref
can be used with up to five arguments, just like
@xref
(see @xref
).
In past versions of Texinfo, it was not allowed to write punctuation
after a @pxref
, so it could be used only before a
right parenthesis. This is no longer the case, so now it can be used
(for example) at the end of a sentence, where a lowercase “see”
works best. For instance:
… For more information, @pxref{More}.
which outputs (in Info):
… For more information, *note More::.
As a matter of style, @pxref
is best used at the ends of
sentences. Although it technically works in the middle of a sentence,
that location breaks up the flow of reading.
Next: @inforef
, Previous: @pxref
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@anchor
: Defining Arbitrary Cross-reference TargetsAn anchor is a position in your document, labelled so that
cross-references can refer to it, just as they can to nodes. You
create an anchor with the @anchor
command, and give the label
as a normal brace-delimited argument. For example:
This marks the @anchor{x-spot}spot. … @xref{x-spot,,the spot}.
produces:
This marks the spot. … See [the spot], page 1.
As you can see, the @anchor
command itself produces no output.
This example defines an anchor ‘x-spot’ just before the word ‘spot’.
You can refer to it later with an @xref
or other cross
reference command, as shown (see Cross References).
It is best to put @anchor
commands just before the position you
wish to refer to; that way, the reader’s eye is led on to the correct
text when they jump to the anchor. You can put the @anchor
command on a line by itself if that helps readability of the source.
Whitespace (including newlines) is ignored after @anchor
.
Anchor names and node names may not conflict. Anchors and nodes are
given similar treatment in some ways; for example, the
goto-node
command takes either an anchor name or a node name as
an argument. (See Go to node in Info.)
Also like node names, anchor names cannot include some characters (see Node Line Requirements).
Because of this duality, when you delete or rename a node, it is
usually a good idea to define an @anchor
with the old name.
That way, any links to the old node, whether from other Texinfo
manuals or general web pages, keep working. You can also do this with
the RENAMED_NODES_FILE feature of makeinfo
(see HTML Xref Link Preservation). Both methods keep links
on the web working; the only substantive difference is that defining
anchors also makes the old node names available when reading the
document in Info.
Next: @url
, Previous: @anchor
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@inforef
: Cross-references to Info-only Material@inforef
is used for making cross-references to Info
documents—even from a printed manual. This might be because you
want to refer to conditional @ifinfo
text
(see Conditionals), or because printed output is not available
(perhaps because there is no Texinfo source), among other
possibilities.
The command takes either two or three arguments, in the following order:
The template is:
@inforef{node-name, cross-reference-name, info-file-name}
For example,
@inforef{Advanced, Advanced Info commands, info}, for more information.
produces (in Info):
*Note Advanced Info commands: (info)Advanced, for more information.
and (in the printed output):
See Info file info, node ‘Advanced’, for more information.
(This particular example is not realistic, since the Info manual is written in Texinfo, so all formats are available. In fact, we don’t know of any extant Info-only manuals.)
The converse of @inforef
is @cite
, which is used to
refer to printed works for which no Info form exists.
See @cite
.
Next: @cite
, Previous: @inforef
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@url
, @uref{url[, text][, replacement]}
@uref
produces a reference to a uniform resource locator
(url). It takes one mandatory argument, the url, and two optional
arguments which control the text that is displayed. In HTML and PDF
output, @uref
produces a link you can follow. (To merely
indicate a url without creating a link people can follow, use
@indicateurl
, see @indicateurl
.)
@url
is a synonym for @uref
.
(Originally, @url
had the meaning of @indicateurl
, but
in practice it was almost always misused. So we’ve changed the
meaning.)
The second argument, if specified, is the text to display (the default is the url itself); in Info, DVI, and PDF output, but not in HTML output, the url is output in addition to this text.
The third argument, if specified, is the text to display, but in this case the url is not output in any format. This is useful when the text is already sufficiently referential, as in a man page. Also, if the third argument is given, the second argument is ignored.
• @url Examples: | Examples of using all the forms of @url .
| |
• URL Line Breaking: | How lines are broken within @url text.
| |
• @url PDF Output Format: | A special option to hide links in PDF output. | |
• PDF Colors: | Colorizing urls and other links in PDF output. |
Next: URL Line Breaking, Up: @url
[Contents][Index]
@url
ExamplesFirst, here is an example of the simplest form of @url
, with
just one argument. The given url is both the target and the visible
text of the link:
The official GNU ftp site is @uref{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu}.
produces:
The official GNU ftp site is http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu.
@url
Here is an example of the two-argument form:
The official @uref{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu, GNU ftp site} holds programs and texts.
which produces:
The official GNU ftp site holds programs and texts.
that is, the Info (and TeX, etc.) output is this:
The official GNU ftp site (http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu) holds programs and texts.
while the HTML output is this:
The official <a href="http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu">GNU ftp site</a> holds programs and texts.
@url
Finally, an example of the three-argument form:
The @uref{/man.cgi/1/ls,,ls} program …
which, except for HTML, produces:
The ls program …
but with HTML:
The <a href="/man.cgi/1/ls">ls</a> program …
By the way, some people prefer to display urls in the unambiguous format:
<URL:http://host/path>
You can use this form in the input file if you wish. We feel it’s not necessary to include the ‘<URL:’ and ‘>’ in the output, since to be useful any software that tries to detect urls in text already has to detect them without the ‘<URL:’.
Next: @url
PDF Output Format, Previous: @url
Examples, Up: @url
[Contents][Index]
TeX allows line breaking within urls at only a few characters (which are special in urls): ‘&’, ‘.’, ‘#’, ‘?’, and ‘/’ (but not between two ‘/’ characters). A tiny amount of stretchable space is also inserted around these characters to help with line breaking.
For HTML output, modern browsers will also do line breaking within
displayed urls. If you need to allow breaks at other characters you
can insert @/
as needed (see Line Breaks).
By default, in TeX any such breaks at special characters will occur
after the character. Some people prefer such breaks to happen before
the special character. This can be controlled with the
@urefbreakstyle
command (this command has effect only in
TeX):
@urefbreakstyle how
where the argument how is one of these words:
(the default) Potentially break after the special characters.
Potentially break before the special characters.
Do not consider breaking at the special characters at all; any potential breaks must be manually inserted.
Next: PDF Colors, Previous: URL Line Breaking, Up: @url
[Contents][Index]
@url
PDF Output FormatIf the ultimate purpose of a PDF is only to be viewed online, perhaps
similar to HTML in some inchoate way, you may not want the urls to be
included in the visible text (just as urls are not visible to readers
of web pages). Texinfo provides a PDF-specific option for this, which
must be used inside @tex
:
@tex \global\urefurlonlylinktrue @end tex
The result is that @url{http://www.gnu.org, GNU}
has the
visible output of just ‘GNU’, with a link target of
http://www.gnu.org. Ordinarily, the visible output would
include both the label and the url: ‘GNU (http://www.gnu.org)’.
This option only has effect when the PDF output is produced with the
pdfTeX program, not with other ways of getting from Texinfo to PDF
(e.g., TeX to DVI to PDF). Consequently, it is ok to specify this
option unconditionally within @tex
, as shown above. It is
ignored when DVI is being produced.
Previous: @url
PDF Output Format, Up: @url
[Contents][Index]
By default, urls and cross-reference links are printed in black in PDF
output. Very occasionally, however, you may want to highlight such
“live” links with a different color, as is commonly done on web
pages. Texinfo provides a PDF-specific option for specifying these
colors, which must be used inside @tex
:
@tex \global\def\linkcolor{1 0 0} % red \global\def\urlcolor{0 1 0} % green @end tex
\urlcolor
changes the color of @url
output (both the
actual url and any textual label), while \linkcolor
changes the
color for cross-references to nodes, etc. They are independent.
The three given values must be numbers between 0 and 1, specifying the amount of red, green, and blue respectively.
These definitions only have an effect when the PDF output is produced
with the pdfTeX program, not with other ways of getting from
Texinfo to PDF (e.g., TeX to DVI to PDF). Consequently, it is ok
to specify this option unconditionally within @tex
, as shown
above. It is ignored when DVI is being produced.
We do not recommend colorizing just for fun; unless you have a specific reason to use colors, best to skip it.
Previous: @url
, Up: Cross References [Contents][Index]
@cite
{reference}Use the @cite
command for the name of a book that lacks a
companion Info file. The command produces italics in the printed
manual, and quotation marks in the Info file.
If a book is written in Texinfo, it is better to use a cross-reference
command since a reader can easily follow such a reference in Info.
See @xref
.
Next: Quotations and Examples, Previous: Cross References, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
In Texinfo, you can mark words and phrases in a variety of ways. The Texinfo formatters use this information to determine how to highlight the text. You can specify, for example, whether a word or phrase is a defining occurrence, a metasyntactic variable, or a symbol used in a program. Also, you can emphasize text, in several different ways.
• Indicating: | How to indicate definitions, files, etc. | |
• Emphasis: | How to emphasize text. |
Next: Emphasis, Up: Marking Text [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has commands for indicating just what kind of object a piece
of text refers to. For example, email addresses are marked by
@email
; that way, the result can be a live link to send email
when the output format supports it. If the email address was simply
marked as “print in a typewriter font”, that would not be possible.
• Useful Highlighting: | Highlighting provides useful information. | |
• @code : | Indicating program code. | |
• @kbd : | Showing keyboard input. | |
• @key : | Specifying keys. | |
• @samp : | Indicating a literal sequence of characters. | |
• @verb : | Indicating a verbatim sequence of characters. | |
• @var : | Indicating metasyntactic variables. | |
• @env : | Indicating environment variables. | |
• @file : | Indicating file names. | |
• @command : | Indicating command names. | |
• @option : | Indicating option names. | |
• @dfn : | Specifying definitions. | |
• @abbr : | Indicating abbreviations. | |
• @acronym : | Indicating acronyms. | |
• @indicateurl : | Indicating an example url. | |
• @email : | Indicating an electronic mail address. |
Next: @code
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
The commands serve a variety of purposes:
@code{sample-code}
Indicate text that is a literal example of a piece of a program.
See @code
.
@kbd{keyboard-characters}
Indicate keyboard input. See @kbd
.
@key{key-name}
Indicate the conventional name for a key on a keyboard.
See @key
.
@samp{text}
Indicate text that is a literal example of a sequence of characters.
See @samp
.
@verb{text}
Write a verbatim sequence of characters.
See @verb
.
@var{metasyntactic-variable}
Indicate a metasyntactic variable. See @var
.
@env{environment-variable}
Indicate an environment variable. See @env
.
@file{file-name}
Indicate the name of a file. See @file
.
@command{command-name}
Indicate the name of a command.
See @command
.
@option{option}
Indicate a command-line option.
See @option
.
@dfn{term}
Indicate the introductory or defining use of a term.
See @dfn
.
@cite{reference}
Indicate the name of a book. See @cite
.
@abbr{abbreviation}
Indicate an abbreviation, such as ‘Comput.’.
@acronym{acronym}
Indicate an acronym. See @acronym
.
@indicateurl{uniform-resource-locator}
Indicate an example (that is, nonfunctional) uniform resource locator.
See @indicateurl
. (Use @url
(see @url
) for
live urls.)
@email{email-address[, displayed-text]}
Indicate an electronic mail address. See @email
.
Next: @kbd
, Previous: Useful Highlighting, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@code
{sample-code}Use the @code
command to indicate text that is a piece of a
program and which consists of entire syntactic tokens. Enclose the
text in braces.
Thus, you should use @code
for an expression in a program, for
the name of a variable or function used in a program, or for a
keyword in a programming language.
Use @code
for command names in languages that resemble
programming languages, such as Texinfo. For example, @code
and
@samp
are produced by writing ‘@code{@@code}’ and
‘@code{@@samp}’ in the Texinfo source, respectively.
It is incorrect to alter the case of a word inside a @code
command when it appears at the beginning of a sentence. Most computer
languages are case sensitive. In C, for example, Printf
is
different from the identifier printf
, and most likely is a
misspelling of it. Even in languages which are not case sensitive, it
is confusing to a human reader to see identifiers spelled in different
ways. Pick one spelling and always use that. If you do not want to
start a sentence with a command name written all in lowercase, you
should rearrange the sentence.
In the Info output, @code
results in single quotation marks
around the text. In other formats, @code
argument is typeset
in a typewriter (monospace) font. For example,
The function returns @code{nil}.
produces this:
The function returns
nil
.
Here are some cases for which it is preferable not to use @code
:
ls
(use @command
).
TEXINPUTS
(use @env
).
@option
).
@samp
rather than @code
. In this case, the rule is to
choose the more pleasing format.
goto-char
Emacs Lisp function, you should use
@samp
.
@code
when you are explaining what letters
or printable symbols can be used in the names of functions. (Use
@samp
.) Also, you should not use @code
to mark text
that is considered input to programs unless the input is written in a
language that is like a programming language. For example, you should
not use @code
for the keystroke commands of GNU Emacs (use
@kbd
instead) although you may use @code
for the names
of the Emacs Lisp functions that the keystroke commands invoke.
By default, TeX will consider breaking lines at ‘-’ and
‘_’ characters within @code
and related commands. This
can be controlled with @allowcodebreaks
(see @allowcodebreaks
). The HTML output attempts to
respect this for ‘-’, but ultimately it is up to the browser’s
behavior. For Info, it seems better never to make such breaks.
For Info, the quotes are omitted in the output of the @code
command and related commands (e.g., @kbd
, @command
),
in typewriter-like contexts such as the @example
environment
(see @example
) and @code
itself, etc.
To control which quoting characters are implicitly inserted by Texinfo
processors in the output of ‘@code’, etc., see the
OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
and CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
customization
variables (see Other Customization Variables). This is separate
from how actual quotation characters in the input document are handled
(see Inserting Quote Characters).
Next: @key
, Previous: @code
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@kbd
{keyboard-characters}Use the @kbd
command for characters of input to be typed by
users. For example, to refer to the characters M-a, write:
@kbd{M-a}
and to refer to the characters M-x shell, write:
@kbd{M-x shell}
By default, the @kbd
command produces a different font
(slanted typewriter instead of normal typewriter),
so users can distinguish the characters that they are supposed
to type from those that the computer outputs.
Since the usage of @kbd
varies from manual to manual, you can
control the font switching with the @kbdinputstyle
command.
This command has no effect on Info output. Write this command at the
beginning of a line with a single word as an argument, one of the
following:
Always use the same font for @kbd
as @code
.
Use the distinguishing font for @kbd
only in @example
and similar environments.
(the default) Always use the distinguishing font for @kbd
.
You can embed another @-command inside the braces of a @kbd
command. Here, for example, is the way to describe a command that
would be described more verbosely as “press the ‘r’ key and then
press the RETURN key”:
@kbd{r @key{RET}}
This produces: r RET. (The present manual uses the
default for @kbdinputstyle
.)
You also use the @kbd
command if you are spelling out the letters
you type; for example:
To give the @code{logout} command, type the characters @kbd{l o g o u t @key{RET}}.
This produces:
To give the
logout
command, type the characters l o g o u t RET.
(Also, this example shows that you can add spaces for clarity. If you explicitly want to mention a space character as one of the characters of input, write @key{SPC} for it.)
Next: @samp
, Previous: @kbd
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@key
{key-name}Use the @key
command for the conventional name for a key on a
keyboard, as in:
@key{RET}
You can use the @key
command within the argument of an
@kbd
command when the sequence of characters to be typed
includes one or more keys that are described by name.
For example, to produce C-x ESC and M-TAB you would type:
@kbd{C-x @key{ESC}} @kbd{M-@key{TAB}}
Here is a list of the recommended names for keys:
- SPC
Space
- RET
Return
- LFD
Linefeed (however, since most keyboards nowadays do not have a Linefeed key, it might be better to call this character C-j)
- TAB
Tab
- BS
Backspace
- ESC
Escape
- DELETE
Delete
- SHIFT
Shift
- CTRL
Control
- META
Meta
There are subtleties to handling words like ‘meta’ or ‘ctrl’ that are
names of modifier keys. When mentioning a character in which the
modifier key is used, such as Meta-a, use the @kbd
command
alone; do not use the @key
command; but when you are referring
to the modifier key in isolation, use the @key
command. For
example, write ‘@kbd{Meta-a}’ to produce Meta-a and
‘@key{META}’ to produce META.
As a convention in GNU manuals, @key
should not be used in
index entries.
Next: @verb
, Previous: @key
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@samp
{text}Use the @samp
command to indicate text that is a literal example
or ‘sample’ of a sequence of characters in a file, string, pattern, etc.
Enclose the text in braces. The argument appears within single
quotation marks in both the Info file and the printed manual; in
addition, it is printed in a fixed-width font.
To match @samp{foo} at the end of the line, use the regexp @samp{foo$}.
produces
To match ‘foo’ at the end of the line, use the regexp ‘foo$’.
Any time you are referring to single characters, you should use
@samp
unless @kbd
or @key
is more appropriate.
Also, you may use @samp
for entire statements in C and for entire
shell commands—in this case, @samp
often looks better than
@code
. Basically, @samp
is a catchall for whatever is
not covered by @code
, @kbd
, @key
,
@command
, etc.
Only include punctuation marks within braces if they are part of the string you are specifying. Write punctuation marks outside the braces if those punctuation marks are part of the English text that surrounds the string. In the following sentence, for example, the commas and period are outside of the braces:
In English, the vowels are @samp{a}, @samp{e}, @samp{i}, @samp{o}, @samp{u}, and sometimes @samp{y}.
This produces:
In English, the vowels are ‘a’, ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘o’, ‘u’, and sometimes ‘y’.
Next: @var
, Previous: @samp
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@verb
{chartextchar}Use the @verb
command to print a verbatim sequence of
characters.
Like LaTeX’s \verb
command, the verbatim text can be quoted using
any unique delimiter character. Enclose the verbatim text, including the
delimiters, in braces. Text is printed in a fixed-width font:
How many @verb{|@|}-escapes does one need to print this @verb{.@a @b.@c.} string or @verb{+@'e?`{}!`\+} this?
produces
How many @-escapes does one need to print this @a @b.@c string or @'e?`{}!`\ this?
This is in contrast to @samp
(see the previous section),
@code
, and similar commands; in those cases, the argument is
normal Texinfo text, where the three characters @{}
are
special, as usual. With @verb
, nothing is special except the
delimiter character you choose.
The delimiter character itself may appear inside the verbatim text, as shown above. As another example, ‘@verb{...}’ prints a single (fixed-width) period.
It is not reliable to use @verb
inside other Texinfo
constructs. In particular, it does not work to use @verb
in
anything related to cross-referencing, such as section titles or
figure captions.
Next: @env
, Previous: @verb
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@var
{metasyntactic-variable}Use the @var
command to indicate metasyntactic variables. A
metasyntactic variable is something that stands for another
piece of text. For example, you should use a metasyntactic variable
in the documentation of a function to describe the arguments that are
passed to that function.
Do not use @var
for the names of normal variables in computer
programs. These are specific names, so @code
is correct for
them (@code
). For example, the Emacs Lisp variable
texinfo-tex-command
is not a metasyntactic variable; it is
properly formatted using @code
.
Do not use @var
for environment variables either; @env
is correct for them (see the next section).
The effect of @var
in the Info file is to change the case of
the argument to all uppercase. In the printed manual and HTML
output, the argument is output in slanted type.
For example,
To delete file @var{filename}, type @samp{rm @var{filename}}.
produces
To delete file filename, type ‘rm filename’.
(Note that @var
may appear inside @code
,
@samp
, @file
, etc.)
Write a metasyntactic variable all in lowercase without spaces, and use hyphens to make it more readable. Thus, the Texinfo source for the illustration of how to begin a Texinfo manual looks like this:
\input texinfo @@settitle @var{name-of-manual}
This produces:
\input texinfo @settitle name-of-manual
In some documentation styles, metasyntactic variables are shown with angle brackets, for example:
…, type rm <filename>
However, that is not the style that Texinfo uses.
Next: @file
, Previous: @var
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@env
{environment-variable}Use the @env
command to indicate environment variables, as
used by many operating systems, including GNU. Do not use it for
metasyntactic variables; use @var
for those (see the
previous section).
@env
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The @env{PATH} environment variable …
produces
The
PATH
environment variable …
Next: @command
, Previous: @env
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@file
{file-name}Use the @file
command to indicate text that is the name of a
file, buffer, or directory, or is the name of a node in Info. You can
also use the command for file name suffixes. Do not use @file
for symbols in a programming language; use @code
.
@file
is equivalent to code
in its effects. For
example,
The @file{.el} files are in the @file{/usr/local/emacs/lisp} directory.
produces
The .el files are in the /usr/local/emacs/lisp directory.
Next: @option
, Previous: @file
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@command
{command-name}Use the @command
command to indicate command names, such as
ls
or cc
.
@command
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The command @command{ls} lists directory contents.
produces
The command
ls
lists directory contents.
You should write the name of a program in the ordinary text font, rather
than using @command
, if you regard it as a new English word,
such as ‘Emacs’ or ‘Bison’.
When writing an entire shell command invocation, as in ‘ls -l’,
you should use either @samp
or @code
at your discretion.
Next: @dfn
, Previous: @command
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@option
{option-name}Use the @option
command to indicate a command-line option; for
example, -l or --version or
--output=filename.
@option
is equivalent to @code
in its effects.
For example:
The option @option{-l} produces a long listing.
produces
The option -l produces a long listing.
Next: @abbr
, Previous: @option
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@dfn
{term}Use the @dfn
command to identify the introductory or defining
use of a technical term. Use the command only in passages whose
purpose is to introduce a term which will be used again or which the
reader ought to know. Mere passing mention of a term for the first
time does not deserve @dfn
. The command generates italics in
the printed manual, and double quotation marks in the Info file. For
example:
Getting rid of a file is called @dfn{deleting} it.
produces
Getting rid of a file is called deleting it.
As a general rule, a sentence containing the defining occurrence of a term should be a definition of the term. The sentence does not need to say explicitly that it is a definition, but it should contain the information of a definition—it should make the meaning clear.
Next: @acronym
, Previous: @dfn
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@abbr
{abbreviation[, meaning]}You can use the @abbr
command for general abbreviations. The
abbreviation is given as the single argument in braces, as in
‘@abbr{Comput.}’. As a matter of style, or for particular
abbreviations, you may prefer to omit periods, as in
‘@abbr{Mr} Stallman’.
@abbr
accepts an optional second argument, intended to be used
for the meaning of the abbreviation.
If the abbreviation ends with a lowercase letter and a period, and is
not at the end of a sentence, and has no second argument, remember to
use the @.
command (see Ending a Sentence) to get the
correct spacing. However, you do not have to use @.
within
the abbreviation itself; Texinfo automatically assumes periods within
the abbreviation do not end a sentence.
In TeX and in the Info output, the first argument is printed as-is;
if the second argument is present, it is printed in parentheses after
the abbreviation. In HTML the <abbr>
tag is used; in Docbook,
the <abbrev>
tag is used. For instance:
@abbr{Comput. J., Computer Journal}
produces:
Comput. J. (Computer Journal)
For abbreviations consisting of all capital letters, you may prefer to
use the @acronym
command instead. See the next section for
more on the usage of these two commands.
Next: @indicateurl
, Previous: @abbr
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@acronym
{acronym[, meaning]}You can use the @acronym
command for abbreviations written in
all capital letters, such as ‘NASA’. The abbreviation is
given as the single argument in braces, as in
‘@acronym{NASA}’. As a matter of style, or for particular
acronyms, you may prefer to use periods, as in
‘@acronym{N.A.S.A.}’.
@acronym
accepts an optional second argument, intended to be
used for the meaning of the acronym.
If the acronym is at the end of a sentence, and if there is no second
argument, remember to use the @.
or similar command
(see Ending a Sentence) to get the correct spacing.
In TeX, the acronym is printed in slightly smaller font. In the
Info output, the argument is printed as-is. In either format, if the
second argument is present, it is printed in parentheses after the
acronym. In HTML and Docbook the <acronym>
tag is used.
For instance (since GNU is a recursive acronym, we use
@acronym
recursively):
@acronym{GNU, @acronym{GNU}'s Not Unix}
produces:
GNU (GNU’s Not Unix)
In some circumstances, it is conventional to print family names in all
capitals. Don’t use @acronym
for this, since a name is not an
acronym. Use @sc
instead (see Smallcaps).
@abbr
and @acronym
are closely related commands: they
both signal to the reader that a shortened form is being used, and
possibly give a meaning. When choosing whether to use these two
commands, please bear the following in mind.
@acronym
for all sequences of uppercase
letters. Furthermore, it looks strange for some acronyms to be in the
normal font size and others to be smaller. Thus, a simpler approach
you may wish to consider is to avoid @acronym
and just typeset
everything as normal text in all capitals: ‘GNU’, producing the
output ‘GNU’.
Next: @email
, Previous: @acronym
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@indicateurl
{uniform-resource-locator}Use the @indicateurl
command to indicate a uniform resource
locator on the World Wide Web. This is purely for markup purposes and
does not produce a link you can follow (use the @url
or
@uref
command for that, see @url
).
@indicateurl
is useful for urls which do not actually exist.
For example:
For example, the url might be @indicateurl{http://example.org/path}.
which produces:
For example, the url might be ‘http://example.org/path
’.
The output from @indicateurl
is more or less like that of
@samp
(see @samp
).
Previous: @indicateurl
, Up: Indicating [Contents][Index]
@email
{email-address[, displayed-text]}Use the @email
command to indicate an electronic mail address.
It takes one mandatory argument, the address, and one optional argument, the
text to display (the default is the address itself).
In Info, the address is shown in angle brackets, preceded by the text
to display if any. In TeX, the angle brackets are omitted. In
HTML output, @email
produces a ‘mailto’ link that usually
brings up a mail composition window. For example:
Send bug reports to @email{bug-texinfo@@gnu.org}, suggestions to the @email{bug-texinfo@@gnu.org, same place}.
produces
Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org, suggestions to the same place.
Previous: Indicating, Up: Marking Text [Contents][Index]
Usually, Texinfo changes the font to mark words in the text according
to the category the words belong to; an example is the @code
command. Most often, this is the best way to mark words. However,
sometimes you will want to emphasize text without indicating a
category. Texinfo has two commands to do this. Also, Texinfo has
several commands that specify the font in which text will be output.
These commands have no effect in Info and only one of them, the
@r
command, has any regular use.
• @emph @strong : | How to emphasize text in Texinfo. | |
• Smallcaps: | How to use the small caps font. | |
• Fonts: | Various font commands for printed output. |
@emph
{text} and @strong
{text}The @emph
and @strong
commands are for emphasis;
@strong
is stronger. In printed output, @emph
produces
italics and @strong
produces bold.
In the Info output, @emph
surrounds the text with underscores
(‘_’), and @strong
puts asterisks around the text.
For example,
@strong{Caution:} @samp{rm * .[^.]*} removes @emph{all} files in the directory.
produces the following:
Caution: ‘rm * .[^.]*’ removes all files in the directory.
The @strong
command is seldom used except to mark what is, in
effect, a typographical element, such as the word ‘Caution’ in the
preceding example.
Caution: Do not use
@strong
with the word ‘Note’ followed by a space; Info will mistake the combination for a cross-reference. Use a phrase such as Please notice or Caution instead, or the optional argument to@quotation
—‘Note’ is allowable there.
Next: Fonts, Previous: @emph @strong
, Up: Emphasis [Contents][Index]
@sc
{text}: The Small Caps FontUse the ‘@sc’ command to set text in A SMALL CAPS FONT (where possible). Write the text you want to be in small caps between braces in lowercase, like this:
Richard @sc{Stallman} commencé GNU.
This produces:
Richard STALLMAN commencé GNU.
As shown here, we recommend reserving @sc
for special cases
where you want typographic small caps; family names are one such,
especially in languages other than English, though there are no
hard-and-fast rules about such things.
TeX typesets any uppercase letters between the braces of an
@sc
command in full-size capitals; only lowercase letters are
printed in the small caps font. In the Info output, the argument to
@sc
is printed in all uppercase. In HTML, the argument is
uppercased and the output marked with the <small>
tag to reduce
the font size, since HTML cannot easily represent true small caps.
Overall, we recommend using standard upper- and lowercase letters wherever possible.
Texinfo provides one command to change the size of the main body font
in the TeX output for a document: @fonttextsize
. It has no
effect in other output. It takes a single argument on the remainder
of the line, which must be either ‘10’ or ‘11’. For
example:
@fonttextsize 10
The effect is to reduce the body font to a 10pt size (the
default is 11pt). Fonts for other elements, such as sections
and chapters, are reduced accordingly. This should only be used in
conjunction with @smallbook
(see @smallbook
) or
similar, since 10pt fonts on standard paper (8.5x11 or A4) are
too small. One reason to use this command is to save pages, and hence
printing cost, for physical books.
Texinfo does not at present have commands to switch the font family to use, or more general size-changing commands.
Texinfo also provides a number of font commands that specify font changes in the printed manual and (where possible) in the HTML output. They have no effect in Info. All the commands apply to a following argument surrounded by braces.
@b
selects bold face;
@i
selects an italic font;
@r
selects a roman font, which is the usual font in which text is printed. It may or may not be seriffed.
@sansserif
selects a sans serif font;
@slanted
selects a slanted font;
@t
selects the fixed-width, typewriter-style font used by @code
;
(The commands with longer names were invented much later than the others, at which time it did not seem desirable to use very short names for such infrequently needed features.)
The @r
command can be useful in example-like environments, to
write comments in the standard roman font instead of the fixed-width
font. This looks better in printed output, and produces a
<lineannotation>
tag in Docbook output.
For example,
@lisp (+ 2 2) ; @r{Add two plus two.} @end lisp
produces
(+ 2 2) ; Add two plus two.
The @t
command can occasionally be useful to produce output in
a typewriter font where that is supported (e.g., HTML and PDF), but no
distinction is needed in Info or plain text: @t{foo}
produces foo, cf. @code{foo}
producing foo
.
In general, the other font commands are unlikely to be useful; they exist primarily to make it possible to document the functionality of specific font effects, such as in TeX and related packages.
Next: Lists and Tables, Previous: Marking Text, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Quotations and examples are blocks of text consisting of one or more whole paragraphs that are set off from the bulk of the text and treated differently. They are usually indented in the output.
In Texinfo, you always begin a quotation or example by writing an
@-command at the beginning of a line by itself, and end it by writing
an @end
command that is also at the beginning of a line by
itself. For instance, you begin an example by writing
@example
by itself at the beginning of a line and end the
example by writing @end example
on a line by itself, at the
beginning of that line, and with only one space between the
@end
and the example
.
• Block Enclosing Commands: | Different constructs for different purposes. | |
• @quotation : | Writing a quotation. | |
• @indentedblock : | Block of text indented on left. | |
• @example : | Writing an example in a fixed-width font. | |
• @verbatim : | Writing a verbatim example. | |
• @lisp : | Illustrating Lisp code. | |
• @display : | Writing an example in the current font. | |
• @format : | Writing an example without narrowed margins. | |
• @exdent : | Undo indentation on a line. | |
• @flushleft @flushright : | Pushing text flush left or flush right. | |
• @raggedright : | Avoiding justification on the right. | |
• @noindent : | Preventing paragraph indentation. | |
• @indent : | Forcing paragraph indentation. | |
• @cartouche : | Drawing rounded rectangles around text. | |
• @small… : | Examples in a smaller font. |
Next: @quotation
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
Here is a summary of commands that enclose blocks of text, also known as environments. They’re explained further in the following sections.
@quotation
Indicate text that is quoted. The text is filled, indented (from both margins), and printed in a roman font by default.
@indentedblock
Like @quotation
, but the text is indented only on the left.
@example
Illustrate code, commands, and the like. The text is printed in a fixed-width font, and indented but not filled.
@lisp
Like @example
, but specifically for illustrating Lisp code. The
text is printed in a fixed-width font, and indented but not filled.
@verbatim
Mark a piece of text that is to be printed verbatim; no character
substitutions are made and all commands are ignored, until the next
@end verbatim
. The text is printed in a fixed-width font,
and not indented or filled. Extra spaces and blank lines are
significant, and tabs are expanded.
@display
Display illustrative text. The text is indented but not filled, and no font is selected (so, by default, the font is roman).
@format
Like @display
(the text is not filled and no font is
selected), but the text is not indented.
@smallquotation
@smallindentedblock
@smallexample
@smalllisp
@smalldisplay
@smallformat
These @small...
commands are just like their non-small
counterparts, except that they output text in a smaller font size,
where possible.
@flushleft
@flushright
Text is not filled, but is set flush with the left or right margin, respectively.
@raggedright
Text is filled, but only justified on the left, leaving the right margin ragged.
@cartouche
Highlight text, often an example or quotation, by drawing a box with rounded corners around it.
The @exdent
command is used within the above constructs to
undo the indentation of a line.
The @noindent
command may be used after one of the above
constructs (or at the beginning of any paragraph) to prevent the
following text from being indented as a new paragraph.
Next: @indentedblock
, Previous: Block Enclosing Commands, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@quotation
: Block QuotationsThe text of a quotation is processed like normal text (regular font, text is filled) except that:
@author
command may be given to specify the author of the
quotation.
This is an example of text written between a
@quotation
command and an@end quotation
command. A@quotation
command is most often used to indicate text that is excerpted from another (real or hypothetical) printed work.
Write a @quotation
command as text on a line by itself. This
line will disappear from the output. Mark the end of the quotation
with a line beginning with and containing only @end quotation
.
The @end quotation
line will likewise disappear from the
output.
@quotation
takes one optional argument, given on the remainder
of the line. This text, if present, is included at the beginning of
the quotation in bold or otherwise emphasized, and followed with a
‘:’. For example:
@quotation Note This is a foo. @end quotation
produces
Note: This is a foo.
If the @quotation
argument is one of these English words
(case-insensitive):
Caution Important Note Tip Warning
then the Docbook output uses corresponding special tags
(<note>
, etc.) instead of the default <blockquote>
.
HTML output always uses <blockquote>
.
If the author of the quotation is specified in the @quotation
block with the @author
command, a line with the author name is
displayed after the quotation:
@quotation People sometimes ask me if it is a sin in the Church of Emacs to use vi. Using a free version of vi is not a sin; it is a penance. So happy hacking. @author Richard Stallman @end quotation
produces
People sometimes ask me if it is a sin in the Church of Emacs to use vi. Using a free version of vi is not a sin; it is a penance. So happy hacking.
Texinfo also provides a command @smallquotation
, which is just
like @quotation
but uses a smaller font size where possible.
See @small…
.
Next: @example
, Previous: @quotation
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@indentedblock
: Indented text blocksThe @indentedblock
environment is similar to
@quotation
, except that text is only indented on the left (and
there is no optional argument for an author). Thus, the text font
remains unchanged, and text is gathered and filled as usual, but the
left margin is increased. For example:
This is an example of text written between an
@indentedblock
command and an@end indentedblock
command. The@indentedblock
environment can contain any text or other commands desired.
This is written in the Texinfo source as:
@indentedblock This is an example ... @end indentedblock
Texinfo also provides a command @smallindentedblock
, which is
just like @indentedblock
but uses a smaller font size where
possible. See @small…
.
Next: @verbatim
, Previous: @indentedblock
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@example
: Example TextThe @example
environment is used to indicate an example that
is not part of the running text, such as computer input or output.
Write an @example
command at the beginning of a line by
itself. Mark the end of the example with an @end example
command, also written at the beginning of a line by itself.
An @example
environment has the following characteristics:
@verbatim
environment instead
(see @verbatim
).
For example,
@example cp foo @var{dest1}; \ cp foo @var{dest2} @end example
produces
cp foo dest1; \ cp foo dest2
The lines containing @example
and @end example
will
disappear from the output. To make the output look good, you should
put a blank line before the @example
and another blank line
after the @end example
. Blank lines inside the beginning
@example
and the ending @end example
, on the other
hand, do appear in the output.
Caution: Do not use tabs in the lines of an example! (Or anywhere else in Texinfo, except in verbatim environments.) TeX treats tabs as single spaces, and that is not what they look like. In Emacs, you can use M-x untabify to convert tabs in a region to multiple spaces.
Examples are often, logically speaking, “in the middle” of a
paragraph, and the text that continues afterwards should not be
indented, as in the example above. The @noindent
command
prevents a piece of text from being indented as if it were a new
paragraph (see @noindent
).
If you want to embed code fragments within sentences, instead of
displaying them, use the @code
command or its relatives
(see @code
).
If you wish to write a “comment” on a line of an example in the
normal roman font, you can use the @r
command (see Fonts).
Next: @lisp
, Previous: @example
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@verbatim
: Literal TextUse the @verbatim
environment for printing of text that may
contain special characters or commands that should not be interpreted,
such as computer input or output (@example
interprets its text
as regular Texinfo commands). This is especially useful for including automatically
generated files in a Texinfo manual.
In general, the output will be just the same as the input. No character substitutions are made, e.g., all spaces and blank lines are significant, including tabs. In the printed manual, the text is typeset in a fixed-width font, and not indented or filled.
Write a @verbatim
command at the beginning of a line by
itself. This line will disappear from the output. Mark the end of
the verbatim block with an @end verbatim
command, also written
at the beginning of a line by itself. The @end verbatim
will
also disappear from the output.
For example:
@verbatim
{
TAB@command with strange characters: @'e
expandTABme
}
@end verbatim
This produces:
{ @command with strange characters: @'e expand me }
Since the lines containing @verbatim
and @end verbatim
produce no output, typically you should put a blank line before the
@verbatim
and another blank line after the @end
verbatim
. Blank lines between the beginning @verbatim
and
the ending @end verbatim
will appear in the output.
You can get a “small” verbatim by enclosing the @verbatim
in
an @smallformat
environment, as shown here:
@smallformat
@verbatim
... still verbatim, but in a smaller font ...
@end verbatim
@end smallformat
Finally, a word of warning: it is not reliable to use
@verbatim
inside other Texinfo constructs.
See also @verbatiminclude
.
Next: @display
, Previous: @verbatim
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@lisp
: Marking a Lisp ExampleThe @lisp
command is used for Lisp code. It is synonymous
with the @example
command.
This is an example of text written between an@lisp
command and an@end lisp
command.
Use @lisp
instead of @example
to preserve information
regarding the nature of the example. This is useful, for example, if
you write a function that evaluates only and all the Lisp code in a
Texinfo file. Then you can use the Texinfo file as a Lisp
library. Mark the end of @lisp
with @end lisp
on a line
by itself.
Next: @format
, Previous: @lisp
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@display
: Examples Using the Text FontThe @display
command begins another kind of environment, where
the font is left unchanged, not switched to typewriter as with
@example
. Each line of input still produces a line of output,
and the output is still indented.
This is an example of text written between a@display
command and an@end display
command. The@display
command indents the text, but does not fill it.
Texinfo also provides the environment @smalldisplay
, which is
like @display
but uses a smaller font size.
See @small…
.
Next: @exdent
, Previous: @display
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@format
: Examples Using the Full Line WidthThe @format
command is similar to @display
, except it
leaves the text unindented. Like @display
, it does not select
the fixed-width font.
This is an example of text written between a@format
command and an@end format
command. As you can see from this example, the@format
command does not fill the text.
Texinfo also provides the environment @smallformat
, which is
like @format
but uses a smaller font size.
See @small…
.
Next: @flushleft @flushright
, Previous: @format
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@exdent
: Undoing a Line’s IndentationThe @exdent
command removes any indentation a line might have.
The command is written at the beginning of a line and applies only to
the text that follows the command that is on the same line. Do not use
braces around the text. In a printed manual, the text on an
@exdent
line is printed in the roman font.
@exdent
is usually used within examples. Thus,
@example This line follows an @@example command. @exdent This line is exdented. This line follows the exdented line. The @@end example comes on the next line. @end example
produces
This line follows an @example command.
This line is exdented.
This line follows the exdented line. The @end example comes on the next line.
In practice, the @exdent
command is rarely used. Usually, you
un-indent text by ending the example and returning the page to its
normal width.
@exdent
has no effect in HTML output.
Next: @raggedright
, Previous: @exdent
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@flushleft
and @flushright
The @flushleft
and @flushright
commands line up the
ends of lines on the left and right margins of a page,
but do not fill the text. The commands are written on lines of their
own, without braces. The @flushleft
and @flushright
commands are ended by @end flushleft
and @end
flushright
commands on lines of their own.
For example,
@flushleft This text is written flushleft. @end flushleft
produces
This text is written flushleft.
@flushright
produces the type of indentation often used in the
return address of letters. For example,
@flushright Here is an example of text written flushright. The @code{@flushright} command right justifies every line but leaves the left end ragged. @end flushright
produces
Here is an example of text written
flushright. The @flushright
command
right justifies every line but leaves the
left end ragged.
Next: @noindent
, Previous: @flushleft @flushright
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@raggedright
: Ragged Right TextThe @raggedright
fills text as usual, but the text is only
justified on the left; the right margin is ragged. The command is
written on a line of its own, without braces. The
@raggedright
command is ended by @end raggedright
on a
line of its own. This command has no effect in Info and HTML output,
where text is always set ragged right.
The @raggedright
command can be useful with paragraphs
containing lists of commands with long names, when it is known in
advance that justifying the text on both margins will make the
paragraph look bad.
An example (from elsewhere in this manual):
@raggedright Commands for double and single angle quotation marks: @code{@@guillemetleft@{@}}, @code{@@guillemetright@{@}}, @code{@@guillemotleft@{@}}, @code{@@guillemotright@{@}}, @code{@@guilsinglleft@{@}}, @code{@@guilsinglright@{@}}. @end raggedright
produces
Commands for double and single angle quotation marks:
@guillemetleft{}
, @guillemetright{}
,
@guillemotleft{}
, @guillemotright{}
,
@guilsinglleft{}
, @guilsinglright{}
.
Next: @indent
, Previous: @raggedright
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@noindent
: Omitting IndentationAn example or other inclusion can break a paragraph into segments.
Ordinarily, the formatters indent text that follows an example as a new
paragraph. You can prevent this on a case-by-case basis by writing
@noindent
at the beginning of a line, preceding the continuation
text. You can also disable indentation for all paragraphs globally with
@paragraphindent
(see @paragraphindent
).
Here is an example showing how to eliminate the normal indentation of
the text after an @example
, a common situation:
@example This is an example @end example @noindent This line is not indented. As you can see, the beginning of the line is fully flush left with the line that follows after it.
produces:
This is an example
This line is not indented. As you can see, the beginning of the line is fully flush left with the line that follows after it.
The standard usage of @noindent
is just as above: at the
beginning of what would otherwise be a paragraph, to eliminate the
indentation that normally happens there. It can either be followed by
text or be on a line by itself. There is no reason to use it
in other contexts, such as in the middle of a paragraph or inside an
environment (see Quotations and Examples).
You can control the number of blank lines in the Info file output by
adjusting the input as desired: a line containing just
@noindent
does not generate a blank line, and neither does an
@end
line for an environment.
Do not put braces after a @noindent
command; they are not
used, since @noindent
is a command used outside of paragraphs
(see Command Syntax).
Next: @cartouche
, Previous: @noindent
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@indent
: Forcing IndentationTo complement the @noindent
command (see the previous
section), Texinfo provides the @indent
command to force a
paragraph to be indented. For instance, this paragraph (the first in
this section) is indented using an @indent
command.
And indeed, the first paragraph of a section is the most likely place
to use @indent
, to override the normal behavior of no
indentation there (see @paragraphindent
). It can either be
followed by text or be on a line by itself.
As a special case, when @indent
is used in an environment
where text is not filled, it produces a paragraph indentation space in
the TeX output. (These environments are where a line of input
produces a line of output, such as @example
and
@display
; for a summary of all environments, see Block Enclosing Commands.)
Do not put braces after an @indent
command; they are not used,
since @indent
is a command used outside of paragraphs
(see Command Syntax).
Next: @small…
, Previous: @indent
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@cartouche
: Rounded RectanglesIn a printed manual, the @cartouche
command draws a box with
rounded corners around its contents. In HTML, a normal rectangle is
drawn. @cartouche
has no effect in Info output.
You can use this command to further highlight an example or quotation. For instance, you could write a manual in which one type of example is surrounded by a cartouche for emphasis.
For example,
@cartouche @example % pwd /usr/local/share/emacs @end example @end cartouche
surrounds the two-line example with a box with rounded corners, in the printed manual.
The output from the example looks like this (if you’re reading this in
Info, you’ll see the @cartouche
had no effect):
% pwd /usr/local/share/emacs |
@cartouche
also implies @group
(see @group
).
Previous: @cartouche
, Up: Quotations and Examples [Contents][Index]
@small…
Block CommandsIn addition to the regular @example
and similar commands,
Texinfo has “small” example-style commands. These are
@smallquotation
, @smallindentedblock
,
@smalldisplay
, @smallexample
, @smallformat
,
and @smalllisp
.
In Info output, the @small…
commands are equivalent to
their non-small companion commands.
In TeX, however, the @small…
commands typeset text in
a smaller font than the non-small example commands. Thus, for
instance, code examples can contain longer lines and still fit on a
page without needing to be rewritten.
A smaller font size is also requested in HTML output, and (as usual) retained in the Texinfo XML transliteration.
Mark the end of a @small…
block with a corresponding
@end small…
. For example, pair @smallexample
with
@end smallexample
.
Here is an example of the font used by the @smallexample
command (in Info, the output will be the same as usual):
… to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
The @small…
commands use the same font style as their
normal counterparts: @smallexample
and @smalllisp
use
a fixed-width font, and everything else uses the regular font.
They also have the same behavior in other respects—whether filling
is done and whether margins are narrowed.
As a general rule, a printed document looks better if you use only one
of (for instance) @example
or @smallexample
consistently within a chapter.
Next: Special Displays, Previous: Quotations and Examples, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has several ways of making lists and tables. Lists can be bulleted or numbered; two-column tables can highlight the items in the first column; multi-column tables are also supported.
• Introducing Lists: | Texinfo formats lists for you. | |
• @itemize : | How to construct a simple list. | |
• @enumerate : | How to construct a numbered list. | |
• Two-column Tables: | How to construct a two-column table. | |
• Multi-column Tables: | How to construct generalized tables. |
Next: @itemize
, Up: Lists and Tables [Contents][Index]
Texinfo automatically indents the text in lists or tables, and numbers an enumerated list. This last feature is useful if you modify the list, since you do not need to renumber it yourself.
Numbered lists and tables begin with the appropriate @-command at the
beginning of a line, and end with the corresponding @end
command on a line by itself. The table and itemized-list commands
also require that you write formatting information on the same line as
the beginning @-command.
Begin an enumerated list, for example, with an @enumerate
command and end the list with an @end enumerate
command.
Begin an itemized list with an @itemize
command, followed on
the same line by a formatting command such as @bullet
, and end
the list with an @end itemize
command.
Precede each element of a list with an @item
or @itemx
command.
Here is an itemized list of the different kinds of table and lists:
Here is an enumerated list with the same items:
And here is a two-column table with the same items and their @-commands:
@itemize
Itemized lists with and without bullets.
@enumerate
Enumerated lists, using numbers or letters.
@table
@ftable
@vtable
Two-column tables, optionally with indexing.
Next: @enumerate
, Previous: Introducing Lists, Up: Lists and Tables [Contents][Index]
@itemize
: Making an Itemized ListThe @itemize
command produces a sequence of “items”, each
starting with a bullet or other mark inside the left margin, and
generally indented.
Begin an itemized list by writing @itemize
at the beginning of
a line. Follow the command, on the same line, with a character or a
Texinfo command that generates a mark. Usually, you will use
@bullet
after @itemize
, but you can use
@minus
, or any command or character that results in a single
character in the Info file. (When you write the mark command such as
@bullet
after an @itemize
command, you may omit the
‘{}’.) If you don’t specify a mark command, the default is
@bullet
. If you don’t want any mark at all, but still want
logical items, use @w{}
(in this case the braces are
required).
After the @itemize
, write your items, each starting with
@item
. Text can follow on the same line as the @item
.
The text of an item can continue for more than one paragraph.
There should be at least one @item
inside the @itemize
environment. If none are present, makeinfo
gives a warning.
If you just want indented text and not a list of items, use
@indentedblock
; see @indentedblock
.
Index entries and comments that are given before an @item
including the first, are automatically moved (internally) to after the
@item
, so the output is as expected. Historically this has
been a common practice.
Usually, you should put a blank line between items. This puts a blank line in the Info file. (TeX inserts the proper vertical space in any case.) Except when the entries are very brief, these blank lines make the list look better.
Here is an example of the use of @itemize
, followed by the
output it produces. @bullet
produces an ‘*’ in Info and
a round dot in other output formats.
@itemize @bullet @item Some text for foo. @item Some text for bar. @end itemize
This produces:
- Some text for foo.
- Some text for bar.
Itemized lists may be embedded within other itemized lists. Here is a list marked with dashes embedded in a list marked with bullets:
@itemize @bullet @item First item. @itemize @minus @item Inner item. @item Second inner item. @end itemize @item Second outer item. @end itemize
This produces:
- First item.
- - Inner item.
- - Second inner item.
- Second outer item.
Next: Two-column Tables, Previous: @itemize
, Up: Lists and Tables [Contents][Index]
@enumerate
: Making a Numbered or Lettered List@enumerate
is like @itemize
(see @itemize
),
except that the labels on the items are successive integers or letters
instead of bullets.
Write the @enumerate
command at the beginning of a line. The
command does not require an argument, but accepts either a number or a
letter as an option. Without an argument, @enumerate
starts the
list with the number ‘1’. With a numeric argument, such as
‘3’, the command starts the list with that number. With an upper-
or lowercase letter, such as ‘a’ or ‘A’, the command starts
the list with that letter.
Write the text of the enumerated list in the same way as an itemized
list: write a line starting with @item
at the beginning of
each item in the enumeration. It is ok to have text following the
@item
, and the text for an item can continue for several
paragraphs.
You should put a blank line between entries in the list. This generally makes it easier to read the Info file.
Here is an example of @enumerate
without an argument:
@enumerate @item Underlying causes. @item Proximate causes. @end enumerate
This produces:
Here is an example with an argument of 3:
@enumerate 3 @item Predisposing causes. @item Precipitating causes. @item Perpetuating causes. @end enumerate
This produces:
Here is a brief summary of the alternatives. The summary is constructed
using @enumerate
with an argument of a.
@enumerate
Without an argument, produce a numbered list, with the first item numbered 1.
@enumerate unsigned-integer
With an (unsigned) numeric argument, start a numbered list with that number. You can use this to continue a list that you interrupted with other text.
@enumerate upper-case-letter
With an uppercase letter as argument, start a list in which each item is marked by a letter, beginning with that uppercase letter.
@enumerate lower-case-letter
With a lowercase letter as argument, start a list in which each item is marked by a letter, beginning with that lowercase letter.
You can also nest enumerated lists, as in an outline.
Next: Multi-column Tables, Previous: @enumerate
, Up: Lists and Tables [Contents][Index]
@table
is similar to @itemize
(see @itemize
), but allows you to specify a name or
heading line for each item. The @table
command is used to
produce two-column tables, and is especially useful for glossaries,
explanatory exhibits, and command-line option summaries.
• @table : | How to construct a two-column table. | |
• @ftable @vtable : | Automatic indexing for two-column tables. | |
• @itemx : | How to put more entries in the first column. |
Next: @ftable @vtable
, Up: Two-column Tables [Contents][Index]
@table
CommandUse the @table
command to produce a two-column table. This
command is typically used when you have a list of items and a brief text
with each one, such as a list of definitions.
Write the @table
command at the beginning of a line, after a
blank line, and follow it on the same line with an argument that is an
‘indicating’ command, such as @code
, @samp
,
@var
, @option
, or @kbd
(see Indicating).
This command will be applied to the text in the first column. For
example, @table @code
will cause the text in the first column
to be output as if it had been the argument to a @code
command.
You may use the @asis
command as an argument to
@table
. @asis
is a command that does nothing: if you
use this command after @table
, the first column entries are
output without added highlighting (“as is”).
The @table
command works with other commands besides those
explicitly mentioned here. However, you can only use predefined
Texinfo commands that take an argument in braces. You cannot
reliably use a new command defined with @macro
, although an
@alias
(for a suitable predefined command) is acceptable.
See Defining New Texinfo Commands.
Begin each table entry with an @item
command at the beginning
of a line. Write the text for the first column on the same line as the
@item
command. Write the text for the second column on the line
following the @item
line and on subsequent lines. You may
write as many lines of supporting text as you wish, even several
paragraphs. But only the text on the same line as the @item
will be placed in the first column (including any footnotes).
You do not need to type anything for an empty second column.
Normally, you should put a blank line before an @item
line
(except the first one). This puts a blank line in the Info file.
Except when the entries are very brief, a blank line looks better.
End the table with a line consisting of @end table
, followed
by a blank line. TeX will always start a new paragraph after the
table, so the blank line is needed for the Info output to be analogous.
For example, the following table highlights the text in the first
column with the @samp
command:
@table @samp @item foo This is the text for @samp{foo}. @item bar Text for @samp{bar}. @end table
This produces:
This is the text for ‘foo’.
Text for ‘bar’.
If you want to list two or more named items with a single block of
text, use the @itemx
command. (See @itemx
.)
The @table
command (see @table
) is not supported
inside @display
. Since @display
is line-oriented, it
doesn’t make sense to use them together. If you want to indent a
table, try @quotation
(see @quotation
) or
@indentedblock
(see @indentedblock
).
Next: @itemx
, Previous: @table
, Up: Two-column Tables [Contents][Index]
@ftable
and @vtable
The @ftable
and @vtable
commands are the same as the
@table
command except that @ftable
automatically enters
each of the items in the first column of the table into the index of
functions and @vtable
automatically enters each of the items in
the first column of the table into the index of variables. This
simplifies the task of creating indices. Only the items on the same
line as the @item
or @itemx
commands are indexed, and
they are indexed in exactly the form that they appear on that line.
See Indices, for more information about indices.
Begin a two-column table using @ftable
or @vtable
by
writing the @-command at the beginning of a line, followed on the same
line by an argument that is a Texinfo command such as @code
,
exactly as you would for a @table
command; and end the table
with an @end ftable
or @end vtable
command on a line by
itself.
See the example for @table
in the previous section.
Previous: @ftable @vtable
, Up: Two-column Tables [Contents][Index]
@itemx
: Second and Subsequent ItemsUse the @itemx
command inside a table when you have two or more
first column entries for the same item, each of which should appear on a
line of its own.
Use @item
for the first entry, and @itemx
for all
subsequent entries; @itemx
must always follow an @item
command, with no blank line intervening.
The @itemx
command works exactly like @item
except
that it does not generate extra vertical space above the first column
text. If you have multiple consecutive @itemx
commands, do
not insert any blank lines between them.
For example,
@table @code @item upcase @itemx downcase These two functions accept a character or a string as argument, and return the corresponding uppercase (lowercase) character or string. @end table
This produces:
upcase
downcase
These two functions accept a character or a string as argument, and return the corresponding uppercase (lowercase) character or string.
(Note also that this example illustrates multi-line supporting text in a two-column table.)
Previous: Two-column Tables, Up: Lists and Tables [Contents][Index]
@multitable
: Multi-column Tables@multitable
allows you to construct tables with any number of
columns, with each column having any width you like.
You define the column widths on the @multitable
line itself, and
write each row of the actual table following an @item
command,
with columns separated by a @tab
command. Finally, @end
multitable
completes the table. Details in the sections below.
• Multitable Column Widths: | Defining multitable column widths. | |
• Multitable Rows: | Defining multitable rows, with examples. |
Next: Multitable Rows, Up: Multi-column Tables [Contents][Index]
You can define the column widths for a multitable in two ways: as
fractions of the line length; or with a prototype row. Mixing the two
methods is not supported. In either case, the widths are defined
entirely on the same line as the @multitable
command.
@columnfractions
and the decimal numbers (presumably less than
1; a leading zero is allowed and ignored) after the
@multitable
command, as in:
@multitable @columnfractions .33 .33 .33
The fractions need not add up exactly to 1.0, as these do not. This allows you to produce tables that do not need the full line length.
@multitable
command. For example:
@multitable {some text for column one} {for column two}
The first column will then have the width of the typeset ‘some text for column one’, and the second column the width of ‘for column two’.
The prototype entries need not appear in the table itself.
Although we used simple text in this example, the prototype entries can
contain Texinfo commands; markup commands such as @code
are
particularly likely to be useful.
Previous: Multitable Column Widths, Up: Multi-column Tables [Contents][Index]
After the @multitable
command defining the column widths (see
the previous section), you begin each row in the body of a multitable
with @item
, and separate the column entries with @tab
.
Line breaks are not special within the table body, and you may break
input lines in your source file as necessary.
You can also use @headitem
instead of @item
to produce
a heading row. The TeX output for such a row is in bold, and
the HTML and Docbook output uses the <thead>
tag. In Info, the
heading row is followed by a separator line made of dashes (‘-’
characters).
The command @headitemfont
can be used in templates when the
entries in a @headitem
row need to be used in a template. It
is a synonym for @b
, but using @headitemfont
avoids
any dependency on that particular font style, in case we provide a way
to change it in the future.
Here is a complete example of a multi-column table (the text is from The GNU Emacs Manual, see Splitting Windows in The GNU Emacs Manual):
@multitable @columnfractions .15 .45 .4 @headitem Key @tab Command @tab Description @item C-x 2 @tab @code{split-window-vertically} @tab Split the selected window into two windows, with one above the other. @item C-x 3 @tab @code{split-window-horizontally} @tab Split the selected window into two windows positioned side by side. @item C-Mouse-2 @tab @tab In the mode line or scroll bar of a window, split that window. @end multitable
produces:
Key | Command | Description |
---|---|---|
C-x 2 | split-window-vertically | Split the selected window into two windows, with one above the other. |
C-x 3 | split-window-horizontally | Split the selected window into two windows positioned side by side. |
C-Mouse-2 | In the mode line or scroll bar of a window, split that window. |
Next: Indices, Previous: Lists and Tables, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The commands in this chapter allow you to write text that is specially displayed (output format permitting), outside of the normal document flow.
One set of such commands is for creating “floats”, that is, figures, tables, and the like, set off from the main text, possibly numbered, captioned, and/or referred to from elsewhere in the document. Images are often included in these displays.
Another group of commands is for creating footnotes in Texinfo.
• Floats: | Figures, tables, and the like. | |
• Images: | Including graphics and images. | |
• Footnotes: | Writing footnotes. |
Next: Images, Up: Special Displays [Contents][Index]
A float is a display which is set off from the main text. It is typically labeled as being a “Figure”, “Table”, “Example”, or some similar type.
A float is so-named because, in principle, it can be moved to the
bottom or top of the current page, or to a following page, in the
printed output. (Floating does not make sense in other output
formats.) In the present version of Texinfo, however, this floating
is unfortunately not yet implemented. Instead, the floating material
is simply output at the current location, more or less as if it were
an @group
(see @group
).
• @float : | Producing floating material. | |
• @caption @shortcaption : | Specifying descriptions for floats. | |
• @listoffloats : | A table of contents for floats. |
Next: @caption @shortcaption
, Up: Floats [Contents][Index]
@float
[type][,label]: Floating MaterialTo produce floating material, enclose the material you want to be
displayed separate between @float
and @end float
commands, on lines by themselves.
Floating material often uses @image
to display an
already-existing graphic (see Images), or @multitable
to
display a table (see Multi-column Tables). However, the contents
of the float can be anything. Here’s an example with simple text:
@float Figure,fig:ex1 This is an example float. @end float
And the output:
As shown in the example, @float
takes two arguments (separated
by a comma), type and label. Both are optional.
Specifies the sort of float this is; typically a word such as “Figure”, “Table”, etc. If this is not given, and label is, any cross-referencing will simply use a bare number.
Specifies a cross-reference label for this float. If given, this
float is automatically given a number, and will appear in any
@listoffloats
output (see @listoffloats
). Cross
references to label are allowed.
On the other hand, if label is not given, then the float will
not be numbered and consequently will not appear in the
@listoffloats
output or be cross-referenceable.
Ordinarily, you specify both type and label, to get a labeled and numbered float.
In Texinfo, all floats are numbered in the same way: with the chapter number (or appendix letter), a period, and the float number, which simply counts 1, 2, 3, …, and is reset at each chapter. Each float type is counted independently.
Floats within an @unnumbered
, or outside of any chapter, are
simply numbered consecutively from 1.
These numbering conventions are not, at present, changeable.
Next: @listoffloats
, Previous: @float
, Up: Floats [Contents][Index]
@caption
& @shortcaption
You may write a @caption
anywhere within a @float
environment, to define a caption for the float. It is not allowed in
any other context. @caption
takes a single argument, enclosed
in braces. Here’s an example:
@float An example float, with caption. @caption{Caption for example float.} @end float
The output is:
An example float, with caption.
Caption for example float.
@caption
can appear anywhere within the float; it is not
processed until the @end float
. The caption text is usually a
sentence or two, but may consist of several paragraphs if necessary.
In the output, the caption always appears below the float; this is not
currently changeable. It is preceded by the float type and/or number,
as specified to the @float
command (see the previous section).
The @shortcaption
command likewise may be used only within
@float
, and takes a single argument in braces. The short
caption text is used instead of the caption text in a list of floats
(see the next section). Thus, you can write a long caption for the
main document, and a short title to appear in the list of floats. For
example:
@float ... as above ... @shortcaption{Text for list of floats.} @end float
The text for @shortcaption
may not contain comments
(@c
), verbatim text (@verb
), environments such as
@example
, footnotes (@footnote
) or other complex
constructs. The same constraints apply to @caption
unless
there is a @shortcaption
.
Previous: @caption @shortcaption
, Up: Floats [Contents][Index]
@listoffloats
: Tables of Contents for FloatsYou can write a @listoffloats
command to generate a list of
floats for a given float type (see @float
), analogous to
the document’s overall table of contents. Typically, it is written in
its own @unnumbered
node to provide a heading and structure,
rather like @printindex
(see Printing Indices & Menus).
@listoffloats
takes one optional argument, the float type.
Here’s an example:
@node List of Figures @unnumbered List of Figures @listoffloats Figure
And here’s what the output from @listoffloats
looks like, given the example figure earlier in this chapter (the Info
output is formatted as a menu):
Without any argument, @listoffloats
generates a list of floats
for which no float type was specified, i.e., no first argument to the
@float
command (see @float
).
Each line in the list of floats contains the float type (if any),
the float number, and the caption, if any—the @shortcaption
argument, if it was specified, else the @caption
argument.
In Info, the result is a menu where each float can be selected. In
HTML, each line is a link to the float. In printed output, the page
number is included.
Unnumbered floats (those without cross-reference labels) are omitted from the list of floats.
Next: Footnotes, Previous: Floats, Up: Special Displays [Contents][Index]
You can insert an image given in an external file with the
@image
command. Although images can be used anywhere,
including the middle of a paragraph, we describe them in this chapter
since they are most often part of a displayed figure or example.
• Image Syntax: | ||
• Image Scaling: |
Next: Image Scaling, Up: Images [Contents][Index]
Here is the synopsis of the @image
command:
@image{filename[, width[, height[, alttext[, extension]]]]}
The filename argument is mandatory, and must not have an extension, because the different processors support different formats:
makeinfo
includes filename.txt verbatim
(more or less as if it were in @verbatim
). The Info output
may also include a reference to filename.png or
filename.jpg. (See below.)
makeinfo
outputs a reference to
filename.png, filename.jpg,
filename.jpeg or filename.gif (in that
order). If none of those exist, it gives an error, and outputs a
reference to filename.jpg anyway.
makeinfo
outputs references to
filename.eps, filename.gif
filename.jpeg, filename.jpg,
filename.pdf, filename.png and
filename.svg, for every file found. Also,
filename.txt is included verbatim, if present. (The
subsequent Docbook processor is supposed to choose the appropriate one.)
makeinfo
uses the optional fifth
argument extension to @image
for the filename extension,
if it is specified and the file is found. Any leading period should
be included in extension. For example:
@image{foo,,,,.xpm}
If you want to install image files for use by Info readers too, we
recommend putting them in a subdirectory like ‘foo-figures’
for a package foo. Copying the files into
$(infodir)/foo-figures/
should be done in your
Makefile
.
The width and height arguments are described in the next section.
For TeX output, if an image is the only thing in a paragraph it
will ordinarily be displayed on a line by itself, respecting the
current environment indentation, but without the normal paragraph
indentation. If you want it centered, use @center
(see @titlefont @center @sp
).
For HTML output, makeinfo
sets the alt attribute for
inline images to the optional alttext (fourth) argument to
@image
, if supplied. If not supplied, makeinfo
uses
the full file name of the image being displayed. The alttext is
processed as Texinfo text, so special characters such as ‘"’ and
‘<’ and ‘&’ are escaped in the HTML output; also, you can
get an empty alt
string with @-
(a command that
produces no output; see @- @hyphenation
).
For Info output, the alt
string is also processed as Texinfo
text and output. In this case, ‘\’ is escaped as ‘\\’ and
‘"’ as ‘\"’; no other escapes are done.
In Info output, makeinfo
writes a reference to the binary image
file (trying filename suffixed with extension,
.extension, .png, or .jpg, in that order)
if one exists. It also literally includes the .txt file if one
exists. This way, Info readers which can display images (such as the
Emacs Info browser, running under X) can do so, whereas Info readers
which can only use text (such as the standalone Info reader) can
display the textual version.
The implementation of this is to put the following construct into the Info output:
^@^H[image src="binaryfile" text="txtfile" alt="alttext ... ^@^H]
where ‘^@’ and ‘^H’ stand for the actual null and backspace control characters. If one of the files is not present, the corresponding argument is omitted.
The reason for mentioning this here is that older Info browsers (this feature was introduced in Texinfo version 4.6) will display the above literally, which, although not pretty, should not be harmful.
Previous: Image Syntax, Up: Images [Contents][Index]
The optional width and height arguments to the
@image
command (see the previous section) specify the size to
which to scale the image. They are only taken into account in TeX.
If neither is specified, the image is presented in its natural size
(given in the file); if only one is specified, the other is scaled
proportionately; and if both are specified, both are respected, thus
likely distorting the original image by changing its aspect ratio.
The width and height may be specified using any valid TeX dimension, namely:
point (72.27pt = 1in)
pica (1pc = 12pt)
big point (72bp = 1in)
inch
centimeter (2.54cm = 1in)
millimeter (10mm = 1cm)
didôt point (1157dd = 1238pt)
cicero (1cc = 12dd)
scaled point (65536sp = 1pt)
For example, the following will scale a file ridt.eps to one inch vertically, with the width scaled proportionately:
@image{ridt,,1in}
For @image
to work with TeX, the file epsf.tex must be
installed somewhere that TeX can find it. (The standard location is
texmf/tex/generic/dvips/epsf.tex, where texmf is a
root of your TeX directory tree.) This file is included in the
Texinfo distribution and is also available from
ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex, among other places.
@image
can be used within a line as well as for displayed
figures. Therefore, if you intend it to be displayed, be sure to leave
a blank line before the command, or the output will run into the
preceding text.
Image scaling is presently implemented only in TeX, not in HTML or any other sort of output.
Previous: Images, Up: Special Displays [Contents][Index]
A footnote is for a reference that documents or elucidates the primary text.4
Footnotes are distracting; use them sparingly at most, and it is best to avoid them completely. Standard bibliographical references are usually better placed in a bibliography at the end of a document instead of in footnotes throughout.
• Footnote Commands: | How to write a footnote in Texinfo. | |
• Footnote Styles: | Controlling how footnotes appear in Info. |
Next: Footnote Styles, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
In Texinfo, footnotes are created with the @footnote
command.
This command is followed immediately by a left brace, then by the text
of the footnote, and then by a terminating right brace. Footnotes may
be of any length (they will be broken across pages if necessary), but
are usually short. The template is:
ordinary text@footnote{text of footnote}
As shown here, the @footnote
command should come right after the
text being footnoted, with no intervening space; otherwise, the footnote
marker might end up starting a line.
For example, this clause is followed by a sample footnote5; in the Texinfo source, it looks like this:
…a sample footnote@footnote{Here is the sample footnote.}; in the Texinfo source…
As you can see, this source includes two punctuation marks next to each other; in this case, ‘.};’ is the sequence. This is normal (the first ends the footnote and the second belongs to the sentence being footnoted), so don’t worry that it looks odd. (Another style, perfectly acceptable, is to put the footnote after punctuation belonging to the sentence, as in ‘;@footnote{...’.)
In a printed manual or book, the reference mark for a footnote is a small, superscripted number; the text of the footnote appears at the bottom of the page, below a horizontal line.
In Info, the reference mark for a footnote is a pair of parentheses with the footnote number between them, like this: ‘(1)’. The reference mark is followed by a cross-reference link to the footnote text if footnotes are put in separate nodes (see Footnote Styles).
In the HTML output, footnote references are generally marked with a small, superscripted number which is rendered as a hypertext link to the footnote text.
Footnotes cannot be nested, and cannot appear in section headings of any kind or other “unusual” places.
A final tip: footnotes in the argument of an @item
command for
an @table
must be entirely on the same line as the
@item
(as usual). See Two-column Tables.
Previous: Footnote Commands, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
Info has two footnote styles, which determine where the text of the footnote is located:
Here is an example of the Info output for a single footnote in the end-of-node style:
--------- Footnotes --------- (1) Here is a sample footnote.
The name of the node with the footnotes is constructed by appending ‘-Footnotes’ to the name of the node that contains the footnotes. (Consequently, the footnotes’ node for the Footnotes node is Footnotes-Footnotes!) The footnotes’ node has an ‘Up’ node pointer that leads back to its parent node.
Here is how the first footnote in this manual looks after being formatted for Info in the separate node style:
File: texinfo.info Node: Overview-Footnotes, Up: Overview (1) The first syllable of "Texinfo" is pronounced like "speck", not "hex". …
Unless your document has long and important footnotes (as in, say, Gibbon’s Decline and Fall …), we recommend the ‘end’ style, as it is simpler for readers to follow.
Use the @footnotestyle
command to specify an Info file’s
footnote style. Write this command at the beginning of a line followed
by an argument, either ‘end’ for the end node style or
‘separate’ for the separate node style.
For example,
@footnotestyle end
or
@footnotestyle separate
Write a @footnotestyle
command before or shortly after the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file. (You should
include any @footnotestyle
command between the start-of-header
and end-of-header lines, so the region formatting commands will format
footnotes as specified.)
In HTML, when the footnote style is ‘end’, or if the output is not split, footnotes are put at the end of the output. If set to ‘separate’, and the output is split, they are placed in a separate file.
Next: Insertions, Previous: Special Displays, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Using Texinfo, you can generate indices without having to sort and collate entries manually. In an index, the entries are listed in alphabetical order, together with information on how to find the discussion of each entry. In a printed manual, this information consists of page numbers. In an Info file, this information is a menu entry leading to the first node referenced.
Texinfo provides several predefined kinds of index: an index for functions, an index for variables, an index for concepts, and so on. You can combine indices or use them for other than their canonical purpose. Lastly, you can define your own new indices.
• Predefined Indices: | Use different indices for different kinds of entries. | |
• Indexing Commands: | How to make an index entry. | |
• Index Entries: | Choose different words for index entries. | |
• Printing Indices & Menus: | How to print an index in hardcopy and generate index menus in Info. | |
• Combining Indices: | How to combine indices. | |
• New Indices: | How to define your own indices. |
Next: Indexing Commands, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
Texinfo provides six predefined indices. Here are their nominal meanings, abbreviations, and the corresponding index entry commands:
(@cindex
) concept index, for general concepts.
(@findex
) function index, for function and function-like
names (such as entry points of libraries).
(@kindex
) keystroke index, for keyboard commands.
(@pindex
) program index, for names of programs.
(@tindex
) data type index, for type names (such as structures
defined in header files).
(@vindex
) variable index, for variable names (such as global
variables of libraries).
Not every manual needs all of these, and most manuals use only two or three at most. The present manual, for example, has two indices: a concept index and an @-command index (that is actually the function index but is called a command index in the chapter heading).
You are not required to use the predefined indices strictly for their
canonical purposes. For example, suppose you wish to index some C
preprocessor macros. You could put them in the function index along
with actual functions, just by writing @findex
commands for
them; then, when you print the “Function Index” as an unnumbered
chapter, you could give it the title ‘Function and Macro Index’ and
all will be consistent for the reader.
On the other hand, it is best not to stray too far from the meaning of the predefined indices. Otherwise, in the event that your text is combined with other text from other manuals, the index entries will not match up. Instead, define your own new index (see New Indices).
We recommend having a single index in the final document whenever
possible, however many source indices you use, since then readers have
only one place to look. Two or more source indices can be combined
into one output index using the @synindex
or
@syncodeindex
commands (see Combining Indices).
Next: Index Entries, Previous: Predefined Indices, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
The data to make an index come from many individual indexing commands scattered throughout the Texinfo source file. Each command says to add one entry to a particular index; after formatting, the index will give the current page number or node name as the reference.
An index entry consists of an indexing command at the beginning of a line followed, on the rest of the line, by the entry.
For example, this section begins with the following five entries for the concept index:
@cindex Defining indexing entries @cindex Index entries, defining @cindex Entries for an index @cindex Specifying index entries @cindex Creating index entries
Each predefined index has its own indexing command—@cindex
for the concept index, @findex
for the function index, and so
on, as listed in the previous section.
Index entries should precede the visible material that is being indexed. For instance:
@cindex hello Hello, there!
Among other reasons, that way following indexing links (in whatever context) ends up before the material, where readers want to be, instead of after.
By default, entries for a concept index are printed in a small roman
font and entries for the other indices are printed in a small
@code
font. You may change the way part of an entry is
printed with the usual Texinfo commands, such as @file
for
file names (see Marking Text), and @r
for the normal roman
font (see Fonts).
For the printed output, you may specify an explicit sort key for an
index entry using @sortas
immediately following the index
command. For example: ‘@findex @sortas{\} \ @r{(literal
\ in @code{@@math})’ sorts the index entry this produces under
backslash.
To reduce the quantity of sort keys you need to provide explicitly,
you may choose to ignore certain characters in index entries
for the purposes of sorting. The characters that you can
currently choose to ignore are ‘\’, ‘-’, ‘<’
and ‘@’, which are ignored by giving as an argument to the
@set
command, respectively, txiindexbackslashignore
,
txiindexhyphenignore
, txiindexlessthanignore
and
txiindexatsignignore
. For example, specifying ‘@set
txiindexbackslashignore’ causes the ‘\mathopsup’ entry in the
index for this manual to be sorted as if it were ‘mathopsup’,
so that it appears among the other entries beginning ‘M’.
Caution: Do not use a colon in an index entry. In Info, a colon separates the menu entry name from the node name, so a colon in the entry itself confuses Info. See Menu Parts, for more information about the structure of a menu entry.
Next: Printing Indices & Menus, Previous: Indexing Commands, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
Concept index entries consist of text. The best way to write an index is to devise entries which are terse yet clear. If you can do this, the index usually looks better if the entries are written just as they would appear in the middle of a sentence, that is, capitalizing only proper names and acronyms that always call for uppercase letters. This is the case convention we use in most GNU manuals’ indices.
If you don’t see how to make an entry terse yet clear, make it longer and clear—not terse and confusing. If many of the entries are several words long, the index may look better if you use a different convention: to capitalize the first word of each entry. Whichever case convention you use, use it consistently.
In any event, do not ever capitalize a case-sensitive name such as a C or Lisp function name or a shell command; that would be a spelling error. Entries in indices other than the concept index are symbol names in programming languages, or program names; these names are usually case-sensitive, so likewise use upper- and lowercase as required.
It is a good idea to make index entries unique wherever feasible. That way, people using the printed output or online completion of index entries don’t see undifferentiated lists. Consider this an opportunity to make otherwise-identical index entries be more specific, so readers can more easily find the exact place they are looking for.
When you are making index entries, it is good practice to think of the different ways people may look for something. Different people do not think of the same words when they look something up. A helpful index will have items indexed under all the different words that people may use. For example, one reader may think it obvious that the two-letter names for indices should be listed under “Indices, two-letter names, since “Indices” are the general concept. But another reader may remember the specific concept of two-letter names and search for the entry listed as “Two letter names for indices”. A good index will have both entries and will help both readers.
Like typesetting, the construction of an index is a skilled art, the subtleties of which may not be appreciated until you need to do it yourself.
Next: Combining Indices, Previous: Index Entries, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
To print an index means to include it as part of a manual or Info file.
This does not happen automatically just because you use @cindex
or other index-entry generating commands in the Texinfo file; those just
cause the raw data for the index to be accumulated. To generate an
index, you must include the @printindex
command at the place in
the document where you want the index to appear. Also, as part of the
process of creating a printed manual, you must run a program called
texindex
(see Hardcopy) to sort the raw data to produce a
sorted index file. The sorted index file is what is actually used to
print the index.
Texinfo offers six separate types of predefined index, which suffice
in most cases. See Indices, for information on this, as well
defining your own new indices, combining indices, and, most
importantly advice on writing the actual index entries. This section
focuses on printing indices, which is done with the
@printindex
command.
@printindex
takes one argument, a two-letter index
abbreviation. It reads the corresponding sorted index file (for
printed output), and formats it appropriately into an index.
The @printindex
command does not generate a chapter heading
for the index, since different manuals have different needs.
Consequently, you should precede the @printindex
command with
a suitable section or chapter command (usually @appendix
or
@unnumbered
) to supply the chapter heading and put the index
into the table of contents. Precede the chapter heading with an
@node
line as usual.
For example:
@node Variable Index @unnumbered Variable Index @printindex vr
@node Concept Index @unnumbered Concept Index @printindex cp
If you have more than one index, we recommend placing the concept index last.
@printindex
produces a traditional
two-column index, with dot leaders between the index terms and page
numbers.
@printindex
produces a special menu containing
the line number of the entry, relative to the start of the node. Info
readers can use this to go to the exact line of an entry, not just the
containing node. (Older Info readers will just go to the node.)
Here’s an example:
* First index entry: Top. (line 7)
The actual number of spaces is variable, to right-justify the line number; it’s been reduced here to make the line fit in the printed manual.
@printindex
produces the same menu, but
the line numbers are relative to the start of the file, since that’s
more convenient for that format.
@printindex
produces links to the index
entries.
Next: New Indices, Previous: Printing Indices & Menus, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
Sometimes you will want to combine two disparate indices such as functions and concepts, perhaps because you have few enough entries that a separate index would look silly.
You could put functions into the concept index by writing
@cindex
commands for them instead of @findex
commands,
and produce a consistent manual by printing the concept index with the
title ‘Function and Concept Index’ and not printing the ‘Function
Index’ at all; but this is not a robust procedure. It works only if
your document is never included as part of another document that is
designed to have a separate function index; if your document were to
be included with such a document, the functions from your document and
those from the other would not end up together. Also, to make your
function names appear in the right font in the concept index, you
would need to enclose every one of them between the braces of
@code
.
• @syncodeindex : | How to merge two indices, using @code
font for the merged-from index.
| |
• @synindex : | How to merge two indices, using the roman font for the merged-from index. |
Next: @synindex
, Up: Combining Indices [Contents][Index]
@syncodeindex
: Combining indices using @code
When you want to combine functions and concepts into one index, you
should index the functions with @findex
and index the concepts
with @cindex
, and use the @syncodeindex
command to
redirect the function index entries into the concept index.
The @syncodeindex
command takes two arguments; they are the name
of the index to redirect, and the name of the index to redirect it to.
The template looks like this:
@syncodeindex from to
For this purpose, the indices are given two-letter names:
concept index
function index
variable index
key index
program index
data type index
Write a @syncodeindex
command before or shortly after the
end-of-header line at the beginning of a Texinfo file. For example,
to merge a function index with a concept index, write the
following:
@syncodeindex fn cp
This will cause all entries designated for the function index to merge in with the concept index instead.
To merge both a variables index and a function index into a concept index, write the following:
@syncodeindex vr cp @syncodeindex fn cp
The @syncodeindex
command puts all the entries from the ‘from’
index (the redirected index) into the @code
font, overriding
whatever default font is used by the index to which the entries are
now directed. This way, if you direct function names from a function
index into a concept index, all the function names are printed in the
@code
font as you would expect.
Previous: @syncodeindex
, Up: Combining Indices [Contents][Index]
@synindex
: Combining indicesThe @synindex
command is nearly the same as the
@syncodeindex
command, except that it does not put the ‘from’
index entries into the @code
font; rather it puts them in the
roman font. Thus, you use @synindex
when you merge a concept
index into a function index.
See Printing Indices & Menus, for information about printing an index at the end of a book or creating an index menu in an Info file.
Previous: Combining Indices, Up: Indices [Contents][Index]
In addition to the predefined indices (see Predefined Indices),
you may use the @defindex
and @defcodeindex
commands
to define new indices. These commands create new indexing @-commands
with which you mark index entries. The @defindex
command is
used like this:
@defindex name
New index names are usually two-letter words, such as ‘au’. For example:
@defindex au
This defines a new index, called the ‘au’ index. At the same
time, it creates a new indexing command, @auindex
, that you
can use to make index entries. Use this new indexing command just as
you would use a predefined indexing command.
For example, here is a section heading followed by a concept index entry and two ‘au’ index entries.
@section Cognitive Semantics @cindex kinesthetic image schemas @auindex Johnson, Mark @auindex Lakoff, George
(Evidently, ‘au’ serves here as an abbreviation for “author”.)
Texinfo constructs the new indexing command by concatenating the name
of the index with ‘index’; thus, defining an ‘xy’ index
leads to the automatic creation of an @xyindex
command.
Use the @printindex
command to print the index, as you do with
the predefined indices. For example:
@node Author Index @unnumbered Author Index @printindex au
The @defcodeindex
is like the @defindex
command,
except that, in the printed output, it prints entries in an
@code
font by default instead of a roman font.
You should define new indices before the end-of-header line of a
Texinfo file, and (of course) before any @synindex
or
@syncodeindex
commands (see Texinfo File Header).
As mentioned earlier (see Predefined Indices), we recommend having a single index in the final document whenever possible, however many source indices you use, since then readers have only one place to look.
When creating an index, TeX creates a file whose extension is the
name of the index (see Names of index files). Therefore you
should avoid using index names that collide with extensions used for
other purposes, such as ‘.aux’ or ‘.xml’.
makeinfo
already reports an error if a new index conflicts
well-known extension name.
Texinfo provides several commands for inserting characters that have special meaning in Texinfo, such as braces, and for other graphic elements that do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
• Special Characters: | Inserting @ {} , \ # | |
• Inserting Quote Characters: | Inserting left and right quotes, in code. | |
• Inserting Space: | Inserting the right amount of whitespace. | |
• Inserting Accents: | Inserting accents and special characters. | |
• Inserting Quotation Marks: | Inserting quotation marks. | |
• Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts: | Inserting sub/superscripts. | |
• Inserting Math: | Formatting mathematical expressions. | |
• Glyphs for Text: | Inserting dots, bullets, currencies, etc. | |
• Glyphs for Programming: | Indicating results of evaluation, expansion of macros, errors, etc. | |
• Inserting Unicode: | Inserting a Unicode character by code point. |
Next: Inserting Quote Characters, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
‘@’ and curly braces are the basic special characters in Texinfo. To insert these characters so they appear in text, you must put an ‘@’ in front of these characters to prevent Texinfo from misinterpreting them. Alphabetic commands are also provided.
The other characters (comma, backslash, hash) are special only in restricted contexts, as explained in the respective sections.
• Inserting an Atsign: | @@ , @atchar{} .
| |
• Inserting Braces: | @{ @} , @l rbracechar{} .
| |
• Inserting a Comma: | , and @comma{} .
| |
• Inserting a Backslash: | \ and @backslashchar{} .
| |
• Inserting a Hashsign: | # and @hashchar{} .
|
Next: Inserting Braces, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
@@
and @atchar{}
@@
produces a single ‘@’ character in the output. Do
not put braces after an @@
command.
@atchar{}
also produces a single ‘@’ character in the
output. It does need following braces, as usual for alphabetic
commands. In inline conditionals (see Inline Conditionals), it
can be necessary to avoid using the literal ‘@’ character in the
source (and may be clearer in other contexts).
Next: Inserting a Comma, Previous: Inserting an Atsign, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
@{ @}
and @l rbracechar{}
@{
produces a single ‘{’ in the output, and @}
produces a single ‘}’. Do not put braces after either an
@{
or an @}
command.
@lbracechar{}
and @rbracechar{}
also produce
single ‘{’ and ‘}’ characters in the output. They do need
following braces, as usual for alphabetic commands. In inline
conditionals (see Inline Conditionals), it can be
necessary to avoid using literal brace characters in the source (and
may be clearer in other contexts).
Next: Inserting a Backslash, Previous: Inserting Braces, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
@comma{}
Ordinarily, a comma ‘,’ is a normal character that can be simply typed in your input where you need it.
However, Texinfo uses the comma as a special character only in one
context: to separate arguments to those Texinfo commands, such as
@acronym
(see @acronym
) and @xref
(see Cross References), as well as user-defined macros
(see Defining Macros), which take more than one argument.
Since a comma character would confuse Texinfo’s parsing for these commands, you must use the command ‘@comma{}’ instead if you want to pass an actual comma. Here are some examples:
@acronym{ABC, A Bizarre @comma{}} @xref{Comma,, The @comma{} symbol} @mymac{One argument@comma{} containing a comma}
Although ‘@comma{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it anywhere except in this unusual case.
(Incidentally, the name ‘@comma’ lacks the ‘char’ suffix used in its companion commands only for historical reasons. It didn’t seem important enough to define a synonym.)
Next: Inserting a Hashsign, Previous: Inserting a Comma, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
@backslashchar{}
Ordinarily, a backslash ‘\’ is a normal character in Texinfo that can be simply typed in your input where you need it. The result is to typeset the backslash from the typewriter font.
However, Texinfo uses the backslash as a special character in one restricted context: to delimit formal arguments in the bodies of user-defined macros (see Defining Macros).
Due to the vagaries of macro argument parsing, it is more reliable to
pass an alphabetic command that produces a backslash instead of using
a literal \. Hence @backslashchar{}
. Here is an example
macro call:
@mymac{One argument@backslashchar{} with a backslash}
Texinfo documents may also use \ as a command character inside
@math
(see Inserting Math). In this case, @\
or
\backslash
produces a “math” backslash (from the math symbol
font), while @backslashchar{}
produces a typewriter
backslash as usual.
Although ‘@backslashchar{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it except in these unusual cases.
Previous: Inserting a Backslash, Up: Special Characters [Contents][Index]
@hashchar{}
Ordinarily, a hash ‘#’ is a normal character in Texinfo that can be simply typed in your input where you need it. The result is to typeset the hash character from the current font.
This character has many other names, varying by locale, such as “number sign”, “pound”, and “octothorp”. It is also sometimes called “sharp” or “sharp sign” since it vaguely resembles the musical symbol by that name. In situations where Texinfo is used, “hash” is the most common in our experience.
However, Texinfo uses the hash character as a special character in one
restricted context: to introduce the so-called #line
directive
and variants (see External Macro Processors).
So, in order to typeset an actual hash character in such a place (for
example, in a program that needs documentation about #line
),
it’s necessary to use @hashchar{}
or some other construct.
Here’s an example:
@hashchar{} 10 "example.c"
Although ‘@hashchar{}’ can be used nearly anywhere, there is no need for it anywhere except this unusual case.
Next: Inserting Space, Previous: Special Characters, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
As explained in the early section on general Texinfo input conventions
(see Conventions), Texinfo source files use the ASCII character
`
(96 decimal) to produce a left quote (‘), and ASCII '
(39 decimal) to produce a right quote (’). Doubling these input
characters (``
and ''
) produces double quotes (“ and
”). These are the conventions used by TeX.
This works all right for text. However, in examples of computer code,
readers are especially likely to cut and paste the text
verbatim—and, unfortunately, some document viewers will mangle these
characters. (The free PDF reader xpdf
works fine, but other
PDF readers, both free and nonfree, have problems.)
If this is a concern for you, Texinfo provides these two commands:
@codequoteundirected on-off
causes the output for the '
character in code environments to
be the undirected single quote, like this:
'
.
@codequotebacktick on-off
causes the output for the `
character in code environments to
be the backtick character (standalone grave accent), like this:
`
.
If you want these settings for only part of the document,
@codequote... off
will restore the normal behavior, as in
@codequoteundirected off
.
These settings affect @code
, @example
, @kbd
,
@samp
, @verb
, and @verbatim
. See Useful Highlighting.
This feature used to be controlled by using @set
to change the
values of the corresponding variables txicodequoteundirected
and txicodequotebacktick
; they are still supported, but the
command interface is preferred.
Next: Inserting Accents, Previous: Inserting Quote Characters, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
The following sections describe commands that control spacing of various kinds within and after sentences.
• Multiple Spaces: | Inserting multiple spaces. | |
• Not Ending a Sentence: | Sometimes a . doesn’t end a sentence. | |
• Ending a Sentence: | Sometimes it does. | |
• @frenchspacing : | Specifying end-of-sentence spacing. | |
• @dmn : | Formatting a dimension. |
Next: Not Ending a Sentence, Up: Inserting Space [Contents][Index]
Ordinarily, multiple whitespace characters (space, tab, and newline) are collapsed into a single space.
Occasionally, you may want to produce several consecutive spaces,
either for purposes of example (e.g., what your program does with
multiple spaces as input), or merely for purposes of appearance in
headings or lists. Texinfo supports three commands:
@SPACE
, @TAB
, and @NL
, all
of which insert a single space into the output. (Here,
@SPACE
represents an ‘@’ character followed by a
space, i.e., ‘@ ’, TAB represents an actual tab character,
and @NL
represents an ‘@’ character and end-of-line,
i.e., when ‘@’ is the last character on a line.)
For example,
Spacey@ @ @ @ example.
produces
Spacey example.
Other possible uses of @SPACE
have been subsumed by
@multitable
(see Multi-column Tables).
Do not follow any of these commands with braces.
To produce a non-breakable space, see @tie
.
Next: Ending a Sentence, Previous: Multiple Spaces, Up: Inserting Space [Contents][Index]
When a period, exclamation point or question mark is at the end of a sentence, slightly more space is inserted after it in a typeset manual.
Usually, Texinfo can determine automatically when a period ends a
sentence. However, special commands are needed in some circumstances.
Use the @:
command after a period, question mark, exclamation
mark or colon that should not be followed by extra space. This is
necessary in the following situations:
@:
should be used after the right parenthesis. Similarly for
right brackets and right quotes (both single and double).
For example:
‘foo vs.@: bar (or?)@: baz’,
The first line below shows the output, and for comparison, the second line shows the spacing when the ‘@:’ commands were not used.
foo vs. bar (or?) baz
foo vs. bar (or?) baz
It may help you to remember what @:
does by imagining that it
stands for an invisible lower-case character that stops a word ending in
a period.
A few Texinfo commands force normal interword spacing, so that you
don’t have to insert @:
where you otherwise would. These are
the code-like highlighting commands, @var
, @abbr
, and
@acronym
(see Useful Highlighting). For example, in
‘@code{foo. bar}’ the period is not considered to be the end of a
sentence, and no extra space is inserted.
@:
has no effect on the HTML or Docbook output.
Next: @frenchspacing
, Previous: Not Ending a Sentence, Up: Inserting Space [Contents][Index]
As mentioned above, Texinfo normally inserts additional space after the end of a sentence. It uses the same heuristic for this as TeX: a sentence ends with a period, exclamation point, or question mark, either preceded or followed by optional closing punctuation, and then whitespace, and not preceded by a capital letter.
Use @.
instead of a period, @!
instead of an
exclamation point, and @?
instead of a question mark at the
end of a sentence that does end with a capital letter. Do not put
braces after any of these commands. For example:
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W@. Also, give it to R.J.C@. Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
The output follows. In printed output and Info, you can see the desired extra whitespace after the ‘W’ in the first line.
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
Give it to M.I.B. and to M.E.W. Also, give it to R.J.C.
In the HTML output, @.
is equivalent to a simple ‘.’;
likewise for @!
and @?
.
The “closing punctuation” mentioned above is defined as a right parenthesis (‘)’, right bracket (‘]’), or right quote, either single or double (‘'’ and ‘''’; the many possible additional Unicode right quotes are not included). These characters can be thought of as invisible with respect to whether a given period ends a sentence. (This is the same rule as TeX.) For instance, the periods in ‘foo.) Bar’ and ‘foo.'' Bar’ do end sentences.
The meanings of @:
and @.
, etc. in Texinfo are
designed to work well with the Emacs sentence motion commands
(see Sentences in The GNU Emacs Manual). It may help to
imagine that the ‘@’ in ‘@.’, etc., is an invisible
lower-case letter ‘a’ which makes an upper-case letter before it
immaterial for the purposes of deciding whether the period ends the
sentence.
A few Texinfo commands are not considered as being an abbreviation,
even though they may end with a capital letter when expanded, so that
you don’t have to insert @.
and companions. Notably, this is
the case for code-like highlighting commands, @var
arguments
ending with a capital letter, @LaTeX
, and @TeX
. For
example, that sentence ended with ‘... @code{@@TeX}.’;
@.
was not needed. Similarly, in
... @var{VARNAME}. Text
the period after VARNAME ends
the sentence; there is no need to use @.
.
Next: @dmn
, Previous: Ending a Sentence, Up: Inserting Space [Contents][Index]
@frenchspacing
val: Control Sentence SpacingIn American typography, it is traditional and correct to put extra space at the end of a sentence. This is the default in Texinfo (implemented in Info and printed output; for HTML, we don’t try to override the browser). In French typography (and others), this extra space is wrong; all spaces are uniform.
Therefore Texinfo provides the @frenchspacing
command to
control the spacing after punctuation. It reads the rest of the line
as its argument, which must be the single word ‘on’ or ‘off’
(always these words, regardless of the language of the document).
Here is an example:
@frenchspacing on This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. French spacing. @frenchspacing off This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. Non-French spacing.
produces:
This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. French spacing.
This is text. Two sentences. Three sentences. Non-French spacing.
@frenchspacing
also affects the output after @.
,
@!
, and @?
(see Ending a Sentence).
@frenchspacing
has no effect on the HTML or Docbook output;
for XML, it outputs a transliteration of itself (see Output Formats).
Previous: @frenchspacing
, Up: Inserting Space [Contents][Index]
@dmn
{dimension}: Format a DimensionYou can use the @dmn
command to format a dimension with a
little extra space in the printed output. That is, on seeing
@dmn
, TeX inserts just enough space for proper typesetting;
in other output formats, the formatting commands insert no space at
all.
To use the @dmn
command, write the number and then follow it
immediately, with no intervening space, by @dmn
, and then by
the dimension within braces. For example,
A4 paper is 8.27@dmn{in} wide.
produces
A4 paper is 8.27in wide.
Not everyone uses this style. Some people prefer ‘8.27 in.’ or
‘8.27 inches’. In these cases, however, you need to use
@tie
(see @tie
) or @w
(see @w
)
so that no line break can occur between the number and the dimension.
Also, if you write a period after an abbreviation within a sentence
(as with the ‘in.’ above), you should write ‘@:’ after the
period to prevent TeX from inserting extra whitespace, as shown
here. See Not Ending a Sentence.
Next: Inserting Quotation Marks, Previous: Inserting Space, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
Here is a table with the commands Texinfo provides for inserting
floating accents. They all need an argument, the character to accent,
which can either be given in braces as usual (@'{e}
), or, as
a special case, the braces can be omitted, in which case the argument
is the next character (@'e
). This is to make the source as
convenient as possible to type and read, since accented characters are
very common in some languages.
If the command is alphabetic, such as @dotaccent
, then there
must be a space between the command name and argument if braces are
not used. If the command is non-alphabetic, such as @'
, then
there must not be a space; the argument is the very next
character.
Exception: the argument to @tieaccent
must be enclosed in
braces (since it is two characters instead of one).
To get the true accented characters output in Info, not just the ASCII
transliterations, it is necessary to specify @documentencoding
with an encoding which supports the required characters
(see @documentencoding
). In this case, you can also use
non-ASCII (e.g., pre-accented) characters in the source file.
Command | Output | What |
---|---|---|
@"o | ö | umlaut accent |
@'o | ó | acute accent |
@,{c} | ç | cedilla accent |
@=o | ō | macron/overbar accent |
@^o | ô | circumflex accent |
@`o | ò | grave accent |
@~o | õ | tilde accent |
@dotaccent{o} | ȯ | overdot accent |
@H{o} | ő | long Hungarian umlaut |
@ogonek{a} | ą | ogonek |
@ringaccent{o} | o* | ring accent |
@tieaccent{oo} | oo[ | tie-after accent |
@u{o} | ŏ | breve accent |
@ubaraccent{o} | o_ | underbar accent |
@udotaccent{o} | ọ | underdot accent |
@v{o} | ǒ | caron/hacek/check accent |
This table lists the Texinfo commands for inserting other characters commonly used in languages other than English.
@exclamdown{} | ¡ | upside-down ! |
@questiondown{} | ¿ | upside-down ? |
@aa{} @AA{} | å Å | a,A with circle |
@ae{} @AE{} | æ Æ | ae,AE ligatures |
@dh{} @DH{} | ð Ð | Icelandic eth |
@dotless{i} | i | dotless i |
@dotless{j} | j | dotless j |
@l{} @L{} | ł Ł | suppressed-L,l |
@o{} @O{} | ø Ø | O,o with slash |
@oe{} @OE{} | œ Œ | oe,OE ligatures |
@ordf{} @ordm{} | ª º | Spanish ordinals |
@ss{} | ß | es-zet or sharp S |
@th{} @TH{} | þ Þ | Icelandic thorn |
Next: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts, Previous: Inserting Accents, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
Use doubled single-quote characters to begin and end quotations: ``…''. TeX converts two single quotes to left- and right-hand doubled quotation marks, and Info converts doubled single-quote characters to ASCII double-quotes: ``…'' becomes "…".
You may occasionally need to produce two consecutive single quotes;
for example, in documenting a computer language such as Maxima where
'' is a valid command. You can do this with the input
'@w{}'; the empty @w
command stops the combination into
the double-quote characters.
The left quote character (`, ASCII code 96) used in Texinfo is a grave accent in ANSI and ISO character set standards. We use it as a quote character because that is how TeX is set up, by default.
Texinfo supports several other quotation marks used in languages other than English. Below is a table with the commands Texinfo provides for inserting quotation marks.
In order to get the symbols for the quotation marks in encoded Info
output, it is necessary to specify @documentencoding UTF-8
.
(See @documentencoding
.) Double guillemets are also
present in ISO 8859-1 (aka Latin 1) and ISO 8859-15 (aka
Latin 9).
The standard TeX fonts support the usual quotation marks used in English (the ones produced with single and doubled ASCII single-quotes). For the other quotation marks, TeX uses European Computer Modern (EC) fonts (ecrm1000 and other variants). These fonts are freely available, of course; you can download them from http://ctan.org/pkg/ec, among other places.
The free EC fonts are bitmap fonts created with Metafont. Especially for on-line viewing, Type 1 (vector) versions of the fonts are preferable; these are available in the CM-Super font package (http://ctan.org/pkg/cm-super).
Both distributions include installation instructions.
Command | Glyph | Unicode name (point) |
---|---|---|
@quotedblleft{} `` | “ | Left double quotation mark (U+201C) |
@quotedblright{} '' | ” | Right double quotation mark (U+201D) |
@quoteleft{} ` | ‘ | Left single quotation mark (U+2018) |
@quoteright{} ' | ’ | Right single quotation mark (U+2019) |
@quotedblbase{} | „ | Double low-9 quotation mark (U+201E) |
@quotesinglbase{} | ‚ | Single low-9 quotation mark (U+201A) |
@guillemetleft{} | « | Left-pointing double angle quotation mark (U+00AB) |
@guillemetright{} | » | Right-pointing double angle quotation mark (U+00BB) |
@guilsinglleft{} | ‹ | Single left-pointing angle quotation mark (U+2039) |
@guilsinglright{} | › | Single right-pointing angle quotation mark (U+203A) |
For the double angle quotation marks, Adobe and LaTeX glyph names
are also supported: @guillemotleft
and
@guillemotright
. These names are incorrect; a
“guillemot” is a bird species (a type of auk).
Traditions for quotation mark usage vary to a great extent between
languages (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark).
Texinfo does not provide commands or configurations for typesetting
quotation marks according to the numerous traditions. Therefore, you
have to choose the commands appropriate for the language of your
manual. Sometimes aliases (see @alias
) can simplify the
usage and make the source code more readable. For example, in German,
@quotedblbase
is used for the left double quote, and the right
double quote is the glyph produced by @quotedblleft
, which is
counter-intuitive. Thus, in this case the following aliases would be
convenient:
@alias lgqq = quotedblbase @alias rgqq = quotedblleft
Next: Inserting Math, Previous: Inserting Quotation Marks, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
@sub
and @sup
: Inserting Subscripts and SuperscriptsYou can insert subscripts and superscripts, in either text or math,
with the @sub
and @sup
commands. (For other
mathematical expressions, see the next section.) For example, here is
a purely textual subscript and superscript:
here@sub{below}@sup{above}
produces:
herebelowabove
Inside @math
, @sub
and @sup
produce
mathematical subscripts and superscripts. This uses a different font
in the TeX output (math italic instead of text italic); it makes no
difference in the other output formats. Here’s an example:
@math{e@sup{x}}
produces:
ex
In Info and plain text, regardless of being used inside @math
,
@sub{text}
is output as ‘_{text}’ and
@sup{text}
as ‘^{text}’, including the
literal braces (to mark the beginning and end of the “script” text
to the reader).
When the output format (and display program) permit (TeX math, HTML), the superscript is set above the subscript when both commands are given consecutively.
Next: Glyphs for Text, Previous: Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
@math
: Inserting Mathematical ExpressionsYou can write a short mathematical expression with the @math
command. Write the mathematical expression between braces, like this:
@math{(a + b) = (b + a)}
This produces the following in Info and HTML:
(a + b) = (b + a)
The @math
command has no special effect on the Info and HTML
output. makeinfo
expands any @-commands as usual, but it
does not try to use produce good mathematical formatting in any way
(no use of MathML, etc.). The HTML output is enclosed by
<em>...</em>
, but nothing more.
However, as far as the TeX output is concerned, plain TeX
mathematical commands are allowed in @math
, starting with
‘\’. In essence, @math
switches into plain TeX math
mode. (Exception: the plain TeX command \sup
, which
typesets the mathematical operator name ‘sup’, must be accessed as
\mathopsup
, due to the conflict with Texinfo’s @sup
command.)
This allows you to use all the plain TeX math control sequences for symbols, functions, and so on, and thus get proper formatting in the TeX output, at least.
The @sub
and @sup
commands described in the previous
section produce subscripts and superscripts in HTML output as well as
TeX; the plain TeX characters _
and ^
for
subscripts and superscripts are recognized by TeX inside
@math
, but do nothing special in HTML or other output formats.
It’s best to use ‘\’ instead of ‘@’ for any such
mathematical commands; otherwise, makeinfo
will complain.
On the other hand, makeinfo
does allow input with matching
(but unescaped) braces, such as ‘k_{75}’; it complains about
such bare braces in regular input.
Here’s an example:
@math{\sin 2\pi \equiv \cos 3\pi}
which looks like the input in Info and HTML:
\sin 2\pi \equiv \cos 3\pi
Since ‘\’ is an escape character inside @math
, you can
use @\
to get a literal backslash (\\
will work in
TeX, but you’d get the literal two characters ‘\\’ in Info).
@\
is not defined outside of @math
, since a ‘\’
ordinarily produces a literal (typewriter) ‘\’. You can also use
@backslashchar{}
in any mode to get a typewriter backslash.
See Inserting a Backslash.
For displayed equations, you must at present use TeX directly (see Raw Formatter Commands).
Next: Glyphs for Programming, Previous: Inserting Math, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has support for a few additional glyphs that are commonly used
in printed text but not available in ASCII. Of course, there are
many thousands more. It is possible to use Unicode characters as-is
as far as makeinfo
is concerned, but TeX is not so lucky.
• @TeX @LaTeX : | The TeX logos. | |
• @copyright : | The copyright symbol (c in a circle). | |
• @registeredsymbol : | The registered symbol (R in a circle). | |
• @dots : | How to insert ellipses: … and ... | |
• @bullet : | How to insert a bullet: • | |
• @euro : | How to insert the euro currency symbol. | |
• @pounds : | How to insert the pounds currency symbol. | |
• @textdegree : | How to insert the degrees symbol. | |
• @minus : | How to insert a minus sign. | |
• @geq @leq : | How to insert greater/less-than-or-equal signs. |
Next: @copyright
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@TeX
{} (TeX) and @LaTeX
{} (LaTeX)Use the @TeX{}
command to generate ‘TeX’. In a printed
manual, this is a special logo that is different from three ordinary
letters. In Info, it just looks like ‘TeX’.
Similarly, use the @LaTeX{}
command to generate ‘LaTeX’,
which is even more special in printed manuals (and different from the
incorrect La@TeX{}
. In Info, the result is just
‘LaTeX’. (LaTeX is another macro package built on top of
TeX, very loosely analogous to Texinfo in that it emphasizes
logical structure, but much (much) larger.)
The spelling of these commands are unusual for Texinfo, in that they use both uppercase and lowercase letters.
Next: @registeredsymbol
, Previous: @TeX @LaTeX
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@copyright{}
(©)Use the @copyright{}
command to generate the copyright
symbol, ‘©’. Where possible, this is a ‘c’ inside a
circle; in Info, this is ‘(C)’.
Legally, it’s not necessary to use the copyright symbol; the English word ‘Copyright’ suffices, according to international treaty.
Next: @dots
, Previous: @copyright
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@registeredsymbol{}
(®)Use the @registeredsymbol{}
command to generate the
registered symbol, ‘®’. Where possible, this is an
‘R’ inside a circle; in Info, this is ‘(R)’.
Next: @bullet
, Previous: @registeredsymbol
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@dots
(…) and @enddots
(...)An ellipsis (a sequence of dots) would be spaced wrong when
typeset as a string of periods, so a special command is used in
Texinfo: use the @dots{}
command to generate a normal
ellipsis, which is three dots in a row, appropriately spaced …
like so. To emphasize: do not simply write three periods in the input
file; that would work for the Info file output, but would produce the
wrong amount of space between the periods in the printed manual.
The @enddots{}
command generates an end-of-sentence
ellipsis, which also has three dots, but with different spacing
afterwards, ... Look closely to see the difference.
Here is an ellipsis: … Here are three periods in a row: ...
In printed (and usually HTML) output, the three periods in a row are much closer together than the dots in the ellipsis.
Next: @euro
, Previous: @dots
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@bullet
(•)Use the @bullet{}
command to generate a large round dot, or
the closest possible thing to one. In Info, an asterisk is used.
Here is a bullet: •
When you use @bullet
in @itemize
, you do not need to
type the braces, because @itemize
supplies them.
(see @itemize
).
Next: @pounds
, Previous: @bullet
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@euro
(€): Euro Currency SymbolUse the @euro{}
command to generate ‘€’. Where
possible, this is the symbol for the Euro currency. Otherwise, the
word ‘Euro’ is used.
Texinfo cannot magically synthesize support for the Euro symbol where the underlying system (fonts, software, whatever) does not support it. Therefore, you may find it preferable to use the word “Euro”. (In banking contexts, the abbreviation for the Euro is EUR.)
In order to get the Euro symbol in encoded Info output, for example,
it is necessary to specify @documentencoding ISO-8859-15
or
@documentencoding UTF-8
(See @documentencoding
.)
The Euro symbol is in ISO 8859-15 (aka Latin 9), and is
not in the more widely-used ISO 8859-1 (Latin 1).
The Euro symbol does not exist in the standard TeX fonts (which
were designed before the Euro was legislated into existence).
Therefore, TeX uses an additional font, named feymr10
(along
with other variables). It is freely available, of course; you can
download it from http://ctan.org/pkg/eurosym, among other
places. The distribution includes installation instructions.
Next: @textdegree
, Previous: @euro
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@pounds
(£): Pounds SterlingUse the @pounds{}
command to generate ‘£’. Where
possible, this is the symbol for the pounds sterling British currency.
Otherwise, it is ‘#’.
Next: @minus
, Previous: @pounds
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@textdegree
(°): Degrees SymbolUse the @textdegree{}
command to generate ‘°’.
Where possible, this is the normal symbol for degrees. Otherwise,
it is an ‘o’.
Next: @geq @leq
, Previous: @textdegree
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@minus
(-): Inserting a Minus SignUse the @minus{}
command to generate a minus sign. In a
fixed-width font, this is a single hyphen, but in a proportional font,
the symbol is the customary length for a minus sign—a little longer
than a hyphen, shorter than an em-dash:
‘-’ is a minus sign generated with ‘@minus{}’, ‘-’ is a hyphen generated with the character ‘-’, ‘—’ is an em-dash for text.
In the fixed-width font used by Info, @minus{}
is the same
as a hyphen.
You should not use @minus{}
inside @code
or
@example
because the width distinction is not made in the
fixed-width font they use.
When you use @minus
to specify the mark beginning each entry
in an itemized list, you do not need to type the braces
(see @itemize
).
If you actually want to typeset some math that does a subtraction, it
is better to use @math
. Then the regular ‘-’ character
produces a minus sign, as in @math{a-b}
(see Inserting Math).
Previous: @minus
, Up: Glyphs for Text [Contents][Index]
@geq
(≥) and @leq
(≤): Inserting RelationsUse the @geq{}
and @leq{}
commands to generate
greater-than-or-equal and less-than-equal-signs, ‘≥’ and
‘≤’. When those symbols are not available, the ASCII sequences
‘>=’ and ‘<=’ are output.
Next: Inserting Unicode, Previous: Glyphs for Text, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
In Texinfo, code is often illustrated in examples that are delimited
by @example
and @end example
, or by @lisp
and
@end lisp
. In such examples, you can indicate the results of
evaluation or an expansion using ‘⇒’ or
‘→’. Likewise, there are commands to insert glyphs to
indicate printed output, error messages, equivalence of expressions,
the location of point in an editor, and GUI operation sequences.
The glyph-insertion commands do not need to be used within an example, but most often they are. All glyph-insertion commands are followed by empty braces.
• Glyphs Summary: | ||
• @result : | How to show the result of expression. | |
• @expansion : | How to indicate an expansion. | |
• @print : | How to indicate generated output. | |
• @error : | How to indicate an error message. | |
• @equiv : | How to indicate equivalence. | |
• @point : | How to indicate the location of point. | |
• Click Sequences: | Inserting GUI usage sequences. |
Next: @result
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
Here is a summary of the glyph commands:
@result{}
indicates the result of an expression.
@expansion{}
indicates the results of a macro expansion.
@print{}
indicates printed output.
@error{}
indicates the following text is an error message.
@equiv{}
indicates the exact equivalence of two forms.
@point{}
shows the location of point.
@clicksequence{A @click{} B
indicates a GUI operation
sequence: first A, then clicking B, or choosing B from a menu, or
otherwise selecting it.
Next: @expansion
, Previous: Glyphs Summary, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@result{}
(⇒): Result of an ExpressionUse the @result{}
command to indicate the result of
evaluating an expression.
The @result{}
command is displayed as ‘⇒’,
either a double stemmed arrow or (when that is not available) the
ASCII sequence ‘=>’.
Thus, the following,
(cdr '(1 2 3)) ⇒ (2 3)
may be read as “(cdr '(1 2 3))
evaluates to (2 3)
”.
Next: @print
, Previous: @result
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@expansion{}
(→): Indicating an ExpansionWhen an expression is a macro call, it expands into a new expression.
You can indicate the result of the expansion with the
@expansion{}
command.
The @expansion{}
command is displayed as
‘→’, either a long arrow with a flat base or (when
that is not available) the ASCII sequence ‘==>’.
For example, the following
@lisp (third '(a b c)) @expansion{} (car (cdr (cdr '(a b c)))) @result{} c @end lisp
produces
(third '(a b c)) → (car (cdr (cdr '(a b c)))) ⇒ c
which may be read as:
(third '(a b c))
expands to(car (cdr (cdr '(a b c))))
; the result of evaluating the expression isc
.
Often, as in this case, an example looks better if the
@expansion{}
and @result{}
commands are indented.
Next: @error
, Previous: @expansion
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@print{}
(-|): Indicating Generated OutputSometimes an expression will generate output during its execution.
You can indicate such displayed output with the @print{}
command.
The @print{}
command is displayed as ‘-|’, either
a horizontal dash butting against a vertical bar or (when that is not
available) the ASCII sequence ‘-|’.
In the following example, the printed text is indicated with ‘-|’, and the value of the expression follows on the last line.
(progn (print 'foo) (print 'bar)) -| foo -| bar ⇒ bar
In a Texinfo source file, this example is written as follows:
@lisp (progn (print 'foo) (print 'bar)) @print{} foo @print{} bar @result{} bar @end lisp
Next: @equiv
, Previous: @print
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@error{}
(error→): Indicating an Error MessageA piece of code may cause an error when you evaluate it. You can
designate the error message with the @error{}
command.
The @error{}
command is displayed as ‘error→’, either
the word ‘error’ in a box in the printed output, the word error
followed by an arrow in other formats or (when no arrow is available)
‘error-->’.
Thus,
@lisp (+ 23 'x) @error{} Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x @end lisp
produces
(+ 23 'x) error→ Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x
This indicates that the following error message is printed when you evaluate the expression:
Wrong type argument: integer-or-marker-p, x
The word ‘error→’ itself is not part of the error message.
Next: @point
, Previous: @error
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@equiv{}
(≡): Indicating EquivalenceSometimes two expressions produce identical results. You can indicate
the exact equivalence of two forms with the @equiv{}
command. The @equiv{}
command is displayed as
‘≡’, either a standard mathematical equivalence sign
(three parallel horizontal lines) or (when that is not available) as
the ASCII sequence ‘==’.
Thus,
@lisp (make-sparse-keymap) @equiv{} (list 'keymap) @end lisp
produces
(make-sparse-keymap) ≡ (list 'keymap)
This indicates that evaluating (make-sparse-keymap)
produces
identical results to evaluating (list 'keymap)
.
Next: Click Sequences, Previous: @equiv
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
@point{}
(∗): Indicating Point in a BufferSometimes you need to show an example of text in an Emacs buffer. In such examples, the convention is to include the entire contents of the buffer in question between two lines of dashes containing the buffer name.
You can use the ‘@point{}’ command to show the location of point in the text in the buffer. (The symbol for point, of course, is not part of the text in the buffer; it indicates the place between two characters where point is located.)
The @point{}
command is displayed as ‘∗’, either
a pointed star or (when that is not available) the ASCII sequence
‘-!-’.
The following example shows the contents of buffer foo before
and after evaluating a Lisp command to insert the word changed
.
---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
(insert "changed ") ⇒ nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the changed ∗contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
In a Texinfo source file, the example is written like this:
@example ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the @point{}contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- (insert "changed ") @result{} nil ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- This is the changed @point{}contents of foo. ---------- Buffer: foo ---------- @end example
Previous: @point
, Up: Glyphs for Programming [Contents][Index]
When documenting graphical interfaces, it is necessary to describe
sequences such as ‘Click on ‘File’, then choose ‘Open’, then
…’. Texinfo offers commands @clicksequence
and
click
to represent this, typically used like this:
… @clicksequence{File @click{} Open} …
which produces:
… File → Open …
The @click
command produces a right arrow by default; this
glyph is also available independently via the command
@arrow{}
.
You can change the glyph produced by @click
with the command
@clickstyle
, which takes a command name as its single argument
on the rest of the line, much like @itemize
and friends
(see @itemize
). The command should produce a glyph, and
the usual empty braces ‘{}’ are omitted. Here’s an example:
@clickstyle @result … @clicksequence{File @click{} Open} …
now produces:
… File ⇒ Open …
Previous: Glyphs for Programming, Up: Insertions [Contents][Index]
@U
The command @U{hex}
inserts a representation of the
Unicode character U+hex. For example, @U{0132}
inserts the Dutch ‘IJ’ ligature (poorly shown here as simply the two
letters ‘I’ and ‘J’).
The hex value should be at least four hex digits; leading zeros are not added. In general, hex must specify a valid normal Unicode character; e.g., U+10FFFF (the very last code point) is invalid by definition, and thus cannot be inserted this way.
@U
is useful for inserting occasional glyphs for which Texinfo
has no dedicated command, while allowing the Texinfo source to remain
purely 7-bit ASCII for maximum portability.
This command has many limitations—the same limitations as inserting
Unicode characters in UTF-8 or another binary form. First and most
importantly, TeX knows nothing about most of Unicode. Supporting
specific additional glyphs upon request is possible, but it’s not
viable for texinfo.tex to support whole additional scripts
(Japanese, Urdu, …). The @U
command does nothing to
change this. If the specified character is not supported in TeX,
an error is given. (See @documentencoding
.)
In HTML, XML, and Docbook, the output from @U
is always an
entity reference of the form ‘&#xhex;’, as in
‘IJ’ for the example above. This should work even when an
HTML document uses some other encoding (say, Latin 1) and the
given character is not supported in that encoding.
In Info and plain text, if the document encoding is specified explicitly to be UTF-8, the output will be the UTF-8 representation of the character U+hex (presuming it’s a valid character). In all other cases, the output is the ASCII sequence ‘U+hex’, as in the six ASCII characters ‘U+0132’ for the example above.
That’s all. No magic!
Next: Definition Commands, Previous: Insertions, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Line and page breaks can sometimes occur in the ‘wrong’ place in one or another form of output. It’s up to you to ensure that text looks right in all the output formats.
For example, in a printed manual, page breaks may occur awkwardly in the middle of an example; to prevent this, you can hold text together using a grouping command that keeps the text from being split across two pages. Conversely, you may want to force a page break where none would occur normally.
You can use the break, break prevention, or pagination commands to fix problematic line and page breaks.
• Break Commands: | Summary of break-related commands. | |
• Line Breaks: | Forcing line breaks. | |
• @- @hyphenation : | Helping TeX with hyphenation points. | |
• @allowcodebreaks : | Controlling line breaks within @code text. | |
• @w : | Preventing unwanted line breaks in text. | |
• @tie : | Inserting an unbreakable but varying space. | |
• @sp : | Inserting blank lines. | |
• @page : | Forcing the start of a new page. | |
• @group : | Preventing unwanted page breaks. | |
• @need : | Another way to prevent unwanted page breaks. |
Next: Line Breaks, Up: Breaks [Contents][Index]
The break commands create or allow line and paragraph breaks:
@*
Force a line break.
@sp n
Skip n blank lines.
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphen.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Define hyphen points in hy-phen-a-ted words.
These commands hold text together on a single line:
@w{text}
Prevent text from being split and hyphenated across two lines.
@tie{}
Insert a normal interword space at which a line break may not occur.
The pagination commands apply only to printed output, since other output formats do not have pages.
@page
Start a new page.
@group
Hold text together that must appear on one page.
@need mils
Start a new page if not enough space on this one.
Next: @- @hyphenation
, Previous: Break Commands, Up: Breaks [Contents][Index]
@*
and @/
: Generate and Allow Line BreaksThe @*
command forces a line break in all output formats.
The @/
command allows a line break (printed manual only).
Here is an example with @*
:
This sentence is broken @*into two lines.
produces
This sentence is broken into two lines.
The @/
command can be useful within long urls or other
identifiers where TeX can’t find a good place to break. TeX
will automatically break urls at the natural places (see URL Line Breaking), so only use @/
if you need it. @/
has no
effect in the other output format.
Next: @allowcodebreaks
, Previous: Line Breaks, Up: Breaks [Contents][Index]
@-
and @hyphenation
: Helping TeX HyphenateAlthough TeX’s hyphenation algorithm is generally pretty good, it does miss useful hyphenation points from time to time. (Or, far more rarely, insert an incorrect hyphenation.) So, for documents with an unusual vocabulary or when fine-tuning for a printed edition, you may wish to help TeX out. Texinfo supports two commands for this:
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphen, i.e., a place where TeX can (but does
not have to) hyphenate. This is especially useful when you notice an
overfull hbox is due to TeX missing a hyphenation (see Overfull hboxes). TeX will not insert any hyphenation points itself into a
word containing @-
.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Tell TeX how to hyphenate hy-phen-a-ted words. As shown, you put a ‘-’ at each hyphenation point. For example:
@hyphenation{man-u-script man-u-scripts}
TeX only uses the specified hyphenation points when the words match exactly, so give all necessary variants, such as plurals.
Info, HTML, and other non-TeX output is not hyphenated, so none of these commands have any effect there.
Next: @w
, Previous: @- @hyphenation
, Up: Breaks [Contents][Index]
@allowcodebreaks
: Control Line Breaks in @code
Ordinarily, TeX considers breaking lines at ‘-’ and ‘_’
characters within @code
and related commands
(see @code
), more or less as if they were “empty”
hyphenation points.
This is necessary since many manuals, especially for Lisp-family
languages, must document very long identifiers. On the other hand,
some manuals don’t have this problems, and you may not wish to allow a
line break at the underscore in, for example, SIZE_MAX
, or even
worse, after any of the four underscores in __typeof__
.
So Texinfo provides this command:
@allowcodebreaks false
to prevent from breaking at ‘-’ or ‘_’ within
@code
. You can go back to allowing such breaks with
@allowcodebreaks true
. Write these commands on lines by
themselves.
These commands can be given anywhere in the document. For example, you may have just one problematic paragraph where you need to turn off the breaks, but want them in general, or vice versa.
This command has no effect except in HTML and TeX output.
Next: @tie
, Previous: @allowcodebreaks
, Up: Breaks [Contents][Index]
@w
{text}: Prevent Line Breaks@w{text}
outputs text, while prohibiting line
breaks within text.
Thus, you can use @w
to produce a non-breakable space, fixed at
the width of a normal interword space:
@w{ } @w{ } @w{ } indentation.
produces:
indentation.
The space from @w{ }
, as well as being non-breakable,
also will not stretch or shrink. Sometimes that is what you want, for
instance if you’re doing manual indenting. However, usually you want
a normal interword space that does stretch and shrink (in the printed
output); for that, see the @tie
command in the next section.
You can also use the @w
command to prevent TeX from
automatically hyphenating a long name or phrase that happens to fall
near the end of a line. makeinfo
does not ever hyphenate
words.
You can also use @w
to avoid unwanted keyword expansion in
source control systems. For example, to literally write $Id$
in your document, use @w{$}Id$
. This trick isn’t effective
in Info or plain text output, though.
@tie{}
: Inserting an Unbreakable SpaceThe @tie{}
command produces a normal interword space at which
a line break may not occur. Always write it with following (empty)
braces, as usual for commands used within a paragraph. Here’s an
example:
@TeX{} was written by Donald E.@tie{}Knuth.
produces:
TeX was written by Donald E. Knuth.
There are two important differences between @tie{}
and
@w{ }
:
@tie{}
will stretch and shrink slightly
along with the normal interword spaces in the paragraph; the space
produced by @w{ }
will not vary.
@tie{}
allows hyphenation of the surrounding words, while
@w{ }
inhibits hyphenation of those words (for TeXnical
reasons, namely that it produces an ‘\hbox’).
@sp
n: Insert Blank LinesA line beginning with and containing only @sp n
generates n blank lines of space in both the printed manual and
the Info file. @sp
also forces a paragraph break. For
example,
@sp 2
generates two blank lines.
The @sp
command is most often used in the title page.
@page
: Start a New PageA line containing only @page
starts a new page in a printed
manual. In other formats, without the concept of pages, it starts a
new paragraph. A @page
command is often used in the
@titlepage
section of a Texinfo file to start the copyright
page.
@group
: Prevent Page BreaksThe @group
command (on a line by itself) is used inside an
@example
or similar construct to begin an unsplittable vertical
group, which will appear entirely on one page in the printed output.
The group is terminated by a line containing only @end group
.
These two lines produce no output of their own, and in the Info file
output they have no effect at all.
Although @group
would make sense conceptually in a wide
variety of contexts, its current implementation works reliably only
within @example
and variants, and within @display
,
@format
, @flushleft
and @flushright
.
See Quotations and Examples. (What all these commands have in
common is that each line of input produces a line of output.) In
other contexts, @group
can cause anomalous vertical
spacing.
This formatting requirement means that you should write:
@example @group … @end group @end example
with the @group
and @end group
commands inside the
@example
and @end example
commands.
The @group
command is most often used to hold an example
together on one page. In this Texinfo manual, more than 100 examples
contain text that is enclosed between @group
and @end
group
.
If you forget to end a group, you may get strange and unfathomable
error messages when you run TeX. This is because TeX keeps
trying to put the rest of the Texinfo file onto the one page and does
not start to generate error messages until it has processed
considerable text. It is a good rule of thumb to look for a missing
@end group
if you get incomprehensible error messages in
TeX.
@need mils
: Prevent Page BreaksA line containing only @need n
starts a new page in a
printed manual if fewer than n mils (thousandths of an inch)
remain on the current page. Do not use braces around the argument
n. The @need
command has no effect on other output
formats since they are not paginated.
This paragraph is preceded by a @need
command that tells
TeX to start a new page if fewer than 800 mils (eight-tenths
inch) remain on the page. It looks like this:
@need 800 This paragraph is preceded by …
The @need
command is useful for preventing orphans: single
lines at the bottoms of printed pages.
Next: Internationalization, Previous: Breaks, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The @deffn
command and the other definition commands
enable you to describe functions, variables, macros, commands, user
options, special forms and other such artifacts in a uniform
format.
In the Info file, a definition causes the entity
category—‘Function’, ‘Variable’, or whatever—to appear at the
beginning of the first line of the definition, followed by the
entity’s name and arguments. In the printed manual, the command
causes TeX to print the entity’s name and its arguments on the left
margin and print the category next to the right margin. In both
output formats, the body of the definition is indented. Also, the
name of the entity is entered into the appropriate index:
@deffn
enters the name into the index of functions,
@defvr
enters it into the index of variables, and so
on (see Predefined Indices).
A manual need not and should not contain more than one definition for
a given name. An appendix containing a summary should use
@table
rather than the definition commands.
• Def Cmd Template: | Writing descriptions using definition commands. | |
• Def Cmd Continuation Lines: | Continuing the heading over source lines. | |
• Optional Arguments: | Handling optional and repeated arguments. | |
• @deffnx : | Group two or more ‘first’ lines. | |
• Def Cmds in Detail: | Reference for all the definition commands. | |
• Def Cmd Conventions: | Conventions for writing definitions. | |
• Sample Function Definition: | An example. |
Next: Def Cmd Continuation Lines, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
The @deffn
command is used for definitions of entities that
resemble functions. To write a definition using the @deffn
command, write the @deffn
command at the beginning of a line
and follow it on the same line by the category of the entity, the name
of the entity itself, and its arguments (if any). Then write the body
of the definition on succeeding lines. (You may embed examples in the
body.) Finally, end the definition with an @end deffn
command
written on a line of its own.
The other definition commands follow the same format: a line with the
@def…
command and whatever arguments are appropriate for
that command; the body of the definition; and a corresponding
@end
line.
The template for a definition looks like this:
@deffn category name arguments… body-of-definition @end deffn
For example,
@deffn Command forward-word count This command moves point forward @var{count} words (or backward if @var{count} is negative). … @end deffn
produces
- Command: forward-word count
This command moves point forward count words (or backward if count is negative). …
Capitalize the category name like a title. If the name of the category contains spaces, as in the phrase ‘Interactive Command’, enclose it in braces. For example:
@deffn {Interactive Command} isearch-forward … @end deffn
Otherwise, the second word will be mistaken for the name of the entity. As a general rule, when any of the arguments in the heading line except the last one are more than one word, you need to enclose them in braces. This may also be necessary if the text contains commands, for example, ‘{declaraci@'on}’ if you are writing in Spanish.
Some of the definition commands are more general than others. The
@deffn
command, for example, is the general definition command
for functions and the like—for entities that may take arguments.
When you use this command, you specify the category to which the
entity belongs. Three predefined, specialized variations
(@defun
, @defmac
, and @defspec
) specify the
category for you: “Function”, “Macro”, and “Special Form”
respectively. (In Lisp, a special form is an entity much like a
function.) Similarly, the general @defvr
command is
accompanied by several specialized variations for describing
particular kinds of variables.
See Sample Function Definition, for a detailed example of a
function definition, including the use of @example
inside the
definition.
Next: Optional Arguments, Previous: Def Cmd Template, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
The heading line of a definition command can get very long. Therefore, Texinfo has a special syntax allowing them to be continued over multiple lines of the source file: a lone ‘@’ at the end of each line to be continued. Here’s an example:
@defun fn-name @ arg1 arg2 arg3 This is the basic continued defun. @end defun
produces:
This is the basic continued defun.
As you can see, the continued lines are combined, as if they had been typed on one source line.
Although this example only shows a one-line continuation,
continuations may extend over any number of lines, in the same way;
put an @
at the end of each line to be continued.
In general, any number of spaces or tabs before the @
continuation character are collapsed into a single space. There is one
exception: the Texinfo processors will not fully collapse whitespace
around a continuation inside braces. For example:
@deffn {Category @ Name} …
The output (not shown) has excess space between ‘Category’
and ‘Name’. To avoid this, elide the unwanted whitespace in your
input, or put the continuation @
outside braces.
@
does not function as a continuation character in any
other context. Ordinarily, ‘@’ followed by a whitespace
character (space, tab, newline) produces a normal interword space
(see Multiple Spaces).
Next: @deffnx
, Previous: Def Cmd Continuation Lines, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
Some entities take optional or repeated arguments, conventionally specified by using square brackets and ellipses: an argument enclosed within square brackets is optional, and an argument followed by an ellipsis is optional and may be repeated more than once.
Thus, [optional-arg] means that optional-arg is optional
and repeated-args…
stands for zero or more
arguments. Parentheses are used when several arguments are grouped
into additional levels of list structure in Lisp.
Here is the @defspec
line of an example of an imaginary
(complicated) special form:
- Special Form: foobar (var [from to [inc]]) body…
In this example, the arguments from and to are optional, but must both be present or both absent. If they are present, inc may optionally be specified as well. These arguments are grouped with the argument var into a list, to distinguish them from body, which includes all remaining elements of the form.
In a Texinfo source file, this @defspec
line is written like
this:
@defspec foobar (var [from to [inc]]) body@dots{}
The function is listed in the Command and Variable Index under ‘foobar’.
Next: Def Cmds in Detail, Previous: Optional Arguments, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
@deffnx
, et al.: Two or More ‘First’ LinesTo create two or more ‘first’ or header lines for a definition, follow
the first @deffn
line by a line beginning with
@deffnx
. The @deffnx
command works exactly like
@deffn
except that it does not generate extra vertical white
space between it and the preceding line.
For example,
@deffn {Interactive Command} isearch-forward @deffnx {Interactive Command} isearch-backward These two search commands are similar except … @end deffn
produces
These two search commands are similar except …
Each definition command has an ‘x’ form: @defunx
,
@defvrx
, @deftypefunx
, etc.
The ‘x’ forms work similarly to @itemx
(see @itemx
).
Next: Def Cmd Conventions, Previous: @deffnx
, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
Texinfo provides more than a dozen definition commands, all of which are described in this section.
The definition commands automatically enter the name of the entity in
the appropriate index: for example, @deffn
, @defun
,
and @defmac
enter function names in the index of functions;
@defvr
and @defvar
enter variable names in the index
of variables.
Although the examples that follow mostly illustrate Lisp, the commands can be used for other programming languages.
• Functions Commands: | Commands for functions and similar entities. | |
• Variables Commands: | Commands for variables and similar entities. | |
• Typed Functions: | Commands for functions in typed languages. | |
• Typed Variables: | Commands for variables in typed languages. | |
• Data Types: | The definition command for data types. | |
• Abstract Objects: | Commands for object-oriented programming. |
Next: Variables Commands, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
This section describes the commands for describing functions and similar entities:
@deffn category name arguments…
The @deffn
command is the general definition command for
functions, interactive commands, and similar entities that may take
arguments. You must choose a term to describe the category of entity
being defined; for example, “Function” could be used if the entity is
a function. The @deffn
command is written at the beginning of a
line and is followed on the same line by the category of entity being
described, the name of this particular entity, and its arguments, if
any. Terminate the definition with @end deffn
on a line of its
own.
For example, here is a definition:
@deffn Command forward-char nchars Move point forward @var{nchars} characters. @end deffn
This shows a rather terse definition for a “command” named
forward-char
with one argument, nchars.
@deffn
prints argument names such as nchars in slanted
type in the printed output, because we think of these names as
metasyntactic variables—they stand for the actual argument values.
Within the text of the description, however, write an argument name
explicitly with @var
to refer to the value of the argument.
In the example above, we used ‘@var{nchars}’ in this way.
In the extremely unusual case when an argument name contains
‘--’, or another character sequence which is treated specially
(see Conventions), use @code
around the special
characters. This avoids the conversion to typographic en-dashes and
em-dashes.
The template for @deffn
is:
@deffn category name arguments… body-of-definition @end deffn
@defun name arguments…
The @defun
command is the definition command for functions.
@defun
is equivalent to ‘@deffn Function …’.
Terminate the definition with @end defun
on a line of its own.
Thus, the template is:
@defun function-name arguments… body-of-definition @end defun
@defmac name arguments…
The @defmac
command is the definition command for macros.
@defmac
is equivalent to ‘@deffn Macro …’ and
works like @defun
.
@defspec name arguments…
The @defspec
command is the definition command for special
forms. (In Lisp, a special form is an entity much like a function;
see Special Forms in GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.)
@defspec
is equivalent to ‘@deffn {Special Form}
…’ and works like @defun
.
All these commands create entries in the index of functions.
Next: Typed Functions, Previous: Functions Commands, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
Here are the commands for defining variables and similar entities:
@defvr category name
The @defvr
command is a general definition command for
something like a variable—an entity that records a value. You must
choose a term to describe the category of entity being defined; for
example, “Variable” could be used if the entity is a variable.
Write the @defvr
command at the beginning of a line and
follow it on the same line by the category of the entity and the
name of the entity.
We recommend capitalizing the category name like a title. If the name of the category contains spaces, as in the name “User Option”, enclose it in braces. Otherwise, the second word will be mistaken for the name of the entity. For example,
@defvr {User Option} fill-column This buffer-local variable specifies the maximum width of filled lines. … @end defvr
Terminate the definition with @end defvr
on a line of its
own.
The template is:
@defvr category name body-of-definition @end defvr
@defvr
creates an entry in the index of variables for name.
@defvar name
The @defvar
command is the definition command for variables.
@defvar
is equivalent to ‘@defvr Variable
…’.
For example:
@defvar kill-ring … @end defvar
The template is:
@defvar name body-of-definition @end defvar
@defvar
creates an entry in the index of variables for
name.
@defopt name
The @defopt
command is the definition command for user
options, i.e., variables intended for users to change according to
taste; Emacs has many such (see Variables in The GNU Emacs
Manual). @defopt
is equivalent to ‘@defvr {User
Option} …’ and works like @defvar
. It creates an entry
in the index of variables.
Next: Typed Variables, Previous: Variables Commands, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
The @deftypefn
command and its variations are for describing
functions in languages in which you must declare types of variables
and functions, such as C and C++.
@deftypefn category data-type name arguments…
The @deftypefn
command is the general definition command for
functions and similar entities that may take arguments and that are
typed. The @deftypefn
command is written at the beginning of
a line and is followed on the same line by the category of entity
being described, the type of the returned value, the name of this
particular entity, and its arguments, if any.
For example,
@deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar @ (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) … @end deftypefn
produces:
- Library Function: int foobar (int foo, float bar)
…
This means that foobar
is a “library function” that returns an
int
, and its arguments are foo (an int
) and
bar (a float
).
Since in typed languages, the actual names of the arguments are
typically scattered among data type names and keywords, Texinfo cannot
find them without help. You can either (a) write everything as
straight text, and it will be printed in slanted type; (b) use
@var
for the variable names, which will uppercase the variable
names in Info and use the slanted typewriter font in printed output;
(c) use @var
for the variable names and @code
for
the type names and keywords, which will be dutifully obeyed.
The template for @deftypefn
is:
@deftypefn category data-type name arguments … body-of-description @end deftypefn
Note that if the category or data type is more than one word then it must be enclosed in braces to make it a single argument.
If you are describing a procedure in a language that has packages,
such as Ada, you might consider using @deftypefn
in a manner
somewhat contrary to the convention described in the preceding
paragraphs. For example:
@deftypefn stacks private push @ (@var{s}:in out stack; @ @var{n}:in integer) … @end deftypefn
(In these examples the @deftypefn
arguments are shown using
continuations (see Def Cmd Continuation Lines), but could be on a
single line.)
In this instance, the procedure is classified as belonging to the
package stacks
rather than classified as a ‘procedure’ and its
data type is described as private
. (The name of the procedure
is push
, and its arguments are s and n.)
@deftypefn
creates an entry in the index of functions for
name.
@deftypefun data-type name arguments…
The @deftypefun
command is the specialized definition command
for functions in typed languages. The command is equivalent to
‘@deftypefn Function …’. The template is:
@deftypefun type name arguments… body-of-description @end deftypefun
@deftypefun
creates an entry in the index of functions for
name.
Ordinarily, the return type is printed on the same line as the
function name and arguments, as shown above. In source code, GNU
style is to put the return type on a line by itself. So Texinfo
provides an option to do that: @deftypefnnewline on
.
This affects typed functions only—not untyped functions, not typed
variables, etc.. Specifically, it affects the commands in this
section, and the analogous commands for object-oriented languages,
namely @deftypeop
and @deftypemethod
(see Object-Oriented Methods).
Specifying @deftypefnnewline off
reverts to the default.
Next: Data Types, Previous: Typed Functions, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
Variables in typed languages are handled in a manner similar to
functions in typed languages. See Typed Functions. The general
definition command @deftypevr
corresponds to
@deftypefn
and the specialized definition command
@deftypevar
corresponds to @deftypefun
.
@deftypevr category data-type name
The @deftypevr
command is the general definition command for
something like a variable in a typed language—an entity that records
a value. You must choose a term to describe the category of the
entity being defined; for example, “Variable” could be used if the
entity is a variable.
The @deftypevr
command is written at the beginning of a line
and is followed on the same line by the category of the entity
being described, the data type, and the name of this particular
entity.
For example:
@deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable … @end deftypevr
produces the following:
- Global Flag: int enable
…
The template is:
@deftypevr category data-type name body-of-description @end deftypevr
@deftypevar data-type name
The @deftypevar
command is the specialized definition command
for variables in typed languages. @deftypevar
is equivalent
to ‘@deftypevr Variable …’. The template is:
@deftypevar data-type name body-of-description @end deftypevar
These commands create entries in the index of variables.
Next: Abstract Objects, Previous: Typed Variables, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
Here is the command for data types:
@deftp category name attributes…
The @deftp
command is the generic definition command for data
types. The command is written at the beginning of a line and is
followed on the same line by the category, by the name of the type
(which is a word like int
or float
), and then by names of
attributes of objects of that type. Thus, you could use this command
for describing int
or float
, in which case you could use
data type
as the category. (A data type is a category of
certain objects for purposes of deciding which operations can be
performed on them.)
In Lisp, for example, pair names a particular data
type, and an object of that type has two slots called the
CAR and the CDR. Here is how you would write the first line
of a definition of pair
.
@deftp {Data type} pair car cdr … @end deftp
The template is:
@deftp category name-of-type attributes… body-of-definition @end deftp
@deftp
creates an entry in the index of data types.
Previous: Data Types, Up: Def Cmds in Detail [Contents][Index]
Here are the commands for formatting descriptions about abstract objects, such as are used in object-oriented programming. A class is a defined type of abstract object. An instance of a class is a particular object that has the type of the class. An instance variable is a variable that belongs to the class but for which each instance has its own value.
• Variables: | ||
• Methods: |
Next: Object-Oriented Methods, Up: Abstract Objects [Contents][Index]
These commands allow you to define different sorts of variables in object-oriented programming languages.
@defcv category class name
The @defcv
command is the general definition command for
variables associated with classes in object-oriented programming. The
@defcv
command is followed by three arguments: the category of
thing being defined, the class to which it belongs, and its
name. For instance:
@defcv {Class Option} Window border-pattern … @end defcv
produces:
…
@defcv
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@deftypecv category class data-type name
The @deftypecv
command is the definition command for typed
class variables in object-oriented programming. It is analogous to
@defcv
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify the type of the instance variable. Ordinarily, the data type
is a programming language construct that should be marked with
@code
. For instance:
@deftypecv {Class Option} Window @code{int} border-pattern … @end deftypecv
produces:
int
border-pattern…
@deftypecv
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@defivar class name
The @defivar
command is the definition command for instance
variables in object-oriented programming. @defivar
is
equivalent to ‘@defcv {Instance Variable} …’. For
instance:
@defivar Window border-pattern … @end defivar
produces:
…
@defivar
creates an entry in the index of variables.
@deftypeivar class data-type name
The @deftypeivar
command is the definition command for typed
instance variables in object-oriented programming. It is analogous to
@defivar
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify the type of the instance variable. Ordinarily, the data type
is a programming language construct that should be marked with
@code
. For instance:
@deftypeivar Window @code{int} border-pattern … @end deftypeivar
produces:
int
border-pattern…
@deftypeivar
creates an entry in the index of variables.
Previous: Object-Oriented Variables, Up: Abstract Objects [Contents][Index]
These commands allow you to define different sorts of function-like entities resembling methods in object-oriented programming languages. These entities take arguments, as functions do, but are associated with particular classes of objects.
@defop category class name arguments…
The @defop
command is the general definition command for these
method-like entities.
For example, some systems have constructs called wrappers that
are associated with classes as methods are, but that act more like
macros than like functions. You could use @defop Wrapper
to
describe one of these.
Sometimes it is useful to distinguish methods and operations.
You can think of an operation as the specification for a method.
Thus, a window system might specify that all window classes have a
method named expose
; we would say that this window system
defines an expose
operation on windows in general. Typically,
the operation has a name and also specifies the pattern of arguments;
all methods that implement the operation must accept the same
arguments, since applications that use the operation do so without
knowing which method will implement it.
Often it makes more sense to document operations than methods. For
example, window application developers need to know about the
expose
operation, but need not be concerned with whether a
given class of windows has its own method to implement this operation.
To describe this operation, you would write:
@defop Operation windows expose
The @defop
command is written at the beginning of a line and
is followed on the same line by the overall name of the category of
operation, the name of the class of the operation, the name of the
operation, and its arguments, if any.
The template is:
@defop category class name arguments… body-of-definition @end defop
@defop
creates an entry, such as ‘expose
on
windows
’, in the index of functions.
@deftypeop category class data-type name arguments…
The @deftypeop
command is the definition command for typed
operations in object-oriented programming. It is similar to
@defop
with the addition of the data-type parameter to
specify the return type of the method. @deftypeop
creates an
entry in the index of functions.
@defmethod class name arguments…
The @defmethod
command is the definition command for methods
in object-oriented programming. A method is a kind of function that
implements an operation for a particular class of objects and its
subclasses.
@defmethod
is equivalent to ‘@defop Method …’.
The command is written at the beginning of a line and is followed by
the name of the class of the method, the name of the method, and its
arguments, if any.
For example:
@defmethod bar-class
bar-method argument
…
@end defmethod
illustrates the definition for a method called bar-method
of
the class bar-class
. The method takes an argument.
@defmethod
creates an entry in the index of functions.
@deftypemethod class data-type name arguments…
The @deftypemethod
command is the definition command for methods
in object-oriented typed languages, such as C++ and Java. It is similar
to the @defmethod
command with the addition of the
data-type parameter to specify the return type of the method.
@deftypemethod
creates an entry in the index of functions.
The typed commands are affected by the @deftypefnnewline
option (see Functions in Typed Languages).
Next: Sample Function Definition, Previous: Def Cmds in Detail, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
When you write a definition using @deffn
, @defun
, or
one of the other definition commands, please take care to use
arguments that indicate the meaning, as with the count argument
to the forward-word
function. Also, if the name of an argument
contains the name of a type, such as integer, take care that the
argument actually is of that type.
Previous: Def Cmd Conventions, Up: Definition Commands [Contents][Index]
A function definition uses the @defun
and @end defun
commands. The name of the function follows immediately after the
@defun
command and it is followed, on the same line, by the
parameter list.
Here is a definition from Calling Functions in The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
- Function: apply function &rest arguments
apply
calls function with arguments, just likefuncall
but with one difference: the last of arguments is a list of arguments to give to function, rather than a single argument. We also say that this list is appended to the other arguments.
apply
returns the result of calling function. As withfuncall
, function must either be a Lisp function or a primitive function; special forms and macros do not make sense inapply
.(setq f 'list) ⇒ list (apply f 'x 'y 'z) error→ Wrong type argument: listp, z (apply '+ 1 2 '(3 4)) ⇒ 10 (apply '+ '(1 2 3 4)) ⇒ 10 (apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) ⇒ (a b c x y z)An interesting example of using
apply
is found in the description ofmapcar
.
In the Texinfo source file, this example looks like this:
@defun apply function &rest arguments @code{apply} calls @var{function} with @var{arguments}, just like @code{funcall} but with one difference: the last of @var{arguments} is a list of arguments to give to @var{function}, rather than a single argument. We also say that this list is @dfn{appended} to the other arguments.
@code{apply} returns the result of calling @var{function}. As with @code{funcall}, @var{function} must either be a Lisp function or a primitive function; special forms and macros do not make sense in @code{apply}.
@example (setq f 'list) @result{} list (apply f 'x 'y 'z) @error{} Wrong type argument: listp, z (apply '+ 1 2 '(3 4)) @result{} 10 (apply '+ '(1 2 3 4)) @result{} 10 (apply 'append '((a b c) nil (x y z) nil)) @result{} (a b c x y z) @end example
An interesting example of using @code{apply} is found in the description of @code{mapcar}. @end defun
In this manual, this function is listed in the Command and Variable
Index under apply
.
Ordinary variables and user options are described using a format like that for functions except that variables do not take arguments.
Next: Conditionals, Previous: Definition Commands, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has some support for writing in languages other than English, although this area still needs considerable work. (If you are the one helping to translate the fixed strings written to documents, see Internationalization of Document Strings.)
For a list of the various accented and special characters Texinfo supports, see Inserting Accents.
• @documentlanguage : | Declaring the current language. | |
• @documentencoding : | Declaring the input encoding. |
Next: @documentencoding
, Up: Internationalization [Contents][Index]
@documentlanguage ll[_cc]
: Set the Document LanguageThe @documentlanguage
command declares the current document
locale. Write it on a line by itself, near the beginning of the file.
@documentlanguage ll[_cc]
Include a two-letter ISO 639-2 language code (ll) following
the command name, optionally followed by an underscore and two-letter
ISO 3166 two-letter country code (cc). If you have a
multilingual document, the intent is to be able to use this command
multiple times, to declare each language change. If the command is
not used at all, the default is en_US
for US English.
As with GNU Gettext (see Gettext), if the country
code is omitted, the main dialect is assumed where possible. For
example, de
is equivalent to de_DE
(German as spoken in
Germany).
For Info and other online output, this command changes the translation of various document strings such as “see” in cross-references (see Cross References), “Function” in defuns (see Definition Commands), and so on. Some strings, such as “Node:”, “Next:”, “Menu:”, etc., are keywords in Info output, so are not translated there; they are translated in other output formats.
For TeX, this command causes a file txi-locale.tex to
be read (if it exists). If @documentlanguage
argument
contains the optional ‘_cc’ suffix, this is tried first.
For example, with @documentlanguage de_DE
, TeX first looks
for txi-de_DE.tex, then txi-de.tex.
Such a txi-* file is intended to redefine the various English words used in TeX output, such as ‘Chapter’, ‘See’, and so on. We are aware that individual words like these cannot always be translated in isolation, and that a very different strategy would be required for ideographic (among other) scripts. Help in improving Texinfo’s language support is welcome.
@documentlanguage
also changes TeX’s current hyphenation
patterns, if the TeX program being run has the necessary support
included. This will generally not be the case for tex
itself, but will usually be the case for up-to-date distributions of
the extended TeX programs etex
(DVI output) and
pdftex
(PDF output). texi2dvi
will use the
extended TeXs if they are available (see Format with texi2dvi
).
In September 2006, the W3C Internationalization Activity released a new recommendation for specifying languages: http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. When Gettext supports this new scheme, Texinfo will too.
Since the lists of language codes and country codes are updated relatively frequently, we don’t attempt to list them here. The valid language codes are on the official home page for ISO 639, http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/. The country codes and the official web site for ISO 3166 can be found via http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166.
Previous: @documentlanguage
, Up: Internationalization [Contents][Index]
@documentencoding enc
: Set Input EncodingThe @documentencoding
command declares the input document
encoding, and can also affect the encoding of the output. Write it on
a line by itself, with a valid encoding specification following, near
the beginning of the file.
@documentencoding enc
Texinfo supports these encodings:
US-ASCII
This has no particular effect, but it’s included for completeness.
UTF-8
The vast global character encoding, expressed in 8-bit bytes.
ISO-8859-1
ISO-8859-15
ISO-8859-2
These specify the standard encodings for Western European (the first two) and Eastern European languages (the third), respectively. ISO 8859-15 replaces some little-used characters from 8859-1 (e.g., precomposed fractions) with more commonly needed ones, such as the Euro symbol (€).
A full description of the encodings is beyond our scope here; one useful reference is http://czyborra.com/charsets/iso8859.html.
koi8-r
This is the commonly used encoding for the Russian language.
koi8-u
This is the commonly used encoding for the Ukrainian language.
Specifying an encoding enc has the following effects:
In Info output, a so-called ‘Local Variables’ section (see File Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual) is output including enc. This allows Info readers to set the encoding appropriately. It looks like this:
Local Variables: coding: enc End:
Also, in Info and plain text output, unless the option
--disable-encoding is given to makeinfo
, accent
constructs and special characters, such as @'e
, are output as
the actual 8-bit or UTF-8 character in the given encoding where
possible.
In HTML output, a ‘<meta>’ tag is output, in the ‘<head>’ section of the HTML, that specifies enc. Web servers and browsers cooperate to use this information so the correct encoding is used to display the page, if supported by the system. That looks like this:
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=enc">
In XML and Docbook output, UTF-8 is always used for the output, according to the conventions of those formats.
In TeX output, the characters which are supported in the standard Computer Modern fonts are output accordingly. For example, this means using constructed accents rather than precomposed glyphs. Using a missing character generates a warning message, as does specifying an unimplemented encoding.
Although modern TeX systems support nearly every script in use in
the world, this wide-ranging support is not available in
texinfo.tex, and it’s not feasible to duplicate or incorporate
all that effort. (Our plan to support other scripts is to create a
LaTeX back-end to texi2any
, where the support is already
present.)
For maximum portability of Texinfo documents across the many different
user environments in the world, we recommend sticking to 7-bit ASCII
in the input unless your particular manual needs a substantial amount
of non-ASCII, e.g., it’s written in German. You can use the
@U
command to insert an occasional needed character
(see Inserting Unicode).
Next: Defining New Texinfo Commands, Previous: Internationalization, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The conditional commands allow you to use different text for different output formats, or for general conditions that you define. For example, you can use them to specify different text for the printed manual and the Info output.
The conditional commands comprise the following categories.
• Conditional Commands: | Text for a given format. | |
• Conditional Not Commands: | Text for any format other than a given one. | |
• Raw Formatter Commands: | Using raw formatter commands. | |
• Inline Conditionals: | Brace-delimited conditional text. | |
• @set @clear @value : | Variable tests and substitutions. | |
• Testing for Texinfo Commands: | Testing if a Texinfo command is available. | |
• Conditional Nesting: | Using conditionals inside conditionals. |
Next: Conditional Not Commands, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has an @ifformat
environment for each output
format, to allow conditional inclusion of text for a particular output
format.
@ifinfo
begins segments of text that should be ignored by
TeX when it typesets the printed manual, and by makeinfo
when not producing Info output. The segment of text appears only in
the Info file and, for historical compatibility, the plain text
output.
The environments for the other formats are analogous:
@ifdocbook … @end ifdocbook
Text to appear only in the Docbook output.
@ifhtml … @end ifhtml
Text to appear only in the HTML output.
@ifplaintext … @end ifplaintext
Text to appear only in the plain text output.
@iftex … @end iftex
Text to appear only in the printed manual.
@ifxml … @end ifxml
Text to appear only in the XML output.
The @if…
and @end if…
commands must appear
on lines by themselves in your source file. The newlines following
the commands are (more or less) treated as whitespace, so that the
conditional text is flowed normally into a surrounding paragraph.
The @if…
constructs are intended to conditionalize
normal Texinfo source; see Raw Formatter Commands, for using
underlying format commands directly.
Here is an example showing all these conditionals:
@iftex This text will appear only in the printed manual. @end iftex @ifinfo However, this text will appear only in Info and plain text. @end ifinfo @ifhtml And this text will only appear in HTML. @end ifhtml @ifplaintext Whereas this text will only appear in plain text. @end ifplaintext @ifxml Notwithstanding that this will only appear in XML. @end ifxml @ifdocbook Nevertheless, this will only appear in Docbook. @end ifdocbook
The preceding example produces the following line:
And this text will only appear in HTML.
Notice that you only see one of the input lines, depending on which version of the manual you are reading.
In complex documents, you may want Texinfo to issue an error message
in some conditionals that should not ever be processed. The
@errormsg{text}
command will do this; it takes one
argument, the text of the error message.
We mention @errormsg{}
here even though it is not strictly
related to conditionals, since in practice it is most likely to be
useful in that context. Technically, it can be used anywhere.
See External Macro Processors, for a caveat regarding the line
numbers which @errormsg
emits in TeX.
Next: Raw Formatter Commands, Previous: Conditional Commands, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
You can specify text to be included in any output format other
than a given one with the @ifnot…
environments:
@ifnotdocbook … @end ifnotdocbook @ifnothtml … @end ifnothtml @ifnotinfo … @end ifnotinfo @ifnotplaintext … @end ifnotplaintext @ifnottex … @end ifnottex @ifnotxml … @end ifnotxml
The @ifnot…
command and the @end
command must
appear on lines by themselves in your actual source file.
If the output file is being made in the given format, the region is ignored. Otherwise, it is included.
There is one exception (for historical compatibility):
@ifnotinfo
text is omitted for both Info and plain text
output, not just Info. To specify text which appears only in Info and
not in plain text, use @ifnotplaintext
, like this:
@ifinfo @ifnotplaintext This will be in Info, but not plain text. @end ifnotplaintext @end ifinfo
The regions delimited by these commands are ordinary Texinfo source as
with @iftex
, not raw formatter source as with @tex
(see Raw Formatter Commands).
Next: Inline Conditionals, Previous: Conditional Not Commands, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
The @if…
conditionals just described must be used only
with normal Texinfo source. For instance, most features of plain
TeX will not work within @iftex
. The purpose of
@if…
is to provide conditional processing for Texinfo
source, not provide access to underlying formatting features. For
that, Texinfo provides so-called raw formatter commands. They
should only be used when truly required (most documents do not need
them).
The first raw formatter command is @tex
. You can enter plain
TeX completely, and use ‘\’ in the TeX commands, by
delineating a region with the @tex
and @end tex
commands. All plain TeX commands and category codes are restored
within a @tex
region. The sole exception is that the
@
character still introduces a command, so that @end
tex
can be recognized. Texinfo processors will not output material
in such a region, unless TeX output is being produced.
In complex cases, you may wish to define new TeX macros within
@tex
. You must use \gdef
to do this, not \def
,
because @tex
regions are processed in a TeX group. If you
need to make several definitions, you may wish to set
\globaldefs=1
(its value will be restored to zero as usual when
the group ends at @end tex
, so it won’t cause problems with
the rest of the document).
As an example, here is a displayed equation written in plain TeX:
@tex $$ \chi^2 = \sum_{i=1}^N \left (y_i - (a + b x_i) \over \sigma_i\right)^2 $$ @end tex
The output of this example will appear only in a printed manual. If you are reading this in a format not generated by TeX, you will not see the equation that appears in the printed manual.
Analogously, you can use @ifhtml … @end ifhtml
to
delimit Texinfo source to be included in HTML output only, and
@html … @end html
for a region of raw HTML.
Likewise, you can use @ifxml … @end ifxml
to delimit
Texinfo source to be included in XML output only, and @xml
… @end xml
for a region of raw XML. Regions of raw text in
other formats will also be present in the XML output, but with
protection of XML characters and within corresponding elements. For
example, the raw HTML text:
@html <br /> @end html
will be included in the XML output as:
<html> <br /> </html>
Again likewise, you can use @ifdocbook … @end ifdocbook
to delimit Texinfo source to be included in Docbook output only, and
@docbook … @end docbook
for a region of raw Docbook.
The behavior of newlines in raw regions is unspecified.
In all cases, in raw processing, @
retains the same meaning as
in the remainder of the document. Thus, the Texinfo processors must
recognize and even execute, to some extent, the contents of the raw
regions, regardless of the final output format. Therefore, specifying
changes that globally affect the document inside a raw region leads to
unpredictable and generally undesirable behavior. For example, using
the @kbdinputstyle
command inside a raw region is undefined.
The remedy is simple: don’t do that. Use the raw formatter commands
for their intended purpose, of providing material directly in the
underlying format. When you simply want to give different Texinfo
specifications for different output formats, use the
@if…
conditionals and stay in Texinfo syntax.
Next: @set @clear @value
, Previous: Raw Formatter Commands, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
@inline
, @inlineifelse
, @inlineraw
Texinfo provides a set of conditional commands with arguments given within braces:
@inlinefmt{format, text}
Process the Texinfo text if format output is being generated.
@inlinefmtifelse{format, then-text, else-text}
Process the Texinfo then-text if format output is being generated; otherwise, process else-text.
@inlineraw{format, text}
Similar, but for raw text (see Raw Formatter Commands).
The supported format names are:
docbook html info plaintext tex xml
For example,
@inlinefmt{html, @emph{HTML-only text}}
is nearly equivalent to
@ifhtml @emph{HTML-only text} @end ifhtml
except that no whitespace is added, as happens in the latter (environment) case.
In these commands, whitespace is ignored after the comma separating the arguments, as usual, but is not ignored at the end of text.
To insert a literal at sign, left brace, or right brace in one of the
arguments, you must use the alphabetic commands @atchar{}
(see Inserting an Atsign), and @lbracechar{}
or
@rbracechar{}
(see Inserting Braces), or the parsing
will become confused.
With @inlinefmtifelse
, it is also necessary to use
@comma{}
to avoid mistaking a ‘,’ in the text for the
delimiter. With @inlinefmt
and @inlineraw
,
@comma{}
is not required (though it’s fine to use it), since
these commands always have exactly two arguments.
For TeX, the processed text cannot contain newline-delimited commands. Text to be ignored (i.e., for non-TeX) can, though.
Two other @inline...
conditionals complement the
@ifset
and @ifclear
commands; see the next section.
Next: Testing for Texinfo Commands, Previous: Inline Conditionals, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
@set
, @clear
, conditionals, and @value
You can direct the Texinfo formatting commands to format or ignore parts
of a Texinfo file with the @set
, @clear
, @ifset
,
and @ifclear
commands.
Here are brief descriptions of these commands, see the following sections for more details:
@set flag [value]
Set the variable flag, to the optional value if specified.
@clear flag
Undefine the variable flag, whether or not it was previously defined.
@ifset flag
If flag is set, text through the next @end ifset
command
is formatted. If flag is clear, text through the following
@end ifset
command is ignored.
@inlineifset{flag, text}
Brace-delimited version of @ifset
.
@ifclear flag
If flag is set, text through the next @end ifclear
command
is ignored. If flag is clear, text through the following
@end ifclear
command is formatted.
@inlineifclear{flag, text}
Brace-delimited version of @ifclear
.
• @set @value : | Expand a flag variable to a string. | |
• @ifset @ifclear : | Format a region if a flag is set. | |
• @inlineifset @inlineifclear : | Brace-delimited flag conditionals. | |
• @value Example: | An easy way to update edition information. |
Next: @ifset @ifclear
, Up: @set @clear @value
[Contents][Index]
@set
and @value
You use the @set
command to specify a value for a flag, which
is later expanded by the @value
command.
A flag (aka variable) name is an identifier starting with an alphanumeric, ‘-’, or ‘_’. Subsequent characters, if any, may not be whitespace, ‘@’, braces, angle brackets, or any of ‘~`^+|’; other characters, such as ‘%’, may work. However, it is best to use only letters and numerals in a flag name, not ‘-’ or ‘_’ or others—they will work in some contexts, but not all, due to limitations in TeX.
The value is the remainder of the input line, and can contain anything.
However, unlike most other commands which take the rest of the line as
a value, @set
need not appear at the beginning of a line.
Write the @set
command like this:
@set foo This is a string.
This sets the value of the flag foo
to “This is a string.”.
The Texinfo formatters then replace a @value{flag}
command with the string to which flag is set. Thus, when
foo
is set as shown above, the Texinfo formatters convert this:
@value{foo}
to this:
This is a string.
You can write a @value
command within a paragraph; but you
must write a @set
command on a line of its own.
If you write the @set
command like this:
@set foo
without specifying a string, the value of foo
is the empty string.
If you clear a previously set flag with @clear flag
, a
subsequent @value{flag}
command will report an error.
For example, if you set foo
as follows:
@set howmuch very, very, very
then the formatters transform
It is a @value{howmuch} wet day.
into
It is a very, very, very wet day.
If you write
@clear howmuch
then the formatters transform
It is a @value{howmuch} wet day.
into
It is a {No value for "howmuch"} wet day.
@value
cannot be reliably used as the argument to an accent
command (see Inserting Accents). For example, this fails:
@set myletter a @'@value{myletter}
Next: @inlineifset @inlineifclear
, Previous: @set @value
, Up: @set @clear @value
[Contents][Index]
@ifset
and @ifclear
When a flag is set, the Texinfo formatting commands format text
between subsequent pairs of @ifset flag
and @end
ifset
commands. When the flag is cleared, the Texinfo formatting
commands do not format the text. @ifclear
operates
analogously.
Write the conditionally formatted text between @ifset flag
and @end ifset
commands, like this:
@ifset flag conditional-text @end ifset
For example, you can create one document that has two variants, such as a manual for a ‘large’ and ‘small’ model:
You can use this machine to dig up shrubs without hurting them. @set large @ifset large It can also dig up fully grown trees. @end ifset Remember to replant promptly …
In the example, the formatting commands will format the text between
@ifset large
and @end ifset
because the large
flag is set.
When flag is cleared, the Texinfo formatting commands do
not format the text between @ifset flag
and
@end ifset
; that text is ignored and does not appear in either
printed or Info output.
For example, if you clear the flag of the preceding example by writing
an @clear large
command after the @set large
command
(but before the conditional text), then the Texinfo formatting commands
ignore the text between the @ifset large
and @end ifset
commands. In the formatted output, that text does not appear; in both
printed and Info output, you see only the lines that say, “You can use
this machine to dig up shrubs without hurting them. Remember to replant
promptly …”.
If a flag is cleared with a @clear flag
command, then
the formatting commands format text between subsequent pairs of
@ifclear
and @end ifclear
commands. But if the flag
is set with @set flag
, then the formatting commands do
not format text between an @ifclear
and an @end
ifclear
command; rather, they ignore that text. An @ifclear
command looks like this:
@ifclear flag
Next: @value
Example, Previous: @ifset @ifclear
, Up: @set @clear @value
[Contents][Index]
@inlineifset
and @inlineifclear
@inlineifset
and @inlineifclear
provide
brace-delimited alternatives to the @ifset
and
@ifclear
forms, similar to the other @inline...
Commands (see Inline Conditionals). The same caveats about
argument parsing given there apply here too.
@inlineifset{var, text}
Process the Texinfo text if the flag var is defined.
@inlineifclear{var, text}
Process the Texinfo text if the flag var is not defined.
Except for the syntax, their general behavior and purposes is the same
as with @ifset
and @ifclear
, described in the previous
section.
Previous: @inlineifset @inlineifclear
, Up: @set @clear @value
[Contents][Index]
@value
ExampleYou can use the @value
command to minimize the number of
places you need to change when you record an update to a manual.
See GNU Sample Texts, for the full text of an example of using this
to work with Automake distributions.
This example is adapted from The GNU Make Manual.
@set EDITION 0.35 Beta @set VERSION 3.63 Beta @set UPDATED 14 August 1992 @set UPDATE-MONTH August 1992
@copying
section (see @copying
):
@copying This is Edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED}, of @cite{The GNU Make Manual}, for @code{make}, version @value{VERSION}. Copyright … Permission is granted … @end copying
@titlepage @title GNU Make @subtitle A Program for Directing Recompilation @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, … @subtitle @value{UPDATE-MONTH} @page @insertcopying … @end titlepage
(On a printed cover, a date listing the month and the year looks less fussy than a date listing the day as well as the month and year.)
@ifnottex @node Top @top Make This is Edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED}, of @cite{The GNU Make Manual}, for @code{make}, version @value{VERSION}. @end ifnottex
After you format the manual, the @value
constructs have been
expanded, so the output contains text like this:
This is Edition 0.35 Beta, last updated 14 August 1992, of `The GNU Make Manual', for `make', Version 3.63 Beta.
When you update the manual, you change only the values of the flags; you do not need to edit the three sections.
Next: Conditional Nesting, Previous: @set @clear @value
, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
@ifcommanddefined
, @ifcommandnotdefined
Occasionally, you may want to arrange for your manual to test if a
given Texinfo command is available and (presumably) do some sort of
fallback formatting if not. There are conditionals
@ifcommanddefined
and @ifcommandnotdefined
to do this.
For example:
@ifcommanddefined node Good, @samp{@@node} is defined. @end ifcommanddefined
will output the expected ‘Good, ‘@node’ is defined.’.
This conditional will also consider any new commands defined by
the document via @macro
, @alias
,
@definfoenclose
, and @def(code)index
(see Defining New Texinfo Commands) to be true. Caveat: the TeX
implementation reports internal TeX commands, in addition to all
the Texinfo commands, as being “defined”; the makeinfo
implementation is reliable in this regard, however.
You can check the NEWS file in the Texinfo source distribution and linked from the Texinfo home page (http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo) to see when a particular command was added.
These command-checking conditionals themselves were added in
Texinfo 5.0, released in 2013—decades after Texinfo’s
inception. In order to test if they themselves are available,
the predefined flag txicommandconditionals
can be tested, like
this:
@ifset txicommandconditionals @ifcommandnotdefined foobarnode (Good, @samp{@@foobarnode} is not defined.) @end ifcommandnotdefined @end ifset
Since flags (see the previous section) were added early in the existence of Texinfo, there is no problem with assuming they are available.
We recommend avoiding these tests whenever possible—which is usually the case. For many software packages, it is reasonable for all developers to have a given version of Texinfo (or newer) installed, and thus no reason to worry about older versions. (It is straightforward for anyone to download and install the Texinfo source; it does not have any problematic dependencies.)
The issue of Texinfo versions does not generally arise for end-users. With properly distributed packages, users need not process the Texinfo manual simply to build and install the package; they can use preformatted Info (or other) output files. This is desirable in general, to avoid unnecessary dependencies between packages (see Releases in GNU Coding Standards).
Previous: Testing for Texinfo Commands, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
Conditionals can be nested; however, the details are a little tricky.
The difficulty comes with failing conditionals, such as
@ifhtml
when HTML is not being produced, where the included
text is to be ignored. However, it is not to be completely
ignored, since it is useful to have one @ifset
inside another,
for example—that is a way to include text only if two conditions are
met. Here’s an example:
@ifset somevar @ifset anothervar Both somevar and anothervar are set. @end ifset @ifclear anothervar Somevar is set, anothervar is not. @end ifclear @end ifset
Technically, Texinfo requires that for a failing conditional, the ignored text must be properly nested with respect to that failing conditional. Unfortunately, it’s not always feasible to check that all conditionals are properly nested, because then the processors could have to fully interpret the ignored text, which defeats the purpose of the command. Here’s an example illustrating these rules:
@ifset a @ifset b @ifclear ok - ok, ignored @end junky - ok, ignored @end ifset @c WRONG - missing @end ifset.
Finally, as mentioned above, all conditional commands must be on lines by themselves, with no text (even spaces) before or after. Otherwise, the processors cannot reliably determine which commands to consider for nesting purposes.
Next: Include Files, Previous: Conditionals, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Texinfo provides several ways to define new commands (in all cases, it’s not recommended to try redefining existing commands):
Incidentally, these macros have nothing to do with the @defmac
command, which is for documenting macros in the subject area of the
manual (see Def Cmd Template).
Most generally of all (not just for defining new commands), it is
possible to invoke any external macro processor and have Texinfo
recognize so-called #line
directives for error reporting.
If you want to do simple text substitution, @set
and
@value
is the simplest approach (see @set @clear @value
).
• Defining Macros: | Defining and undefining new commands. | |
• Invoking Macros: | Using a macro, once you’ve defined it. | |
• Macro Details: | Limitations of Texinfo macros. | |
• @alias : | Command aliases. | |
• @definfoenclose : | Customized highlighting. | |
• External Macro Processors: | #line directives.
|
Next: Invoking Macros, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
You use the Texinfo @macro
command to define a macro, like this:
@macro macroname{param1, param2, …} text … \param1\ … @end macro
The parameters param1, param2, … correspond to arguments supplied when the macro is subsequently used in the document (described in the next section).
For a macro to work consistently with TeX, macroname must
consist entirely of letters: no digits, hyphens, underscores, or other
special characters. So, we recommend using only letters. However,
makeinfo
will accept anything consisting of alphanumerics,
and (except as the first character) ‘-’. The ‘_’ character
is excluded so that macros can be called inside @math
without
a following space (see Inserting Math).
If a macro needs no parameters, you can define it either with an empty list (‘@macro foo {}’) or with no braces at all (‘@macro foo’).
The definition or body of the macro can contain most Texinfo
commands, including macro invocations. However, a macro definition
that defines another macro does not work in TeX due to limitations
in the design of @macro
.
In the macro body, instances of a parameter name surrounded by backslashes, as in ‘\param1\’ in the example above, are replaced by the corresponding argument from the macro invocation. You can use parameter names any number of times in the body, including zero.
To get a single ‘\’ in the macro expansion, use ‘\\’. Any other use of ‘\’ in the body yields a warning.
The newline characters after the @macro
line and before the
@end macro
line are ignored, that is, not included in the
macro body. All other whitespace is treated according to the usual
Texinfo rules.
To allow a macro to be used recursively, that is, in an argument to a call to itself, you must define it with ‘@rmacro’, like this:
@rmacro rmac {arg} a\arg\b @end rmacro … @rmac{1@rmac{text}2}
This produces the output ‘a1atextb2b’. With ‘@macro’ instead of ‘@rmacro’, an error message is given.
You can undefine a macro foo with @unmacro foo
.
It is not an error to undefine a macro that is already undefined.
For example:
@unmacro foo
Next: Macro Details, Previous: Defining Macros, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
After a macro is defined (see the previous section), you can invoke (use) it in your document like this:
@macroname {arg1, arg2, …}
and the result will be more or less as if you typed the body of macroname at that spot. For example:
@macro foo {p, q} Together: \p\ & \q\. @end macro @foo{a, b}
produces:
Together: a & b.
Thus, the arguments and parameters are separated by commas and delimited by braces; any whitespace after (but not before) a comma is ignored. The braces are required in the invocation even when the macro takes no arguments, consistent with other Texinfo commands. For example:
@macro argless {} No arguments here. @end macro @argless{}
produces:
No arguments here.
Passing macro arguments containing commas requires care, since
commas also separate the arguments. To include a comma character in
an argument, the most reliable method is to use the @comma{}
command. For makeinfo
, you can also prepend a backslash
character, as in ‘\,’, but this does not work with TeX.
It’s not always necessary to worry about commas. To facilitate use of
macros, makeinfo
implements two rules for automatic
quoting in some circumstances:
@macro TRYME{text} @strong{TRYME: \text\} @end macro @TRYME{A nice feature, though it can be dangerous.}
will produce the following output
TRYME: A nice feature, though it can be dangerous.
And indeed, it can. Namely, makeinfo
does not control the
number of arguments passed to one-argument macros, so be careful when
you invoke them.
@say{@strong{Yes, I do}, person one}
the comma after ‘Yes’ is implicitly quoted. Here’s another example, with a recursive macro:
@rmacro cat{a,b} \a\\b\ @end rmacro @cat{@cat{foo, bar}, baz}
will produce the string ‘foobarbaz’.
The backslash itself can be quoted in macro arguments with another backslash. For example:
@macname {\\bleh}
will pass the argument ‘\bleh’ to macname.
makeinfo
also recognizes ‘\{’ and ‘\}’ sequences
for curly braces, but these are not recognized by the implementation in
TeX. There should, however, rarely be a need for these, as they are
only needed when a macro argument contains unbalanced braces.
If a macro is defined to take exactly one argument, it can be invoked without any braces, taking all of the line after the macro name as the argument. For example:
@macro bar {p} Twice: \p\ & \p\. @end macro @bar aah
produces:
Twice: aah & aah.
In these arguments, there is no escaping of special characters, so each ‘\’ stands for itself.
If a macro is defined to take more than one argument, but is called with only one (in braces), the remaining arguments are set to the empty string, and no error is given. For example:
@macro addtwo {p, q} Both: \p\\q\. @end macro @addtwo{a}
produces simply:
Both: a.
Next: @alias
, Previous: Invoking Macros, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
By design, macro expansion does not happen in the following contexts
in makeinfo
:
@macro
and @unmacro
lines;
@if...
lines, including @ifset
and similar;
@set
, @clear
, @value
;
@clickstyle
lines;
@end
lines.
Unfortunately, TeX may do some expansion in these situations, possibly yielding errors.
Also, quite a few macro-related constructs cause problems with TeX;
some of the caveats are listed below. Thus, if you get macro-related
errors when producing the printed version of a manual, you might try
expanding the macros with makeinfo
by invoking
texi2dvi
with the ‘-E’ option (see Format with texi2dvi
). Or, more reliably, eschew Texinfo macros altogether
and use a language designed for macro processing, such as M4
(see External Macro Processors).
@example
environments, may behave unpredictably in TeX.
@macro Mac @iftex text for TeX output @end iftex @ifnottex text for not TeX output @end ifnottex @end macro
you can do the following instead:
@iftex @macro Mac text for TeX output @end macro @end iftex @ifnottex @macro Mac text for not TeX output @end macro @end ifnottex
@comma{}
must be used.
@,
(to produce a cedilla, see Inserting Accents), you have
to use @value
or another work-around. Otherwise, the comma
may be taken as separating the arguments. For example,
@macro mactwo{argfirst, argsecond} \argfirst\+\argsecond\. @end macro @set fc Fran@,cois @mactwo{@value{fc},}
produces:
François+.
makeinfo
. This is
not the case when processing with TeX. This was often done
to “comment out” an unwanted newline at the end of a macro body, but
this is not necessary any more, as the final newline before ‘@end
macro’ is not included in the macro body anyway.
@value
) call for Texinfo command arguments, even when the text
is the same. Texinfo is not M4 (or even plain TeX). It might work
with some commands, it fails with others. Best not to do it at all.
For instance, this fails:
@macro offmacro off @end macro @headings @offmacro
This looks equivalent to @headings off
, but for TeXnical
reasons, it fails with a mysterious error message (namely,
‘Paragraph ended before @headings was complete’).
@ifnottex @macro ctor {name, arg} @macro \name\ something involving \arg\ somehow @end macro @end macro @end ifnottex @tex \gdef\ctor#1{\ctorx#1,} \gdef\ctorx#1,#2,{\def#1{something involving #2 somehow}} @end tex
The makeinfo
implementation also has the following
limitations (by design):
@verbatim
and macros do not mix; for instance, you can’t start
a verbatim block inside a macro and end it outside
(see @verbatim
). Starting any environment inside a macro
and ending it outside may or may not work, for that matter.
@macro
and @end macro
(likewise for @rmacro
) must be
correctly paired. For example, you cannot start a macro definition
within a macro, and then end that nested definition outside the macro.
In the makeinfo
implementation before Texinfo 5.0, ends of
lines from expansion of a @macro
definition did not end an
@-command line-delimited argument (@chapter
, @center
,
etc.). This is no longer the case. For example:
@macro twolines{} aaa bbb @end macro @center @twolines{}
In the current makeinfo
, this is equivalent to:
@center aaa bbb
with just ‘aaa’ as the argument to @center
. In
the earlier implementation, it would have been parsed as this:
@center aaa bbb
Next: @definfoenclose
, Previous: Macro Details, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
The ‘@alias’ command defines a new command to be just like an existing one. This is useful for defining additional markup names, thus preserving additional semantic information in the input even though the output result may be the same.
Write the ‘@alias’ command on a line by itself, followed by the new command name, an equals sign, and the existing command name. Whitespace around the equals sign is optional and ignored if present. Thus:
@alias new = existing
For example, if your document contains citations for both books and
some other media (movies, for example), you might like to define a
macro @moviecite{}
that does the same thing as an ordinary
@cite{}
but conveys the extra semantic information as well.
You’d do this as follows:
@alias moviecite = cite
Macros do not always have the same effect as aliases, due to vagaries of argument parsing. Also, aliases are much simpler to define than macros. So the command is not redundant.
Unfortunately, it’s not possible to alias Texinfo environments; for
example, @alias lang=example
is an error.
Aliases must not be recursive, directly or indirectly.
It is not advisable to redefine any TeX primitive, plain TeX, or Texinfo command name as an alias. Unfortunately this is a very large set of names, and the possible resulting errors from TeX are unpredictable.
makeinfo
will accept the same identifiers for aliases as it
does for macro names, that is, alphanumerics and (except as the first
character) ‘-’.
Next: External Macro Processors, Previous: @alias
, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
@definfoenclose
: Customized HighlightingAn @definfoenclose
command may be used to define a
highlighting command for all the non-TeX output formats. A command
defined using @definfoenclose
marks text by enclosing it in
strings that precede and follow the text. You can use this to get
closer control of your output.
Presumably, if you define a command with @definfoenclose
, you
will create a corresponding command for TeX, either in
texinfo.tex, texinfo.cnf, or within an ‘@iftex’ or
‘@tex’ in your document.
Write a @definfoenclose
command at the beginning of a line
followed by three comma-separated arguments. The first argument to
@definfoenclose
is the @-command name (without the
@
); the second argument is the start delimiter string; and the
third argument is the end delimiter string. The latter two arguments
enclose the highlighted text in the output.
A delimiter string may contain spaces. Neither the start nor end delimiter is required. If you do not want a start delimiter but do want an end delimiter, you must follow the command name with two commas in a row; otherwise, the end delimiter string you intended will naturally be (mis)interpreted as the start delimiter string.
If you do a @definfoenclose
on the name of a predefined
command (such as @emph
, @strong
, @t
, or
@i
), the enclosure definition will override the built-in
definition. We don’t recommend this.
An enclosure command defined this way takes one argument in braces, since it is intended for new markup commands (see Marking Text).
For example, you can write:
@definfoenclose phoo,//,\\
near the beginning of a Texinfo file to define @phoo
as an Info
formatting command that inserts ‘//’ before and ‘\\’ after the argument
to @phoo
. You can then write @phoo{bar}
wherever you
want ‘//bar\\’ highlighted in Info.
For TeX formatting, you could write
@iftex @global@let@phoo=@i @end iftex
to define @phoo
as a command that causes TeX to typeset the
argument to @phoo
in italics.
Each definition applies to its own formatter: one for TeX, the
other for everything else. The raw TeX commands need to be in
‘@iftex’. @definfoenclose
command need not be within
‘@ifinfo’, unless you want to use different definitions for
different output formats.
Here is another example: write
@definfoenclose headword, , :
near the beginning of the file, to define @headword
as an Info
formatting command that inserts nothing before and a colon after the
argument to @headword
.
‘@definfoenclose’ definitions must not be recursive, directly or indirectly.
Previous: @definfoenclose
, Up: Defining New Texinfo Commands [Contents][Index]
Texinfo macros (and its other text substitution facilities) work fine in straightforward cases. If your document needs unusually complex processing, however, their fragility and limitations can be a problem. In this case, you may want to use a different macro processor altogether, such as M4 (see M4) or CPP (see The C Preprocessor).
With one exception, Texinfo does not need to know whether its input is “original” source or preprocessed from some other source file. Therefore, you can arrange your build system to invoke whatever programs you like to handle macro expansion or other preprocessing needs. Texinfo does not offer built-in support for any particular preprocessor, since no one program seemed likely to suffice for the requirements of all documents.
The one exception is line numbers in error messages. In that case, the line number should refer to the original source file, whatever it may be. There’s a well-known mechanism for this: the so-called ‘#line’ directive. Texinfo supports this.
• ‘#line’ Directive: | ||
• TeX: | ||
• Syntax: |
Next: ‘#line’ and TeX, Up: External Macro Processors [Contents][Index]
An input line such as this:
#line 100 "foo.ptexi"
indicates that the next line was line 100 of the file foo.ptexi, and so that’s what an error message should refer to. Both M4 (see Preprocessor features in GNU M4) and CPP (see Line Control in The C Preprocessor, and Preprocessor Output in The C Preprocessor) can generate such lines.
The makeinfo
program recognizes these lines by default,
except within @verbatim
blocks (see @verbatim
.
Their recognition can be turned off completely with
CPP_LINE_DIRECTIVES
(see Other Customization Variables),
though there is normally no reason to do so.
For those few programs (M4, CPP, Texinfo) which need to document
‘#line’ directives and therefore have examples which would
otherwise match the pattern, the command @hashchar{}
can be
used (see Inserting a Hashsign). The example line above looks
like this in the source for this manual:
@hashchar{}line 100 "foo.ptexi"
The @hashchar
command was added to Texinfo in 2013. If you
don’t want to rely on it, you can also use @set
and
@value
to insert the literal ‘#’:
@set hash # @value{hash}line 1 "example.c"
Or, if suitable, a @verbatim
environment can be used instead
of @example
. As mentioned above, #line
-recognition is
disabled inside verbatim blocks.
Next: ‘#line’ Syntax Details, Previous: ‘#line’ Directive, Up: External Macro Processors [Contents][Index]
As mentioned, makeinfo
recognizes the ‘#line’
directives described in the previous section. However,
texinfo.tex does not and cannot. Therefore, such a line will
be incorrectly typeset verbatim if TeX sees it. The solution is to
use makeinfo
’s macro expansion options before running
TeX. There are three approaches:
texi2dvi
or its variants (see Format with texi2dvi
), you can pass -E and texi2dvi
will run makeinfo
first to expand macros and eliminate
‘#line’.
makeinfo
or its variants (see Generic Translator texi2any
), you can specify --no-ifinfo
--iftex -E somefile.out, and then give somefile.out to
texi2dvi
in a separate command.
makeinfo
will then call
texi2dvi -E
.
One last caveat regarding use with TeX: since the #line
directives are not recognized, the line numbers emitted by the
@errormsg{}
command (see Conditional Commands), or by
TeX itself, are the (incorrect) line numbers from the derived file
which TeX is reading, rather than the preprocessor-specified line
numbers. This is another example of why we recommend running
makeinfo
for the best diagnostics (see makeinfo
Advantages).
Previous: ‘#line’ and TeX, Up: External Macro Processors [Contents][Index]
Syntax details for the ‘#line’ directive: the ‘#’ character can be preceded or followed by whitespace, the word ‘line’ is optional, and the file name can be followed by a whitespace-separated list of integers (these are so-called “flags” output by CPP in some cases). For those who like to know the gory details, the actual (Perl) regular expression which is matched is this:
/^\s*#\s*(line)? (\d+)(( "([^"]+)")(\s+\d+)*)?\s*$/
As far as we’ve been able to tell, the trailing integer flags only occur in conjunction with a filename, so that is reflected in the regular expression.
As an example, the following is a syntactically valid ‘#line’ directive, meaning line 1 of /usr/include/stdio.h:
# 1 "/usr/include/stdio.h" 2 3 4
Unfortunately, the quoted filename (‘"..."’) has to be optional, because M4 (especially) can often generate ‘#line’ directives within a single file. Since the ‘line’ is also optional, the result is that lines might match which you wouldn’t expect, e.g.,
# 1
The possible solutions are described above (see ‘#line’ Directive).
Next: Hardcopy, Previous: Defining New Texinfo Commands, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
When a Texinfo processor sees an @include
command in a Texinfo
file, it processes the contents of the file named by the
@include
and incorporates them into the output files being
created. Include files thus let you keep a single large document as a
collection of conveniently small parts.
• Using Include Files: | How to use the @include command.
| |
• texinfo-multiple-files-update : | How to create and update nodes and menus when using included files. | |
• Include Files Requirements: | texinfo-multiple-files-update needs.
| |
• Sample Include File: | A sample outer file with included files within it; and a sample included file. | |
• @verbatiminclude : | Including a file verbatim. | |
• Include Files Evolution: | How use of the @include command
has changed over time.
|
Next: texinfo-multiple-files-update
, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
To include another file within a Texinfo file, write the
@include
command at the beginning of a line and follow it on
the same line by the name of a file to be included. For example:
@include buffers.texi
@-commands are expanded in file names. The one most likely to be
useful is @value
(see @set @value
), and even then
only in complicated situations.
An included file should simply be a segment of text that you expect to
be included as is into the overall or outer Texinfo file; it
should not contain the standard beginning and end parts of a Texinfo
file. In particular, you should not start an included file with a
line saying ‘\input texinfo’; if you do, that text is inserted
into the output file literally. Likewise, you should not end an
included file with a @bye
command; nothing after @bye
is formatted.
In the long-ago past, you were required to write an
@setfilename
line at the beginning of an included file, but no
longer. Now, it does not matter whether you write such a line. If an
@setfilename
line exists in an included file, it is ignored.
Next: Include Files Requirements, Previous: Using Include Files, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
texinfo-multiple-files-update
GNU Emacs Texinfo mode provides the
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command. This command creates or
updates ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers of included files as
well as those in the outer or overall Texinfo file, and it creates or
updates a main menu in the outer file. Depending on whether you call
it with optional arguments, the command updates only the pointers in
the first @node
line of the included files or all of them:
Called without any arguments:
@node
line in each file included in an outer or overall
Texinfo file.
Called with C-u as a prefix argument:
@node
line in each
included file.
Called with a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 8:
texinfo-master-menu
with an argument when you are
working with just one file.
Note the use of the prefix argument in interactive use: with a regular
prefix argument, just C-u, the
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command inserts a master menu;
with a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 8, the command
updates every pointer and menu in all the files and
then inserts a master menu.
Next: Sample Include File, Previous: texinfo-multiple-files-update
, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
If you plan to use the texinfo-multiple-files-update
command,
the outer Texinfo file that lists included files within it should
contain nothing but the beginning and end parts of a Texinfo file, and
a number of @include
commands listing the included files. It
should not even include indices, which should be listed in an included
file of their own.
Moreover, each of the included files must contain exactly one highest
level node (conventionally, @chapter
or equivalent),
and this node must be the first node in the included file.
Furthermore, each of these highest level nodes in each included file
must be at the same hierarchical level in the file structure.
Usually, each is a @chapter
, an @appendix
, or an
@unnumbered
node. Thus, normally, each included file contains
one, and only one, chapter or equivalent-level node.
The outer file should contain only one node, the ‘Top’ node. It
should not contain any nodes besides the single ‘Top’ node. The
texinfo-multiple-files-update
command will not process
them.
Next: @verbatiminclude
, Previous: Include Files Requirements, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
@include
Here is an example of an outer Texinfo file with @include
files
within it before running texinfo-multiple-files-update
, which
would insert a main or master menu:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @settitle Include Example
... See Sample Texinfo Files, for examples of the rest of the frontmatter ...
@ifnottex @node Top @top Include Example @end ifnottex
@include foo.texinfo @include bar.texinfo @include concept-index.texinfo @bye
An included file, such as foo.texinfo, might look like this:
@node First @chapter First Chapter Contents of first chapter …
The full contents of concept-index.texinfo might be as simple as this:
@node Concept Index @unnumbered Concept Index @printindex cp
The outer Texinfo source file for The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
Manual is named elisp.texi. This outer file contains a master
menu with 417 entries and a list of 41 @include
files.
Next: Include Files Evolution, Previous: Sample Include File, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
@verbatiminclude
file: Include a File VerbatimYou can include the exact contents of a file in the document with the
@verbatiminclude
command:
@verbatiminclude filename
The contents of filename is printed in a verbatim environment
(see @verbatim
). Generally, the file is printed exactly
as it is, with all special characters and white space retained. No
indentation is added; if you want indentation, enclose the
@verbatiminclude
within @example
(see @example
).
The name of the file is taken literally, with a single exception:
@value{var}
references are expanded. This makes it
possible to include files in other directories within a distribution,
for instance:
@verbatiminclude @value{top_srcdir}/NEWS
(You still have to get top_srcdir
defined in the
first place.)
For a method on printing the file contents in a smaller font size, see
the end of the section on @verbatim
.
Previous: @verbatiminclude
, Up: Include Files [Contents][Index]
When Info was first created, it was customary to create many small Info files on one subject. Each Info file was formatted from its own Texinfo source file. This custom meant that Emacs did not need to make a large buffer to hold the whole of a large Info file when someone wanted information; instead, Emacs allocated just enough memory for the small Info file that contained the particular information sought. This way, Emacs could avoid wasting memory.
References from one file to another were made by referring to the file
name as well as the node name. (See Referring to
Other Info Files. Also, see @xref
with Four and Five Arguments.)
Include files were designed primarily as a way to create a single,
large printed manual out of several smaller Info files. In a printed
manual, all the references were within the same document, so TeX
could automatically determine the references’ page numbers. The Info
formatting commands used include files only for creating joint
indices; each of the individual Texinfo files had to be formatted for
Info individually. (Each, therefore, required its own
@setfilename
line.)
However, because large Info files are now split automatically, it is no longer necessary to keep them small.
Nowadays, multiple Texinfo files are used mostly for large documents, such as The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, and for projects in which several different people write different sections of a document simultaneously.
In addition, the Info formatting commands have been extended to work
with the @include
command so as to create a single large Info
file that is split into smaller files if necessary. This means that
you can write menus and cross-references without naming the different
Texinfo files.
Next: Generic Translator texi2any
, Previous: Include Files, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Running the texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
command is the
simplest way to create printable output. These commands are installed
as part of the Texinfo package.
In more detail, three major shell commands are used to print formatted output from a Texinfo manual: one converts the Texinfo source into something printable, a second sorts indices, and a third actually prints the formatted document. When you use the shell commands, you can either work directly in the operating system shell or work within a shell inside GNU Emacs (or some other computing environment).
If you are using GNU Emacs, you can use commands provided by Texinfo mode instead of shell commands. In addition to the three commands to format a file, sort the indices, and print the result, Texinfo mode offers key bindings for commands to recenter the output buffer, show the print queue, and delete a job from the print queue.
Details are in the following sections.
• Use TeX: | Use TeX to format for hardcopy. | |
• Format with texi2dvi : | The simplest way to format. | |
• Format with tex /texindex : | Formatting with explicit shell commands. | |
• Print with lpr : | How to print. | |
• Within Emacs: | How to format and print from an Emacs shell. | |
• Texinfo Mode Printing: | How to format and print in Texinfo mode. | |
• Compile-Command: | How to print using Emacs’s compile command. | |
• Requirements Summary: | TeX formatting requirements summary. | |
• Preparing for TeX: | What to do before you use TeX. | |
• Overfull hboxes: | What are and what to do with overfull hboxes. | |
• @smallbook : | How to print small format books and manuals. | |
• A4 Paper: | How to print on A4 or A5 paper. | |
• @pagesizes : | How to print with customized page sizes. | |
• Cropmarks and Magnification: | How to print marks to indicate the size of pages and how to print scaled up output. | |
• PDF Output: | Portable Document Format output. | |
• Obtaining TeX: | How to obtain TeX. |
Next: Format with texi2dvi
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
The typesetting program called TeX is used to format a Texinfo document for printable output. TeX is a very powerful typesetting program and, when used correctly, does an exceptionally good job.
See Obtaining TeX, for information on how to obtain TeX. It is not included in the Texinfo package, being a vast suite of software in itself.
Next: Format with tex
/texindex
, Previous: Use TeX, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
texi2dvi
The texi2dvi
program takes care of all the steps for producing
a TeX DVI file from a Texinfo document. Similarly, texi2pdf
produces a PDF file.
To run texi2dvi
or texi2pdf
on an input file
foo.texi, do this (where ‘prompt$ ’ is your shell prompt):
prompt$ texi2dvi foo.texi prompt$ texi2pdf foo.texi
As shown in this example, the input filenames to texi2dvi
and
texi2pdf
must include any extension, such as ‘.texi’.
(Under MS-DOS and perhaps in other circumstances, you may need to run
‘sh texi2dvi foo.texi’ instead of relying on the operating system
to invoke the shell on the ‘texi2dvi’ script.)
For a list of all the options, run ‘texi2dvi --help’. Some of the options are discussed below.
With the --pdf option, texi2dvi
produces PDF output
instead of DVI (see PDF Output), by running pdftex
instead of tex
. Alternatively, the command
texi2pdf
is an abbreviation for running ‘texi2dvi
--pdf’. The command pdftexi2dvi
is also provided as a
convenience for AUC-TeX (see AUC-TeX), as it
prefers to merely prepend ‘pdf’ to DVI producing tools to have
PDF producing tools.
With the --dvipdf option, texi2dvi
produces PDF
output by running TeX and then a DVI-to-PDF program: if the
DVIPDF
environment variable is set, that value is used, else the
first program extant among dvipdfmx
, dvipdfm
,
dvipdf
, dvi2pdf
, dvitopdf
. This method generally
supports CJK typesetting better than pdftex
.
With the --ps option, texi2dvi
produces PostScript
instead of DVI, by running tex
and then dvips
(see Dvips). (Or the value of the DVIPS
environment variable, if set.)
texi2dvi
can also be used to process LaTeX files.
Normally texi2dvi
is able to guess the input file language
by its contents and file name extension; however, if it guesses wrong
you can explicitly specify the input language using
--language=lang command line option, where lang
is either ‘latex’ or ‘texinfo’.
One useful option to texi2dvi
is ‘--command=cmd’.
This inserts cmd on a line by itself, after a
@setfilename
line in a temporary copy of the input file, before
running TeX. With this, you can specify different printing
formats, such as @smallbook
(see @smallbook
),
@afourpaper
(see A4 Paper), or @pagesizes
(see @pagesizes
), without actually changing the document
source. (You can also do this on a site-wide basis with
texinfo.cnf; see Preparing for TeX).
The option -E (equivalently, -e and
--expand) does Texinfo macro expansion using
makeinfo
instead of the TeX implementation (see Macro Details). Each implementation has its own limitations and
advantages. If this option is used, no line in the source file
may begin with the string @c _texi2dvi
or the
string @c (_texi2dvi)
.
texi2dvi
takes the --build=mode option to
specify where the TeX compilation takes place, and, as a
consequence, how auxiliary files are treated. The build mode
can also be set using the environment variable
TEXI2DVI_BUILD_MODE
. The valid values for mode are:
Compile in the current directory, leaving all the auxiliary files around. This is the traditional TeX use.
Compile in a local *.t2d
directory, where the auxiliary files
are left. Output files are copied back to the original file.
Using the ‘tidy’ mode brings several advantages:
*.t2d
directories are stored there.
On the other hand, because ‘tidy’ compilation takes place in another
directory, occasionally TeX won’t be able to find some files (e.g., when
using \graphicspath
): in that case, use -I to specify the
additional directories to consider.
Same as ‘tidy’, but remove the auxiliary directory afterwards. Every compilation therefore requires the full cycle.
texi2dvi
will use etex
(or pdfetex
) if
it is available, because it runs faster in some cases, and
provides additional tracing information when debugging
texinfo.tex. Nevertheless, this extended version of TeX is
not required, and the DVI output is identical.
(These days, pdftex
and pdfetex
are exactly the
same, but we still run pdfetex
to cater to ancient TeX
installations.)
texi2dvi
attempts to detect auxiliary files output by TeX,
either by using the -recorder option, or by scanning for
‘\openout’ in the log file that a run of TeX produces. You may
control how texi2dvi
does this with the TEXI2DVI_USE_RECORDER
environment variable. Valid values are:
use the -recorder option, no checks.
scan for ‘\openout’ in the log file, no checks.
check whether -recorder option is supported, and if yes use it, otherwise check for tracing ‘\openout’ in the log file is supported, and if yes use it, else it is an error.
same as ‘yesmaybe’, except that the ‘\openout’ trace in log file is checked first.
The default is ‘nomaybe’. This environment variable is provided for troubleshooting purposes, and may change or disappear in the future.
Next: Print with lpr
, Previous: Format with texi2dvi
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
tex
/texindex
You can do the basic formatting of a Texinfo file with the shell
command tex
followed by the name of the Texinfo file. For
example:
tex foo.texi
TeX will produce a DVI file as well as several auxiliary files containing information for indices, cross-references, etc. The DVI file (for DeVice Independent file) can be printed on virtually any device, perhaps after a further conversion (see the previous section).
The tex
formatting command itself does not sort the indices; it
writes an output file of unsorted index data. To generate a printed
index after running the tex
command, you first need a sorted
index to work from. The texindex
command sorts indices.
(texi2dvi
, described in the previous section, runs
tex
and texindex
as necessary.)
tex
outputs unsorted index files under names following a
standard convention: the name of your main input file with any
‘.texi’ or similar extension replaced by the two letter index
name. For example, the raw index output files for the input file
foo.texi would be, by default, foo.cp, foo.vr,
foo.fn, foo.tp, foo.pg and foo.ky. Those
are exactly the arguments to give to texindex
.
Instead of specifying all the unsorted index file names explicitly, it’s typical to use ‘??’ as shell wildcards and give the command in this form:
texindex foo.??
This command will run texindex
on all the unsorted index files,
including any two letter indices that you have defined yourself using
@defindex
or @defcodeindex
. You can safely run
‘texindex foo.??’ even if there are files with two letter
extensions that are not index files, such as ‘foo.el’. The
texindex
command reports but otherwise ignores such files.
For each file specified, texindex
generates a sorted index file
whose name is made by appending ‘s’ to the input file name; for
example, foo.cps is made from foo.cp. The
@printindex
command looks for a file with that name
(see Printing Indices & Menus). TeX does not read the raw
index output file, and texindex
does not alter it.
After you have sorted the indices, you need to rerun tex
on the
Texinfo file. This regenerates the output file, this time with
up-to-date index entries.
Finally, you may need to run tex
one more time, to get the page
numbers in the cross-references correct.
To summarize, this is a five step process. (Alternatively, it’s a
one-step process: run texi2dvi
; see the previous section.)
tex
on your Texinfo file. This generates a DVI file (with
undefined cross-references and no indices), and the raw index files
(with two letter extensions).
texindex
on the raw index files. This creates the
corresponding sorted index files (with three letter extensions).
tex
again on your Texinfo file. This regenerates the DVI
file, this time with indices and defined cross-references, but with
page numbers for the cross-references from the previous run, generally
incorrect.
texindex
.
tex
one last time. This time the correct page numbers are
written for the cross-references.
• Formatting Partial Documents: | ||
• Details of texindex : |
Next: Details of texindex
, Up: Format with tex
/texindex
[Contents][Index]
Sometimes you may wish to print a document while you know it is
incomplete, or to print just one chapter of a document. In such a
case, the usual auxiliary files that TeX creates and warnings
TeX gives about undefined cross-references are just nuisances. You
can avoid them with the @novalidate
command, which you must
give before any sectioning or cross-reference commands.
Thus, the beginning of your file would look approximately like this:
\input texinfo @novalidate …
@novalidate
also turns off validation in
makeinfo
, just like its --no-validate
option
(see Pointer Validation).
Furthermore, you need not run texindex
each time after you run
tex
. The tex
formatting command simply uses whatever
sorted index files happen to exist from a previous use of
texindex
. If those are out of date, that is usually ok while
you are creating or debugging a document.
Previous: Formatting Partial Documents, Up: Format with tex
/texindex
[Contents][Index]
texindex
In Texinfo version 6, released in 2015, the texindex
program
was completely reimplemented. The principal functional difference is
that index entries beginning with a left brace or right brace
(‘{’ resp. ‘}’) can work properly. For example, these
simple index entries are processed correctly, including the “index
initial” shown in the index:
@cindex @{ @cindex @} ... @printindex cp
However, to enable this behavior, it’s necessary (for the time being) to give a special option to TeX early in a source document:
@tex \global\usebracesinindexestrue @end tex
This is because the previous texindex
implementation aborted
with an incorrect error message (‘No page number in \entry...’)
on such index entries when handled in the normal way. Therefore
TeX wrote out an incorrect “sort string” using the ‘|’
character; this did not affect the text of the entry, but the index
initial was the incorrect ‘|’, and sorting was not perfect.
Because of that fatal error, and because relatively few documents have
index entries beginning with braces, we want to provide some
transition time for installations to have the new texindex
.
At some point in the future, we’ll make \usebracesinindexes
true by default (the above TeX code will continue to work fine).
Although not a matter of functionality, readers may be interested to
know that the new texindex
is a literate program
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Literate_programming) using
Texinfo for documentation and (portable) awk
for code. A
single source file, texindex/ti.twjr in this case, produces the
runnable program, a printable document, and an online document.
The system is called TexiWeb Jr. and was created by Arnold
Robbins, who also wrote the new texindex
. Not
coincidentally, he is also the long-time maintainer of gawk
(GNU Awk, see The GNU Awk User’s Guide). The file
texindex/Makefile.am shows example usage of the system.
Next: Within Emacs, Previous: Format with tex
/texindex
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
lpr
from ShellThe way to print a DVI file depends on your system installation. Two common ones are ‘dvips foo.dvi -o’ to make a PostScript file first and then print that, and ‘lpr -d foo.dvi’ to print a DVI file directly.
For example, the following commands will (probably) suffice to sort
the indices, format, and print this manual using the texi2dvi
shell script (see Format with texi2dvi
).
texi2dvi texinfo.texi dvips texinfo.dvi -o lpr texinfo.ps
Depending on the lpr
setup on your machine, you might able to
combine the last two steps into lpr -d texinfo.dvi
.
You can also generate a PDF file by running texi2pdf
instead of
texi2dvi
; a PDF is often directly printable. Or you can
generate a PCL file by using dvilj
instead of dvips
, if
you have a printer that prefers that format.
lpr
is a standard program on Unix systems, but it is usually
absent on MS-DOS/MS-Windows. If so, just create a PostScript or PDF
or PCL file, whatever is most convenient, and print that in the usual
way for your machine (e.g., by sending to the appropriate port,
usually ‘PRN’).
Next: Texinfo Mode Printing, Previous: Print with lpr
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
You can give formatting and printing commands from a shell within GNU Emacs, just like any other shell command. To create a shell within Emacs, type M-x shell (see Shell in The GNU Emacs Manual). In this shell, you can format and print the document. See Format and Print Hardcopy, for details.
You can switch to and from the shell buffer while tex
is
running and do other editing. If you are formatting a long document
on a slow machine, this can be very convenient.
For example, you can use texi2dvi
from an Emacs shell. Here is
one way to use texi2pdf
to format and print Using and
Porting GNU CC from a shell within Emacs:
texi2pdf gcc.texi lpr gcc.pdf
See the next section for more information about formatting and printing in Texinfo mode.
Next: Compile-Command, Previous: Within Emacs, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
Texinfo mode provides several predefined key commands for TeX formatting and printing. These include commands for sorting indices, looking at the printer queue, killing the formatting job, and recentering the display of the buffer in which the operations occur.
Run texi2dvi
on the current buffer.
Run TeX on the current region.
Sort the indices of a Texinfo file formatted with
texinfo-tex-region
.
Print a DVI file that was made with texinfo-tex-region
or
texinfo-tex-buffer
.
Show the print queue.
Delete a job from the print queue; you will be prompted for the job
number shown by a preceding C-c C-t C-q command
(texinfo-show-tex-print-queue
).
Kill the currently running TeX job started by either
texinfo-tex-region
or texinfo-tex-buffer
, or any other
process running in the Texinfo shell buffer.
Quit a TeX formatting job that has stopped because of an error by sending an x to it. When you do this, TeX preserves a record of what it did in a .log file.
Redisplay the shell buffer in which the TeX printing and formatting commands are run to show its most recent output.
Thus, the usual sequence of commands for formatting a buffer is as follows (with comments to the right):
C-c C-t C-b Run texi2dvi
on the buffer.
C-c C-t C-p Print the DVI file.
C-c C-t C-q Display the printer queue.
The Texinfo mode TeX formatting commands start a subshell in Emacs
called the *tex-shell*. The texinfo-tex-command
,
texinfo-texindex-command
, and tex-dvi-print-command
commands are all run in this shell.
You can watch the commands operate in the ‘*tex-shell*’ buffer, and you can switch to and from and use the ‘*tex-shell*’ buffer as you would any other shell buffer.
The formatting and print commands depend on the values of several variables. The default values are:
Variable Default value texinfo-texi2dvi-command "texi2dvi" texinfo-tex-command "tex" texinfo-texindex-command "texindex" texinfo-delete-from-print-queue-command "lprm" texinfo-tex-trailer "@bye" tex-start-of-header "%**start" tex-end-of-header "%**end" tex-dvi-print-command "lpr -d" tex-show-queue-command "lpq"
You can change the values of these variables with the M-x set-variable command (see Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual), or with your .emacs initialization file (see Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Beginning with version 20, GNU Emacs offers a user-friendly interface, called Customize, for changing values of user-definable variables. See Easy Customization Interface in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more details about this. The Texinfo variables can be found in the ‘Development/Docs/Texinfo’ group, once you invoke the M-x customize command.
Next: Requirements Summary, Previous: Texinfo Mode Printing, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
Yet another way to apply the TeX formatting command to a Texinfo file
is to put that command in a local variables list at the end of the
Texinfo file. You can then specify the tex
or texi2dvi
commands as a compile-command
and have Emacs run it by typing
M-x compile. This creates a special shell called the
*compilation* buffer in which Emacs runs the compile command.
For example, at the end of the gdb.texi file, after the
@bye
, you could put the following:
Local Variables: compile-command: "texi2dvi gdb.texi" End:
This technique is most often used by programmers who also compile programs this way; see Compilation in The GNU Emacs Manual.
Next: Preparing for TeX, Previous: Compile-Command, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
Every Texinfo file that is to be input to TeX must begin with a
\input
command:
\input texinfo
This instructs TeX to load the macros it needs to process a Texinfo file.
Every Texinfo file must end with a line that terminates TeX’s processing and forces out unfinished pages:
@bye
Strictly speaking, these two lines are all a Texinfo file needs to be processed successfully by TeX.
Usually, however, the beginning includes a @settitle
command
to define the title of the printed manual, a title page, a copyright
page, permissions, and a table of contents. Besides @bye
, the
end of a file usually includes indices. (Not to mention that most
manuals contain a body of text as well.)
For more information, see:
@settitle
.
@setchapternewpage
.
Next: Overfull hboxes, Previous: Requirements Summary, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
TeX needs to know where to find the texinfo.tex file that the ‘\input texinfo’ command on the first line reads. The texinfo.tex file tells TeX how to handle @-commands; it is included in all standard GNU distributions. The latest version released for general use is available from the usual GNU servers and mirrors:
The latest development version is available from the Texinfo source repository:
texinfo.tex is essentially a standalone file, and compatibility is of utmost concern; so, if you need or want to try a newer version than came with your system, it nearly always suffices to download it and put it anywhere that TeX will find it (first). You can replace any existing texinfo.tex with a newer version (of course saving the original in case of disaster).
Also, you should install epsf.tex, if it is not already installed
from another distribution. More details are at the end of the description
of the @image
command (see Images).
To use quotation marks other than those used in English, you’ll need to have the European Computer Modern fonts (e.g., ecrm1000) and (for PDF output) CM-Super fonts (see Inserting Quotation Marks).
To use the @euro
command, you’ll need the ‘feym*’ fonts
(e.g., feymr10). See @euro
.
All of the above files (and a whole lot more) should be installed by default in a reasonable TeX installation.
Optionally, you may create a file texinfo.cnf for site configuration. This file is read by TeX at the beginning of a Texinfo file. You can put any commands you like there, according to local site-wide conventions. They will be read by TeX when processing any Texinfo document. For example, if texinfo.cnf contains the line ‘@afourpaper’ (see A4 Paper), then all Texinfo documents will be processed with that page size in effect. If you have nothing to put in texinfo.cnf, you do not need to create it.
If neither of the above locations for these system files suffice, you
can specify the directories explicitly. For texinfo.tex, you
can do this by writing the complete path for the file after the
\input
command. Another way, that works for both
texinfo.tex and texinfo.cnf (and any other file TeX
might read), is to set the TEXINPUTS
environment variable in
your .profile or .cshrc file.
Whether you use .profile or .cshrc depends on
whether you use a Bourne shell-compatible (sh
, bash
,
ksh
, …) or C shell-compatible (csh
, tcsh
)
command interpreter, respeictvely.
In a .profile file, you could use the following sh
command
sequence:
TEXINPUTS=.:/home/me/mylib: export TEXINPUTS
While in a .cshrc file, you could use the following csh
command sequence:
setenv TEXINPUTS .:/home/me/mylib:
On MS-DOS/MS-Windows, you’d do this (note the use of the ‘;’ character as directory separator, instead of ‘:’):
set TEXINPUTS=.;d:/home/me/mylib;c:
It is customary for DOS/Windows users to put such commands in the autoexec.bat file, or in the Windows registry.
These settings would cause TeX to look for \input file first in the current directory, indicated by the ‘.’, then in a hypothetical user ‘me’’s mylib directory, and finally in the system directories. (A leading, trailing, or doubled ‘:’ indicates searching the system directories at that point.)
Next: @smallbook
, Previous: Preparing for TeX, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
TeX is sometimes unable to typeset a line within the normal margins. This most often occurs when TeX comes upon what it interprets as a long word that it cannot hyphenate, such as an electronic mail network address or a very long identifier. When this happens, TeX prints an error message like this:
Overfull @hbox (20.76302pt too wide)
(In TeX, lines are in “horizontal boxes”, hence the term, “hbox”. ‘@hbox’ is a TeX primitive not used in the Texinfo language.)
TeX also provides the line number in the Texinfo source file and the text of the offending line, which is marked at all the places that TeX considered hyphenation. See Debugging with TeX, for more information about typesetting errors.
If the Texinfo file has an overfull hbox, you can rewrite the sentence so the overfull hbox does not occur, or you can decide to leave it. A small excursion into the right margin often does not matter and may not even be noticeable.
If you have many overfull boxes and/or an antipathy to rewriting, you can coerce TeX into greatly increasing the allowable interword spacing, thus (if you’re lucky) avoiding many of the bad line breaks, like this:
@tex \global\emergencystretch = .9\hsize @end tex
(You should adjust the fraction as needed.) This huge value for
\emergencystretch
cannot be the default, since then the typeset
output would generally be of noticeably lower quality; its default
value is ‘.15\hsize’. \hsize
is the TeX dimension
containing the current line width.
For any overfull boxes you do have, TeX will print a large, ugly, black rectangle beside the line that contains the overfull hbox unless told otherwise. This is so you will notice the location of the problem if you are correcting a draft.
To prevent such a monstrosity from marring your final printout, write
the following in the beginning of the Texinfo file on a line of its own,
before the @titlepage
command:
@finalout
Next: A4 Paper, Previous: Overfull hboxes, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
@smallbook
: Printing “Small” BooksBy default, TeX typesets pages for printing in an 8.5 by 11 inch format. However, you can direct TeX to typeset a document in a 7 by 9.25 inch format that is suitable for bound books by inserting the following command on a line by itself at the beginning of the Texinfo file, before the title page:
@smallbook
(Since many books are about 7 by 9.25 inches, this command might better
have been called the @regularbooksize
command, but it came to be
called the @smallbook
command by comparison to the 8.5 by 11
inch format.)
If you write the @smallbook
command between the
start-of-header and end-of-header lines, the Texinfo mode TeX
region formatting command, texinfo-tex-region
, will format the
region in “small” book size (see Start of Header).
See @small…
, for information about commands that make
it easier to produce examples for a smaller manual.
See Format with texi2dvi
, and Preparing for TeX,
for other ways to format with @smallbook
that do not require
changing the source file.
Next: @pagesizes
, Previous: @smallbook
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
You can tell TeX to format a document for printing on European size
A4 paper (or A5) with the @afourpaper
(or @afivepaper
)
command. Write the command on a line by itself near the beginning of
the Texinfo file, before the title page. For example, this is how you
would write the header for this manual:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @c %**start of header @settitle Texinfo @afourpaper @c %**end of header
See Format with texi2dvi
, and Preparing for TeX,
for other ways to format for different paper sizes that do not require
changing the source file.
You may or may not prefer the formatting that results from the command
@afourlatex
. There’s also @afourwide
for A4 paper in
wide format.
Next: Cropmarks and Magnification, Previous: A4 Paper, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
@pagesizes
[width][, height]: Custom Page SizesYou can explicitly specify the height and (optionally) width of the main
text area on the page with the @pagesizes
command. Write this
on a line by itself near the beginning of the Texinfo file, before the
title page. The height comes first, then the width if desired,
separated by a comma. Examples:
@pagesizes 200mm,150mm
and
@pagesizes 11.5in
This would be reasonable for printing on B5-size paper. To emphasize, this command specifies the size of the text area, not the size of the paper (which is 250mm by 177mm for B5, 14in by 8.5in for legal).
To make more elaborate changes, such as changing any of the page margins, you must define a new command in texinfo.tex or texinfo.cnf.
See Format with texi2dvi
, and Preparing for TeX,
for other ways to specify @pagesizes
that do not require
changing the source file.
Next: PDF Output, Previous: @pagesizes
, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
You can (attempt to) direct TeX to print cropmarks at the corners
of pages with the @cropmarks
command. Write the
@cropmarks
command on a line by itself near the beginning of
the Texinfo file, before the title page, like this:
@cropmarks
This command is mainly for printers that typeset several pages on one
sheet of film; but you can attempt to use it to mark the corners of a
book set to 7 by 9.25 inches with the @smallbook
command.
(Printers will not produce cropmarks for regular sized output that is
printed on regular sized paper.) Since different printing machines
work in different ways, you should explore the use of this command
with a spirit of adventure. You may have to redefine the command in
texinfo.tex.
The @cropmarks
command is recognized and ignored in non-TeX
output formats.
You can attempt to direct TeX to typeset pages larger or smaller
than usual with the \mag
TeX command. Everything that is
typeset is scaled proportionally larger or smaller. (\mag
stands for “magnification”.) This is not a Texinfo
@-command, but is a raw TeX command that is prefixed with a
backslash. You have to write this command between @tex
and
@end tex
(see Raw Formatter Commands).
Follow the \mag
command with an ‘=’ and then a number that
is 1000 times the magnification you desire. For example, to print pages
at 1.2 normal size, write the following near the beginning of the
Texinfo file, before the title page:
@tex \global\mag=1200 @end tex
With some printing technologies, you can print normal-sized copies that look better than usual by giving a larger-than-normal master to your print shop. They do the reduction, thus effectively increasing the resolution.
Depending on your system, DVI files prepared with a
nonstandard-\mag
may not print or may print only with certain
magnifications. Be prepared to experiment.
Next: Obtaining TeX, Previous: Cropmarks and Magnification, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
The simplest way to generate PDF output from Texinfo source is to run
the convenience script texi2pdf
(or pdftexi2dvi
);
this executes the texi2dvi
script with the --pdf
option (see Format with texi2dvi
). If for some reason you
want to process the document by hand, you can run the pdftex
program instead of plain tex
. That is, run ‘pdftex
foo.texi’ instead of ‘tex foo.texi’.
PDF stands for ‘Portable Document Format’. It was invented by Adobe Systems some years ago for document interchange, based on their PostScript language. Related links:
xpdf
, a freely available standalone
PDF reader for the X window
system.
At present, Texinfo does not provide ‘@ifpdf’ or ‘@pdf’ commands as for the other output formats, since PDF documents contain many internal low-level offsets and cross-references that would be hard or impossible to specify at the Texinfo source level.
PDF files require dedicated software to be displayed, unlike the plain ASCII formats (Info, HTML) that Texinfo supports. They also tend to be much larger than the DVI files output by TeX by default. Nevertheless, a PDF file does define an actual typeset document in a self-contained file, notably including all the fonts that are used, so it has its place.
Previous: PDF Output, Up: Hardcopy [Contents][Index]
TeX is a document formatter that is used by the FSF for its documentation. It is the easiest way to get printed output (e.g., PDF and PostScript) for Texinfo manuals. TeX is freely redistributable, and you can get it over the Internet or on physical media. See http://tug.org/texlive.
Next: Creating and Installing Info Files, Previous: Hardcopy, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
texi2any
: The Generic Translator for Texinfotexi2any
is the generic translator for Texinfo that can
produce different output formats and is highly customizable. It
supports these formats:
makeinfo
is an alias for texi2any
. By default,
both texi2any
and makeinfo
generate Info output;
indeed, there are no differences in behavior based on the name.
Beside these default formats, command line options to
texi2any
can change many aspects of the output. Beyond
that, initialization files provide even more control over the final
output—nearly anything not specified in the Texinfo input file.
Initialization files are written in Perl, like the main program, and
anything which can be specified on the command line can also be
specified within a initialization file.
The rest of this chapter goes into the details.
• Reference Implementation: | texi2any : the reference implementation.
| |
• Invoking texi2any : | Running the translator from a shell. | |
• texi2any Environment Variables: | ||
• texi2any Printed Output: | Calling texi2dvi .
| |
• Pointer Validation: | How to check that pointers point somewhere. | |
• Customization Variables: | Configuring texi2any .
| |
• Internationalization of Document Strings: | Translating program-inserted text. | |
• Invoking pod2texi : | Translating Perl pod to Texinfo. | |
• texi2html : | An ancestor of texi2any .
|
Next: Invoking texi2any
, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2any
: A Texinfo Reference ImplementationAbove, we called texi2any
“the” translator for Texinfo
instead of just “a” translator, even though (of course) it’s
technically and legally possible for other implementations to be
written. The reason is that alternative implementations are very
likely to have subtle, or not-so-subtle, differences in behavior, and
thus Texinfo documents would become dependent on the processor.
Therefore, it is important to have a reference implementation that
defines parts of the language not fully specified by the manual (often
intentionally so). It is equally important to have consistent
command-line options and other behavior for all processors.
For this reason, the once-independent texi2html
Perl Texinfo
processor was made compatible with the C implementation of
makeinfo
, to avoid continuing with two different
implementations (see History). The current implementation,
texi2any
, serves as the reference implementation. It
inherited the design of customization and other features from
texi2html
(for more on texi2html
compatibility,
see texi2html
). However, texi2any
is a full
reimplementation: it constructs a tree-based representation of the
input document for all back-ends to work from.
Extensive tests of the language were developed at the same time as
texi2any
; we plead with anyone thinking of writing a program
to parse Texinfo input to at least make use of these tests.
The texi2html
wrapper script (see texi2html
)
provides a very simple example of calling texi2any
from a
shell script; it’s in util/texi2html in the Texinfo sources.
More consequentially, texi-elements-by-size
is an example
Perl script using the Texinfo::Parser
module interface; it’s
also in the util source directory. (Its functionality may also
be useful to authors; see texi-elements-by-size.)
With the release of texi2any
as the reference
implementation, development of both the C implementation of
makeinfo
and texi2html
has been halted. Going
forward, we ask authors of Texinfo documents to use only
texi2any
.
Next: texi2any
Environment Variables, Previous: Reference Implementation, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2any
/makeinfo
from a ShellTo process a Texinfo file, invoke texi2any
or
makeinfo
(the two names are synonyms for the same program;
we’ll use the names interchangeably) followed by the name of the
Texinfo file. Also select the format you want to output with the
appropriate command line option (default is Info). Thus, to create
the Info file for Bison, type the following to the shell:
texi2any --info bison.texinfo
You can specify more than one input file name; each is processed in turn. If an input file name is ‘-’, standard input is read.
The texi2any
program accepts many options. Perhaps the
most basic are those that change the output format. By default,
texi2any
outputs Info.
Each command line option is either a long name preceded by ‘--’ or a single letter preceded by ‘-’. You can use abbreviations for the long option names as long as they are unique.
For example, you could use the following shell command to create an Info file for bison.texinfo in which lines are filled to only 68 columns:
texi2any --fill-column=68 bison.texinfo
You can write two or more options in sequence, like this:
texi2any --no-split --fill-column=70 …
(This would keep the Info file together as one possibly very long file and would also set the fill column to 70.)
The options are (approximately in alphabetical order):
--commands-in-node-names
This option now does nothing, but remains for compatibility. (It used
to ensure that @-commands in node names were expanded throughout the
document, especially @value
. This is now done by default.)
--conf-dir=path
Prepend path to the directory search list for finding customization files that may be loaded with --init-file (see below). The path value can be a single directory, or a list of several directories separated by the usual path separator character (‘:’ on Unix-like systems, ‘;’ on Windows).
--css-include=file
When producing HTML, literally include the contents of file, which should contain W3C cascading style sheets specifications, in the ‘<style>’ block of the HTML output. If file is ‘-’, read standard input. See HTML CSS.
--css-ref=url
When producing HTML, add a ‘<link>’ tag to the output which references a cascading style sheet at url. This allows using standalone style sheets.
-D var
-D 'var value'
Cause the Texinfo variable var to be defined. This is
equivalent to @set var
in the Texinfo file
(see @set @clear @value
).
The argument to the option is always one word to the shell; if it
contains internal whitespace, the first word is taken as the variable
name and the remainder as the value. For example, -D 'myvar
someval'
is equivalent to @set myvar someval
.
--disable-encoding
--enable-encoding
By default, or with --enable-encoding, output accented and
special characters in Info and plain text output based on
‘@documentencoding’. With --disable-encoding, 7-bit
ASCII transliterations are output. See @documentencoding
,
and Inserting Accents.
--docbook
Generate Docbook output (rather than Info).
--document-language=lang
Use lang to translate Texinfo keywords which end up in the
output document. The default is the locale specified by the
@documentlanguage
command if there is one, otherwise English
(see @documentlanguage
).
--dvi
Generate a TeX DVI file using texi2dvi
, rather than Info
(see texi2any
Printed Output).
--dvipdf
Generate a PDF file using texi2dvi --dvipdf
, rather than
Info (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--error-limit=limit
-e limit
Report LIMIT errors before aborting (on the assumption that continuing would be useless); default 100.
--fill-column=width
-f width
Specify the maximum number of columns in a line; this is the right-hand edge of a line. Paragraphs that are filled will be filled to this width. (Filling is the process of breaking up and connecting lines so that lines are the same length as or shorter than the number specified as the fill column. Lines are broken between words.) The default value is 72.
--footnote-style=style
-s style
Set the footnote style to style: either ‘end’ for the end
node style (the default) or ‘separate’ for the separate node
style. The value set by this option overrides the value set in a
Texinfo file by a @footnotestyle
command (see Footnote Styles).
When the footnote style is ‘separate’, makeinfo
makes a
new node containing the footnotes found in the current node. When the
footnote style is ‘end’, makeinfo
places the footnote
references at the end of the current node.
In HTML, when the footnote style is ‘end’, or if the output is not split, footnotes are put at the end of the output. If set to ‘separate’, and the output is split, they are placed in a separate file.
--force
-F
Ordinarily, if the input file has errors, the output files are not created. With this option, they are preserved.
--help
-h
Print a message with available options and basic usage, then exit successfully.
--html
Generate HTML output (rather than Info). By default, the HTML output is split into one output file per Texinfo source node, and the split output is written into a subdirectory based on the name of the top-level Info file. See Generating HTML.
-I path
Append path to the directory search list for finding files that
are included using the @include
command. By default,
texi2any
searches only the current directory. If path is
not given, the current directory is appended. The path value
can be a single directory or a list of several directories separated
by the usual path separator character (‘:’ on Unix-like systems,
‘;’ on Windows).
--ifdocbook
--ifhtml
--ifinfo
--ifplaintext
--iftex
--ifxml
For the given format, process ‘@ifformat’ and ‘@format’ commands, and do not process ‘@ifnotformat’, regardless of the format being output. For instance, if --iftex is given, then ‘@iftex’ and ‘@tex’ blocks will be read, and ‘@ifnottex’ blocks will be ignored.
--info
Generate Info output. By default, if the output file contains more
than about 300,000 bytes, it is split into shorter subfiles of about
that size. The name of the output file and any subfiles is determined
by @setfilename
(see @setfilename
). See Tag and Split Files.
--init-file=file
Load file as code to modify the behavior and output of the
generated manual. It is customary to use the .pm
or the
.init
extensions for these customization files, but that is not
enforced; the file name can be anything. The
--conf-dir option (see above) can be used to add to the list
of directories in which these customization files are searched for.
--internal-links=file
In HTML mode, output a tab-separated file containing three columns: the internal link to an indexed item or item in the table of contents, the name of the index (or table of contents) in which it occurs, and the term which was indexed or entered. The items are in the natural sorting order for the given element. This dump can be useful for post-processors.
--macro-expand=file
-E file
Output the Texinfo source, with all Texinfo macros expanded, to
file. Normally, the result of macro expansion is used
internally by makeinfo
and then discarded.
--no-headers
Do not include menus or node separator lines in the output.
When generating Info, this is the same as using --plaintext,
resulting in a simple plain text file. Furthermore,
@setfilename
is ignored, and output is to standard output
unless overridden with -o. (This behavior is for backward
compatibility.)
When generating HTML, and output is split, also output navigation links only at the beginning of each file. If output is not split, do not include navigation links at the top of each node at all. See Generating HTML.
--no-ifdocbook
--no-ifhtml
--no-ifinfo
--no-ifplaintext
--no-iftex
--no-ifxml
For the given format, do not process ‘@ifformat’ and ‘@format’ commands, and do process ‘@ifnotformat’, regardless of the format being output. For instance, if --no-ifhtml is given, then ‘@ifhtml’ and ‘@html’ blocks will not be read, and ‘@ifnothtml’ blocks will be.
--no-node-files
--node-files
When generating HTML, create redirection files for anchors and any nodes not already output with the file name corresponding to the node name (see HTML Xref Node Name Expansion). This makes it possible for section- and chapter-level cross-manual references to succeed (see HTML Xref Configuration).
If the output is split, this is enabled by default. If the output is not split, --node-files enables the creation of the redirection files, in addition to the monolithic main output file. --no-node-files suppresses the creation of redirection files in any case. This option has no effect with any output format other than HTML. See Generating HTML.
--no-number-footnotes
Suppress automatic footnote numbering. By default, footnotes are numbered sequentially within a node, i.e., the current footnote number is reset to 1 at the start of each node.
--no-number-sections
--number-sections
With --number_sections (the default), output chapter,
section, and appendix numbers as in printed manuals. This works only
with hierarchically-structured manuals. You should specify
--no-number-sections
if your manual is not normally structured.
--no-pointer-validate
--no-validate
Suppress the pointer-validation phase of makeinfo
—a dangerous
thing to do. This can also be done with the @novalidate
command (see Use TeX). Normally, consistency checks are made
to ensure that cross-references can be resolved, etc. See Pointer Validation.
--no-warn
Suppress warning messages (but not error messages).
--output=file
-o file
Specify that the output should be directed to file. This
overrides any file name specified in a @setfilename
command
found in the Texinfo source. If neither @setfilename
nor this
option are specified, the input file name is used to determine the
output name. See @setfilename
.
If file is ‘-’, output goes to standard output and ‘--no-split’ is implied.
If file is a directory or ends with a ‘/’ the usual rules
are used to determine the output file name (namely, use
@setfilename
or the input file name) but the files are written
to the file directory. For example, ‘makeinfo -o bar/
foo.texi’, with or without --no-split, will write
bar/foo.info, and possibly other files, under bar/.
When generating HTML and output is split, file is used as the name for the directory into which all files are written. For example, ‘makeinfo -o bar --html foo.texi’ will write bar/index.html, among other files.
--output-indent=val
This option now does nothing, but remains for compatibility. (It used to alter indentation in XML/Docbook output.)
-P path
Prepend path to the directory search list for @include
.
If path is not given, the current directory is prepended. See
‘-I’ above.
--paragraph-indent=indent
-p indent
Set the paragraph indentation style to indent. The value set by
this option overrides the value set in a Texinfo file by an
@paragraphindent
command (see @paragraphindent
).
The value of indent is interpreted as follows:
Preserve any existing indentation (or lack thereof) at the beginnings of paragraphs.
Delete any existing indentation.
Indent each paragraph by num spaces.
The default is to indent by two spaces, except for paragraphs following a section heading, which are not indented.
--pdf
Generate a PDF file using texi2dvi --pdf
, rather than Info
(see texi2any
Printed Output).
--plaintext
Output a plain text file (rather than Info): do not include menus or node separator lines in the output. This results in a straightforward plain text file that you can (for example) send in email without complications, or include in a distribution (for example, an INSTALL file).
With this option, @setfilename
is ignored and the output goes
to standard output by default; this can be overridden with -o.
--ps
Generate a PostScript file using texi2dvi --ps
, rather than
Info (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--set-customization-variable var=value
-c var=value
Set the customization variable var to value. The =
is optional, but both var and value must be quoted to the
shell as necessary so the result is a single word. Many aspects of
texi2any
behavior and output may be controlled by
customization variables, beyond what can be set in the document by
@-commands and with other command line switches. See Customization Variables.
--split=how
--no-split
When generating Info, by default large output files are split into smaller subfiles, of approximately 300k bytes. When generating HTML, by default each output file contains one node (see Generating HTML). --no-split suppresses this splitting of the output.
Alternatively, --split=how may be used to specify at which level the HTML output should be split. The possible values for how are:
The output is split at @chapter
and other sectioning
@-commands at this level (@appendix
, etc.).
The output is split at @section
and similar.
The output is split at every node. This is the default.
Plain text output can be split similarly to HTML. This may be useful for extracting sections from a Texinfo document and making them available as separate files.
--split-size=num
Keep Info files to at most num characters if possible; default is 300,000. (However, a single node will never be split across Info files.)
--transliterate-file-names
Enable transliteration of 8-bit characters in node names for the purpose of file name creation. See HTML Xref 8-bit Character Expansion.
-U var
Cause var to be undefined. This is equivalent to @clear
var
in the Texinfo file (see @set @clear @value
).
--verbose
Cause makeinfo
to display messages saying what it is doing.
Normally, makeinfo
only outputs messages if there are errors or
warnings.
--version
-V
Print the version number, then exit successfully.
--Xopt str
Pass str (a single shell word) to texi2dvi
; may be
repeated (see texi2any
Printed Output).
--xml
Generate Texinfo XML output (rather than Info).
Next: texi2any
Printed Output, Previous: Invoking texi2any
, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2any
makeinfo
also reads the environment variable
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
to determine the output format, if not
overridden by a command line option. The value should be one of:
docbook dvi dvipdf html info pdf plaintext ps xml
If not set or otherwise specified, Info output is the default.
The customization variable of the same name is also read; if set, that overrides an environment variable setting, but not a command-line option. See Customization Variables and Options.
You can control texi2any
’s use of Perl extension modules
by setting the TEXINFO_XS
environment variable. These modules
are compiled native code that the interpreted Perl code can use.
Ideally, these extension modules should just work, and the only noticable
difference they should make is that texi2any
finishes running
sooner. However, you can use this environment variable for the purposes
of troubleshooting: for example, if you have problems with the output of
texi2any
varying depending on whether the extension modules are
in use.
The following values of TEXINFO_XS
are recognized by
texi2any
:
The default behavior. Try to load extension modules, and silently fall back to the interpreted Perl implementations if this fails.
Try to load extension modules, and if this fails, give a warning message before falling back to the interpreted Perl implementations.
Try to load extension modules, printing many messages while doing so.
Do not use extension modules.
Next: Pointer Validation, Previous: texi2any
Environment Variables, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2any
Printed OutputTo justify the name Texinfo-to-any, texi2any
has
basic support for creating printed output in the various formats:
TeX DVI, PDF, and PostScript. This is done via the simple method
of executing the texi2dvi
program when those output formats
are requested, after checking the validity of the input to give users
the benefit of texi2any
’s error checking. If you don’t want
such error checking, perhaps because your manual plays advanced TeX
tricks together with texinfo.tex, just invoke
texi2dvi
directly.
The output format options for this are --dvi,
--dvipdf, --pdf, and --ps. See Format with texi2dvi
, for more details on these options and general
texi2dvi
operation. In addition, the --verbose,
--silent, and --quiet options are passed on if
specified; the -I and -o options are likewise passed
on with their arguments, and --debug without its argument.
The only option remaining that is related to the texi2dvi
invocation is --Xopt. Here, just the argument is passed on
and multiple --Xopt options accumulate. This provides a way
to construct an arbitrary command line for texi2dvi
. For
example, running
texi2any --Xopt -t --Xopt @a4paper --pdf foo.texi
is equivalent to running
texi2dvi -t @a4paper --pdf foo.texi
except for the validity check.
Although one might wish that other options to texi2any
would
take effect, they don’t. For example, running ‘texi2any
--no-number-sections --dvi foo.texi’ still results in a DVI file with
numbered sections. (Perhaps this could be improved in the future, if
requests are received.)
The actual name of the command that is invoked is specified by the
TEXI2DVI
customization variable (see Other Customization Variables). As you might guess, the default is ‘texi2dvi’.
texi2any
itself does not generate any normal output when it
invokes texi2dvi
, only diagnostic messages.
Next: Customization Variables, Previous: texi2any
Printed Output, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
If you do not suppress pointer validation with the
‘--no-validate’ option or the @novalidate
command in the
source file (see Use TeX), makeinfo
will check the
validity of the Texinfo file.
Most validation checks are different depending on whether node pointers are explicitly or implicitly determined. With explicit node pointers, here is the list of what is checked:
With implicit node pointers, the above error cannot occur, as such.
(Which is a major reason why we recommend using this feature of
makeinfo
, and not specifying any node pointers yourself.)
Instead, makeinfo
checks that the tree constructed from the
document’s menus matches the tree constructed from the sectioning
commands. For example, if a chapter-level menu mentions nodes
n1 and n2, in that order, nodes n1 and n2 must
be associated with @section
commands in the chapter.
Finally, with both explicit and implicit node pointers,
makeinfo
checks that every node except the ‘Top’ node is
referenced in a menu.
Next: Internationalization of Document Strings, Previous: Pointer Validation, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
Warning: These customization variable names and meanings may change in any Texinfo release. We always try to avoid incompatible changes, but we cannot absolutely promise, since needs change over time.
Many aspects of the behavior and output of texi2any
may be
modified by modifying so-called customization variables. These
fall into a few general categories:
@documentlanguage
.
SPLIT
is associated with the
--split command-line option, and TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
allows specifying the output format.
Customization variables may set on the command line using
--set-customization-variable 'var value'
(quoting
the variable/value pair to the shell) or
--set-customization-variable var=value
(using
=
). A special value is ‘undef’, which sets the
variable to this special “undefined” Perl value.
The sections below give the details for each of these.
• Commands: | ||
• Options: | ||
• HTML: | ||
• Other: |
Each of the following @-commands has an associated customization
variable with the same name (minus the leading @
):
@allowcodebreaks @clickstyle @codequotebacktick @codequoteundirected @contents @deftypefnnewline @documentdescription @documentencoding @documentlanguage @evenfooting @evenfootingmarks @evenheading @evenheadingmarks @everyfooting @everyfootingmarks @everyheading @everyheadingmarks @exampleindent @firstparagraphindent @fonttextsize @footnotestyle @frenchspacing @headings @kbdinputstyle @novalidate @oddfooting @oddfootingmarks @oddheading @oddheadingmarks @pagesizes @paragraphindent @setchapternewpage @setfilename @shortcontents @urefbreakstyle @validatemenus @xrefautomaticsectiontitle
Setting such a customization variable to a value ‘foo’ is similar
to executing @cmd foo
. It is not exactly the same,
though, since any side effects of parsing the Texinfo source are not
redone. Also, some variables do not take Texinfo code when generating
particular formats, but an argument that is already formatted. This
is the case, for example, for HTML for documentdescription
.
Next: HTML Customization Variables, Previous: Customization Variables for @-Commands, Up: Customization Variables [Contents][Index]
The following table gives the customization variables associated with
some command line options. See Invoking texi2any
, for the
meaning of the options.
Setting such a customization variable to a value ‘foo’ is
essentially the same as specifying the --opt=foo
if the
option takes an argument, or --opt
if not.
In addition, the customization variable TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
allows specifying what makeinfo
outputs, either one of the usual
output formats that can be specified with options, or various other
forms:
These correspond to the command-line options (and
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
environment variable values) of the same
name. See Invoking texi2any
.
Instead of generating a regular output format, output a text representation of the tree obtained by parsing the input texinfo document.
Do only Texinfo source parsing; there is no output.
Output the Texinfo source with all the macros, @include
and
@value{}
expanded. This is similar to setting
--macro-expand, but instead of being output in addition to
the normal conversion, output of Texinfo is the main output.
Output raw text, with minimal formatting. For example, footnotes are ignored and there is no paragraph filling. This is used by the parser for file names and copyright text in HTML comments, for example.
Do only Texinfo source parsing and determination of the document structure; there is no output.
Output the document in TexinfoSXML representation, a syntax for writing XML data using Lisp S-expressions.
Output the text content only, stripped of commands; this is useful for
spell checking or word counting, for example. The trivial
detexinfo
script setting this is in the util directory
of the Texinfo source as an example. It’s one line:
exec texi2any -c TEXINPUT_OUTPUT_FORMAT=textcontent "$@"
Next: Other Customization Variables, Previous: Customization Variables and Options, Up: Customization Variables [Contents][Index]
This table gives the customization variables which apply to HTML output only. A few other customization variable apply to both HTML and other output formats; those are given in the next section.
AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY
For HTML. If set, and the menu entry and menu description are the same, then do not print the menu description; default false.
AFTER_BODY_OPEN
For HTML. If set, the corresponding text will appear at the beginning of each HTML file; default unset.
AFTER_ABOUT
For HTML, when an About-element is output. If set, the corresponding text will appear at the end of the About element; default unset.
AFTER_OVERVIEW
AFTER_TOC_LINES
For HTML. If set, the corresponding text is output after the short
table of contents for AFTER_OVERVIEW
and after the table of
contents for AFTER_TOC_LINES
; otherwise, a default string is
used. At the time of writing, a </div>
element is closed.
In general, you should set BEFORE_OVERVIEW
if
AFTER_OVERVIEW
is set, and you should set
BEFORE_TOC_LINES
if AFTER_TOC_LINES
is set.
BASEFILENAME_LENGTH
For HTML. The maximum length of the base filenames; default 245. Changing this would make cross-manual references to such long node names invalid (see HTML Xref Link Basics).
BEFORE_OVERVIEW
BEFORE_TOC_LINES
For HTML. If set, the corresponding text is output before the short
table of contents for BEFORE_OVERVIEW
and before the table of
contents for BEFORE_TOC_LINES
, otherwise a default string is
used. At the time of writing, a <div ...>
element is opened.
In general you should set AFTER_OVERVIEW
if
BEFORE_OVERVIEW
is set, and you should set
AFTER_TOC_LINES
if BEFORE_TOC_LINES
is set.
BIG_RULE
For HTML. Rule used after and before the top element and before
special elements, but not for footers and headers; default
<hr>
.
BODYTEXT
For HTML, the text appearing in <body>
. By default, sets the
HTML lang
attribute to the document language
(see @documentlanguage
).
CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAMES
For HTML. Construct output file names as if the filesystem were case insensitive (see HTML Splitting); default false.
CHAPTER_HEADER_LEVEL
For HTML. Header formatting level used for chapter level sectioning commands; default ‘2’.
CHECK_HTMLXREF
For HTML. Check that manuals which are the target of external cross-references (see Four and Five Arguments) are present in htmlxref.cnf (see HTML Xref Configuration); default false.
COMPLEX_FORMAT_IN_TABLE
For HTML. If set, use tables for indentation of complex formats; default false.
CSS_LINES
For HTML. CSS output, automatically determined by default (see HTML CSS).
DATE_IN_HEADER
For HTML. Put the document generation date in the header; off by default.
DEF_TABLE
For HTML. If set, a <table>
construction for @deffn
and similar @-commands is used (looking more like the TeX output),
instead of definition lists; default false.
DEFAULT_RULE
For HTML. Rule used between element, except before and after the
top element, and before special elements, and for footers and headers;
default <hr>
.
DO_ABOUT
For HTML. If set to 0 never do an About special element; if set to 1 always do an About special element; default 0.
EXTERNAL_DIR
For HTML. Base directory for external manuals; default none. It is better to use the general external cross-reference mechanism (see HTML Xref Configuration) than this variable.
EXTRA_HEAD
For HTML. Additional text appearing within <head>
; default unset.
FOOTNOTE_END_HEADER_LEVEL
For HTML. Header formatting level used for the footnotes header with the ‘end’ footnotestyle; default ‘4’. See Footnote Styles.
FOOTNOTE_SEPARATE_HEADER_LEVEL
For HTML. Header formatting level used for the footnotes header with the ‘separate’ footnotestyle; default ‘4’. See Footnote Styles.
FRAMES
For HTML. If set, a file describing the frame layout is generated, together with a file with the short table of contents; default false.
FRAMESET_DOCTYPE
For HTML. Same as DOCTYPE, but for the file containing the frame description.
HEADER_IN_TABLE
For HTML. Use tables for header formatting rather than a simple
<div>
element; default false.
ICONS
For HTML. Use icons for the navigation panel; default false.
IMAGE_LINK_PREFIX
For HTML. If set, the associated value is prepended to the image file links; default unset.
INLINE_CONTENTS
For HTML. If set, output the contents where the @contents
and
similar @-commands are located; default true. This is ignored if
@set*contentsaftertitlepage
is set (see Contents).
INLINE_CSS_STYLE
For HTML. Put CSS directly in HTML elements rather than at the beginning of the output; default false.
KEEP_TOP_EXTERNAL_REF
For HTML. If set, do not ignore ‘Top’ as the first argument for an external ref to a manual, as is done by default. See Referring to a Manual as a Whole.
L2H
For HTML. If set, latex2html
is used to convert @math
and @tex
sections; default false. Best used with --iftex.
L2H_CLEAN
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) If set, the intermediate files
generated in relation with latex2html
are removed; default
true.
L2H_FILE
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) If set, the given file is used
as latex2html
’s init file; default unset.
L2H_HTML_VERSION
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) The HTML version used in the
latex2html
call; default unset.
L2H_L2H
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) The program invoked as
latex2html
; default is latex2html
.
L2H_SKIP
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) If set to a true value, the
actual call to latex2html
is skipped; previously generated
content is reused instead. If set to 0, the cache is not used at all.
If set to ‘undef’, the cache is used for as many TeX fragments as
possible and for any remaining the command is run. The default is
‘undef’.
L2H_TMP
(Relevant only if L2H
is set.) Set the directory used for
temporary files. None of the file name components in this directory
name may start with ‘.’; otherwise, latex2html
will
fail (because of dvips
). The default is the empty string,
which means the current directory.
MAX_HEADER_LEVEL
For HTML. Maximum header formatting level used (higher header formatting level numbers correspond to lower sectioning levels); default ‘4’.
MENU_SYMBOL
For HTML. Symbol used in front of menu entries when node names are used for menu entries formatting; default ‘•’.
MONOLITHIC
For HTML. Output only one file including the table of contents. Set by default, but only relevant when the output is not split.
NO_CSS
For HTML. Do not use CSS; default false. See HTML CSS.
NODE_FILE_EXTENSION
For HTML. Extension for node files if NODE_FILENAMES
is set;
default ‘html’.
PRE_ABOUT
For HTML, when an About element is output. If set to a text string, this text will appear at the beginning of the About element. If set to a reference on a subroutine, the result of the subroutine call will appear at the beginning of the About element. If not set (the default), default text is used.
PRE_BODY_CLOSE
For HTML. If set, the given text will appear at the footer of each HTML file; default unset.
PROGRAM_NAME_IN_FOOTER
For HTML. If set, output the program name and miscellaneous related information in the page footers; default false.
SHORTEXTN
For HTML. If set, use ‘.htm’ as extension; default false.
SHOW_TITLE
For HTML. If set, output the title at the beginning of the document; default true.
SIMPLE_MENU
For HTML. If set, use a simple preformatted style for the menu, instead of breaking down the different parts of the menu; default false. See Menu Parts.
TOC_LINKS
For HTML. If set, links from headings to toc entries are created; default false.
TOP_FILE
This file name may be used for the top-level file. The extension is set appropriately, if necessary. This is used to override the default, and is, in general, only taken into account when output is split, and for HTML.
TOP_NODE_FILE
For HTML. File name used for the Top node, if NODE_FILENAMES
is set; default is index
.
TOP_NODE_FILE_TARGET
For HTML. File name used for the Top node in cross-references;
default is index
.
TOP_NODE_UP_URL
For HTML. A url used for (dir)
references; the default is
undef
, meaning that the normal rules apply, typically leading
to a link to ‘dir.html’ from an implicit or explicit reference to
‘(dir)’ (see HTML Xref). For more about the Top node
pointers, see First Node. For overriding the Up pointer in other
formats, see TOP_NODE_UP
in Other Customization Variables.
USE_ACCESSKEY
For HTML. Use accesskey
in cross-references; default true.
USE_ISO
For HTML. Use entities for doubled single-quote characters (see Inserting Quotation Marks), and ‘---’ and ‘--’ (see Conventions); default true.
USE_LINKS
For HTML. Generate <link>
elements in the HTML <head>
output; default true.
USE_REL_REV
For HTML. Use rel
in cross-references; default true.
VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION
For HTML. If set, a vertical navigation panel is used; default false.
WORDS_IN_PAGE
For HTML, with output split at nodes. Specifies the approximate minimum page length at which a navigation panel is placed at the bottom of a page. To avoid ever having the navigation buttons at the bottom of a page, set this to a sufficiently large number. The default is 300.
XREF_USE_FLOAT_LABEL
For HTML. If set, for the float name in cross-references, use the
float label instead of the type followed by the float number
(see @float
). The default is off.
XREF_USE_NODE_NAME_ARG
For HTML. Only relevant for cross-reference commands with no cross
reference name (second argument). If set to 1, use the node name
(first) argument in cross-reference @-commands for the text displayed
as the hyperlink. If set to 0, use the node name if
USE_NODES
is set, otherwise the section name. If set to
‘undef’, use the first argument in preformatted environments,
otherwise use the node name or section name depending on
USE_NODES
. The default is ‘undef’.
Previous: HTML Customization Variables, Up: Customization Variables [Contents][Index]
This table gives the remaining customization variables, which apply to multiple formats, or affect global behavior, or otherwise don’t fit into the categories of the previous sections.
CLOSE_QUOTE_SYMBOL
When a closing quote is needed, use this character; default ’
in HTML, ’
in Docbook. The default for Info is the same
as OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
(see below).
CPP_LINE_DIRECTIVES
Recognize #line
directives in a “preprocessing” pass
(see External Macro Processors); on by default.
DEBUG
If set, debugging output is generated; default is off (zero).
DOCTYPE
For Docbook, HTML, XML. Specifies the SystemLiteral
, the
entity’s system identifier. This is a URI which may be used to
retrieve the entity, and identifies the canonical DTD for the
document. The default value is different for each of HTML, Docbook
and Texinfo XML.
DUMP_TEXI
For debugging. If set, no conversion is done, only parsing and macro expansion. If the option --macro-expand is set, the Texinfo source is also expanded to the corresponding file. Default false.
DUMP_TREE
For debugging. If set, the tree constructed upon parsing a Texinfo document is output to standard error; default false.
ENABLE_ENCODING_USE_ENTITY
For HTML, XML. If --enable-encoding is set, and there is an entity corresponding with the letter or the symbol being output, prefer the entity. Set by default for HTML, but not XML.
EXTERNAL_CROSSREF_SPLIT
For cross-references to other manuals, this determines if the other
manual is considered to be split or monolithic. By default, it is set
based on the value of SPLIT
. See HTML Xref, and see HTML Xref Configuration.
EXTENSION
The extension added to the output file name. The default is different for each output format.
FIX_TEXINFO
For “plain Texinfo” (see the PLAINTEXINFO
item). If set to
false, the resulting Texinfo does not have all errors corrected, such
as missing ‘@end’; default true. This variable is only
relevant when expanding Texinfo; other converters always try to
output something sane even if the input is erroneous.
IGNORE_BEFORE_SETFILENAME
If set, begin outputting at @setfilename
, if
@setfilename
is present; default true.
IGNORE_SPACE_AFTER_BRACED_COMMAND_NAME
If set, spaces are ignored after an @-command that takes braces. Default true, matching the TeX behavior.
INDEX_ENTRY_COLON
Symbol used between the index entry and the associated node or section; default ‘:’.
INDEX_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
If set, warn about ‘:’ in index entry, as it leads to invalid entries in index menus in output Info files. For Info and plaintext only.
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_QUOTE
If set, whenever there are problematic characters for Info output in places such as node names or menu items, surround the part of the construct where they appear with quoting characters, as described in Info Format Specification. See Node Line Requirements.
INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_WARNING
If set, warn about problematic constructs for Info output (such as the string ‘::’) in node names, menu items, and cross-references; default true. Do not warn about index entries, since parsing problems there don’t prevent navigation; readers can still relatively easily find their way to the node in question.
INPUT_ENCODING_NAME
Normalized encoding name suitable for output. Should be a usable
charset name in HTML, typically one of the preferred IANA encoding
names. You should not need to use this variable, since it is set by
@documentencoding
(see @documentencoding
).
INPUT_PERL_ENCODING
Perl encoding used to process the Texinfo source. You should not need
to use that variable, since it is set by @documentencoding
(see @documentencoding
).
MAX_MACRO_CALL_NESTING
The maximal number of recursive calls of @-commands defined through
@rmacro
; default 100000. The purpose of this variable is to
avoid infinite recursions.
MENU_ENTRY_COLON
Symbol used between the menu entry and the description; default ‘:’.
NO_USE_SETFILENAME
If set, do not use @setfilename
to set the document name;
instead, base the output document name only on the input file name.
The default is false.
NODE_FILENAMES
If set, node names are used to construct file names. By default, it
is set if the output is split by node, or if NODE_FILES
is set
and the output is split in any way.
NODE_NAME_IN_INDEX
If set, use node names in index entries, otherwise prefer section names; default true.
NODE_NAME_IN_MENU
If set, use node names in menu entries, otherwise prefer section names; default true.
OPEN_QUOTE_SYMBOL
When an opening quote is needed, e.g., for ‘@samp’ output, use
the specified character; default ‘
for HTML,
‘
for Docbook. For Info, the default depends on the
enabled document encoding (see @documentencoding
); if no
document encoding is set, or the encoding is US-ASCII, etc., ‘'’
is used. This character usually appears as an undirected single quote
on modern systems. If the document encoding is Unicode, the Info
output uses a Unicode left quote.
OUTPUT_ENCODING_NAME
Normalized encoding name used for output files. Should be a usable
charset name in HTML, typically one of the preferred IANA encoding
names. By default, if an input encoding is set (typically through
@documentencoding
or INPUT_ENCODING_NAME
), this
information is used to set the output encoding name. If no input
encoding is specified, the default output encoding name may be set by
the output format. In particular, the XML-based formats use
utf-8
for OUTPUT_ENCODING_NAME
if the encoding is not
otherwise specified. See @documentencoding
.
OVERVIEW_LINK_TO_TOC
If set, the cross-references in the Overview link to the corresponding Table of Contents entries; default true.
PACKAGE
PACKAGE_VERSION
PACKAGE_AND_VERSION
PACKAGE_URL
PACKAGE_NAME
The implementation’s short package name, package version, package name
and version concatenated, package url, and full package name,
respectively. By default, these variables are all set through
Autoconf, Automake, and configure
.
PREFIX
The output file prefix, which is prepended to some output file names.
By default it is set by @setfilename
or from the input file
(see @setfilename
). How this value is used depends on the
value of other customization variables or command line options, such
as whether the output is split and NODE_FILENAMES
. The default
is unset.
PROGRAM
Name of the program used. By default, it is set to the name of the program launched, with a trailing ‘.pl’ removed.
RENAMED_NODES_FILE
If set, use the value for the renamed nodes description file. If not set, the file is doc_basename-noderename.cnf. See HTML Xref Link Preservation.
RENAMED_NODES_REDIRECTIONS
If set, create redirection files for renamed nodes. Set by default when generating HTML.
SHOW_MENU
If set, Texinfo menus are output. By default, it is set unless generating Docbook or if --no-headers is specified.
SORT_ELEMENT_COUNT
If set, the name of a file to which a list of elements (nodes or
sections, depending on the output format) is dumped, sorted by the
number of lines they contain after removal of @-commands; default
unset. This is used by the program texi-elements-by-size
in
the util/ directory of the Texinfo source distribution
(see texi-elements-by-size).
SORT_ELEMENT_COUNT_WORDS
When dumping the elements-by-size file (see preceding item), use word counts instead of line counts; default false.
TEST
If set to true, some variables which are normally dynamically generated anew for each run (date, program name, version) are set to fixed and given values. This is useful to compare the output to a reference file, as is done for the tests. The default is false.
TEXI2DVI
Name of the command used to produce PostScript, PDF, and DVI; default
‘texi2dvi’. See texi2any
Printed Output.
TEXI2HTML
Generate HTML and try to be as compatible as possible with
texi2html
; default false.
TEXINFO_DTD_VERSION
For XML. Version of the DTD used in the XML output preamble. The default is set based on a variable in configure.ac.
TEXTCONTENT_COMMENT
For stripped text content output (i.e., when
TEXINFO_OUTPUT_FORMAT
is set to textcontent
). If set,
also output comments. Default false.
TOP_NODE_UP
Up node for the Top node; default ‘(dir)’. For overriding the
url in HTML output, see TOP_NODE_UP_URL
in HTML Customization Variables.
TREE_TRANSFORMATIONS
The associated value is a comma separated list of transformations that can be applied to the Texinfo tree prior to outputting the result. If more than one is specified, the ordering is irrelevant; each is always applied at the necessary point during processing.
The only one executed by default is ‘move_index_entries_after_items’ for HTML and Docbook output. Here’s an example of updating the master menu in a document:
makeinfo \ -c TREE_TRANSFORMATIONS=regenerate_master_menu \ -c PLAINTEXINFO=1 \ mydoc.texi \ -o /tmp/out
(Caveat: Since PLAINTEXINFO
output does expand
Texinfo macros and conditionals, it’s necessary to remove any such
differences before installing the updates in the original document.
This will be remedied in a future release.)
The following transformations are currently supported (many are used
in the pod2texi
utility distributed with Texinfo;
see Invoking pod2texi
):
Add menu entries or whole menus for nodes associated with sections of any level, based on the sectioning tree.
Adds empty @unnumbered...
sections in a tree to fill gaps in
sectioning. For example, an @unnumberedsec
will be inserted
if a @chapter
is followed by a @subsection
.
Insert nodes for sectioning commands lacking a corresponding node.
In @enumerate
and @itemize
, move index entries
appearing just before an @item
to just after the
@item
. Comment lines between index entries are moved too. As
mentioned, this is always done for HTML and Docbook output.
Update the Top node master menu, either replacing the (first)
@detailmenu
in the Top node menu, or creating it at the end of
the Top node menu.
Mostly the same as SIMPLE_MENU
: use a simple preformatted style
for the menu. It differs from setting SIMPLE_MENU
in that
SIMPLE_MENU
only has an effect in HTML output.
USE_NODES
Preferentially use nodes to decide where elements are separated. If set to false, preferentially use sectioning to decide where elements are separated. The default is true.
USE_NODE_TARGET
If set, use the node associated with a section for the section target in cross-references; default true.
USE_NUMERIC_ENTITY
For HTML and XML. If set, use numeric entities instead of ASCII characters when there is no named entity. By default, set to true for HTML.
USE_UP_NODE_FOR_ELEMENT_UP
Fill in up sectioning direction with node direction when there is no sectioning up direction. In practice this can only happen when there is no @top section. Not set by default.
USE_SETFILENAME_EXTENSION
Default is on for Info, off for other output. If set, use exactly
what @setfilename
gives for the output file name, including
the extension. You should not need to explicitly set this variable.
USE_TITLEPAGE_FOR_TITLE
Use the full @titlepage
as the title, not a simple title string;
default false.
USE_UNIDECODE
If set to false, do not use the Text::Unidecode
Perl module to
transliterate more characters; default true.
Next: Invoking pod2texi
, Previous: Customization Variables, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2any
writes fixed strings into the output document at
various places: cross-references, page footers, the help page,
alternate text for images, and so on. The string chosen depends on
the value of the documentlanguage
at the time of the string
being output (see @documentlanguage
, for the Texinfo
command interface).
The Gettext framework is used for those strings (see Gettext). The libintl-perl
package is used as the
gettext
implementation; more specifically, the pure Perl
implementation is used, so Texinfo can support consistent behavior
across all platforms and installations, which would not otherwise be
possible. libintl-perl
is included in the Texinfo distribution
and always installed, to ensure that it is available if needed. It is
also possible to use the system gettext
(the choice can be made
at build-time).
The Gettext domain ‘texinfo_document’ is used for the strings.
Translated strings are written as Texinfo, and may include
@-commands. In translated strings, the varying parts of the string
are not usually denoted by %s
and the like, but by
‘{arg_name}’. (This convention is common for gettext
in
Perl and is fully supported in GNU Gettext; see Perl
Format Strings in GNU Gettext.) For example, in the
following, ‘{section}’ will be replaced by the section name:
see {section}
These Perl-style brace format strings are used for two reasons: first,
changing the order of printf
arguments is only available since
Perl 5.8.0; second, and more importantly, the order of arguments
is unpredictable, since @-command expansion may lead to different
orders depending on the output format.
The expansion of a translation string is done like this:
.
@documentencoding.
If the @documentlanguage has the form ‘ll_CC’, that is
tried first, and then just ‘ll’. If that does not exist, and the
encoding is not us-ascii
, then us-ascii
is tried.
The idea is that if there is a us-ascii
encoding, it means that
all the characters in the charset may be expressed as @-commands.
For example, there is a fr.us-ascii
locale that can accommodate
any encoding, since all the Latin 1 characters have associated
@-commands. On the other hand, Japanese has only a translation
ja.utf-8
, since there are no @-commands for Japanese
characters.
In the following example, ‘{date}’, ‘{program_homepage}’
and ‘{program}’ are the arguments of the string. Since they
are used in @uref
, their order is not predictable.
‘{date}’, ‘{program_homepage}’ and ‘{program}’ are
substituted after the expansion:
Generated on @emph{{date}} using @uref{{program_homepage}, @emph{{program}}}.
This approach is admittedly a bit complicated. Its usefulness is that it supports having translations available in different encodings for encodings which can be covered by @-commands, and also specifying how the formatting for some commands is done, independently of the output format—yet still be language-dependent. For example, the ‘@pxref’ translation string can be like this:
see {node_file_href} section `{section}\' in @cite{{book}}
which allows for specifying a string independently of the output format, while nevertheless with rich formatting it may be translated appropriately in many languages.
Next: texi2html
, Previous: Internationalization of Document Strings, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
pod2texi
: Convert POD to TexinfoThe pod2texi
program translates Perl pod documentation file(s)
to Texinfo. There are two basic modes of operation: generating a
standalone manual from each input pod, or (if --base-level=1
or
higher is given) generating Texinfo subfiles suitable for use
with @include
.
Although ordinarily this documentation in the Texinfo manual would be
the best place to look, in this case we have documented all the
options and examples in the pod2texi
program itself, since it
may be useful outside of the rest of Texinfo. Thus, please see the
output of pod2texi --help
, the version on the web at
http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/pod2texi.html, etc.
For an example of using pod2texi
to make Texinfo out of the
Perl documentation itself, see
contrib/perldoc-all in the Texinfo source distribution (the
output is available at http://www.gnu.org/software/perl/manual).
Previous: Invoking pod2texi
, Up: Generic Translator texi2any
[Contents][Index]
texi2html
: Ancestor of texi2any
Conceptually, the texi2html
program is the parent of today’s
texi2any
program. texi2html
was developed
independently, originally by Lionel Cons in 1998; at the time,
makeinfo
could not generate HTML. Many other people
contributed to texi2html
over the years.
The present texi2any
uses little of the actual code of
texi2html
, and has quite a different basic approach to the
implementation (namely, parsing the Texinfo document into a tree), but
still, there is a family resemblance.
By design, texi2any
supports nearly all the features of
texi2html
in some way. However, we did not attempt to
maintain strict compatibility, so no texi2html
executable is
installed by the Texinfo package. An approximation can be run with an
invocation like this (available as util/texi2html in the
Texinfo source):
texi2any --set-customization-variable TEXI2HTML=1 ...
but, to emphasize, this is not a drop-in replacement
for the previous texi2html
. Here are the biggest differences:
texi2html
are now customization variables, for the most part. A table of
approximate equivalents is given below.
texi2any
.
texi2any
in the future.
Aside from the last, we do not intend to reimplement these
differences. Therefore, the route forward for authors is alter
manuals and build processes as necessary to use the new features and
methods of texi2any
. The texi2html
maintainers
(one of whom is the principal author of texi2any
) do not
intend to make further releases.
Here is the table showing texi2html
options and
corresponding texi2any
customization variables.
--toc-links | TOC_LINKS |
--short-ext | SHORTEXTN |
--prefix | PREFIX |
--short-ref | SHORT_REF |
--idx-sum | IDX_SUMMARY |
--def-table | DEF_TABLE |
--ignore-preamble-text | IGNORE_PREAMBLE_TEXT |
--html-xref-prefix | EXTERNAL_DIR |
--l2h | L2H |
--l2h-l2h | L2H_L2H |
--l2h-skip | L2H_SKIP |
--l2h-tmp | L2H_TMP |
--l2h-file | L2H_FILE |
--l2h-clean | L2H_CLEAN |
--use-nodes | USE_NODES |
--monolithic | MONOLITHIC |
--top-file | TOP_FILE |
--toc-file | TOC_FILE |
--frames | FRAMES |
--menu | SHOW_MENU |
--debug | DEBUG |
--doctype | DOCTYPE |
--frameset-doctype | FRAMESET_DOCTYPE |
--test | TEST |
Finally, any texi2html
users seeking more detailed
information can check the draft file doc/texi2oldapi.texi in
the Texinfo source repository. It consists mainly of very rough
notes, but may still be useful to some.
Next: Generating HTML, Previous: Generic Translator texi2any
, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter describes how to create and install Info files. See Info Files, for general information about the file format itself.
• Creating an Info File: | ||
• Installing an Info File: |
makeinfo
is a program that converts a Texinfo file into an Info
file, HTML file, or plain text. texinfo-format-region
and
texinfo-format-buffer
are GNU Emacs functions that convert
Texinfo to Info.
For information on installing the Info file in the Info system, see Installing an Info File.
• makeinfo Advantages: | makeinfo provides better error checking.
| |
• makeinfo in Emacs: | How to run makeinfo from Emacs.
| |
• texinfo-format commands: | Two Info formatting commands written
in Emacs Lisp are an alternative
to makeinfo .
| |
• Batch Formatting: | How to format for Info in Emacs batch mode. | |
• Tag and Split Files: | How tagged and split files help Info to run better. |
Next: makeinfo
in Emacs, Up: Creating an Info File [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
AdvantagesThe makeinfo
utility creates an Info file from a Texinfo source
providing better error messages than either of the Emacs formatting
commands. We recommend it. The makeinfo
program is
independent of Emacs. You can run makeinfo
in any of three
ways: from an operating system shell, from a shell inside Emacs, or by
typing the C-c C-m C-r or the C-c C-m C-b command in
Texinfo mode in Emacs.
The texinfo-format-region
and the texinfo-format-buffer
commands may be useful if you cannot run makeinfo
.
Next: texinfo-format
commands, Previous: makeinfo
Advantages, Up: Creating an Info File [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
Within EmacsYou can run makeinfo
in GNU Emacs Texinfo mode by using either the
makeinfo-region
or the makeinfo-buffer
commands. In
Texinfo mode, the commands are bound to C-c C-m C-r and C-c
C-m C-b by default.
When you invoke makeinfo-region
the output goes to a temporary
buffer. When you invoke makeinfo-buffer
output goes to the
file set with @setfilename
(see @setfilename
).
The Emacs makeinfo-region
and makeinfo-buffer
commands
run the makeinfo
program in a temporary shell buffer. If
makeinfo
finds any errors, Emacs displays the error messages in
the temporary buffer.
You can parse the error messages by typing C-x `
(next-error
). This causes Emacs to go to and position the
cursor on the line in the Texinfo source that makeinfo
thinks
caused the error. See Running make
or
Compilers Generally in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about using the next-error
command.
In addition, you can kill the shell in which the makeinfo
command is running or make the shell buffer display its most recent
output.
Kill the current running makeinfo
job
(from makeinfo-region
or makeinfo-buffer
).
Redisplay the makeinfo
shell buffer to display its most recent
output.
(Note that the parallel commands for killing and recentering a TeX job are C-c C-t C-k and C-c C-t C-l. See Texinfo Mode Printing.)
You can specify options for makeinfo
by setting the
makeinfo-options
variable with either the M-x
customize or the M-x set-variable command, or by setting the
variable in your .emacs initialization file.
For example, you could write the following in your .emacs file:
(setq makeinfo-options "--paragraph-indent=0 --no-split --fill-column=70 --verbose")
For more information, see
Easy Customization Interface in The GNU Emacs Manual,
Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual,
Init File in The GNU Emacs Manual, and
makeinfo
Options.
Next: Batch Formatting, Previous: makeinfo
in Emacs, Up: Creating an Info File [Contents][Index]
texinfo-format…
CommandsIn GNU Emacs in Texinfo mode, you can format part or all of a Texinfo
file with the texinfo-format-region
command. This formats the
current region and displays the formatted text in a temporary buffer
called ‘*Info Region*’.
Similarly, you can format a buffer with the
texinfo-format-buffer
command. This command creates a new
buffer and generates the Info file in it. Typing C-x C-s will
save the Info file under the name specified by the
@setfilename
line which must be near the beginning of the
Texinfo file.
texinfo-format-region
Format the current region for Info.
texinfo-format-buffer
Format the current buffer for Info.
The texinfo-format-region
and texinfo-format-buffer
commands provide you with some error checking, and other functions can
provide you with further help in finding formatting errors. These
procedures are described in an appendix; see Catching Mistakes.
However, the makeinfo
program provides better error checking
(see makeinfo
in Emacs).
A peculiarity of the texinfo-format-buffer
and
texinfo-format-region
commands is that they do not indent (nor
fill) paragraphs that contain @w
or @*
commands.
Next: Tag and Split Files, Previous: texinfo-format
commands, Up: Creating an Info File [Contents][Index]
You can format Texinfo files for Info using batch-texinfo-format
and Emacs batch mode. You can run Emacs in batch mode from any shell,
including a shell inside of Emacs. (See Initial Options in The GNU Emacs Manual.)
Here is a shell command to format all the files that end in .texinfo in the current directory:
emacs -batch -funcall batch-texinfo-format *.texinfo
Emacs processes all the files listed on the command line, even if an error occurs while attempting to format some of them.
Run batch-texinfo-format
only with Emacs in batch mode as shown;
it is not interactive. It kills the batch mode Emacs on completion.
batch-texinfo-format
is convenient if you lack makeinfo
and want to format several Texinfo files at once. When you use Batch
mode, you create a new Emacs process. This frees your current Emacs, so
you can continue working in it. (When you run
texinfo-format-region
or texinfo-format-buffer
, you cannot
use that Emacs for anything else until the command finishes.)
Previous: Batch Formatting, Up: Creating an Info File [Contents][Index]
If a Texinfo file has more than 30,000 bytes,
texinfo-format-buffer
automatically creates a tag table
for its Info file; makeinfo
always creates a tag table. With
a tag table, Info can jump to new nodes more quickly than it can
otherwise.
In addition, if the Texinfo file contains more than about 300,000
bytes, texinfo-format-buffer
and makeinfo
split the
large Info file into shorter indirect subfiles of about 300,000
bytes each. Big files are split into smaller files so that Emacs does
not need to make a large buffer to hold the whole of a large Info
file; instead, Emacs allocates just enough memory for the small, split-off
file that is needed at the time. This way, Emacs avoids wasting
memory when you run Info. (Before splitting was implemented, Info
files were always kept short and include files were designed as
a way to create a single, large printed manual out of the smaller Info
files. See Include Files, for more information. Include files are
still used for very large documents, such as The Emacs Lisp
Reference Manual, in which each chapter is a separate file.)
When a file is split, Info itself makes use of a shortened version of the original file that contains just the tag table and references to the files that were split off. The split-off files are called indirect files.
The split-off files have names that are created by appending ‘-1’,
‘-2’, ‘-3’ and so on to the file name specified by the
@setfilename
command. The shortened version of the original file
continues to have the name specified by @setfilename
.
At one stage in writing this document, for example, the Info file was saved as the file test-texinfo and that file looked like this:
Info file: test-texinfo, -*-Text-*- produced by texinfo-format-buffer from file: new-texinfo-manual.texinfo ^_ Indirect: test-texinfo-1: 102 test-texinfo-2: 50422
test-texinfo-3: 101300 ^_^L Tag table: (Indirect) Node: overview^?104 Node: info file^?1271
Node: printed manual^?4853 Node: conventions^?6855 …
(But test-texinfo had far more nodes than are shown here.) Each of the split-off, indirect files, test-texinfo-1, test-texinfo-2, and test-texinfo-3, is listed in this file after the line that says ‘Indirect:’. The tag table is listed after the line that says ‘Tag table:’.
In the list of indirect files, the number following the file name records the cumulative number of bytes in the preceding indirect files, not counting the file list itself, the tag table, or any permissions text in the first file. In the tag table, the number following the node name records the location of the beginning of the node, in bytes from the beginning of the (unsplit) output.
If you are using texinfo-format-buffer
to create Info files,
you may want to run the Info-validate
command. (The
makeinfo
command does such a good job on its own, you do not
need Info-validate
.) However, you cannot run the M-x
Info-validate node-checking command on indirect files. For
information on how to prevent files from being split and how to
validate the structure of the nodes, see Using Info-validate
.
Previous: Creating an Info File, Up: Creating and Installing Info Files [Contents][Index]
Info files are usually kept in the info directory. You can read Info files using the standalone Info program or the Info reader built into Emacs. (See Info, for an introduction to Info.)
• Directory File: | The top level menu for all Info files. | |
• New Info File: | Listing a new Info file. | |
• Other Info Directories: | How to specify Info files that are located in other directories. | |
• Installing Dir Entries: | How to specify what menu entry to add to the Info directory. | |
• Invoking install-info : | install-info options.
|
Next: New Info File, Up: Installing an Info File [Contents][Index]
For Info to work, the info directory must contain a file that serves as a top level directory for the Info system. By convention, this file is called dir. (You can find the location of this file within Emacs by typing C-h i to enter Info and then typing C-x C-f to see the pathname to the info directory.)
The dir file is itself an Info file. It contains the top level menu for all the Info files in the system. The menu looks like this:
* Menu: * Info: (info). Documentation browsing system. * Emacs: (emacs). The extensible, self-documenting text editor. * Texinfo: (texinfo). With one source file, make either a printed manual using @TeX{} or an Info file. …
Each of these menu entries points to the ‘Top’ node of the Info file that is named in parentheses. (The menu entry does not need to specify the ‘Top’ node, since Info goes to the ‘Top’ node if no node name is mentioned. See Nodes in Other Info Files.)
Thus, the ‘Info’ entry points to the ‘Top’ node of the info file and the ‘Emacs’ entry points to the ‘Top’ node of the emacs file.
In each of the Info files, the ‘Up’ pointer of the ‘Top’ node refers
back to the dir
file. For example, the line for the ‘Top’
node of the Emacs manual looks like this in Info:
File: emacs Node: Top, Up: (DIR), Next: Distrib
In this case, the dir file name is written in uppercase letters—it can be written in either upper- or lowercase. This is not true in general, it is a special case for dir.
Next: Other Info Directories, Previous: Directory File, Up: Installing an Info File [Contents][Index]
To add a new Info file to your system, you must write a menu entry to add to the menu in the dir file in the info directory. For example, if you were adding documentation for GDB, you would write the following new entry:
* GDB: (gdb). The source-level C debugger.
The first part of the menu entry is the menu entry name, followed by a colon. The second part is the name of the Info file, in parentheses, followed by a period. The third part is the description.
The name of an Info file often has a .info extension. Thus, the Info file for GDB might be called either gdb or gdb.info. The Info reader programs automatically try the file name both with and without .info6; so it is better to avoid clutter and not to write ‘.info’ explicitly in the menu entry. For example, the GDB menu entry should use just ‘gdb’ for the file name, not ‘gdb.info’.
Next: Installing Dir Entries, Previous: New Info File, Up: Installing an Info File [Contents][Index]
If an Info file is not in the info directory, there are three ways to specify its location:
INFOPATH
environment
variable in your .profile or .cshrc initialization file.
(Only you and others who set this environment variable will be able to
find Info files whose location is specified this way.)
Info-directory-list
variable in your personal or site
initialization file.
This variable tells Emacs where to look for dir files (the files
must be named dir). Emacs merges the files named dir from
each of the listed directories. (In Emacs version 18, you can set the
Info-directory
variable to the name of only one
directory.)
For example, to reach a test file in the /home/bob/info directory, you could add an entry like this to the menu in the standard dir file:
* Test: (/home/bob/info/info-test). Bob's own test file.
In this case, the absolute file name of the info-test file is written as the second part of the menu entry.
If you don’t want to edit the system dir file, you can tell
Info where to look by setting the INFOPATH
environment variable
in your shell startup file. This works with both the Emacs and
standalone Info readers.
Specifically, if you use a Bourne-compatible shell such as sh
or bash
for your shell command interpreter, you set the
INFOPATH
environment variable in the .profile
initialization file; but if you use csh
or tcsh
, you set
the variable in the .cshrc initialization file. On
MS-DOS/MS-Windows systems, you must set INFOPATH
in your
autoexec.bat file or in the registry. Each type of shell uses
a different syntax.
INFOPATH
variable as follows:
setenv INFOPATH .:~/info:/usr/local/emacs/info
INFOPATH=.:$HOME/info:/usr/local/emacs/info export INFOPATH
set INFOPATH=.;%HOME%/info;c:/usr/local/emacs/info
The ‘.’ indicates the current directory as usual. Emacs uses the
INFOPATH
environment variable to initialize the value of Emacs’s
own Info-directory-list
variable. The standalone Info reader
merges any files named dir in any directory listed in the
INFOPATH
variable into a single menu presented to you in the node
called ‘(dir)Top’.
However you set INFOPATH
, if its last character is a colon (on
MS-DOS/MS-Windows systems, use a semicolon instead), this is replaced
by the default (compiled-in) path. This gives you a way to augment
the default path with new directories without having to list all the
standard places. For example (using sh
syntax):
INFOPATH=/home/bob/info: export INFOPATH
will search /home/bob/info first, then the standard directories. Leading or doubled colons are not treated specially.
When you create your own dir file for use with
Info-directory-list
or INFOPATH
, it’s easiest to start by
copying an existing dir file and replace all the text after the
‘* Menu:’ with your desired entries. That way, the punctuation
and special CTRL-_ characters that Info needs will be present.
As one final alternative, which works only with Emacs Info, you can
change the Info-directory-list
variable. For example:
(add-hook 'Info-mode-hook '(lambda () (add-to-list 'Info-directory-list (expand-file-name "~/info"))))
Next: Invoking install-info
, Previous: Other Info Directories, Up: Installing an Info File [Contents][Index]
When you install an Info file onto your system, you can use the program
install-info
to update the Info directory file dir.
Normally the makefile for the package runs install-info
, just
after copying the Info file into its proper installed location.
In order for the Info file to work with install-info
, you include
the commands @dircategory
and
@direntry
…@end direntry
in the Texinfo source
file. Use @direntry
to specify the menu entries to add to the
Info directory file, and use @dircategory
to specify which part
of the Info directory to put it in. Here is how these commands are used
in this manual:
@dircategory Texinfo documentation system @direntry * Texinfo: (texinfo). The GNU documentation format. * install-info: (texinfo)Invoking install-info. … … @end direntry
Here’s what this produces in the Info file:
INFO-DIR-SECTION Texinfo documentation system START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * Texinfo: (texinfo). The GNU documentation format. * install-info: (texinfo)Invoking install-info. … … END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
The install-info
program sees these lines in the Info file, and
that is how it knows what to do.
Always use the @direntry
and @dircategory
commands near
the beginning of the Texinfo input, before the first @node
command. If you use them later on in the input, install-info
will not notice them.
install-info
will automatically reformat the description of the
menu entries it is adding. As a matter of convention, the description
of the main entry (above, ‘The GNU documentation format’) should
start at column 32, starting at zero (as in
what-cursor-position
in Emacs). This will make it align with
most others. Description for individual utilities best start in
column 48, where possible. For more information about formatting see
the ‘--calign’, ‘--align’, and ‘--max-width’ options in
Invoking install-info
.
If you use @dircategory
more than once in the Texinfo source,
each usage specifies the ‘current’ category; any subsequent
@direntry
commands will add to that category.
When choosing a category name for the @dircategory
command, we
recommend consulting the Free Software Directory. If your program is not listed there,
or listed incorrectly or incompletely, please report the situation to
the directory maintainers (http://directory.fsf.org) so that the
category names can be kept in sync.
Here are a few examples (see the util/dir-example file in the
Texinfo distribution for large sample dir
file):
Emacs Localization Printing Software development Software libraries Text creation and manipulation
Each ‘Invoking’ node for every program installed should have a
corresponding @direntry
. This lets users easily find the
documentation for the different programs they can run, as with the
traditional man
system.
Previous: Installing Dir Entries, Up: Installing an Info File [Contents][Index]
install-info
install-info
inserts menu entries from an Info file into the
top-level dir file in the Info system (see the previous sections
for an explanation of how the dir file works). install-info
also removes menu entries from the dir file. It’s most often
run as part of software installation, or when constructing a dir file
for all manuals on a system. Synopsis:
install-info [option…] [info-file [dir-file]]
If info-file or dir-file are not specified, the options
(described below) that define them must be. There are no compile-time
defaults, and standard input is never used. install-info
can
read only one Info file and write only one dir file per invocation.
If dir-file (however specified) does not exist,
install-info
creates it if possible (with no entries).
If any input file is compressed with gzip
(see Gzip), install-info
automatically uncompresses it for reading.
And if dir-file is compressed, install-info
also
automatically leaves it compressed after writing any changes. If
dir-file itself does not exist, install-info
tries to
open dir-file.gz, dir-file.xz,
dir-file.bz2, dir-file.lz, and
dir-file.lzma, in that order.
Options:
--add-once
Specifies that the entry or entries will only be put into a single section.
--align=column
Specifies the column that the second and subsequent lines of menu entry’s description will be formatted to begin at. The default for this option is ‘35’. It is used in conjunction with the ‘--max-width’ option. column starts counting at 1.
--append-new-sections
Instead of alphabetizing new sections, place them at the end of the DIR file.
--calign=column
Specifies the column that the first line of menu entry’s description will be formatted to begin at. The default for this option is ‘33’. It is used in conjunction with the ‘--max-width’ option. When the name of the menu entry exceeds this column, entry’s description will start on the following line. column starts counting at 1.
--debug
Report what is being done.
--delete
Delete the entries in info-file from dir-file. The file name in the entry in dir-file must be info-file (except for an optional ‘.info’ in either one). Don’t insert any new entries. Any empty sections that result from the removal are also removed.
--description=text
Specify the explanatory portion of the menu entry. If you don’t specify a description (either via ‘--entry’, ‘--item’ or this option), the description is taken from the Info file itself.
--dir-file=name
Specify file name of the Info directory file. This is equivalent to using the dir-file argument.
--dry-run
Same as ‘--test’.
--entry=text
Insert text as an Info directory entry; text should have the form of an Info menu item line plus zero or more extra lines starting with whitespace. If you specify more than one entry, they are all added. If you don’t specify any entries, they are determined from information in the Info file itself.
--help
Display a usage message with basic usage and all available options, then exit successfully.
--info-file=file
Specify Info file to install in the directory. This is equivalent to using the info-file argument.
--info-dir=dir
Specify the directory where the directory file dir resides. Equivalent to ‘--dir-file=dir/dir’.
--infodir=dir
Same as ‘--info-dir’.
--item=text
Same as ‘--entry=text’. An Info directory entry is actually a menu item.
--keep-old
Do not replace pre-existing menu entries. When ‘--remove’ is specified, this option means that empty sections are not removed.
--max-width=column
Specifies the column that the menu entry’s description will be word-wrapped at. column starts counting at 1.
--maxwidth=column
Same as ‘--max-width’.
--menuentry=text
Same as ‘--name’.
--name=text
Specify the name portion of the menu entry. If the text does not start with an asterisk ‘*’, it is presumed to be the text after the ‘*’ and before the parentheses that specify the Info file. Otherwise text is taken verbatim, and is taken as defining the text up to and including the first period (a space is appended if necessary). If you don’t specify the name (either via ‘--entry’, ‘--item’ or this option), it is taken from the Info file itself. If the Info does not contain the name, the basename of the Info file is used.
--no-indent
Suppress formatting of new entries into the dir file.
--quiet
--silent
Suppress warnings, etc., for silent operation.
--remove
Same as ‘--delete’.
--remove-exactly
Also like ‘--delete’, but only entries if the Info file name
matches exactly; .info
and/or .gz
suffixes are
not ignored.
--section=sec
Put this file’s entries in section sec of the directory. If you specify more than one section, all the entries are added in each of the sections. If you don’t specify any sections, they are determined from information in the Info file itself. If the Info file doesn’t specify a section, the menu entries are put into the Miscellaneous section.
--section regex sec
Same as ‘--regex=regex --section=sec --add-once’.
install-info
tries to detect when this alternate syntax is used,
but does not always guess correctly. Here is the heuristic that
install-info
uses:
--section
starts with a hyphen, the
original syntax is presumed.
--section
is a file that can be
opened, the original syntax is presumed.
When the heuristic fails because your section title starts with a hyphen, or it happens to be a filename that can be opened, the syntax should be changed to ‘--regex=regex --section=sec --add-once’.
--regex=regex
Put this file’s entries into any section that matches regex. If
more than one section matches, all of the entries are added in each of the
sections. Specify regex using basic regular expression syntax, more
or less as used with grep
, for example.
--test
Suppress updating of the directory file.
--version
Display version information and exit successfully.
Next: @-Command Details, Previous: Creating and Installing Info Files, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
generates Info output by default, but given the
--html option, it will generate HTML, for web browsers and
other programs. This chapter gives some details on such HTML output.
makeinfo
has many user-definable customization variables
with which you can influence the HTML output. See Customization Variables.
makeinfo
can also produce output in XML and Docbook formats,
but we do not as yet describe these in detail. See Output Formats,
for a brief overview of all the output formats.
• HTML Translation: | Details of the HTML output. | |
• HTML Splitting: | How HTML output is split. | |
• HTML CSS: | Influencing HTML output with Cascading Style Sheets. | |
• HTML Xref: | Cross-references in HTML output. |
Next: HTML Splitting, Up: Generating HTML [Contents][Index]
First, the HTML generated by makeinfo
is standard
HTML 4. It also tries to be compatible with earlier standards
(e.g., HTML 2.0, RFC-1866). Thus, please report output from an
error-free run of makeinfo
which has practical browser
portability problems as a bug (see Reporting Bugs).
Some known exceptions to HTML 3.2 (using
‘--init-file=html32.pm’ produces strict HTML 3.2 output;
see Invoking texi2any
):
@multitable
command
(see Multi-column Tables), but they should degrade reasonably in
browsers without table support.
thead
, abbr
,
acronym
.
To achieve maximum portability and accessibility among browsers (both graphical and text-based), systems, and users, the HTML output is intentionally quite plain and generic. It has always been our goal for users to be able to customize the output to their wishes via CSS (see HTML CSS) or other means (see Customization Variables). If you cannot accomplish a reasonable customization, feel free to report that.
However, we do not wish to depart from our basic goal of widest readability for the core output. For example, using fancy CSS may make it possible for the HTML output to more closely resemble the TeX output in some details, but this result is not even close to being worth the ensuing difficulties.
It is also intentionally not our goal, and not even possible, to pass through every conceivable validation test without any diagnostics. Different validation tests have different goals, often about pedantic enforcement of some standard or another. Our overriding goal is to help users, not blindly comply with standards.
To repeat what was said at the top: please report output from an
error-free run of makeinfo
which has practical browser
portability problems as a bug (see Reporting Bugs).
A few other general points about the HTML output follow.
Navigation bar: By default, a navigation bar is inserted at the
start of each node, analogous to Info output. If the
‘--no-headers’ option is used, the navigation bar is only
inserted at the beginning of split files. Header <link>
elements in split output can support Info-like navigation with
browsers like Lynx and Emacs W3 which implement this HTML 1.0
feature.
Footnotes: for HTML, when the footnote style is ‘end’, or if the output is not split, footnotes are put at the end of the output. If the footnote style is set to ‘separate’, and the output is split, they are placed in a separate file. See Footnote Styles.
Raw HTML: makeinfo
will include segments of Texinfo
source between @ifhtml
and @end ifhtml
in the HTML
output (but not any of the other conditionals, by default). Source
between @html
and @end html
is passed without change
to the output (i.e., suppressing the normal escaping of input
‘<’, ‘>’ and ‘&’ characters which have special
significance in HTML). See Conditional Commands.
Next: HTML CSS, Previous: HTML Translation, Up: Generating HTML [Contents][Index]
When splitting output at nodes (which is the default),
makeinfo
writes HTML output into (basically) one output file
per Texinfo source @node
.
Each output file name is the node name with spaces replaced by ‘-’’s and special characters changed to ‘_’ followed by their code point in hex (see HTML Xref). This is to make it portable and easy to use as a filename. In the unusual case of two different nodes having the same name after this treatment, they are written consecutively to the same file, with HTML anchors so each can be referred to independently.
If makeinfo
is run on a system which does not distinguish
case in file names, nodes which are the same except for case (e.g.,
‘index’ and ‘Index’) will also be folded into the same
output file with anchors. You can also pretend to be on a case
insensitive filesystem by setting the customization variable
CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAMES
.
It is also possible to split at chapters or sections with
--split (see Invoking texi2any
). In that case,
the file names are constructed after the name of the node associated
with the relevant sectioning command. Also, unless
--no-node-files is specified, a redirection file is output
for every node in order to more reliably support cross-references to
that manual (see HTML Xref).
When splitting, the HTML output files are written into a subdirectory, with the name chosen as follows:
makeinfo
first tries the subdirectory with the base name
from @setfilename
(that is, any extension is removed). For
example, HTML output for @setfilename gcc.info
would be
written into a subdirectory named ‘gcc/’.
makeinfo
tries appending ‘.html’ to the directory name.
For example, output for @setfilename texinfo
would be written
to ‘texinfo.html/’.
makeinfo
gives up.
In any case, the top-level output file within the directory is always named ‘index.html’.
Monolithic output (--no-split
) is named according to
@setfilename
(with any ‘.info’ extension is replaced with
‘.html’), --output
(the argument is used literally), or
based on the input file name as a last resort
(see @setfilename
).
Next: HTML Xref, Previous: HTML Splitting, Up: Generating HTML [Contents][Index]
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS for short) is an Internet standard for influencing the display of HTML documents: see http://www.w3.org/Style/CSS/.
By default, makeinfo
includes a few simple CSS commands to
better implement the appearance of some Texinfo environments. Here
are two of them, as an example:
pre.display { font-family:inherit } pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
A full explanation of CSS is (far) beyond this manual; please see the
reference above. In brief, however, the above tells the web browser
to use a ‘smaller’ font size for @smalldisplay
text, and to
use the same font as the main document for both @smalldisplay
and @display
. By default, the HTML ‘<pre>’ command uses
a monospaced font.
You can influence the CSS in the HTML output with two
makeinfo
options: --css-include=file and
--css-ref=url.
The option --css-ref=url adds to each output HTML file a ‘<link>’ tag referencing a CSS at the given url. This allows using external style sheets. You may find the file texi2html/examples/texinfo-bright-colors.css useful for visualizing the CSS elements in Texinfo output.
The option --css-include=file includes the contents file in the HTML output, as you might expect. However, the details are somewhat tricky, as described in the following, to provide maximum flexibility.
The CSS file may begin with so-called ‘@import’ directives,
which link to external CSS specifications for browsers to use when
interpreting the document. Again, a full description is beyond our
scope here, but we’ll describe how they work syntactically, so we can
explain how makeinfo
handles them.
There can be more than one ‘@import’, but they have to come
first in the file, with only whitespace and comments interspersed, no
normal definitions. (Technical exception: a ‘@charset’
directive may precede the ‘@import’’s. This does not alter
makeinfo
’s behavior, it just copies the ‘@charset’ if
present.) Comments in CSS files are delimited by ‘/* ... */’, as
in C. An ‘@import’ directive must be in one of these two forms:
@import url(http://example.org/foo.css); @import "http://example.net/bar.css";
As far as makeinfo
is concerned, the crucial characters are
the ‘@’ at the beginning and the semicolon terminating the
directive. When reading the CSS file, it simply copies any such
‘@’-directive into the output, as follows:
makeinfo
’s default CSS, thus overriding it.
makeinfo
’s
default CSS is included. If you need to override makeinfo
’s
defaults from an ‘@import’, you can do so with the ‘!
important’ CSS construct, as in:
pre.smallexample { font-size: inherit ! important }
makeinfo
’s defaults, and lastly the inline CSS from
file.
makeinfo
includes
its default CSS and then the rest of the file.
If the CSS file is malformed or erroneous, makeinfo
’s output
is unspecified. makeinfo
does not try to interpret the
meaning of the CSS file in any way; it just looks for the special
‘@’ and ‘;’ characters and blindly copies the text into the
output. Comments in the CSS file may or may not be included in the
output.
In addition to the possibilities offered by CSS, makeinfo
has many user-definable customization variables with which you can
influence the HTML output. See Customization Variables.
Previous: HTML CSS, Up: Generating HTML [Contents][Index]
Cross-references between Texinfo manuals in HTML format become, in the
end, a standard HTML <a>
link, but the details are
unfortunately complex. This section describes the algorithm used in
detail, so that Texinfo can cooperate with other programs, such as
texi2html
, by writing mutually compatible HTML files.
This algorithm may or may not be used for links within HTML output for a Texinfo file. Since no issues of compatibility arise in such cases, we do not need to specify this.
We try to support references to such “external” manuals in both monolithic and split forms. A monolithic (mono) manual is entirely contained in one file, and a split manual has a file for each node. (See HTML Splitting.)
The algorithm was primarily devised by Patrice Dumas in 2003–04.
• Link Basics: | ||
• Node Expansion: | ||
• Command Expansion: | ||
• 8-bit Expansion: | ||
• Mismatch: | ||
• Configuration: | htmlxref.cnf. | |
• Preserving links: | MANUAL-noderename.cnf. |
Next: HTML Xref Node Name Expansion, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
For our purposes, an HTML link consists of four components: a host
name, a directory part, a file part, and a target part. We
always assume the http
protocol. For example:
http://host/dir/file.html#target
The information to construct a link comes from the node name and manual name in the cross-reference command in the Texinfo source (see Cross References), and from external information (see HTML Xref Configuration).
We now consider each part in turn.
The host is hardwired to be the local host. This could either be the literal string ‘localhost’, or, according to the rules for HTML links, the ‘http://localhost/’ could be omitted entirely.
The dir and file parts are more complicated, and depend on the relative split/mono nature of both the manual being processed and the manual that the cross-reference refers to. The underlying idea is that there is one directory for Texinfo manuals in HTML, and a given manual is either available as a monolithic file manual.html, or a split subdirectory manual/*.html. Here are the cases:
Another rule, that only holds for filenames, is that base filenames
are truncated to 245 characters, to allow for an extension to be
appended and still comply with the 255-character limit which is common
to many filesystems. Although technically this can be changed with
the BASEFILENAME_LENGTH
customization variable (see Other Customization Variables), doing so would make cross-manual references
to such nodes invalid.
Any directory part in the filename argument of the source cross
reference command is ignored. Thus, @xref{,,,../foo}
and
@xref{,,,foo}
both use ‘foo’ as the manual name. This
is because any such attempted hardwiring of the directory is very
unlikely to be useful for both Info and HTML output.
Finally, the target part is always the expanded node name.
Whether the present manual is split or mono is determined by user
option; makeinfo
defaults to split, with the
--no-split option overriding this.
Whether the referent manual is split or mono, however, is another bit
of the external information (see HTML Xref Configuration). By
default, makeinfo
uses the same form of the referent manual
as the present manual.
Thus, there can be a mismatch between the format of the referent manual that the generating software assumes, and the format it’s actually present in. See HTML Xref Mismatch.
Next: HTML Xref Command Expansion, Previous: HTML Xref Link Basics, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
As mentioned in the previous section, the key part of the HTML cross reference algorithm is the conversion of node names in the Texinfo source into strings suitable for XHTML identifiers and filenames. The restrictions are similar for each: plain ASCII letters, numbers, and the ‘-’ and ‘_’ characters are all that can be used. (Although HTML anchors can contain most characters, XHTML is more restrictive.)
Cross-references in Texinfo can refer either to nodes or anchors
(see @anchor
). However, anchors are treated identically
to nodes in this context, so we’ll continue to say “node” names for
simplicity.
A special exception: the Top node (see The Top Node) is always mapped to the file index.html, to match web server software. However, the HTML target is ‘Top’. Thus (in the split case):
@xref{Top,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. ⇒ <a href="emacs/index.html#Top">
For example:
@node A node --- with _'% ⇒ A-node-_002d_002d_002d-with-_005f_0027_0025
Example translations of common characters:
On case-folding computer systems, nodes differing only by case will be mapped to the same file. In particular, as mentioned above, Top always maps to the file index.html. Thus, on a case-folding system, Top and a node named ‘Index’ will both be written to index.html. Fortunately, the targets serve to distinguish these cases, since HTML target names are always case-sensitive, independent of operating system.
Next: HTML Xref 8-bit Character Expansion, Previous: HTML Xref Node Name Expansion, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
Node names may contain @-commands (see Node Line Requirements). This section describes how they are handled.
First, comments are removed.
Next, any @value
commands (see @set @value
) and
macro invocations (see Invoking Macros) are fully expanded.
Then, for the following commands, the command name and braces are removed, and the text of the argument is recursively transformed:
@asis @b @cite @code @command @dfn @dmn @dotless @emph @env @file @i @indicateurl @kbd @key @samp @sansserif @sc @slanted @strong @sub @sup @t @U @var @verb @w
For @sc
, any letters are capitalized.
In addition, the following commands are replaced by constant text, as
shown below. If any of these commands have non-empty arguments, as in
@TeX{bad}
, it is an error, and the result is unspecified.
In this table, ‘(space)’ means a space character and ‘(nothing)’ means
the empty string. The notation ‘U+hhhh’ means Unicode code
point hhhh (in hex, as usual).
There are further transformations of many of these expansions to yield the final file or other target name, such as space characters to ‘-’, etc., according to the other rules.
@(newline) | (space) |
@(space) | (space) |
@(tab) | (space) |
@! | ‘!’ |
@* | (space) |
@- | (nothing) |
@. | ‘.’ |
@: | (nothing) |
@? | ‘?’ |
@@ | ‘@’ |
@{ | ‘{’ |
@} | ‘}’ |
@LaTeX | ‘LaTeX’ |
@TeX | ‘TeX’ |
@arrow | U+2192 |
@bullet | U+2022 |
@comma | ‘,’ |
@copyright | U+00A9 |
@dots | U+2026 |
@enddots | ‘...’ |
@equiv | U+2261 |
@error | ‘error-->’ |
@euro | U+20AC |
@exclamdown | U+00A1 |
@expansion | U+21A6 |
@geq | U+2265 |
@leq | U+2264 |
@minus | U+2212 |
@ordf | U+00AA |
@ordm | U+00BA |
@point | U+2605 |
@pounds | U+00A3 |
@print | U+22A3 |
@questiondown | U+00BF |
@registeredsymbol | U+00AE |
@result | U+21D2 |
@textdegree | U+00B0 |
@tie | (space) |
Quotation mark @-commands (@quotedblright{}
and the like),
are likewise replaced by their Unicode values. Normal quotation
characters (e.g., ASCII ‘ and ’) are not altered.
See Inserting Quotation Marks.
Any @acronym
, @abbr
, @email
, and
@image
commands are replaced by their first argument. (For
these commands, all subsequent arguments are optional, and ignored
here.) See @acronym
, and @email
, and Images.
Accents are handled according to the next section.
Any other command is an error, and the result is unspecified.
Next: HTML Xref Mismatch, Previous: HTML Xref Command Expansion, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
Usually, characters other than plain 7-bit ASCII are transformed into
the corresponding Unicode code point(s) in Normalization Form C,
which uses precomposed characters where available. (This is the
normalization form recommended by the W3C and other bodies.) This
holds when that code point is 0xffff
or less, as it almost
always is.
These will then be further transformed by the rules above into the string ‘_hhhh’, where hhhh is the code point in hex.
For example, combining this rule and the previous section:
@node @b{A} @TeX{} @u{B} @point{}@enddots{} ⇒ A-TeX-B_0306-_2605_002e_002e_002e
Notice: 1) @enddots
expands to three periods which in
turn expands to three ‘_002e’’s; 2) @u{B}
is a ‘B’
with a breve accent, which does not exist as a pre-accented Unicode
character, therefore expands to ‘B_0306’ (B with combining
breve).
When the Unicode code point is above 0xffff
, the transformation
is ‘__xxxxxx’, that is, two leading underscores followed by
six hex digits. Since Unicode has declared that their highest code
point is 0x10ffff
, this is sufficient. (We felt it was better
to define this extra escape than to always use six hex digits, since
the first two would nearly always be zeros.)
This method works fine if the node name consists mostly of ASCII
characters and contains only few 8-bit ones. But if the document is
written in a language whose script is not based on the Latin alphabet
(for example, Ukrainian), it will create file names consisting almost
entirely of ‘_xxxx’ notations, which is inconvenient and
all but unreadable. To handle such cases, makeinfo
offers
the --transliterate-file-names command line option. This
option enables transliteration of node names into ASCII
characters for the purposes of file name creation and referencing.
The transliteration is based on phonetic principles, which makes the
generated file names more easily understanable.
For the definition of Unicode Normalization Form C, see Unicode report UAX#15, http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr15/. Many related documents and implementations are available elsewhere on the web.
Next: HTML Xref Configuration, Previous: HTML Xref 8-bit Character Expansion, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
As mentioned earlier (see HTML Xref Link Basics), the generating software may need to guess whether a given manual being cross referenced is available in split or monolithic form—and, inevitably, it might guess wrong. However, when the referent manual is generated, it is possible to handle at least some mismatches.
In the case where we assume the referent is split, but it is actually available in mono, the only recourse would be to generate a manual/ subdirectory full of HTML files which redirect back to the monolithic manual.html. Since this is essentially the same as a split manual in the first place, it’s not very appealing.
On the other hand, in the case where we assume the referent is mono, but it is actually available in split, it is possible to use JavaScript to redirect from the putatively monolithic manual.html to the different manual/node.html files. Here’s an example:
function redirect() { switch (location.hash) { case "#Node1": location.replace("manual/Node1.html#Node1"); break; case "#Node2" : location.replace("manual/Node2.html#Node2"); break; … default:; } }
Then, in the <body>
tag of manual.html:
<body onLoad="redirect();">
Once again, this is something the software which generated the referent manual has to do in advance, it’s not something the software generating the cross-reference in the present manual can control.
Next: HTML Xref Link Preservation, Previous: HTML Xref Mismatch, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
reads a file named htmlxref.cnf to gather
information for cross-references to other manuals in HTML output. It
is looked for in the following directories:
(the current directory)
(under the current directory)
(where ~
is the current user’s home directory)
(where sysconfdir is the system configuration directory specified at compile-time, e.g., /usr/local/etc)
(likewise specified at compile time, e.g., /usr/local/share)
All files found are used, with earlier entries overriding later ones. The Texinfo distribution includes a default file which handles many GNU manuals; it is installed in the last of the above directories, i.e., datadir/texinfo/htmlxref.cnf.
The file is line-oriented. Lines consisting only of whitespace are ignored. Comments are indicated with a ‘#’ at the beginning of a line, optionally preceded by whitespace. Since ‘#’ can occur in urls (like almost any character), it does not otherwise start a comment.
Each non-blank non-comment line must be either a variable assignment or manual information.
A variable assignment line looks like this:
varname = varvalue
Whitespace around the ‘=’ is optional and ignored. The varname should consist of letters; case is significant. The varvalue is an arbitrary string, continuing to the end of the line. Variables are then referenced with ‘${varname}’; variable references can occur in the varvalue.
A manual information line looks like this:
manual keyword urlprefix
with manual the short identifier for a manual, keyword
being one of: mono
, node
, section
,
chapter
, and urlprefix described below. Variable
references can occur only in the urlprefix. For example (used
in the canonical htmlxref.cnf):
G = http://www.gnu.org GS = ${G}/software hello mono ${GS}/hello/manual/hello.html hello chapter ${GS}/hello/manual/html_chapter/ hello section ${GS}/hello/manual/html_section/ hello node ${GS}/hello/manual/html_node/
If the keyword is mono
, urlprefix gives the host,
directory, and file name for manual as one monolithic file.
If the keyword is node
, section
, or chapter
,
urlprefix gives the host and directory for manual split
into nodes, sections, or chapters, respectively.
When available, makeinfo
will use the “corresponding”
value for cross-references between manuals. That is, when generating
monolithic output (--no-split), the mono
url will be
used, when generating output that is split by node, the node
url will be used, etc. However, if a manual is not available in that
form, anything that is available can be used. Here is the search
order for each style:
node ⇒ node, section, chapter, mono section ⇒ section, chapter, node, mono chapter ⇒ chapter, section, node, mono mono ⇒ mono, chapter, section, node
These section- and chapter-level cross-manual references can succeed only when the target manual was created using --node-files; this is the default for split output.
If you have additions or corrections to the htmlxref.cnf distributed with Texinfo, please email bug-texinfo@gnu.org as usual. You can get the latest version from http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/htmlxref.cnf.
Previous: HTML Xref Configuration, Up: HTML Xref [Contents][Index]
Occasionally changes in a program require removing (or renaming) nodes in the manual in order to have the best documentation. Given the nature of the web, however, links may exist anywhere to such a removed node (renaming appears the same as removal for this purpose), and it’s not ideal for those links to simply break.
Therefore, Texinfo provides a way for manual authors to specify old node names and the new nodes to which the old names should be redirected, via the file manual-noderename.cnf, where manual is the base name of the manual. For example, the manual texinfo.texi would be supplemented by a file texinfo-noderename.cnf. (This name can be overridden by setting the RENAMED_NODES_FILE customization variable; see Customization Variables).
The file is read in pairs of lines, as follows:
old-node-name @@{} new-node-name
The usual conversion from Texinfo node names to HTML names is applied; see this entire section for details (see HTML Xref). The unusual ‘@@{}’ separator is used because it is not a valid Texinfo construct, so can’t appear in the node names.
The effect is that makeinfo
generates a redirect from
old-node-name to new-node-name when producing HTML output.
Thus, external links to the old node are preserved.
Lines consisting only of whitespace are ignored. Comments are indicated with a ‘@c’ at the beginning of a line, optionally preceded by whitespace.
Another approach to preserving links to deleted or renamed nodes is to
use anchors (see @anchor
). There is no effective
difference between the two approaches.
Next: Tips, Previous: Generating HTML, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Here are the details of @-commands: information about their syntax, a list of commands, and information about where commands can appear.
• Command Syntax: | ||
• Command List: | ||
• Command Contexts: | ||
• Obsolete @-Commands: |
Next: Command List, Up: @-Command Details [Contents][Index]
Texinfo has the following types of @-command:
These commands start with @ followed by a letter or a word, followed by an
argument within braces. For example, the command @dfn
indicates
the introductory or defining use of a term; it is used as follows: ‘In
Texinfo, @@-commands are @dfn{mark-up} commands.’
These commands occupy an entire line. The line starts with @,
followed by the name of the command (a word); for example, @center
or @cindex
. If no argument is needed, the word is followed by
the end of the line. If there is an argument, it is separated from
the command name by a space. Braces are not used.
These commands are written at the start of a line, with general text on
following lines, terminated by a matching @end
command on a
line of its own. For example, @example
, then the lines of a
coding example, then @end example
. Some of these block commands
take arguments as line commands do; for example, @enumerate A
opening an environment terminated by @end enumerate
. Here
‘A’ is the argument.
These commands start with @ followed by a word followed by a
left and right- brace. These commands insert special symbols in
the document; they do not take arguments. Some examples:
@dots{}
⇒ ‘…’, @equiv{}
⇒ ‘≡’, @TeX{}
⇒ ‘TeX’, and
@bullet{}
⇒ ‘•’.
The names of commands in all of the above categories consist of
alphabetic characters, almost entirely in lower-case. Unlike those, the
non-alphabetic commands commands consist of an @ followed by a
punctuation mark or other character that is not part of the Latin
alphabet. Non-alphabetic commands are almost always part of text
within a paragraph. The non-alphabetic commands include @@
,
@{
, @}
, @.
, @SPACE
, and most of
the accent commands.
There are a handful of commands that don’t fit into any of the above
categories; for example, the obsolete command @refill
, which is
always used at the end of a paragraph immediately following the final
period or other punctuation character. @refill
takes no
argument and does not require braces. Likewise, @tab
used in a
@multitable
block does not take arguments, and is not followed
by braces.
Thus, the alphabetic commands fall into classes that have
different argument syntaxes. You cannot tell to which class a command
belongs by the appearance of its name, but you can tell by the
command’s meaning: if the command stands for a glyph, it is in
class 4 and does not require an argument; if it makes sense to use the
command among other text as part of a paragraph, the command
is in class 1 and must be followed by an argument in braces. The
non-alphabetic commands, such as @:
, are exceptions to the
rule; they do not need braces.
The purpose of having different syntax for commands is to make Texinfo files easier to read, and also to help the GNU Emacs paragraph and filling commands work properly.
Next: Command Contexts, Previous: Command Syntax, Up: @-Command Details [Contents][Index]
Here is an alphabetical list of the @-commands in Texinfo. Square brackets, [ ], indicate optional arguments; an ellipsis, ‘…’, indicates repeated text.
@whitespace
An @
followed by a space, tab, or newline produces a normal,
stretchable, interword space. See Multiple Spaces.
@!
Produce an exclamation point that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@"
@'
Generate an umlaut or acute accent, respectively, over the next character, as in ö and ó. See Inserting Accents.
@*
Force a line break. See Line Breaks.
@,{c}
Generate a cedilla accent under c, as in ç. See Inserting Accents.
@-
Insert a discretionary hyphenation point. See @- @hyphenation
.
@.
Produce a period that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@/
Produces no output, but allows a line break. See Line Breaks.
@:
Tell TeX to refrain from inserting extra whitespace after an immediately preceding period, question mark, exclamation mark, or colon, as TeX normally would. See Not Ending a Sentence.
@=
Generate a macron (bar) accent over the next character, as in ō. See Inserting Accents.
@?
Produce a question mark that ends a sentence (usually after an end-of-sentence capital letter). See Ending a Sentence.
@@
@atchar{}
Insert an at sign, ‘@’. See Inserting an Atsign.
@\
@backslashchar{}
Insert a backslash, ‘\’; @backslashchar{}
works
anywhere, while @\
works only inside @math
.
See Inserting a Backslash, and Inserting Math.
@^
@`
Generate a circumflex (hat) or grave accent, respectively, over the next character, as in ô and è. See Inserting Accents.
@{
@lbracechar{}
Insert a left brace, ‘{’. See Inserting Braces.
@}
@rbracechar{}
Insert a right brace, ‘}’. See Inserting Braces.
@~
Generate a tilde accent over the next character, as in Ñ. See Inserting Accents.
@AA{}
@aa{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Scandinavian A-ring letters, respectively: Å, å. See Inserting Accents.
@abbr{abbreviation}
Indicate a general abbreviation, such as ‘Comput.’.
See @abbr
.
@acronym{acronym}
Indicate an acronym in all capital letters, such as ‘NASA’.
See @acronym
.
@AE{}
@ae{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase AE ligatures, respectively: Æ, æ. See Inserting Accents.
@afivepaper
Change page dimensions for the A5 paper size. See A4 Paper.
@afourlatex
@afourpaper
@afourwide
Change page dimensions for the A4 paper size. See A4 Paper.
@alias new=existing
Make the command ‘@new’ a synonym for the existing command
‘@existing’. See @alias
.
@allowcodebreaks true-false
Control breaking at ‘-’ and ‘_’ in TeX.
See @allowcodebreaks
.
@anchor{name}
Define name as the current location for use as a cross-reference
target. See @anchor
.
@appendix title
Begin an appendix. The title appears in the table of contents. In
Info, the title is underlined with asterisks.
See @unnumbered @appendix
.
@appendixsec title
@appendixsection title
Begin an appendix section within an appendix. The section title
appears in the table of contents. In Info, the title is underlined
with equal signs. @appendixsection
is a longer spelling of
the @appendixsec
command. See @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading
.
@appendixsubsec title
Begin an appendix subsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with hyphens.
See @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading
.
@appendixsubsubsec title
Begin an appendix subsubsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with periods.
See @subsubsection
.
@arrow{}
Generate a right arrow glyph: ‘→’. Used by default
for @click
. See Click Sequences.
@asis
Used following @table
, @ftable
, and @vtable
to
print the table’s first column without highlighting (“as is”).
See @asis
.
@author author
Typeset author flushleft and underline it. See @title @subtitle @author
.
@b{text}
Set text in a bold font. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@bullet{}
Generate a large round dot, • (‘*’ in Info). Often used
with @table
. See @bullet
.
@bye
Stop formatting a file. The formatters do not see anything in the
input file following @bye
. See Ending a File.
@c comment
Begin a comment in Texinfo. The rest of the line does not appear in
any output. A synonym for @comment
. DEL also
starts a comment. See Comments.
@caption
Define the full caption for a @float
. See @caption @shortcaption
.
@cartouche
Highlight an example or quotation by drawing a box with rounded
corners around it. Pair with @end cartouche
. No effect in
Info. See @cartouche
.
@center line-of-text
Center the line of text following the command.
See @titlefont @center @sp
.
@centerchap line-of-text
Like @chapter
, but centers the chapter title. See @chapter
.
@chapheading title
Print an unnumbered chapter-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with asterisks.
See @majorheading @chapheading
.
@chapter title
Begin a numbered chapter. The chapter title appears in the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with asterisks.
See @chapter
.
@cindex entry
Add entry to the index of concepts. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@cite{reference}
Highlight the name of a book or other reference that has no companion
Info file. See @cite
.
@clear flag
Unset flag, preventing the Texinfo formatting commands from
formatting text between subsequent pairs of @ifset flag
and @end ifset
commands, and preventing
@value{flag}
from expanding to the value to which
flag is set. See @set @clear @value
.
@click{}
Represent a single “click” in a GUI. Used within
@clicksequence
. See Click Sequences.
@clicksequence{action @click{} action}
Represent a sequence of clicks in a GUI. See Click Sequences.
@clickstyle @cmd
Execute @cmd for each @click
; the default is
@arrow
. The usual following empty braces on @cmd are
omitted. See Click Sequences.
@code{sample-code}
Indicate an expression, a syntactically complete token of a program,
or a program name. Unquoted in Info output. See @code
.
@codequotebacktick on-off
@codequoteundirected on-off
Control output of `
and '
in code examples.
See Inserting Quote Characters.
@comma{}
Insert a comma ‘,’ character; only needed when a literal comma would be taken as an argument separator. See Inserting a Comma.
@command{command-name}
Indicate a command name, such as ls
. See @command
.
@comment comment
Begin a comment in Texinfo. The rest of the line does not appear in
any output. A synonym for @c
.
See Comments.
@contents
Print a complete table of contents. Has no effect in Info, which uses menus instead. See Generating a Table of Contents.
@copying
Specify copyright holders and copying conditions for the document. Pair
with @end copying
. See @copying
.
@copyright{}
Generate the copyright symbol ©.
See @copyright
.
@defcodeindex index-name
Define a new index and its indexing command. Print entries in an
@code
font. See Defining New Indices.
@defcv category class name
@defcvx category class name
Format a description for a variable associated with a class in object-oriented programming. Takes three arguments: the category of thing being defined, the class to which it belongs, and its name. See Definition Commands.
@deffn category name arguments…
@deffnx category name arguments…
Format a description for a function, interactive command, or similar
entity that may take arguments. @deffn
takes as arguments the
category of entity being described, the name of this particular
entity, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands.
@defindex index-name
Define a new index and its indexing command. Print entries in a roman font. See Defining New Indices.
@definfoenclose newcmd, before, after
Must be used within @ifinfo
; create a new command
@newcmd
for Info that marks text by enclosing it in
strings that precede and follow the text.
See @definfoenclose
.
@defivar class instance-variable-name
@defivarx class instance-variable-name
Format a description for an instance variable in object-oriented programming. The command is equivalent to ‘@defcv {Instance Variable} …’. See Definition Commands.
@defmac macroname arguments…
@defmacx macroname arguments…
Format a description for a macro; equivalent to ‘@deffn Macro …’. See Definition Commands.
@defmethod class method-name arguments…
@defmethodx class method-name arguments…
Format a description for a method in object-oriented programming; equivalent to ‘@defop Method …’. See Definition Commands.
@defop category class name arguments…
@defopx category class name arguments…
Format a description for an operation in object-oriented programming.
@defop
takes as arguments the name of the category of
operation, the name of the operation’s class, the name of the
operation, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands, and
Abstract Objects.
@defopt option-name
@defoptx option-name
Format a description for a user option; equivalent to ‘@defvr {User Option} …’. See Definition Commands.
@defspec special-form-name arguments…
@defspecx special-form-name arguments…
Format a description for a special form; equivalent to ‘@deffn {Special Form} …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftp category name-of-type attributes…
@deftpx category name-of-type attributes…
Format a description for a data type; its arguments are the category, the name of the type (e.g., ‘int’) , and then the names of attributes of objects of that type. See Definition Commands, and Data Types.
@deftypecv category class data-type name
@deftypecvx category class data-type name
Format a description for a typed class variable in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Abstract Objects.
@deftypefn category data-type name arguments…
@deftypefnx category data-type name arguments…
Format a description for a function or similar entity that may take
arguments and that is typed. @deftypefn
takes as arguments the
category of entity being described, the type, the name of the
entity, and its arguments, if any. See Definition Commands.
@deftypefnnewline on-off
Specifies whether return types for @deftypefn
and similar are
printed on lines by themselves; default is off. See Functions in Typed Languages.
@deftypefun data-type function-name arguments…
@deftypefunx data-type function-name arguments…
Format a description for a function in a typed language. The command is equivalent to ‘@deftypefn Function …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftypeivar class data-type variable-name
@deftypeivarx class data-type variable-name
Format a description for a typed instance variable in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Abstract Objects.
@deftypemethod class data-type method-name arguments…
@deftypemethodx class data-type method-name arguments…
Format a description for a typed method in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands.
@deftypeop category class data-type name arguments…
@deftypeopx category class data-type name arguments…
Format a description for a typed operation in object-oriented programming. See Definition Commands, and Abstract Objects.
@deftypevar data-type variable-name
@deftypevarx data-type variable-name
Format a description for a variable in a typed language. The command is equivalent to ‘@deftypevr Variable …’. See Definition Commands.
@deftypevr category data-type name
@deftypevrx category data-type name
Format a description for something like a variable in a typed language—an entity that records a value. Takes as arguments the category of entity being described, the type, and the name of the entity. See Definition Commands.
@defun function-name arguments…
@defunx function-name arguments…
Format a description for a function; equivalent to ‘@deffn Function …’. See Definition Commands.
@defvar variable-name
@defvarx variable-name
Format a description for a variable; equivalent to ‘@defvr Variable …’. See Definition Commands.
@defvr category name
@defvrx category name
Format a description for any kind of variable. @defvr
takes
as arguments the category of the entity and the name of the entity.
See Definition Commands.
@detailmenu
Mark the (optional) detailed node listing in a master menu. See Master Menu Parts.
@dfn{term}
Indicate the introductory or defining use of a term. See @dfn
.
@DH{}
@dh{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Icelandic letter eth, respectively: Ð, ð. See Inserting Accents.
@dircategory dirpart
Specify a part of the Info directory menu where this file’s entry should go. See Installing Dir Entries.
@direntry
Begin the Info directory menu entry for this file. Pair with
@end direntry
. See Installing Dir Entries.
@display
Begin a kind of example. Like @example
(indent text, do not
fill), but do not select a new font. Pair with @end display
.
See @display
.
@dmn{dimension}
Format a unit of measure, as in 12pt. Causes TeX to insert a
thin space before dimension. No effect in Info.
See @dmn
.
@docbook
Enter Docbook completely. Pair with @end docbook
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@documentdescription
Set the document description text, included in the HTML output. Pair
with @end documentdescription
. See @documentdescription
.
@documentencoding enc
Declare the input encoding to be enc.
See @documentencoding
.
@documentlanguage CC
Declare the document language as the two-character ISO-639 abbreviation
CC. See @documentlanguage
.
@dotaccent{c}
Generate a dot accent over the character c, as in ȯ. See Inserting Accents.
@dotless{i-or-j}
Generate dotless i (‘i’) and dotless j (‘j’). See Inserting Accents.
@dots{}
Generate an ellipsis, ‘…’.
See @dots
.
@email{address[, displayed-text]}
Indicate an electronic mail address. See @email
.
@emph{text}
Emphasize text, by using italics where possible, and enclosing in asterisks in Info. See Emphasizing Text.
@end environment
Ends environment, as in ‘@end example’. See @-commands.
@enddots{}
Generate an end-of-sentence ellipsis, like this: ...
See @dots
.
@enumerate [number-or-letter]
Begin a numbered list, using @item
for each entry.
Optionally, start list with number-or-letter. Pair with
@end enumerate
. See @enumerate
.
@env{environment-variable}
Indicate an environment variable name, such as PATH
.
See @env
.
@equiv{}
Indicate to the reader the exact equivalence of two forms with a
glyph: ‘≡’. See @equiv
.
@error{}
Indicate to the reader with a glyph that the following text is
an error message: ‘error→’. See @error
.
@errormsg{msg}
Report msg as an error to standard error, and exit unsuccessfully. Texinfo commands within msg are expanded to plain text. See Conditionals, and External Macro Processors.
@euro{}
Generate the Euro currency sign. See @euro
.
@evenfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@evenheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for even-numbered (left-hand) pages. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@everyfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@everyheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for every page. Not relevant to Info. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@example
Begin an example. Indent text, do not fill, and select fixed-width
font. Pair with @end example
. See @example
.
@exampleindent indent
Indent example-like environments by indent number of spaces
(perhaps 0). See @exampleindent
.
@exclamdown{}
Generate an upside-down exclamation point. See Inserting Accents.
@exdent line-of-text
Remove any indentation a line might have. See @exdent
.
@expansion{}
Indicate the result of a macro expansion to the reader with a special
glyph: ‘→’. See @expansion
.
@file{filename}
Highlight the name of a file, buffer, node, directory, etc.
See @file
.
@finalout
Prevent TeX from printing large black warning rectangles beside over-wide lines. See Overfull hboxes.
@findex entry
Add entry to the index of functions. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@firstparagraphindent word
Control indentation of the first paragraph after section headers
according to word, one of ‘none’ or ‘insert’.
See @firstparagraphindent
.
@float
Environment to define floating material. Pair with @end float
.
See Floats.
@flushleft
@flushright
Do not fill text; left (right) justify every line while leaving the
right (left) end ragged. Leave font as is. Pair with @end
flushleft
(@end flushright
). See @flushleft @flushright
.
@fonttextsize 10-11
Change the size of the main body font in the TeX output. See Fonts.
@footnote{text-of-footnote}
Enter a footnote. Footnote text is printed at the bottom of the page by TeX; Info may format in either ‘End’ node or ‘Separate’ node style. See Footnotes.
@footnotestyle style
Specify an Info file’s footnote style, either ‘end’ for the end node style or ‘separate’ for the separate node style. See Footnotes.
@format
Begin a kind of example. Like @display
, but do not indent.
Pair with @end format
. See @example
.
@frenchspacing on-off
Control spacing after punctuation. See @frenchspacing
.
@ftable formatting-command
Begin a two-column table, using @item
for each entry.
Automatically enter each of the items in the first column into the
index of functions. Pair with @end ftable
. The same as
@table
, except for indexing. See @ftable @vtable
.
@geq{}
Generate a greater-than-or-equal sign, ‘≥’. See @geq @leq
.
@group
Disallow page breaks within following text. Pair with @end
group
. Ignored in Info. See @group
.
@guillemetleft{}
@guillemetright{}
@guillemotleft{}
@guillemotright{}
@guilsinglleft{}
@guilsinglright{}
Double and single angle quotation marks: «
» ‹ ›.
@guillemotleft
and @guillemotright
are synonyms for
@guillemetleft
and @guillemetright
. See Inserting Quotation Marks.
@H{c}
Generate the long Hungarian umlaut accent over c, as in ő.
@hashchar{}
Insert a hash ‘#’ character; only needed when a literal hash would
introduce #line
directive. See Inserting a Hashsign, and
External Macro Processors.
@heading title
Print an unnumbered section-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with equal signs.
See @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading
.
@headings on-off-single-double
Turn page headings on or off, and/or specify single-sided or double-sided
page headings for printing. See @headings
.
@headitem
Begin a heading row in a multitable. See Multitable Rows.
@headitemfont{text}
Set text in the font used for multitable heading rows; mostly useful in multitable templates. See Multitable Rows.
@html
Enter HTML completely. Pair with @end html
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@hyphenation{hy-phen-a-ted words}
Explicitly define hyphenation points. See @- @hyphenation
.
@i{text}
Set text in an italic font. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@ifclear txivar
If the Texinfo variable txivar is not set, format the following
text. Pair with @end ifclear
. See @set @clear @value
.
@ifcommanddefined txicmd
@ifcommandnotdefined txicmd
If the Texinfo code ‘@txicmd’ is (not) defined, format the
follow text. Pair with the corresponding @end ifcommand...
.
See Testing for Texinfo Commands.
@ifdocbook
@ifhtml
@ifinfo
Begin text that will appear only in the given output format.
@ifinfo
output appears in both Info and (for historical
compatibility) plain text output. Pair with @end ifdocbook
resp. @end ifhtml
resp. @end ifinfo
.
See Conditionals.
@ifnotdocbook
@ifnothtml
@ifnotplaintext
@ifnottex
@ifnotxml
Begin text to be ignored in one output format but not the others.
@ifnothtml
text is omitted from HTML output, etc. Pair with
the corresponding @end ifnotformat
.
See Conditionals.
@ifnotinfo
Begin text to appear in output other than Info and (for historical
compatibility) plain text. Pair with @end ifnotinfo
.
See Conditionals.
@ifplaintext
Begin text that will appear only in the plain text output.
Pair with @end ifplaintext
. See Conditionals.
@ifset txivar
If the Texinfo variable txivar is set, format the following
text. Pair with @end ifset
. See @set @clear @value
.
@iftex
Begin text to appear only in the TeX output. Pair with @end
iftex
. See Conditionally Visible Text.
@ifxml
Begin text that will appear only in the XML output. Pair with
@end ifxml
. See Conditionals.
@ignore
Begin text that will not appear in any output. Pair with @end
ignore
. See Comments and Ignored Text.
@image{filename, [width], [height], [alt], [ext]}
Include graphics image in external filename scaled to the given width and/or height, using alt text and looking for ‘filename.ext’ in HTML. See Images.
@include filename
Read the contents of Texinfo source file filename. See Include Files.
@indent
Insert paragraph indentation. See @indent
.
@indentedblock
Indent a block of arbitary text on the left. Pair with @end
indentedblock
. See @indentedblock
.
@indicateurl{indicateurl}
Indicate text that is a uniform resource locator for the World Wide
Web. See @indicateurl
.
@inforef{node-name, [entry-name], info-file-name}
Make a cross-reference to an Info file for which there is no printed
manual. See @inforef
.
@inlinefmt{fmt, text}
Insert text only if the output format is fmt. See Inline Conditionals.
@inlinefmtifelse{fmt, text, else-text}
Insert text if the output format is fmt, else else-text.
@inlineifclear{var, text}
@inlineifset{var, text}
Insert text only if the Texinfo variable var is (not) set.
@inlineraw{fmt, raw-text}
Insert text as in a raw conditional, only if the output format is fmt.
\input macro-definitions-file
Use the specified macro definitions file. This command is used only
in the first line of a Texinfo file to cause TeX to make use of the
texinfo macro definitions file. The \
in \input
is used instead of an @
because TeX does not recognize
@
until after it has read the definitions file. See Texinfo File Header.
@insertcopying
Insert the text previously defined with the @copying
environment. See @insertcopying
.
@item
Indicate the beginning of a marked paragraph for @itemize
and
@enumerate
; indicate the beginning of the text of a first column
entry for @table
, @ftable
, and @vtable
.
See Lists and Tables.
@itemize mark-generating-character-or-command
Begin an unordered list: indented paragraphs with a mark, such as
@bullet
, inside the left margin at the beginning of each item.
Pair with @end itemize
. See @itemize
.
@itemx
Like @item
but do not generate extra vertical space above the
item text. Thus, when several items have the same description, use
@item
for the first and @itemx
for the others.
See @itemx
.
@kbd{keyboard-characters}
Indicate characters of input to be typed by users. See @kbd
.
@kbdinputstyle style
Specify when @kbd
should use a font distinct from
@code
according to style: code
, distinct
,
example
. See @kbd
.
@key{key-name}
Indicate the name of a key on a keyboard. See @key
.
@kindex entry
Add entry to the index of keys. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@L{}
@l{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Polish suppressed-L letters, respectively: Ł, ł.
@LaTeX{}
Generate the LaTeX logo. See @TeX @LaTeX
.
@leq{}
Generate a less-than-or-equal sign, ‘≤’. See @geq @leq
.
@lisp
Begin an example of Lisp code. Indent text, do not fill, and select
fixed-width font. Pair with @end lisp
. See @lisp
.
@listoffloats
Produce a table-of-contents-like listing of @float
s.
See @listoffloats
.
@lowersections
Change subsequent chapters to sections, sections to subsections, and so
on. See @raisesections
and
@lowersections
.
@macro macroname {params}
Define a new Texinfo command @macroname{params}
.
Pair with @end macro
. See Defining Macros.
@majorheading title
Print an unnumbered chapter-like heading, but omit from the table of
contents. This generates more vertical whitespace before the heading
than the @chapheading
command. See @majorheading @chapheading
.
@math{mathematical-expression}
Format a mathematical expression. See Inserting Math.
@menu
Mark the beginning of a menu of nodes. No effect in a printed manual.
Pair with @end menu
. See Menus.
@minus{}
Generate a minus sign, ‘-’. See @minus
.
@multitable column-width-spec
Begin a multi-column table. Begin each row with @item
or
@headitem
, and separate columns with @tab
. Pair with
@end multitable
. See Multitable Column Widths.
@need n
Start a new page in a printed manual if fewer than n mils
(thousandths of an inch) remain on the current page.
See @need
.
@node name, next, previous, up
Begin a new node. See Writing a Node.
@noindent
Prevent text from being indented as if it were a new paragraph.
See @noindent
.
@novalidate
Suppress validation of node references and omit creation of auxiliary files with TeX. Use before any sectioning or cross-reference commands. See Pointer Validation.
@O{}
@o{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase O-with-slash letters, respectively: Ø, ø.
@oddfooting [left] @| [center] @| [right]
@oddheading [left] @| [center] @| [right]
Specify page footings resp. headings for odd-numbered (right-hand) pages. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@OE{}
@oe{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase OE ligatures, respectively: Œ, œ. See Inserting Accents.
@ogonek{c}
Generate an ogonek diacritic under the next character, as in ą. See Inserting Accents.
@option{option-name}
Indicate a command-line option, such as -l or
--help. See @option
.
@ordf{}
@ordm{}
Generate the feminine and masculine Spanish ordinals, respectively: ª, º. See Inserting Accents.
@page
Start a new page in a printed manual. No effect in Info.
See @page
.
@pagesizes [width][, height]
Change page dimensions. See pagesizes.
@paragraphindent indent
Indent paragraphs by indent number of spaces (perhaps 0); preserve
source file indentation if indent is asis
.
See @paragraphindent
.
@part title
Begin a group of chapters or appendixes; included in the tables of
contents and produces a page of its own in printed output.
See @part
.
@pindex entry
Add entry to the index of programs. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@point{}
Indicate the position of point in a buffer to the reader with a glyph:
‘∗’. See @point
.
@pounds{}
Generate the pounds sterling currency sign.
See @pounds
.
@print{}
Indicate printed output to the reader with a glyph: ‘-|’.
See @print
.
@printindex index-name
Generate the alphabetized index for index-name (using two columns in a printed manual). See Printing Indices & Menus.
@pxref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [manual]}
Make a reference that starts with a lowercase ‘see’ in a printed
manual. Use within parentheses only. Only the first argument is
mandatory. See @pxref
.
@questiondown{}
Generate an upside-down question mark. See Inserting Accents.
@quotation
Narrow the margins to indicate text that is quoted from another work.
Takes optional argument specifying prefix text, e.g., an author name.
Pair with @end quotation
. See @quotation
.
@quotedblleft{}
@quotedblright{}
@quoteleft{}
@quoteright{}
@quotedblbase{}
@quotesinglbase{}
Produce various quotation marks: “ ” ‘ ’ „ ‚. See Inserting Quotation Marks.
@r{text}
Set text in the regular roman font. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@raggedright
Fill text; left justify every line while leaving the right end ragged.
Leave font as is. Pair with @end raggedright
. No effect in
Info. See @raggedright
.
@raisesections
Change subsequent sections to chapters, subsections to sections, and so on. See Raise/lower sections.
@ref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [manual]}
Make a plain reference that does not start with any special text.
Follow command with a punctuation mark. Only the first argument is
mandatory. See @ref
.
@refill
This command used to refill and indent the paragraph after all the other processing has been done. It is no longer needed, since all formatters now automatically refill as needed, but you may still see it in the source to some manuals, as it does no harm.
@registeredsymbol{}
Generate the legal symbol ®.
See @registeredsymbol
.
@result{}
Indicate the result of an expression to the reader with a special
glyph: ‘⇒’. See @result
.
@ringaccent{c}
Generate a ring accent over the next character, as in o*. See Inserting Accents.
@samp{text}
Indicate a literal example of a sequence of characters, in general.
Quoted in Info output. See @samp
.
@sansserif{text}
Set text in a sans serif font if possible. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@sc{text}
Set text in a small caps font in printed output, and uppercase in Info. See Smallcaps.
@section title
Begin a section within a chapter. The section title appears in the
table of contents. In Info, the title is underlined with equal signs.
Within @chapter
and @appendix
, the section title is
numbered; within @unnumbered
, the section is unnumbered.
See @section
.
@set txivar [string]
Define the Texinfo variable txivar, optionally to the value
string. See @set @clear @value
.
@setchapternewpage on-off-odd
Specify whether chapters start on new pages, and if so, whether on
odd-numbered (right-hand) new pages. See @setchapternewpage
.
@setfilename info-file-name
Provide a name to be used for the output files. This command is ignored
for TeX formatting. See @setfilename
.
@settitle title
Specify the title for page headers in a printed manual, and the
default document title for HTML ‘<head>’.
See @settitle
.
@shortcaption
Define the short caption for a @float
. See @caption @shortcaption
.
@shortcontents
Print a short table of contents, with chapter-level entries only. Not relevant to Info, which uses menus rather than tables of contents. See Generating a Table of Contents.
@shorttitlepage title
Generate a minimal title page. See @titlepage
.
@slanted{text}
Set text in a slanted font if possible. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@smallbook
Cause TeX to produce a printed manual in a 7 by 9.25 inch format
rather than the regular 8.5 by 11 inch format.
See @smallbook
. Also, see @small…
.
@smalldisplay
Begin a kind of example. Like @display
, but use a smaller
font size where possible. Pair with @end smalldisplay
.
See @small…
.
@smallexample
Begin an example. Like @example
, but use a smaller font size
where possible. Pair with @end smallexample
.
See @small…
.
@smallformat
Begin a kind of example. Like @format
, but use a smaller font
size where possible. Pair with @end smallformat
.
See @small…
.
@smallindentedblock
Like @indentedblock
, but use a smaller font size where
possible. Pair with @end smallindentedblock
.
See @small…
.
@smalllisp
Begin an example of Lisp code. Same as @smallexample
. Pair
with @end smalllisp
. See @small…
.
@smallquotation
Like @quotation
, but use a smaller font size where possible.
Pair with @end smallquotation
. See @small…
.
@sortas {key}
Used in the arguments to index commands to give a string by which the index entry should be sorted. See Indexing Commands.
@sp n
Skip n blank lines. See @sp
.
@ss{}
Generate the German sharp-S es-zet letter, ß. See Inserting Accents.
@strong {text}
Emphasize text more strongly than @emph
, by using
boldface where possible; enclosed in asterisks in Info.
See Emphasizing Text.
@sub {text}
Set text as a subscript. See Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts.
@subheading title
Print an unnumbered subsection-like heading, but omit from the table
of contents of a printed manual. In Info, the title is underlined
with hyphens. See @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading
.
@subsection title
Begin a subsection within a section. The subsection title appears in
the table of contents. In Info, the title is underlined with hyphens.
Same context-dependent numbering as @section
.
See @subsection
.
@subsubheading title
Print an unnumbered subsubsection-like heading, but omit from the
table of contents of a printed manual. In Info, the title is
underlined with periods. See @subsubsection
.
@subsubsection title
Begin a subsubsection within a subsection. The subsubsection title
appears in the table of contents. In Info, the title is underlined
with periods. Same context-dependent numbering as @section
.
See @subsubsection
.
@subtitle title
In a printed manual, set a subtitle in a normal sized font flush to
the right-hand side of the page. Not relevant to Info, which does not
have title pages. See @title @subtitle @author
.
@summarycontents
Print a short table of contents. Synonym for @shortcontents
.
See Generating a Table of Contents.
@sup {text}
Set text as a superscript. See Inserting Subscripts and Superscripts.
@syncodeindex from-index to-index
Merge the index named in the first argument into the index named in
the second argument, formatting the entries from the first index with
@code
. See Combining Indices.
@synindex from-index to-index
Merge the index named in the first argument into the index named in the second argument. Do not change the font of from-index entries. See Combining Indices.
@t{text}
Set text in a fixed-width, typewriter-like font. No effect in Info. See Fonts.
@tab
Separate columns in a row of a multitable. See Multitable Rows.
@table formatting-command
Begin a two-column table (description list), using @item
for
each entry. Write each first column entry on the same line as
@item
. First column entries are printed in the font resulting
from formatting-command. Pair with @end table
.
See Making a Two-column Table. Also see
@ftable @vtable
, and @itemx
.
@TeX{}
Generate the TeX logo. See @TeX @LaTeX
.
@tex
Enter TeX completely. Pair with @end tex
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@textdegree{}
Generate the degree symbol. See @textdegree
.
@thischapter
@thischaptername
@thischapternum
@thisfile
@thispage
@thistitle
Only allowed in a heading or footing. Stands for, respectively, the number and name of the current chapter (in the format ‘Chapter 1: Title’), the current chapter name only, the current chapter number only, the filename, the current page number, and the title of the document, respectively. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@TH{}
@th{}
Generate the uppercase and lowercase Icelandic letter thorn, respectively: Þ, þ. See Inserting Accents.
@tie{}
Generate a normal interword space at which a line break is not
allowed. See @tie
.
@tieaccent{cc}
Generate a tie-after accent over the next two characters cc, as in ‘oo[’. See Inserting Accents.
@tindex entry
Add entry to the index of data types. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@title title
In a printed manual, set a title flush to the left-hand side of the
page in a larger than normal font and underline it with a black rule.
Not relevant to Info, which does not have title pages.
See @title @subtitle @author
.
@titlefont{text}
In a printed manual, print text in a larger than normal font.
See @titlefont @center @sp
.
@titlepage
Begin the title page. Write the command on a line of its own, paired
with @end titlepage
. Nothing between @titlepage
and
@end titlepage
appears in Info. See @titlepage
.
@today{}
Insert the current date, in ‘1 Jan 1900’ style. See How to Make Your Own Headings.
@top title
Mark the topmost @node
in the file, which must be defined on
the line immediately preceding the @top
command. The title is
formatted as a chapter-level heading. The entire top node, including
the @node
and @top
lines, are normally enclosed with
@ifnottex ... @end ifnottex
. In TeX and
texinfo-format-buffer
, the @top
command is merely a
synonym for @unnumbered
. See makeinfo
Pointer Creation.
@U{hex}
Output a representation of Unicode character U+hex. See Inserting Unicode.
@u{c}
@ubaraccent{c}
@udotaccent{c}
Generate a breve, underbar, or underdot accent, respectively, over or under the character c, as in ŏ, o_, ọ. See Inserting Accents.
@unmacro macroname
Undefine the macro @macroname
if it has been defined.
See Defining Macros.
@unnumbered title
Begin a chapter that appears without chapter numbers of any kind. The
title appears in the table of contents. In Info, the title is
underlined with asterisks. See @unnumbered @appendix
.
@unnumberedsec title
Begin a section that appears without section numbers of any kind. The
title appears in the table of contents of a printed manual. In Info,
the title is underlined with equal signs. See @unnumberedsec @appendixsec @heading
.
@unnumberedsubsec title
Begin an unnumbered subsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with hyphens.
See @unnumberedsubsec @appendixsubsec @subheading
.
@unnumberedsubsubsec title
Begin an unnumbered subsubsection. The title appears in the table of
contents. In Info, the title is underlined with periods.
See @subsubsection
.
@uref{url[, displayed-text][, replacement}
@url{url[, displayed-text][, replacement}
Define a cross-reference to an external uniform resource locator,
e.g., for the World Wide Web. See @url
.
@urefbreakstyle style
Specify how @uref
/@url
should break at special
characters: after
, before
, none
.
See @url
.
@v{c}
Generate check accent over the character c, as in ǒ. See Inserting Accents.
@validatemenus on-off
Control whether menus can be automatically generated. See Writing a Menu.
@value{txivar}
Insert the value, if any, of the Texinfo variable txivar,
previously defined by @set
. See @set @clear @value
.
@var{metasyntactic-variable}
Highlight a metasyntactic variable, which is something that stands for
another piece of text. See @var
.
@verb{delim literal delim}
Output literal, delimited by the single character delim,
exactly as is (in the fixed-width font), including any whitespace or
Texinfo special characters. See @verb
.
@verbatim
Output the text of the environment exactly as is (in the fixed-width
font). Pair with @end verbatim
. See @verbatim
.
@verbatiminclude filename
Output the contents of filename exactly as is (in the
fixed-width font). See @verbatiminclude
.
@vindex entry
Add entry to the index of variables. See Defining the Entries of an Index.
@vskip amount
In a printed manual, insert whitespace so as to push text on the
remainder of the page towards the bottom of the page. Used in
formatting the copyright page with the argument ‘0pt plus
1filll’. (Note spelling of ‘filll’.) @vskip
may be used
only in contexts ignored for Info. See Copyright.
@vtable formatting-command
Begin a two-column table, using @item
for each entry.
Automatically enter each of the items in the first column into the
index of variables. Pair with @end vtable
. The same as
@table
, except for indexing. See @ftable @vtable
.
@w{text}
Disallow line breaks within text. See @w
.
@xml
Enter XML completely. Pair with @end xml
. See Raw Formatter Commands.
@xref{node, [entry], [node-title], [info-file], [manual]}
Make a reference that starts with ‘See’ in a printed manual. Follow
command with a punctuation mark. Only the first argument is
mandatory. See @xref
.
@xrefautomaticsectiontitle on-off
By default, use the section title instead of the node name in cross references. See Three Arguments.
Next: Obsolete @-Commands, Previous: Command List, Up: @-Command Details [Contents][Index]
Here we describe approximately which @-commands can be used in which
contexts. It not exhaustive or meant to be a complete reference.
Discrepancies between the information here and the makeinfo
or
TeX implementations are most likely to be resolved in favor of the
implementation.
By general text below, we mean anything except sectioning and
other such outer-level document commands, such as @section
,
@node
, and @setfilename
.
@c
, @comment
and @if ... @end if
conditional
commands may appear anywhere (except the conditionals must still be on
lines by themselves). @caption
may only appear in
@float
but may contain general text. @footnote
content likewise.
@-commands with braces marking text (such as @strong
,
@sc
, @asis
) may contain raw formatter commands such as
@html
but no other block commands (other commands terminated
by @end
) and may not be split across paragraphs, but may
otherwise contain general text.
In addition to the block command restriction, on @center
,
@exdent
and @item
in @table
lines, @-commands
that makes only sense in a paragraph are not accepted, such as
@indent
.
In addition to the above, sectioning commands cannot contain
@anchor
, @footnote
or @verb
.
In addition to the above, remaining commands (@node
,
@anchor
, @printindex
, @ref
, @math
,
@cindex
, @url
, @image
, and so on) cannot
contain cross-reference commands (@ref
, @xref
,
@pxref
and @inforef
). In one last addition,
@shortcaption
may only appear inside @float
.
For precise and complete information, we suggest looking into the test suite in the sources, which exhaustively tries combinations.
Previous: Command Contexts, Up: @-Command Details [Contents][Index]
Here are Texinfo @-commands which are obsolete or have been removed completely. This section is for historical purposes.
@setcontentsaftertitlepage
In the past, the contents commands were sometimes placed at the end of
the file, after any indices and just before the @bye
, but we
no longer recommend this.
This command could be used by a user printing a manual, to force the
contents to be printed after the title page
(after the ‘@end titlepage’ line)
even if the @contents
command was at the end of the manual. It
now does nothing.
@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage
This placed the short table of contents after the ‘@end titlepage’
command even if the @shortcontents
command was at the end. It
now does nothing.
Next: Sample Texinfo Files, Previous: @-Command Details, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Here are some tips for writing Texinfo documentation:
Write many index entries, in different ways. Readers like indices; they are helpful and convenient.
Although it is easiest to write index entries as you write the body of the text, some people prefer to write entries afterwards. In either case, write an entry before the paragraph to which it applies. This way, an index entry points to the first page of a paragraph that is split across pages.
Here are more index-related hints we have found valuable:
In the example that follows, a blank line comes after the index entry for “Leaping”:
@section The Dog and the Fox @cindex Jumping, in general @cindex Leaping @cindex Dog, lazy, jumped over @cindex Lazy dog jumped over @cindex Fox, jumps over dog @cindex Quick fox jumps over dog The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
(Note that the example shows entries for the same concept that are written in different ways—‘Lazy dog’, and ‘Dog, lazy’—so readers can look up the concept in different ways.)
@table
command and after an
@end table
command; but never insert a blank line after an
@table
command.
For example,
Types of fox: @table @samp @item Quick Jump over lazy dogs.
@item Brown Also jump over lazy dogs. @end table
@noindent On the other hand, …
Insert blank lines before and after @itemize
… @end
itemize
and @enumerate
… @end enumerate
in the
same way.
Complete phrases are easier to read than …
Include edition numbers, version numbers, and dates in the
@copying
text (for people reading the Texinfo file, and for the
legal copyright in the output files). Then use @insertcopying
in the @titlepage
section for people reading the printed
output (see Short Sample).
It is easiest to handle such version information using @set
and @value
. See @value
Example, and GNU Sample Texts.
Definition commands are @deffn
, @defun
,
@defmac
, and the like, and enable you to write descriptions in
a uniform format.
@table
… @end table
in an appendix that
contains a summary of functions, not @deffn
or other definition
commands.
@TeX{}
command. Note the uppercase
‘T’ and ‘X’. This command causes the formatters to
typeset the name according to the wishes of Donald Knuth, who wrote
TeX. (Likewise @LaTeX{}
for LaTeX.)
Do not use spaces to format a Texinfo file, except inside of
@example
… @end example
and other literal
environments and commands.
For example, TeX fills the following:
@kbd{C-x v} @kbd{M-x vc-next-action} Perform the next logical operation on the version-controlled file corresponding to the current buffer.
so it looks like this:
‘C-x v’ ‘M-x vc-next-action’ Perform the next logical operation on the version-controlled file corresponding to the current buffer.
In this case, the text should be formatted with
@table
, @item
, and @itemx
, to create a table.
@code
around Lisp symbols, including command names.
For example,
The main function is @code{vc-next-action}, …
@var
around meta-variables. Do not write angle brackets
around them.
Place periods and other punctuation marks outside of quotations, unless the punctuation is part of the quotation. This practice goes against some publishing conventions in the United States, but enables the reader to distinguish between the contents of the quotation and the whole passage.
For example, you should write the following sentence with the period outside the end quotation marks:
Evidently, ‘au’ is an abbreviation for ``author''.
since ‘au’ does not serve as an abbreviation for ‘author.’ (with a period following the word).
For example, in the following, the terms “check in”, “register” and “delta” are all appearing for the first time; the example sentence should be rewritten so they are understandable.
The major function assists you in checking in a file to your version control system and registering successive sets of changes to it as deltas.
@dfn
command around a word being introduced, to indicate
that the reader should not expect to know the meaning already, and
should expect to learn the meaning from this passage.
You can invoke programs such as Emacs, GCC, and gawk
from a
shell. The documentation for each program should contain a section that
describes this. Unfortunately, if the node names and titles for these
sections are all different, they are difficult for users to find.
So, there is a convention to name such sections with a phrase beginning with the word ‘Invoking’, as in ‘Invoking Emacs’; this way, users can find the section easily.
When you use @example
to describe a C function’s calling
conventions, use the ANSI C syntax, like this:
void dld_init (char *@var{path});
And in the subsequent discussion, refer to the argument values by
writing the same argument names, again highlighted with
@var
.
Avoid the obsolete style that looks like this:
#include <dld.h> dld_init (path) char *path;
Also, it is best to avoid writing #include
above the
declaration just to indicate that the function is declared in a
header file. The practice may give the misimpression that the
#include
belongs near the declaration of the function. Either
state explicitly which header file holds the declaration or, better
yet, name the header file used for a group of functions at the
beginning of the section that describes the functions.
Keep nodes (sections) to a reasonable length, whatever reasonable might be in the given context. Don’t hesitate to break up long nodes into subnodes and have an extensive tree structure; that’s what it’s there for. Many times, readers will probably try to find a single specific point in the manual, using search, indexing, or just plain guessing, rather than reading the whole thing from beginning to end.
You can use the texi-elements-by-size
utility to see a list
of all nodes (or sections) in the document, sorted by size (either
lines or words), to find candidates for splitting. It’s in the
util/ subdirectory of the Texinfo sources.
Here are several examples of bad writing to avoid:
In this example, say, “ … you must @dfn
{check
in} the new version.” That flows better.
When you are done editing the file, you must perform a
@dfn
{check in}.
In the following example, say, “… makes a unified interface such as VC mode possible.”
SCCS, RCS and other version-control systems all perform similar functions in broadly similar ways (it is this resemblance which makes a unified control mode like this possible).
And in this example, you should specify what ‘it’ refers to:
If you are working with other people, it assists in coordinating everyone’s changes so they do not step on each other.
@bye
. None of the formatters process text after the
@bye
; it is as if the text were within @ignore
…
@end ignore
.
Next: Texinfo Mode, Previous: Tips, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The first example from the first chapter (see Short Sample) is given here in its entirety, without commentary. The second example includes the full texts to be used in GNU manuals.
• Short Sample Texinfo File: | ||
• GNU Sample Texts: | ||
• Verbatim Copying License: | ||
• All-permissive Copying License: |
Next: GNU Sample Texts, Up: Sample Texinfo Files [Contents][Index]
Here is a complete, short sample Texinfo file. You can see this file, with comments, in the first chapter. See Short Sample.
In a nutshell: The makeinfo
program transforms a Texinfo
source file such as this into an Info file or HTML; and TeX typesets
it for a printed manual.
\input texinfo @settitle Sample Manual 1.0 @copying This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @end copying @titlepage @title Sample Title @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage @c Output the table of the contents at the beginning. @contents @ifnottex @node Top @top GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}). @end ifnottex @menu * First Chapter:: The first chapter is the only chapter in this sample. * Index:: Complete index. @end menu @node First Chapter @chapter First Chapter @cindex chapter, first This is the first chapter. @cindex index entry, another Here is a numbered list. @enumerate @item This is the first item. @item This is the second item. @end enumerate @node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
Next: Verbatim Copying License, Previous: Short Sample Texinfo File, Up: Sample Texinfo Files [Contents][Index]
Following is a sample Texinfo document with the full texts that should be used (adapted as necessary) in GNU manuals.
As well as the legal texts, it also serves as a practical example of how many elements in a GNU system can affect the manual. If you’re not familiar with all these different elements, don’t worry. They’re not required and a perfectly good manual can be written without them. They’re included here nonetheless because many manuals do (or could) benefit from them.
See Short Sample, for a minimal example of a Texinfo file. See Beginning and Ending a File, for a full explanation of that minimal example.
Here are some notes on the example:
$Id: texinfo.html,v 1.16 2017/09/13 17:02:36 gavin Exp $
(This is potentially useful in all sources that use version control,
not just manuals.) You may wish to include the ‘$Id:’ comment in
the @copying
text, if you want a completely unambiguous
reference to the documentation source version.
If you want to literally write $Id$, use @w
:
@w{$}Id$
. Unfortunately, this technique does not work in
plain text output, where it’s not clear what should be done.
@include
command is maintained
automatically by Automake (see GNU Automake). It
sets the ‘VERSION’ and ‘UPDATED’ values used elsewhere. If
your distribution doesn’t use Automake, but you do use Emacs, you may
find the time-stamp.el package helpful (see Time Stamps in The GNU Emacs Manual).
@syncodeindex
command reflects the recommendation to use
only one index where possible, to make it easier for readers to look up
index entries.
@dircategory
is for constructing the Info directory.
See Installing Dir Entries, which includes a variety of recommended
category names.
The FDL provides for omitting itself under certain conditions, but in that case the sample texts given here have to be modified. See GNU Free Documentation License.
Here is the sample document:
\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @comment $Id@w{$} @comment %**start of header @include version.texi @settitle GNU Sample @value{VERSION} @syncodeindex pg cp @comment %**end of header @copying This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}), which is an example in the Texinfo documentation. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @quotation Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. @end quotation @end copying @dircategory Texinfo documentation system @direntry * sample: (sample)Invoking sample. @end direntry @titlepage @title GNU Sample @subtitle for version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED} @author A.U. Thor (@email{bug-sample@@gnu.org}) @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll @insertcopying @end titlepage @contents @ifnottex @node Top @top GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version @value{VERSION}, @value{UPDATED}). @end ifnottex @menu * Invoking sample:: * GNU Free Documentation License:: * Index:: @end menu @node Invoking sample @chapter Invoking sample @pindex sample @cindex invoking @command{sample} This is a sample manual. There is no sample program to invoke, but if there were, you could see its basic usage and command line options here. @node GNU Free Documentation License @appendix GNU Free Documentation License @include fdl.texi @node Index @unnumbered Index @printindex cp @bye
Next: All-permissive Copying License, Previous: GNU Sample Texts, Up: Sample Texinfo Files [Contents][Index]
For software manuals and other documentation, it is critical to use a license permitting free redistribution and updating, so that when a free program is changed, the documentation can be updated as well.
On the other hand, for documents that express your personal views, feelings or experiences, it is more appropriate to use a license permitting only verbatim copying.
Here is sample text for such a license permitting verbatim copying only. This is just the license text itself. For a complete sample document, see the previous sections.
@copying This document is a sample for allowing verbatim copying only. Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @quotation Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this entire document without royalty provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved. @end quotation @end copying
Previous: Verbatim Copying License, Up: Sample Texinfo Files [Contents][Index]
For software manuals and other documentation, it is important to use a license permitting free redistribution and updating, so that when a free program is changed, the documentation can be updated as well.
On the other hand, for small supporting files, short manuals (under 300 lines long) and rough documentation (README files, INSTALL files, etc.), the full FDL would be overkill. They can use a simple all-permissive license.
Here is sample text for such an all-permissive license. This is just the license text itself. For a complete sample document, see the previous sections.
Copyright @copyright{} 2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification, are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright notice and this notice are preserved.
Next: Headings, Previous: Sample Texinfo Files, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
You may edit a Texinfo file with any text editor you choose. A Texinfo file is no different from any other ASCII file. However, GNU Emacs comes with a special mode, called Texinfo mode, that provides Emacs commands and tools to help ease your work.
• Texinfo Mode Overview: | How Texinfo mode can help you. | |
• Emacs Editing: | Texinfo mode adds to GNU Emacs’ general purpose editing features. | |
• Inserting: | How to insert frequently used @-commands. | |
• Showing the Structure: | How to show the structure of a file. | |
• Updating Nodes and Menus: | How to update or create new nodes and menus. | |
• Info Formatting: | How to format for Info. | |
• Printing: | How to format and print part or all of a file. | |
• Texinfo Mode Summary: | Summary of all the Texinfo mode commands. |
Next: Emacs Editing, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
Texinfo mode provides special features for working with Texinfo files. You can:
@node
lines.
Perhaps the two most helpful features are those for inserting frequently used @-commands and for creating node pointers and menus.
Next: Inserting, Previous: Texinfo Mode Overview, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
In most cases, the usual Text mode commands work the same in Texinfo
mode as they do in Text mode. Texinfo mode adds new editing commands
and tools to GNU Emacs’ general purpose editing features. The major
difference concerns filling. In Texinfo mode, the paragraph
separation variable and syntax table are redefined so that Texinfo
commands that should be on lines of their own are not inadvertently
included in paragraphs. Thus, the M-q (fill-paragraph
)
command will refill a paragraph but not mix an indexing command on a
line adjacent to it into the paragraph.
In addition, Texinfo mode sets the page-delimiter
variable to
the value of texinfo-chapter-level-regexp
; by default, this is
a regular expression matching the commands for chapters and their
equivalents, such as appendices. With this value for the page
delimiter, you can jump from chapter title to chapter title with the
C-x ] (forward-page
) and C-x [
(backward-page
) commands and narrow to a chapter with the
C-x n p (narrow-to-page
) command. (See Pages in The GNU Emacs Manual, for details about the page commands.)
You may name a Texinfo file however you wish, but the convention is to
end a Texinfo file name with one of the extensions
.texinfo, .texi, .txi, or .tex. A longer
extension is preferred, since it is explicit, but a shorter extension
may be necessary for operating systems that limit the length of file
names. GNU Emacs automatically enters Texinfo mode when you visit a
file with a .texinfo, .texi or .txi
extension. Also, Emacs switches to Texinfo mode
when you visit a
file that has ‘-*-texinfo-*-’ in its first line. If ever you are
in another mode and wish to switch to Texinfo mode, type M-x
texinfo-mode
.
Like all other Emacs features, you can customize or enhance Texinfo mode as you wish. In particular, the keybindings are very easy to change. The keybindings described here are the default or standard ones.
Next: Showing the Structure, Previous: Emacs Editing, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
Texinfo mode provides commands to insert various frequently used @-commands into the buffer. You can use these commands to save keystrokes.
The insert commands are invoked by typing C-c twice and then the first letter of the @-command:
Insert @code{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @dfn{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @end
and attempt to insert the correct following word,
such as ‘example’ or ‘table’. (This command does not handle
nested lists correctly, but inserts the word appropriate to the
immediately preceding list.)
Insert @item
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Insert @kbd{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @node
and a comment line
listing the sequence for the ‘Next’,
‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ nodes.
Leave point after the @node
.
Insert @noindent
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Insert @samp{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @table
followed by a SPC
and leave the cursor after the SPC.
Insert @var{}
and put the
cursor between the braces.
Insert @example
and put the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Insert {}
and put the cursor between the braces.
Move from between a pair of braces forward past the closing brace. Typing C-c ] is easier than typing C-c }, which is, however, more mnemonic; hence the two keybindings. (Also, you can move out from between braces by typing C-f.)
To put a command such as @code{…}
around an
existing word, position the cursor in front of the word and type
C-u 1 C-c C-c c. This makes it easy to edit existing plain text.
The value of the prefix argument tells Emacs how many words following
point to include between braces—‘1’ for one word, ‘2’ for
two words, and so on. Use a negative argument to enclose the previous
word or words. If you do not specify a prefix argument, Emacs inserts
the @-command string and positions the cursor between the braces. This
feature works only for those @-commands that operate on a word or words
within one line, such as @kbd
and @var
.
This set of insert commands was created after analyzing the frequency with which different @-commands are used in the GNU Emacs Manual and the GDB Manual. If you wish to add your own insert commands, you can bind a keyboard macro to a key, use abbreviations, or extend the code in texinfo.el.
C-c C-c C-d (texinfo-start-menu-description
) is an insert
command that works differently from the other insert commands. It
inserts a node’s section or chapter title in the space for the
description in a menu entry line. (A menu entry has three parts, the
entry name, the node name, and the description. Only the node name is
required, but a description helps explain what the node is about.
See The Parts of a Menu.)
To use texinfo-start-menu-description
, position point in a menu
entry line and type C-c C-c C-d. The command looks for and copies
the title that goes with the node name, and inserts the title as a
description; it positions point at beginning of the inserted text so you
can edit it. The function does not insert the title if the menu entry
line already contains a description.
This command is only an aid to writing descriptions; it does not do the whole job. You must edit the inserted text since a title tends to use the same words as a node name but a useful description uses different words.
Next: Updating Nodes and Menus, Previous: Inserting, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
You can show the sectioning structure of a Texinfo file by using the
C-c C-s command (texinfo-show-structure
). This command
lists the lines that begin with the @-commands for @chapter
,
@section
, and the like. It constructs what amounts to a table
of contents. These lines are displayed in another buffer called the
‘*Occur*’ buffer. In that buffer, you can position the cursor
over one of the lines and use the C-c C-c command
(occur-mode-goto-occurrence
), to jump to the corresponding spot
in the Texinfo file.
Show the @chapter
, @section
, and such lines of a
Texinfo file.
Go to the line in the Texinfo file corresponding to the line under the cursor in the *Occur* buffer.
If you call texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument by
typing C-u C-c C-s, it will list not only those lines with the
@-commands for @chapter
, @section
, and the like, but
also the @node
lines. You can use texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument to check whether the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’
pointers of an @node
line are correct.
Often, when you are working on a manual, you will be interested only
in the structure of the current chapter. In this case, you can mark
off the region of the buffer that you are interested in by using the
C-x n n (narrow-to-region
) command and
texinfo-show-structure
will work on only that region. To see
the whole buffer again, use C-x n w (widen
).
(See Narrowing in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about the narrowing commands.)
In addition to providing the texinfo-show-structure
command,
Texinfo mode sets the value of the page delimiter variable to match
the chapter-level @-commands. This enables you to use the C-x
] (forward-page
) and C-x [ (backward-page
)
commands to move forward and backward by chapter, and to use the
C-x n p (narrow-to-page
) command to narrow to a chapter.
See Pages in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more information
about the page commands.
Next: Info Formatting, Previous: Showing the Structure, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
Texinfo mode provides commands for automatically creating or updating
menus and node pointers. The commands are called “update” commands
because their most frequent use is for updating a Texinfo file after you
have worked on it; but you can use them to insert the ‘Next’,
‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers into an @node
line that has none
and to create menus in a file that has none.
If you do not use any updating commands, you need to write menus by hand, which is a tedious task.
• Updating Commands: | Five major updating commands. | |
• Updating Requirements: | How to structure a Texinfo file for using the updating command. | |
• Other Updating Commands: | How to indent descriptions, insert missing nodes lines, and update nodes in sequence. |
Next: Updating Requirements, Up: Updating Nodes and Menus [Contents][Index]
You can use the updating commands to:
You can also use the commands to update all the nodes and menus in a region or in a whole Texinfo file.
The updating commands work only with conventional Texinfo files, which
are structured hierarchically like books. In such files, a structuring
command line must follow closely after each @node
line, except
for the ‘Top’ @node
line. (A structuring command line is
a line beginning with @chapter
, @section
, or other
similar command.)
You can write the structuring command line on the line that follows
immediately after an @node
line or else on the line that
follows after a single @comment
line or a single
@ifinfo
line. You cannot interpose more than one line between
the @node
line and the structuring command line; and you may
interpose only a @comment
line or an @ifinfo
line.
Commands which work on a whole buffer require that the ‘Top’ node be
followed by a node with a @chapter
or equivalent-level command.
The menu updating commands will not create a main or master menu for a
Texinfo file that has only @chapter
-level nodes! The menu
updating commands only create menus within nodes for lower level
nodes. To create a menu of chapters, you must provide a ‘Top’
node.
The menu updating commands remove menu entries that refer to other Info files since they do not refer to nodes within the current buffer. This is a deficiency. Rather than use menu entries, you can use cross references to refer to other Info files. None of the updating commands affect cross-references.
Texinfo mode has five updating commands that are used most often: two
are for updating the node pointers or menu of a single node (or a
region); two are for updating every node pointer and menu in a file;
and one, the texinfo-master-menu
command, is for creating a
master menu for a complete file, and optionally, for updating every
node and menu in the whole Texinfo file.
The texinfo-master-menu
command is the primary command:
Create or update a master menu that includes all the other menus (incorporating the descriptions from pre-existing menus, if any).
With an argument (prefix argument, C-u, if interactive), first create or update all the nodes and all the regular menus in the buffer before constructing the master menu. (See The Top Node and Master Menu, for more about a master menu.)
For texinfo-master-menu
to work, the Texinfo file must have a
‘Top’ node and at least one subsequent node.
After extensively editing a Texinfo file, you can type the following:
C-u M-x texinfo-master-menu
or
C-u C-c C-u m
This updates all the nodes and menus completely and all at once.
The other major updating commands do smaller jobs and are designed for the person who updates nodes and menus as he or she writes a Texinfo file.
The commands are:
Insert the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers for the node that point is
within (i.e., for the @node
line preceding point). If the
@node
line has pre-existing ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, or ‘Up’
pointers in it, the old pointers are removed and new ones inserted.
With an argument (prefix argument, C-u, if interactive), this command
updates all @node
lines in the region (which is the text
between point and mark).
Create or update the menu in the node that point is within. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), the command makes or updates menus for the nodes which are either within or a part of the region.
Whenever texinfo-make-menu
updates an existing menu, the
descriptions from that menu are incorporated into the new menu. This
is done by copying descriptions from the existing menu to the entries
in the new menu that have the same node names. If the node names are
different, the descriptions are not copied to the new menu.
Insert or update the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers for every node in the buffer.
Create or update all the menus in the buffer. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), first insert or update all the node pointers before working on the menus.
If a master menu exists, the texinfo-all-menus-update
command
updates it; but the command does not create a new master menu if none
already exists. (Use the texinfo-master-menu
command for
that.)
When working on a document that does not merit a master menu, you can type the following:
C-u C-c C-u C-a
or
C-u M-x texinfo-all-menus-update
This updates all the nodes and menus.
The texinfo-column-for-description
variable specifies the
column to which menu descriptions are indented. By default, the value
is 32 although it can be useful to reduce it to as low as 24. You
can set the variable via customization (see Customization in The GNU Emacs Manual) or with the M-x set-variable
command (see Examining and Setting Variables in The GNU Emacs Manual).
Also, the texinfo-indent-menu-description
command may be used to
indent existing menu descriptions to a specified column. Finally, if
you wish, you can use the texinfo-insert-node-lines
command to
insert missing @node
lines into a file. (See Other Updating Commands, for more information.)
Next: Other Updating Commands, Previous: Updating Commands, Up: Updating Nodes and Menus [Contents][Index]
To use the updating commands, you must organize the Texinfo file hierarchically with chapters, sections, subsections, and the like. When you construct the hierarchy of the manual, do not ‘jump down’ more than one level at a time: you can follow the ‘Top’ node with a chapter, but not with a section; you can follow a chapter with a section, but not with a subsection. However, you may ‘jump up’ any number of levels at one time—for example, from a subsection to a chapter.
Each @node
line, with the exception of the line for the ‘Top’
node, must be followed by a line with a structuring command such as
@chapter
, @section
, or
@unnumberedsubsec
.
Each @node
line/structuring-command line combination
must look either like this:
@node Comments, Minimum, Conventions, Overview @comment node-name, next, previous, up @section Comments
or like this (without the @comment
line):
@node Comments, Minimum, Conventions, Overview @section Comments
or like this (without the explicit node pointers):
@node Comments @section Comments
In this example, ‘Comments’ is the name of both the node and the
section. The next node is called ‘Minimum’ and the previous node is
called ‘Conventions’. The ‘Comments’ section is within the ‘Overview’
node, which is specified by the ‘Up’ pointer. (Instead of an
@comment
line, you may also write an @ifinfo
line.)
If a file has a ‘Top’ node, it must be called ‘top’ or ‘Top’ and be the first node in the file.
The menu updating commands create a menu of sections within a chapter, a menu of subsections within a section, and so on. This means that you must have a ‘Top’ node if you want a menu of chapters.
Incidentally, the makeinfo
command will create an Info file for a
hierarchically organized Texinfo file that lacks ‘Next’, ‘Previous’ and
‘Up’ pointers. Thus, if you can be sure that your Texinfo file will be
formatted with makeinfo
, you have no need for the update node
commands. (See Creating an Info File, for more information about
makeinfo
.)
Previous: Updating Requirements, Up: Updating Nodes and Menus [Contents][Index]
In addition to the five major updating commands, Texinfo mode possesses several less frequently used updating commands:
Insert @node
lines before the @chapter
,
@section
, and other sectioning commands wherever they are
missing throughout a region in a Texinfo file.
With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if interactive), the
command texinfo-insert-node-lines
not only inserts
@node
lines but also inserts the chapter or section titles as
the names of the corresponding nodes. In addition, it inserts the
titles as node names in pre-existing @node
lines that lack
names. Since node names should be more concise than section or
chapter titles, you must manually edit node names so inserted.
For example, the following marks a whole buffer as a region and inserts
@node
lines and titles throughout:
C-x h C-u M-x texinfo-insert-node-lines
This command inserts titles as node names in @node
lines; the
texinfo-start-menu-description
command (see Inserting Frequently Used Commands) inserts titles as descriptions in
menu entries, a different action. However, in both cases, you need to
edit the inserted text.
Update nodes and menus in a document built from several separate files.
With C-u as a prefix argument, create and insert a master menu in
the outer file. With a numeric prefix argument, such as C-u 2, first
update all the menus and all the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, and ‘Up’ pointers
of all the included files before creating and inserting a master menu in
the outer file. The texinfo-multiple-files-update
command is
described in the appendix on @include
files.
See texinfo-multiple-files-update
.
Indent every description in the menu following point to the specified
column. You can use this command to give yourself more space for
descriptions. With an argument (C-u as prefix argument, if
interactive), the texinfo-indent-menu-description
command indents
every description in every menu in the region. However, this command
does not indent the second and subsequent lines of a multi-line
description.
Insert the names of the nodes immediately following and preceding the
current node as the ‘Next’ or ‘Previous’ pointers regardless of those
nodes’ hierarchical level. This means that the ‘Next’ node of a
subsection may well be the next chapter. Sequentially ordered nodes are
useful for novels and other documents that you read through
sequentially. (However, in Info, the g * command lets
you look through the file sequentially, so sequentially ordered nodes
are not strictly necessary.) With an argument (prefix argument, if
interactive), the texinfo-sequential-node-update
command
sequentially updates all the nodes in the region.
Next: Printing, Previous: Updating Nodes and Menus, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
Texinfo mode provides several commands for formatting part or all of a Texinfo file for Info. Often, when you are writing a document, you want to format only part of a file—that is, a region.
You can use either the texinfo-format-region
or the
makeinfo-region
command to format a region:
Format the current region for Info.
You can use either the texinfo-format-buffer
or the
makeinfo-buffer
command to format a whole buffer:
Format the current buffer for Info.
For example, after writing a Texinfo file, you can type the following:
C-u C-c C-u m
or
C-u M-x texinfo-master-menu
This updates all the nodes and menus. Then type the following to create an Info file:
C-c C-m C-b
or
M-x makeinfo-buffer
See Creating an Info File for details about Info formatting.
Next: Texinfo Mode Summary, Previous: Info Formatting, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
Typesetting and printing a Texinfo file is a multi-step process in
which you first create a file for printing (called a DVI file), and
then print the file. Optionally, you may also create indices. To do
this, you must run the texindex
command after first running the
tex
typesetting command; and then you must run the tex
command again. Or else run the texi2dvi
command which
automatically creates indices as needed (see Format with texi2dvi
).
Often, when you are writing a document, you want to typeset and print
only part of a file to see what it will look like. You can use the
texinfo-tex-region
and related commands for this purpose. Use
the texinfo-tex-buffer
command to format all of a
buffer.
Run texi2dvi
on the buffer. In addition to running TeX on the
buffer, this command automatically creates or updates indices as
needed.
Run TeX on the region.
Run texindex
to sort the indices of a Texinfo file formatted with
texinfo-tex-region
. The texinfo-tex-region
command does
not run texindex
automatically; it only runs the tex
typesetting command. You must run the texinfo-tex-region
command
a second time after sorting the raw index files with the texindex
command. (Usually, you do not format an index when you format a region,
only when you format a buffer. Now that the texi2dvi
command
exists, there is little or no need for this command.)
Print the file (or the part of the file) previously formatted with
texinfo-tex-buffer
or texinfo-tex-region
.
For texinfo-tex-region
or texinfo-tex-buffer
to work, the
file must start with a ‘\input texinfo’ line and must
include a @settitle
line. The file must end with @bye
on a line by itself. (When you use texinfo-tex-region
, you must
surround the @settitle
line with start-of-header and
end-of-header lines.)
See Hardcopy, for a description of the other TeX related
commands, such as tex-show-print-queue
.
Previous: Printing, Up: Texinfo Mode [Contents][Index]
In Texinfo mode, each set of commands has default keybindings that begin with the same keys. All the commands that are custom-created for Texinfo mode begin with C-c. The keys are somewhat mnemonic.
The insert commands are invoked by typing C-c twice and then the first letter of the @-command to be inserted. (It might make more sense mnemonically to use C-c C-i, for ‘custom insert’, but C-c C-c is quick to type.)
C-c C-c c Insert ‘@code’. C-c C-c d Insert ‘@dfn’. C-c C-c e Insert ‘@end’. C-c C-c i Insert ‘@item’. C-c C-c n Insert ‘@node’. C-c C-c s Insert ‘@samp’. C-c C-c v Insert ‘@var’. C-c { Insert braces. C-c ] C-c } Move out of enclosing braces.
C-c C-c C-d Insert a node’s section title in the space for the description in a menu entry line.
The texinfo-show-structure
command is often used within a
narrowed region.
C-c C-s List all the headings.
The texinfo-master-menu
command creates a master menu; and can
be used to update every node and menu in a file as well.
C-c C-u m
M-x texinfo-master-menu
Create or update a master menu.
C-u C-c C-u m With C-u as a prefix argument, first create or update all nodes and regular menus, and then create a master menu.
The update pointer commands are invoked by typing C-c C-u and
then either C-n for texinfo-update-node
or C-e for
texinfo-every-node-update
.
C-c C-u C-n Update a node. C-c C-u C-e Update every node in the buffer.
Invoke the update menu commands by typing C-c C-u
and then either C-m for texinfo-make-menu
or
C-a for texinfo-all-menus-update
. To update
both nodes and menus at the same time, precede C-c C-u
C-a with C-u.
C-c C-u C-m Make or update a menu.
C-c C-u C-a Make or update all menus in a buffer.
C-u C-c C-u C-a With C-u as a prefix argument, first create or update all nodes and then create or update all menus.
The Info formatting commands that are written in Emacs Lisp are invoked by typing C-c C-e and then either C-r for a region or C-b for the whole buffer.
The Info formatting commands that are written in C and based on the
makeinfo
program are invoked by typing C-c C-m and then
either C-r for a region or C-b for the whole buffer.
Use the texinfo-format…
commands:
C-c C-e C-r Format the region. C-c C-e C-b Format the buffer.
Use makeinfo
:
C-c C-m C-r Format the region. C-c C-m C-b Format the buffer. C-c C-m C-l Recenter themakeinfo
output buffer. C-c C-m C-k Kill themakeinfo
formatting job.
The TeX typesetting and printing commands are invoked by typing
C-c C-t and then another control command: C-r for
texinfo-tex-region
, C-b for texinfo-tex-buffer
,
and so on.
C-c C-t C-r Run TeX on the region. C-c C-t C-b Runtexi2dvi
on the buffer. C-c C-t C-i Runtexindex
. C-c C-t C-p Print the DVI file. C-c C-t C-q Show the print queue. C-c C-t C-d Delete a job from the print queue. C-c C-t C-k Kill the current TeX formatting job. C-c C-t C-x Quit a currently stopped TeX formatting job. C-c C-t C-l Recenter the output buffer.
The remaining updating commands do not have standard keybindings because they are rarely used.
M-x texinfo-insert-node-lines
Insert missing @node
lines in region.
With C-u as a prefix argument,
use section titles as node names.
M-x texinfo-multiple-files-update Update a multi-file document. With C-u 2 as a prefix argument, create or update all nodes and menus in all included files first.
M-x texinfo-indent-menu-description
Indent descriptions.
M-x texinfo-sequential-node-update
Insert node pointers in strict sequence.
Next: Catching Mistakes, Previous: Texinfo Mode, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Most printed manuals contain headings along the top of every page except the title and copyright pages. Some manuals also contain footings. Headings and footings have no meaning in Info or the other output formats.
• Headings Introduced: | Conventions for using page headings. | |
• Heading Format: | Standard page heading formats. | |
• Heading Choice: | How to specify the type of page heading. | |
• Custom Headings: | How to create your own headings and footings. |
Next: Heading Format, Up: Headings [Contents][Index]
Texinfo provides standard page heading formats for manuals that are printed on one side of each sheet of paper and for manuals that are printed on both sides of the paper. Typically, you will use these formats, but you can specify your own format if you wish.
In addition, you can specify whether chapters should begin on a new page, or merely continue the same page as the previous chapter; and if chapters begin on new pages, you can specify whether they must be odd-numbered pages.
By convention, a book is printed on both sides of each sheet of paper. When you open a book, the right-hand page is odd-numbered, and chapters begin on right-hand pages—a preceding left-hand page is left blank if necessary. Reports, however, are often printed on just one side of paper, and chapters begin on a fresh page immediately following the end of the preceding chapter. In short or informal reports, chapters often do not begin on a new page at all, but are separated from the preceding text by a small amount of whitespace.
The @setchapternewpage
command controls whether chapters begin
on new pages, and whether one of the standard heading formats is used.
In addition, Texinfo has several heading and footing commands that you
can use to generate your own heading and footing formats.
In Texinfo, headings and footings are single lines at the tops and bottoms of pages; you cannot create multiline headings or footings. Each header or footer line is divided into three parts: a left part, a middle part, and a right part. Any part, or a whole line, may be left blank. Text for the left part of a header or footer line is set flushleft; text for the middle part is centered; and, text for the right part is set flushright.
Next: Heading Choice, Previous: Headings Introduced, Up: Headings [Contents][Index]
Texinfo provides two standard heading formats, one for manuals printed on one side of each sheet of paper, and the other for manuals printed on both sides of the paper.
By default, nothing is specified for the footing of a Texinfo file, so the footing remains blank.
The standard format for single-sided printing consists of a header line in which the left-hand part contains the name of the chapter, the central part is blank, and the right-hand part contains the page number.
A single-sided page looks like this:
_______________________ | | | chapter page number | | | | Start of text ... | | ... | | |
The standard format for two-sided printing depends on whether the page number is even or odd. By convention, even-numbered pages are on the left- and odd-numbered pages are on the right. (TeX will adjust the widths of the left- and right-hand margins. Usually, widths are correct, but during double-sided printing, it is wise to check that pages will bind properly—sometimes a printer will produce output in which the even-numbered pages have a larger right-hand margin than the odd-numbered pages.)
In the standard double-sided format, the left part of the left-hand
(even-numbered) page contains the page number, the central part is
blank, and the right part contains the title (specified by the
@settitle
command). The left part of the right-hand
(odd-numbered) page contains the name of the chapter, the central part
is blank, and the right part contains the page number.
Two pages, side by side as in an open book, look like this:
_______________________ _______________________ | | | | | page number title | | chapter page number | | | | | | Start of text ... | | More text ... | | ... | | ... | | | | |
The chapter name is preceded by the word “Chapter”, the chapter number and a colon. This makes it easier to keep track of where you are in the manual.
Next: Custom Headings, Previous: Heading Format, Up: Headings [Contents][Index]
TeX does not begin to generate page headings for a standard Texinfo
file until it reaches the @end titlepage
command. Thus, the
title and copyright pages are not numbered. The @end
titlepage
command causes TeX to begin to generate page headings
according to a standard format specified by the
@setchapternewpage
command that precedes the
@titlepage
section.
There are four possibilities:
@setchapternewpage
commandCause TeX to specify the single-sided heading format, with chapters
on new pages. This is the same as @setchapternewpage on
.
@setchapternewpage on
Specify the single-sided heading format, with chapters on new pages.
@setchapternewpage off
Cause TeX to start a new chapter on the same page as the last page
of the preceding chapter, after skipping some vertical whitespace.
Also cause TeX to typeset for single-sided printing. (You can
override the headers format with the @headings double
command;
see @headings
.)
@setchapternewpage odd
Specify the double-sided heading format, with chapters on new pages.
Texinfo lacks a @setchapternewpage even
command.
Previous: Heading Choice, Up: Headings [Contents][Index]
You can use the standard headings provided with Texinfo or specify your own. By default, Texinfo has no footers, so if you specify them, the available page size for the main text will be slightly reduced.
Texinfo provides six commands for specifying headings and footings:
@everyheading
and @everyfooting
generate page headers and
footers that are the same for both even- and odd-numbered pages.
@evenheading
and @evenfooting
command generate headers
and footers for even-numbered (left-hand) pages.
@oddheading
and @oddfooting
generate headers and footers
for odd-numbered (right-hand) pages.
Write custom heading specifications in the Texinfo file immediately
after the @end titlepage
command. You must cancel the
predefined heading commands with the @headings off
command
before defining your own specifications.
Here is how to tell TeX to place the chapter name at the left, the page number in the center, and the date at the right of every header for both even- and odd-numbered pages:
@headings off @everyheading @thischapter @| @thispage @| @today{}
You need to divide the left part from the central part and the central part from the right part by inserting ‘@|’ between parts. Otherwise, the specification command will not be able to tell where the text for one part ends and the next part begins.
Each part can contain text or @-commands. The text is printed as if the part were within an ordinary paragraph in the body of the page. The @-commands replace themselves with the page number, date, chapter name, or whatever.
Here are the six heading and footing commands:
@everyheading left @| center @| right
@everyfooting left @| center @| right
The ‘every’ commands specify the format for both even- and odd-numbered pages. These commands are for documents that are printed on one side of each sheet of paper, or for documents in which you want symmetrical headers or footers.
@evenheading left @| center @| right
@oddheading left @| center @| right
@evenfooting left @| center @| right
@oddfooting left @| center @| right
The ‘even’ and ‘odd’ commands specify the format for even-numbered pages and odd-numbered pages. These commands are for books and manuals that are printed on both sides of each sheet of paper.
Use the ‘@this…’ series of @-commands to
provide the names of chapters
and sections and the page number. You can use the
‘@this…’ commands in the left, center, or right portions
of headers and footers, or anywhere else in a Texinfo file so long as
they are between @iftex
and @end iftex
commands.
Here are the ‘@this…’ commands:
@thispage
Expands to the current page number.
@thissectionname
Expands to the name of the current section.
@thissectionnum
Expands to the number of the current section.
@thissection
Expands to the number and name of the current section, in the format ‘Section 1: Title’.
@thischaptername
Expands to the name of the current chapter.
@thischapternum
Expands to the number of the current chapter, or letter of the current appendix.
@thischapter
Expands to the number and name of the current chapter, in the format ‘Chapter 1: Title’.
@thistitle
Expands to the name of the document, as specified by the
@settitle
command.
@thisfile
For @include
files only: expands to the name of the current
@include
file. If the current Texinfo source file is not an
@include
file, this command has no effect. This command does
not provide the name of the current Texinfo source file unless
it is an @include
file. (See Include Files, for more
information about @include
files.)
You can also use the @today{}
command, which expands to the
current date, in ‘1 Jan 1900’ format.
Other @-commands and text are printed in a header or footer just as if they were in the body of a page. It is useful to incorporate text, particularly when you are writing drafts:
@headings off @everyheading @emph{Draft!} @| @thispage @| @thischapter @everyfooting @| @| Version: 0.27: @today{}
Beware of overlong titles: they may overlap another part of the header or footer and blot it out.
If you have very short chapters and/or sections, several of them can
appear on a single page. You can specify which chapters and sections
you want @thischapter
, @thissection
and other such
macros to refer to on such pages as follows:
@everyheadingmarks ref
@everyfootingmarks ref
The ref argument can be either top
(the @this...
commands will refer to the chapter/section at the top of a page) or
bottom
(the commands will reflect the situation at the bottom
of a page). These ‘@every...’ commands specify what to do on
both even- and odd-numbered pages.
@evenheadingmarks ref
@oddheadingmarks ref
@evenfootingmarks ref
@oddfootingmarks ref
These ‘@even...’ and ‘@odd...’ commands specify what to do on only even- or odd-numbered pages, respectively. The ref argument is the same as with the ‘@every...’ commands.
Write these commands immediately after the @...contents
commands, or after the @end titlepage
command if you don’t
have a table of contents or if it is printed at the end of your
manual.
By default the @this...
commands reflect the situation at the
bottom of a page both in headings and in footings.
Next: Info Format Specification, Previous: Headings, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Besides mistakes in the content of your documentation, there are two kinds of mistake you can make with Texinfo: you can make mistakes with @-commands, and you can make mistakes with the structure of the nodes and chapters.
Emacs has two tools for catching the @-command mistakes and two for catching structuring mistakes.
For finding problems with @-commands, you can run TeX or a region formatting command on the region that has a problem; indeed, you can run these commands on each region as you write it.
For finding problems with the structure of nodes and chapters, you can use
C-c C-s (texinfo-show-structure
) and the related occur
command and you can use the M-x Info-validate command.
• makeinfo Preferred: | makeinfo finds errors.
| |
• Debugging with Info: | How to catch errors with Info formatting. | |
• Debugging with TeX: | How to catch errors with TeX formatting. | |
• Using texinfo-show-structure : | How to use texinfo-show-structure .
| |
• Using occur : | How to list all lines containing a pattern. | |
• Running Info-validate : | How to find badly referenced nodes. |
Next: Debugging with Info, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
makeinfo
PreferredThe makeinfo
program does an excellent job of catching errors
and reporting them—far better than texinfo-format-region
or
texinfo-format-buffer
. In addition, the various functions for
automatically creating and updating node pointers and menus remove
many opportunities for human error.
If you can, use the updating commands to create and insert pointers
and menus. These prevent many errors. Then use makeinfo
(or
its Texinfo mode manifestations, makeinfo-region
and
makeinfo-buffer
) to format your file and check for other
errors. This is the best way to work with Texinfo. But if you
cannot use makeinfo
, or your problem is very puzzling, then you
may want to use the tools described in this appendix.
Next: Debugging with TeX, Previous: makeinfo
Preferred, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
After you have written part of a Texinfo file, you can use the
texinfo-format-region
or the makeinfo-region
command to
see whether the region formats properly.
Most likely, however, you are reading this section because for some
reason you cannot use the makeinfo-region
command; therefore, the
rest of this section presumes that you are using
texinfo-format-region
.
If you have made a mistake with an @-command,
texinfo-format-region
will stop processing at or after the
error and display an error message. To see where in the buffer the
error occurred, switch to the ‘*Info Region*’ buffer; the cursor
will be in a position that is after the location of the error. Also,
the text will not be formatted after the place where the error
occurred (or more precisely, where it was detected).
For example, if you accidentally end a menu with the command @end
menus
with an ‘s’ on the end, instead of with @end menu
, you
will see an error message that says:
@end menus is not handled by texinfo
The cursor will stop at the point in the buffer where the error occurs, or not long after it. The buffer will look like this:
---------- Buffer: *Info Region* ---------- * Menu: * Using texinfo-show-structure:: How to use `texinfo-show-structure' to catch mistakes. * Running Info-validate:: How to check for unreferenced nodes. @end menus ∗ ---------- Buffer: *Info Region* ----------
The texinfo-format-region
command sometimes provides slightly
odd error messages. For example, the following cross-reference fails
to format:
(@xref{Catching Mistakes, for more info.)
In this case, texinfo-format-region
detects the missing closing
brace but displays a message that says ‘Unbalanced parentheses’
rather than ‘Unbalanced braces’. This is because the formatting
command looks for mismatches between braces as if they were
parentheses.
Sometimes texinfo-format-region
fails to detect mistakes. For
example, in the following, the closing brace is swapped with the
closing parenthesis:
(@xref{Catching Mistakes), for more info.}
Formatting produces:
(*Note for more info.: Catching Mistakes)
The only way for you to detect this error is to realize that the reference should have looked like this:
(*Note Catching Mistakes::, for more info.)
Incidentally, if you are reading this node in Info and type f
RET (Info-follow-reference
), you will generate an error
message that says:
No such node: "Catching Mistakes) The only way …
This is because Info perceives the example of the error as the first
cross-reference in this node and if you type a RET immediately
after typing the Info f command, Info will attempt to go to the
referenced node. If you type f catch TAB RET, Info
will complete the node name of the correctly written example and take
you to the ‘Catching Mistakes’ node. (If you try this, you can return
from the ‘Catching Mistakes’ node by typing l
(Info-last
).)
Next: Using texinfo-show-structure
, Previous: Debugging with Info, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
You can also catch mistakes when you format a file with TeX.
Usually, you will want to do this after you have run
texinfo-format-buffer
(or, better, makeinfo-buffer
) on
the same file, because texinfo-format-buffer
sometimes displays
error messages that make more sense than TeX. (See Debugging with Info, for more information.)
For example, TeX was run on a Texinfo file, part of which is shown here:
---------- Buffer: texinfo.texi ---------- name of the Texinfo file as an extension. The @samp{??} are `wildcards' that cause the shell to substitute all the raw index files. (@xref{sorting indices, for more information about sorting indices.)@refill ---------- Buffer: texinfo.texi ----------
(The cross-reference lacks a closing brace.) TeX produced the following output, after which it stopped:
---------- Buffer: *tex-shell* ---------- Runaway argument? {sorting indices, for more information about sorting indices.) @refill @ETC. ! Paragraph ended before @xref was complete. <to be read again> @par l.27 ? ---------- Buffer: *tex-shell* ----------
In this case, TeX produced an accurate and understandable error message:
Paragraph ended before @xref was complete.
‘@par’ is an internal TeX command of no relevance to Texinfo. ‘l.27’ means that TeX detected the problem on line 27 of the Texinfo file. The ‘?’ is the prompt TeX uses in this circumstance.
Unfortunately, TeX is not always so helpful, and sometimes you must truly be a Sherlock Holmes to discover what went wrong.
In any case, if you run into a problem like this, you can do one of three things.
This is often the best thing to do. However, beware: the one error may produce a cascade of additional error messages as its consequences are felt through the rest of the file. To stop TeX when it is producing such an avalanche of error messages, type C-c (or C-c C-c, if you are running a shell inside Emacs).
If you are running TeX inside Emacs, you need to switch to the shell buffer and line at which TeX offers the ‘?’ prompt.
Sometimes TeX will format a file without producing error messages even
though there is a problem. This usually occurs if a command is not ended
but TeX is able to continue processing anyhow. For example, if you fail
to end an itemized list with the @end itemize
command, TeX will
write a DVI file that you can print out. The only error message that
TeX will give you is the somewhat mysterious comment:
(@end occurred inside a group at level 1)
However, if you print the DVI file, you will find that the text
of the file that follows the itemized list is entirely indented as if
it were part of the last item in the itemized list. The error message
is the way TeX says that it expected to find an @end
command somewhere in the file; but that it could not determine where
it was needed.
Another source of notoriously hard-to-find errors is a missing
@end group
command. If you ever are stumped by
incomprehensible errors, look for a missing @end group
command
first.
If the Texinfo file lacks header lines, TeX may stop in the beginning of its run and display output that looks like the following. The ‘*’ indicates that TeX is waiting for input.
This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2c 7.0) (test.texinfo [1]) *
In this case, simply type \end RET after the asterisk. Then write the header lines in the Texinfo file and run the TeX command again. (Note the use of the backslash, ‘\’. TeX uses ‘\’ instead of ‘@’; and in this circumstance, you are working directly with TeX, not with Texinfo.)
Next: Using occur
, Previous: Debugging with TeX, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
texinfo-show-structure
It is not always easy to keep track of the nodes, chapters, sections, and subsections of a Texinfo file. This is especially true if you are revising or adding to a Texinfo file that someone else has written.
In GNU Emacs, in Texinfo mode, the texinfo-show-structure
command lists all the lines that begin with the @-commands that
specify the structure: @chapter
, @section
,
@appendix
, and so on. With an argument (C-u
as prefix argument, if interactive),
the command also shows the @node
lines. The
texinfo-show-structure
command is bound to C-c C-s in
Texinfo mode, by default.
The lines are displayed in a buffer called the ‘*Occur*’ buffer,
indented by hierarchical level. For example, here is a part of what was
produced by running texinfo-show-structure
on this manual:
Lines matching "^@\\(chapter \\|sect\\|subs\\|subh\\| unnum\\|major\\|chapheading \\|heading \\|appendix\\)" in buffer texinfo.texi. … 4177:@chapter Nodes 4198: @heading Two Paths 4231: @section Node and Menu Illustration 4337: @section The @code{@@node} Command 4393: @subheading Choosing Node and Pointer Names 4417: @subsection How to Write a @code{@@node} Line 4469: @subsection @code{@@node} Line Tips …
This says that lines 4337, 4393, and 4417 of texinfo.texi begin
with the @section
, @subheading
, and @subsection
commands respectively. If you move your cursor into the ‘*Occur*’
window, you can position the cursor over one of the lines and use the
C-c C-c command (occur-mode-goto-occurrence
), to jump to
the corresponding spot in the Texinfo file. See Using Occur in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more
information about occur-mode-goto-occurrence
.
The first line in the ‘*Occur*’ window describes the regular
expression specified by texinfo-heading-pattern. This regular
expression is the pattern that texinfo-show-structure
looks for.
See Using Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual,
for more information.
When you invoke the texinfo-show-structure
command, Emacs will
display the structure of the whole buffer. If you want to see the
structure of just a part of the buffer, of one chapter, for example,
use the C-x n n (narrow-to-region
) command to mark the
region. (See Narrowing in The GNU Emacs Manual.) This is
how the example used above was generated. (To see the whole buffer
again, use C-x n w (widen
).)
If you call texinfo-show-structure
with a prefix argument by
typing C-u C-c C-s, it will list lines beginning with
@node
as well as the lines beginning with the @-sign commands
for @chapter
, @section
, and the like.
You can remind yourself of the structure of a Texinfo file by looking at the list in the ‘*Occur*’ window; and if you have mis-named a node or left out a section, you can correct the mistake.
Next: Running Info-validate
, Previous: Using texinfo-show-structure
, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
occur
Sometimes the texinfo-show-structure
command produces too much
information. Perhaps you want to remind yourself of the overall structure
of a Texinfo file, and are overwhelmed by the detailed list produced by
texinfo-show-structure
. In this case, you can use the occur
command directly. To do this, type:
M-x occur
and then, when prompted, type a regexp, a regular expression for
the pattern you want to match. (See Regular Expressions in The GNU Emacs Manual.) The occur
command works from
the current location of the cursor in the buffer to the end of the
buffer. If you want to run occur
on the whole buffer, place
the cursor at the beginning of the buffer.
For example, to see all the lines that contain the word ‘@chapter’ in them, just type ‘@chapter’. This will produce a list of the chapters. It will also list all the sentences with ‘@chapter’ in the middle of the line.
If you want to see only those lines that start with the word
‘@chapter’, type ‘^@chapter’ when prompted by
occur
. If you want to see all the lines that end with a word
or phrase, end the last word with a ‘$’; for example,
‘catching mistakes$’. This can be helpful when you want to see
all the nodes that are part of the same chapter or section and
therefore have the same ‘Up’ pointer.
See Using Occur in The GNU Emacs Manual, for more information.
Previous: Using occur
, Up: Catching Mistakes [Contents][Index]
You can use the Info-validate
command to check whether any of
the ‘Next’, ‘Previous’, ‘Up’ or other node pointers fail to point to a
node. This command checks that every node pointer points to an
existing node. The Info-validate
command works only on Info
files, not on Texinfo files.
The makeinfo
program validates pointers automatically, so you
do not need to use the Info-validate
command if you are using
makeinfo
. You only may need to use Info-validate
if you
are unable to run makeinfo
and instead must create an Info file
using texinfo-format-region
or texinfo-format-buffer
, or
if you write an Info file from scratch.
• Using Info-validate : | How to run Info-validate .
| |
• Unsplit: | How to create an unsplit file. | |
• Tagifying: | How to tagify a file. | |
• Splitting: | How to split a file manually. |
Next: Unsplit, Up: Running Info-validate
[Contents][Index]
Info-validate
To use Info-validate
, visit the Info file you wish to check and
type:
M-x Info-validate
Note that the Info-validate
command requires an uppercase
‘I’. You may also need to create a tag table before running
Info-validate
. See Tagifying.
If your file is valid, you will receive a message that says “File appears valid”. However, if you have a pointer that does not point to a node, error messages will be displayed in a buffer called ‘*problems in info file*’.
For example, Info-validate
was run on a test file that contained
only the first node of this manual. One of the messages said:
In node "Overview", invalid Next: Texinfo Mode
This meant that the node called ‘Overview’ had a ‘Next’ pointer that did not point to anything (which was true in this case, since the test file had only one node in it).
Now suppose we add a node named ‘Texinfo Mode’ to our test case but we do not specify a ‘Previous’ for this node. Then we will get the following error message:
In node "Texinfo Mode", should have Previous: Overview
This is because every ‘Next’ pointer should be matched by a ‘Previous’ (in the node where the ‘Next’ points) which points back.
Info-validate
also checks that all menu entries and cross-references
point to actual nodes.
Info-validate
requires a tag table and does not work with files
that have been split. (The texinfo-format-buffer
command
automatically splits large files.) In order to use Info-validate
on a large file, you must run texinfo-format-buffer
with an
argument so that it does not split the Info file; and you must create a
tag table for the unsplit file.
Next: Tagifying, Previous: Using Info-validate
, Up: Running Info-validate
[Contents][Index]
You can run Info-validate
only on a single Info file that has a
tag table. The command will not work on the indirect subfiles that
are generated when a master file is split. If you have a large file
(longer than 300,000 bytes or so), you need to run the
texinfo-format-buffer
or makeinfo-buffer
command in such
a way that it does not create indirect subfiles. You will also need
to create a tag table for the Info file. After you have done this,
you can run Info-validate
and look for badly referenced
nodes.
The first step is to create an unsplit Info file. To prevent
texinfo-format-buffer
from splitting a Texinfo file into
smaller Info files, give a prefix to the M-x
texinfo-format-buffer command:
C-u M-x texinfo-format-buffer
or else
C-u C-c C-e C-b
When you do this, Texinfo will not split the file and will not create a tag table for it.
Next: Splitting, Previous: Unsplit, Up: Running Info-validate
[Contents][Index]
After creating an unsplit Info file, you must create a tag table for it. Visit the Info file you wish to tagify and type:
M-x Info-tagify
(Note the uppercase ‘I’ in Info-tagify
.) This creates an
Info file with a tag table that you can validate.
The third step is to validate the Info file:
M-x Info-validate
(Note the uppercase ‘I’ in Info-validate
.)
In brief, the steps are:
C-u M-x texinfo-format-buffer M-x Info-tagify M-x Info-validate
After you have validated the node structure, you can rerun
texinfo-format-buffer
in the normal way so it will construct a
tag table and split the file automatically, or you can make the tag
table and split the file manually.
Previous: Tagifying, Up: Running Info-validate
[Contents][Index]
You should split a large file or else let the
texinfo-format-buffer
or makeinfo-buffer
command do it
for you automatically. (Generally you will let one of the formatting
commands do this job for you. See Creating an Info File.)
The split-off files are called the indirect subfiles.
Info files are split to save memory. With smaller files, Emacs does not have make such a large buffer to hold the information.
If an Info file has more than 30 nodes, you should also make a tag
table for it. See Using Info-validate
, for information
about creating a tag table. (Again, tag tables are usually created
automatically by the formatting command; you only need to create a tag
table yourself if you are doing the job manually. Most likely, you
will do this for a large, unsplit file on which you have run
Info-validate
.)
Visit the Info file you wish to tagify and split and type the two commands:
M-x Info-tagify M-x Info-split
(Note that the ‘I’ in ‘Info’ is uppercase.)
When you use the Info-split
command, the buffer is modified into a
(small) Info file which lists the indirect subfiles. This file should be
saved in place of the original visited file. The indirect subfiles are
written in the same directory the original file is in, with names generated
by appending ‘-’ and a number to the original file name.
The primary file still functions as an Info file, but it contains just the tag table and a directory of subfiles.
Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Previous: Catching Mistakes, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Here we describe the technical details of the Info format.
In this formal description, the characters <>*()|=#
are used
for the language of the description itself. Other characters are
literal. The formal constructs used are typical: <...>
indicates a metavariable name, ‘=’ means definition, ‘*’
repetition, ‘?’ optional, ‘()’ grouping, ‘|’
alternation, ‘#’ comment. Exception: ‘*’ at the beginning
of a line is literal.
In general, programs that read Info files should try to be case-insensitive to keywords that occur in the file (for example, ‘Tag Table’ and ‘Tag table’ should be equivalent) in order to support Info-generating programs that use different capitalization.
The sections in an Info file (such as nodes or tag tables) are separated with a sequence:
(^L)?^_(^L)?^J
That is, a ‘CTRL-_’ character followed by a newline, with optional formfeed characters. We refer to such sequences as <separator>.
We specify literal parentheses (those that are part of the Info format) with <lparen> and <rparen>, meaning the single characters ‘(’ and ‘)’ respectively. We specify the ‘CTRL-?’ character (character number 127) <del>. Finally, the two-character sequence ‘^x’ means the single character ‘CTRL-x’, for any x.
This format definition was written some 25 years after the Info format was first devised. So in the event of conflicts between this definition and actual practice, practice wins. It also assumes some general knowledge of Texinfo; it is meant to be a guide for implementors rather than a rigid technical standard. We often refer back to other parts of this manual for examples and definitions, rather than redundantly spelling out every detail.
• General: | ||
• Text: |
Next: Info Format Text Constructs, Up: Info Format Specification [Contents][Index]
This section describes the overall layout of Info manuals.
• Whole: | Split vs. nonsplit manuals. | |
• Preamble: | ||
• Indirect: | ||
• Tag table: | ||
• Local variables: | ||
• Regular nodes: |
Next: Info Format Preamble, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
To begin, an Info manual is either nonsplit (contained wholly within a single file) or split (across several files).
The syntax for a nonsplit manual is:
<nonsplit info file> = <preamble> <node>* <tag table>? <local variables>?
When split, there is a main file, which contains only pointers to the nodes given in other subfiles. The main file looks like this:
<split info main file> = <preamble> <indirect table> <tag table> <local variables>?
The subfiles in a split manual have the following syntax:
<split info subfile> = <preamble> <node>*
Note that the tag table is not optional for split files, as it is used with the indirect table to deduce which subfile a particular node is in.
Next: Info Format Indirect Table, Previous: Info Format Whole Manual, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
The <preamble> is text at the beginning of all output files. It is not intended to be visible by default in an Info viewer, but may be displayed upon user request.
<preamble> = <identification> # "This is FILENAME, produced by ..." <copying text> # Expansion of @copying text. <dir entries> # Derived from @dircategory and @direntry.
These pieces are:
An arbitrary string beginning the output file, followed by a blank line.
The expansion of a @copying
environment, if the manual has
one (see @copying
).
The result of any @dircategory
and @direntry
commands present in the manual (see Installing Dir Entries).
Next: Info Format Tag Table, Previous: Info Format Preamble, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
<indirect table> = <separator> Indirect: (<filename>: <bytepos>)*
The indirect table is written to the main file in the case of split output only. It specifies, as a decimal integer, the starting byte position (zero-based) that the first node of each subfile would have if the subfiles were concatenated together in order, not including the top-level file. The first node of actual content is pointed to by the first entry.
As an example, suppose split output is generated for the GDB manual. The top-level file gdb.info will contain something like this:
<separator> Indirect: gdb.info-1: 1878 gdb.info-2: 295733 ...
This tells Info viewers that the first node of the manual occurs at byte 1878 of the file gdb.info-1 (which would be after that file’s preamble.) The first node in the gdb.info-2 subfile would start at byte 295733 if gdb.info-2 were appended to gdb.info-1, including any preamble sections in both files.
Unfortunately, Info-creating programs such as makeinfo
have not
always implemented these rules perfectly, due to various bugs and
oversights. Therefore, robust Info viewers should fall back to
searching “nearby” the given position for a node, instead of
giving up immediately if the position is not exactly at a node beginning.
Next: Info Format Local Variables, Previous: Info Format Indirect Table, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
<tag table> = <separator> Tag Table: (<lparen>Indirect<rparen>)? (Node|Ref): <nodeid>^?<bytepos> <separator> End Tag Table
The ‘(Indirect)’ line appears in the case of split output only.
The tag table specifies the starting byte position of each node and anchor in the file. In the case of split output, it is only written in the main output file.
Each line defines an identifier as either an anchor or a node, as specified. For example, ‘Node: Top^?1647’ says that the node named ‘Top’ starts at byte 1647 while ‘Ref: Overview-Footnote-1^?30045’ says that the anchor named ‘Overview-Footnote-1’ starts at byte 30045. It is an error to define the same identifier both ways.
In the case of nonsplit output, the byte positions simply refer to the location in the output file. In the case of split output, the byte positions refer to an imaginary file created by concatenating all the split files (but not the top-level file). See the previous section.
Here is an example:
^_ Tag Table: Node: Top^?89 Node: Ch1^?292 ^_ End Tag Table
This specifies a manual with two nodes, ‘Top’ and ‘Ch1’, at byte positions 89 and 292 respectively. Because the ‘(Indirect)’ line is not present, the manual is not split.
Preamble sections or other non-node sections of files do not have a tag table entry.
Next: Info Format Regular Nodes, Previous: Info Format Tag Table, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
The local variables section is optional and is currently used to give the encoding information. It may be augmented in the future.
<local variables> = <separator> Local Variables: coding: <encoding> End:
See @documentencoding
.
Previous: Info Format Local Variables, Up: Info Format General Layout [Contents][Index]
Regular nodes look like this:
<node> = <separator> File: <fn>, Node: <id1>, (Next: <id2>, )? (Prev: <id3>, )? Up: <id4> <general text, until the next ^_ or end-of-file>
At least one space or tab must be present after each colon and comma, but any number of spaces are ignored. The <id> node identifiers have following format:
<id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?(<del>?<nodename><del>?)? | <id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?(<nodename>)?
This <node> defines <id1> in file <fn>, which is typically either ‘manualname’ or ‘manualname.info’. No parenthesized <infofile> component may appear within <id1>.
Each of the identifiers after Next
, Prev
and Up
refer to nodes or anchors within a file. These pointers normally
refer within the same file, but ‘(dir)’ is often used to point to
the top-level dir file. If an <infofile> component is used then
the node name may be omitted, in which case the node identifier refers
to the ‘Top’ node within the referenced file.
The Next
and Prev
pointers are optional. The Up
pointer is technically also optional, although most likely this
indicates a mistake in the node structuring. Conventionally, the
nodes are arranged to form a tree, but this is not a requirement of
the format.
Node names containing periods, commas, colons or parentheses
(including @-commands which produce any of these) can confuse
Info readers.
If it is necessary to refer to a node whose name contains any of
these, the <nodename> should be surrounded by a pair of <del>
characters. There is support in makeinfo
for adding these
characters (see INFO_SPECIAL_CHARS_QUOTE); however, we don’t
recommend you make use of this support until such time as Info-reading
programs that recognize this syntax are common. See Node Line Requirements.
The use of non-ASCII characters in the names of nodes is permitted, but can cause problems in cross-references between nodes in Info files with different character encodings, and also when node names from many different files are listed (for example, with the --apropos option to the standalone Info browser), so we recommend avoiding them whenever feasible. For example, prefer the use of the ASCII apostrophe character (') to Unicode directional quotes.
The <general text> of the node can include the special constructs described next.
Previous: Info Format General Layout, Up: Info Format Specification [Contents][Index]
These special Info constructs can appear within the text of a node.
• Info Format Menu: | ||
• Info Format Image: | ||
• Info Format Printindex: | ||
• Info Format Cross Reference: |
Next: Info Format Image, Up: Info Format Text Constructs [Contents][Index]
Conventionally menus appear at the end of nodes, but the Info format places no restrictions on their location.
<menu> = * Menu: (<menu entry> | <menu comment>)*
The parts of a <menu entry> are also described in Menu Parts. They have the same syntax as cross-references (see Info Format Cross Reference). Indices extend the menu format to specify the destination line; see Info Format Printindex.
A <menu comment> is any line not beginning with ‘*’ that appears either at the beginning of the menu or is separated from a menu entry by one or more blank lines. These comments are intended to be displayed as part of the menu, as-is (see Writing a Menu).
Next: Info Format Printindex, Previous: Info Format Menu, Up: Info Format Text Constructs [Contents][Index]
The @image
command results in the following special directive
within the Info file (see Images):
<image> = ^@^H[image src="<image file>" (text="<txt file contents>")? (alt="<alt text>")? ^@^H]
The line breaks and indentation in this description are editorial; the whitespace between the different parts of the directive in Info files is arbitrary.
In the strings <image file>, <txt file contents> and <alt text>, ‘"’ is quoted as ‘\"’ and ‘\’ is quoted as ‘\\’. The txt and alt specifications are optional.
The alt value serves the same purpose as in HTML: A prose description of the image. In text-only displays or speech systems, for example, the alt value may be used instead of displaying the (typically graphical) <image file>.
The <txt file contents>, if present, should be taken as an ASCII representation of the image, for possible use on a text-only display.
The format does not prescribe the choice between displaying the <image file>, the <alt text> or the <txt file contents>.
Next: Info Format Cross Reference, Previous: Info Format Image, Up: Info Format Text Constructs [Contents][Index]
Indices in Info format are generally written as a menu (see Indices), but with an additional directive at the beginning marking this as an index node:
<printindex> = ^@^H[index^@^H] * Menu: <index entry>*
The <index entry> items are similar to normal menu entries, but the free-format description is replaced by the line number of where the entries occurs in the text:
<index entry> = * <entry text>: <entry node>. <lparen>line <lineno><rparen>
The <entry text> is the index term. The <lineno> is an unsigned integer, given relative to the start of the <entry node>. There may be arbitrary whitespace after the colon and period, as usual in menus, and may be broken across lines. Here is an example:
^@^H[index^@^H] * Menu: * thunder: Weather Phenomena. (line 5)
This means that an index entry for ‘thunder’ appears at line 5 of the node ‘Weather Phenomena’.
Previous: Info Format Printindex, Up: Info Format Text Constructs [Contents][Index]
A general cross-reference in Info format has one of the following two forms:
<cross-reference> = * (N|n)ote <id>:: | * (N|n)ote <label>:<id>(.|,) <id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?(<del>?<nodename><del>?)? | <id> = (<lparen><infofile><rparen>)?(<nodename>)? <label> = <del>?<label text><del>?
No space should occur between the ‘*’ character and the following ‘N’ or ‘n’. ‘*Note’ should be used at the start of a sentence, otherwise ‘*note’ should be used. (Some Info readers, such as the one in Emacs, can display ‘*Note’ and ‘*note’ as ‘See’ and ‘see’ respectively.) In both cases, <label text> is descriptive text.
In both forms the <id> refers to a node or anchor, in the same way as a reference in the node information line does (see Info Format Regular Nodes). The optional parenthesized ‘<infofile>’ is the filename of the manual being referenced, and the <nodename> is the node or anchor within that manual,
The second form has a descriptive label. A cross-reference in this form should usually be terminated with a comma or period, to make it feasible to find the end of the <id>.
If <label> contains a colon character (:), it should be surrounded with a pair of <del> characters. Likewise, if <nodename> contains problematic characters (such as commas or periods), it should be surrounded by a pair of <del> characters; then a terminating comma or period is not needed.
As with node names, this quoting mechanism has as of the time of writing limited support in Info-reading programs; hence we do not recommend using it until this changes.
The format does not prescribe how to find other manuals to resolve such references.
Here are some examples:
*note GNU Free Documentation License:: *note Tag table: Info Format Tag Table, for details. *Note Overview: (make)Top. *Note ^?:^?: (bash)Bourne Shell Builtins. *Note alloca.h: (gnulib)^?alloca.h^?.
The first shows a reference to a node in the current manual using the short form.
The second also refers to a node in the current manual, namely ‘Info Format Tag Table’; the ‘Tag table’ before the ‘:’ is only a label on this particular reference, and the ‘for details.’ is text belonging to the sentence, not part of the reference.
The third example refers to the node ‘Top’ in another manual, namely ‘make’, with ‘Overview’ being the label for this cross-reference.
The fourth example shows a colon character being quoted in a label, and the fifth example shows a period being quoted in a node name.
See Cross References.
Next: Command and Variable Index, Previous: Info Format Specification, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Next: General Index, Previous: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This is an alphabetical list of all the @-commands, assorted Emacs Lisp functions, and several variables. To make the list easier to use, the commands are listed without their preceding ‘@’.
Jump to: |
!
"
'
*
,
-
.
/
:
=
?
\
^
`
{
}
~
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X |
---|
Jump to: |
!
"
'
*
,
-
.
/
:
=
?
\
^
`
{
}
~
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X |
---|
Previous: Command and Variable Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: |
!
"
#
$
&
'
(
,
-
8
<
>
?
^
_
`
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
Jump to: |
!
"
#
$
&
'
(
,
-
8
<
>
?
^
_
`
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z |
---|
The word argument comes from the way it is used in mathematics and does not refer to a dispute between two people; it refers to the information presented to the command. According to the Oxford English Dictionary, the word derives from the Latin for to make clear, prove; thus it came to mean ‘the evidence offered as proof’, which is to say, ‘the information offered’, which led to its mathematical meaning. In its other thread of derivation, the word came to mean ‘to assert in a manner against which others may make counter assertions’, which led to the meaning of ‘argument’ as a dispute.
The longer extensions are preferred, since they describe more clearly to a human reader the nature of the file. The shorter extensions are for operating systems that cannot handle long file names.
We have found that it is helpful to refer to versions of independent manuals as ‘editions’ and versions of programs as ‘versions’; otherwise, we find we are liable to confuse each other in conversation by referring to both the documentation and the software with the same words.
A footnote should complement or expand upon the primary text, but a reader should not need to read a footnote to understand the primary text. For a thorough discussion of footnotes, see The Chicago Manual of Style, which is published by the University of Chicago Press.
Here is the sample footnote.
On MS-DOS/MS-Windows systems, Info will try the .inf extension as well.